JP2021016416A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving convenience.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided, including: a first frame body; a second frame body which has one of a right side portion or a left side portion as a support side and supported at one of the right side portion or the left side portion of the first frame body, the second frame body provided to the first frame body in a freely rotatable manner using the support side as a supporting shaft; locking means which is provided at least to one of the second frame body or the first frame body and locks the second frame body in a state opened to the first frame body; an audio device which is provided to the second frame body; a detection device which detects the opening of the second frame body; and abnormality notification means which makes a notification of an abnormality by controlling the audio device, when the opening of the second frame body is detected by the detection device.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 162

Description

The present invention relates to a bullet game machine and a rotating body type game machine.

A pachinko machine, which is a ball game machine, includes a rectangular outer frame forming an outer shell and a game machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame in the forward direction. Further, the game machine main body is rotatably supported by the outer frame on the front side, the front door frame rotatably supported on the inner frame on the front side, and the inner frame on the rear side. Equipped with a back pack unit, locking device, etc. Further, the slot machine, which is a rotating cylinder type game machine, also includes a box-shaped housing that forms an outer shell and a front door that is pivotally installed in the housing so as to cover the opening. A start lever, a stop button, and the like are provided on the front side of the front door, and various devices and parts such as a main control device that controls the progress of the game and a hopper that pays out game medals are arranged inside the housing.

When working or inspecting the above-mentioned bullet game machine and rotating body type game machine, work and inspection are performed with the inner frame, front door frame, and front door open, but the inner frame, front door frame, and front door are used. If the door is not fixed in the open state, the inner frame, the front door frame, and the front door move, which causes a problem that it interferes with work and inspection.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-99142

As described above, there is room for improvement in convenience of the conventional gaming machine. The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving convenience.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is supported by one of the first frame and the right side or the left side of the first frame with one of the right side or the left side as the support side, and the first frame with the support side as the support shaft. A second frame rotatably provided with respect to the body and at least one of the second frame and the first frame are provided, and the second frame is engaged in a state of being open to the first frame. The locking means for stopping, the acoustic device provided on the second frame, the detection device for detecting the opening of the second frame, and the sound device are controlled when the detection device detects the opening of the second frame. It is characterized by comprising an abnormality notification means for notifying an abnormality.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving convenience.

It is a top view which opened the front door frame of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and is the figure which shows the positional relationship with a player. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment in development. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment in development. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the front door frame of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the inner frame of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the back structure of the game board of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the state which the main control unit unit was removed from the game board of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the main control device unit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the back pack unit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st monitoring device seen from the front of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st monitoring device seen from the rear of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a top view which shows the operation button of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of each counter used for the internal lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the winning / failing table which stored the value of the random number which wins the jackpot generation of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of the jackpot type of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for the start opening of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the display duration setting process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the front door frame opening monitoring processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control device and the display control device of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the data structure stored in the ROM of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, (a) is the figure which shows the data structure which is stored in ROM 412, (b) is the data structure which is stored in common ROM 404. It is a figure which shows. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the structure of the register 952 provided in the sound output LSI of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the connection relationship with the DAC and the speaker part which the sound output LSI of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment includes. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game result of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, a game state and the like. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a continuous view which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example of the mode transition effect which is executed when it corresponds to the "most advantageous result" in the normal state of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the production example at the time of a big hit (opening / closing execution mode) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect type (effect type) selection process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart in another example of the effect type (effect type) selection process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the production MA of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the production MB of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the production MC of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of another example of the abnormal state notification processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control device and the display control device of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the connection relationship with the DAC and the speaker part which the sound output LSI of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment includes. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the connection relationship with the DAC and the speaker part which the sound output LSI of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic block diagram of the speaker part and the cover member included in the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, (a) is the front view of the state which the speaker part is not covered by the cover member, (b) is the speaker part. A front view of the state covered by the cover member, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the line segment XX of (b), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the line segment YY of (b). It is a figure which showed the schematic structure of the origin detection sensor of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control device and the display control device of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the connection relationship with the DAC and the speaker part which the sound output LSI of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment includes. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic block diagram which shows the speaker part and the peripheral structure thereof provided with the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment, (a) is a partial cross-sectional plan view which shows the 1st state which the speaker part faces the front of a game machine. , (B) is a partial cross-sectional plan view showing the middle of the direction of the speaker unit changing from the front surface of the game machine to the right side surface, and (c) is a third cross-sectional plan view showing the speaker unit facing the right side surface of the game machine. It is a partial cross-sectional plan view which shows 2 states. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control device and the display control device of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the connection relationship with the DAC and the speaker part which the sound output LSI of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment includes. It is a conceptual diagram of the time change of the reproduction volume of the speaker part of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the sound data reproduction processing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the data used for the transition processing to the production of the 4th mode M4 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the production MA of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the production MB of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the production MC of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure for performing execution control of the effect of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the register of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the sequence data of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the sound light ROM of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ending period determination table stored in the ROM of the main control device of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of the ending period of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification timing of the RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH of the 8th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the notification timing determination table of the RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH stored in the ROM of the voice light emission control apparatus of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the flowchart of the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining another example of the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of another example of the effect transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process A to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process B to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process C to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the timing of the effect type (effect type) selection process of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect type (effect type) selection process of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification timing of the RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH of the 9th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining another example of the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of another example of the effect transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process D to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process E to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process F to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart example of the transition process G to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of the jackpot type of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the display duration setting process of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the gaming machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game result of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment, a game state and the like. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game result of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment, an effect and the like. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggestion in a time saving) of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the result display processing of the game machine which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggestion at the time of result display) of the game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of a tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggested in the jackpot after a time reduction) of the game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the game machine which concerns on the modification 3 of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the game machine which concerns on the modification 4 of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the game machine which concerns on the modification 5 of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the winning / failing table which stored the value of the random number which wins the jackpot generation of the game machine which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing of the game machine which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggestion at the time of a fall) of the game machine which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggestion at the time of result display) of the game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggested in the jackpot after time reduction) of the game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the game machine which concerns on the modification 3 of 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the game machine which concerns on the modification 4 of 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggestion when there is an operation reception) of the game machine which concerns on the modification 5 of 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the production mode of the game machine which concerns on 12th Embodiment, and the volume setting. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the volume setting process (step S6502 of FIG. 127) of the game machine which concerns on 21st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect mode determination process (step S6503 of FIG. 127) of the game machine which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in three game effect modes which the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment has. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for the start opening of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the floater of the look-ahead lottery processing of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control device and the display control device of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game effect mode change process executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the look-ahead effect processing executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead effect executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the display control device of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the operation after the command storage process executed by the display control device of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration drawing counter update processing executed by the display control device of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game effect mode change process executed by the display control device of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example of the game effect mode change process executed by the display control device of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game effect mode selection table which is stored in the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on modification 2 of 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game effect mode change process executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game effect mode change process executed by the display control device of the game machine which concerns on the modification 3 of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example of the game effect mode change process executed by the display control device of the game machine which concerns on the modification 3 of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead effect determination table provided in the game machine which concerns on the modification 4 of the thirteenth embodiment, (a) is an example of the look-ahead effect decision table stored in the ROM of the voice light emission control device b) is an example of a look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM of the display control device. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game effect mode change process executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on modification 4 of 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the look-ahead effect processing executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on modification 4 of 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the look-ahead effect processing executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on the modification 5 of 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game effect mode change process executed by the voice light emission control device of the game machine which concerns on the modification 5 of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of the game machine which concerns on 14th Embodiment developed. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the outline of the locking means provided in the game machine which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a top view which shows the outline of the locking means provided in the game machine which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the operation of the locking means provided in the game machine which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a top view which shows the outline of the detection sensor provided in the game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of 14th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the operation of the detection sensor provided in the game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of 14th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the voice light emission control device and the display control device of the game machine which concerns on modification 1 of 14th Embodiment. This is a data table showing the relationship between the opening angle and the volume of the front door frame 14 stored in the ROM 412 of the gaming machine according to the first modification of the fourteenth embodiment. It is a top view which shows the opening angle of the front door frame of the game machine which concerns on modification 1 of 14th Embodiment, and the positional relationship of the front door frame. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on modification 1 of 14th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the locking means provided in the game machine which concerns on modification 2 of 14th Embodiment.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the present invention can be applied are shown below.

[Bullet game machine]
An operating means (launching handle 41) operated by the player, a ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that flips and launches a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a predetermined game ball launched. A gaming machine including a ball passage (inner rail 101 and outer rail 102) leading to the gaming area 104, and each gaming component (general winning opening 82, nails, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 104.

[Ball game machine equipped with a special display unit and variable display device]
An operating means operated by the player, a ball launching means for flipping and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined gaming area 104, and a gaming area 104. The first and second starting ports 36 and 37, the main display device 98, the variable display unit 86 and the variable winning device 83 arranged inside are provided, and the game ball is inserted into the first and second starting ports 36 and 37. A gaming machine in which when a ball is detected, the display content displayed on the main display device 98 is variably displayed, and when the display content at the time of stopping is a specific display content, the variable winning device 83 is opened in a predetermined mode.

[Slot machines and other rotating game machines]
It is equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row in the final stop. The symbol variation is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, and the operation of the stopping operating means causes the movement. Then, or after a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. The game machine that I made.

[Belt-type game machine using balls]
It is equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row in the final stop. Then, or after a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. Further, a throwing device for providing a ball tray and performing a throwing process of taking in the game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray are provided, and the game ball is thrown by the throwing device. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective.

Hereinafter, each embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As the gaming machine, a general pachinko machine will be described as an example. Further, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, the directions such as up, down, left, and right are specified with reference to the front view of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the front side in FIG. 2 is the front side, and the back side is the rear side.

The gaming machine of the present invention has an inner frame (first frame body) that is openable and closable to the outer frame (fixed frame) and a front door frame (second frame) that is openable and closable to the inner frame. It has a body). Here, in the game machine, it is assumed that the front door frame is opened and the game area provided on the front side of the inner frame is cheated. In addition, it is assumed that the inner frame is opened and the control device mounted on the back side of the inner frame is cheated.

For this reason, the game machine is provided with a control device and an openness detection switch (detection device) for detecting the opening of the inner frame with respect to the outer frame and the opening of the front door frame with respect to the inner frame. Then, when the front door frame and the inner frame are opened, the opening is detected by the opening detection switch, and the detection result is input to the control device. The control device determines that the front door frame and the inner frame have been opened based on the detection result from the release switch, and executes a notification (abnormality notification) to that effect using the speaker unit and the lamp unit.
However, the front door frame is supported by either the right side or the left side of the inner frame with one of the right side or the left side of the inner frame as the support side, and when the front door frame opens, this support side. Will be opened so as to rotate forward (player side) with the rotation axis.

Therefore, for example, when the front door frame is opened during maintenance (maintenance / maintenance / maintenance / inspection / maintenance) or repair, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame is the upper body of the player U who plays in the adjacent seat. It opens so as to face the right side (see FIG. 1 (a)) or the left side (see FIG. 1 (b)). Then, as described above, when the opening of the front door frame is detected, the abnormality notification is output from the speaker (audio device) at a loud volume so that the operator or employee of the hall can hear it. For this reason, the abnormality notification is very troublesome for the player who plays in the next seat. In addition, since the music (BGM), voice, and sound effects output from the game machine being played are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost. The player is excited.
The above problem does not occur only in pachinko machines, but may also occur in other gaming machines having an opening / closing body such as a front door frame or an inner frame, such as a slot machine or a parrot.

[First Embodiment]
<Pachinko machine>
As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine 10 (hereinafter, pachinko machine 10) according to the present embodiment is attached to a rectangular outer frame 11 forming an outer shell and rotatably forward with respect to the outer frame 11. The game machine main body 12 is provided.

The outer frame 11 is a fixed frame that is formed in a rectangular frame shape that opens in the front-rear direction and is installed vertically on an installation frame base (so-called island facility) of a game store. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the game machine main body 12 has an inner frame 13 (frame body) rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 toward the front side (player side) and a front side (frame body) by the inner frame 13. The front door frame 14 (frame body) rotatably supported to the player side) and the back pack unit 15 (box-shaped body) rotatably supported to the rear side (far side from the player) by the inner frame 13. It has a configuration in which the door is locked by the locking device 131 (see FIG. 4). A prepaid card type ball lending device (CR unit) (not shown) is provided on the left side of the outer frame 11.

The inner frame 13 is supported by either the right side or the left side of the outer frame 11 with one of the right side or the left side as the support side. The front door frame 14 has one of the right side or the left side (the left side in FIGS. 3 and 4) as the support side, and one of the right side or the left side of the inner frame 13 (the left side in FIGS. 3 and 4). ) Is supported. The back pack unit 15 is supported on one of the right side or the left side of the inner frame 13 (the left side in FIGS. 3 and 4) with one of the right side or the left side as the support side. The locking device 131 has a cylinder lock 75 provided at the lower part of the right side or the left side of the game machine main body 12 (lower right side in FIG. 2), and the inner frame 13 (game machine main body 12) is attached to the outer frame 11. It has a function of making it impossible to open and a function of making the front door frame 14 unable to open with respect to the inner frame 13. In the pachinko machine 10, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 75 (see FIG. 7) and then rotated clockwise, the function of disabling the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released, and when rotated counterclockwise, the front door is released. The function of making the frame 14 unopenable to the inner frame 13 is released. The locking device 131 will be described in detail in FIG.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the front side of the inner frame 13, and has an elliptical window portion 21 that opens in the thickness direction, a transparent glass plate, a synthetic resin material, or the like that is fitted into the window portion 21. It has a window panel 22 formed by (see FIG. 3).

Further, the front door frame 14 includes a display lamp device 23A as a light emitting means arranged on the right side of the window portion 21, a display lamp device 23B as a light emitting means arranged on the left side of the window portion 21, and the like. The error display lamp unit 24 provided at the uppermost part of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the upper right side (speaker unit 26A) and the upper left side (speaker unit 26B) of the game machine main body 12, and the lower left side (speaker unit 26C). The speaker units 26A to 26C are provided as an audio output means and a navigation means. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes three speaker units 26A to 26C, but one or more speaker units may be provided, and for example, four or more speaker units may be provided. The indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B have a light emitting body (not shown) such as a light bulb in which a light emitting element such as an LED (light emitting diode), a filament, or a discharge element is enclosed in a glass spherical shell, and at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. It lights up and blinks according to the change in the gaming state. The error display lamp unit 24 lights up when a predetermined error occurs. In addition, the speaker units 26A to 26C can output voice, sound effects, and the like. Then, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned on and blinked in accordance with the symbol variation effect of the symbol display device 91, which will be described later (light emission effect), and sound and sound effects are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C (voice effect). As a result, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the speaker units 26A to 26C are configured to function as the effect executing means.

Further, the front door frame 14 has an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side (player side) on the lower side of the window portion 21. The upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The upper bulging portion 31 is provided inside so as to open upward, and has an upper plate 33 serving as a receiving plate for storing game balls. Further, the lower bulging portion 32 is provided inside so as to open upward, and has a lower plate 34 serving as a receiving plate for storing the game ball. The upper plate 33 is configured such that the bottom surface is gently inclined from the left side to the right side and is tapered on the right side portion, and the game ball launching mechanism 110 is arranged while arranging the stored game balls one by one. It has a function of leading to (see FIG. 7).

When the game ball becomes surplus on the upper plate 33, the game ball is discharged to the lower plate 34. That is, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the game balls surplus in the upper plate 33. Further, the lower bulging portion 32 is provided with a lever that can be slid in the left-right direction, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 34 is moved to the lower portion of the lower plate 34 by the player sliding the lever. It is configured to be discharged from. In the present embodiment, the upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 are integrally molded with the front door frame 14 at the lower position of the front door frame 14, and are molded in accordance with the opening and closing of the front door frame 14. The upper bulge 31 and the lower bulge 32 are also configured to open and close.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a firing handle 41 as a launching means at a lower right position of the gaming machine main body 12. The launch handle 41 is urged counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is activated by the player rotating the launch handle 41 clockwise (clockwise) to move up. The game balls stored in the plate 33 are fired one by one toward the game area 104 of the game board 81 (see FIG. 8). In the present embodiment, the launching operation of the gaming ball by the gaming ball launching mechanism 110 is performed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls launched by the game ball launch mechanism 110 is controlled so as not to exceed 100 balls per minute.

The launch handle 41 is configured so that the hitting force of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 110 changes according to the amount of rotation thereof, and as the player rotates the launch handle 41 clockwise (clockwise). The hitting force of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 110 gradually increases, and the hitting force of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 110 gradually decreases as the player rotates the firing handle 41 counterclockwise (counterclockwise). It is configured. That is, as the player rotates the launch handle 41 clockwise (clockwise), the arrival position of the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 110 on the game board 81 shifts from the left side to the right side.

Further, the launch handle 41 is provided with a touch sensor 41a for detecting that the player is touching the handle and a launch stop switch 41b for temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball. The launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 110 is performed when the launch handle 41 is rotated to turn on the touch sensor 41a and the launch stop switch 41b is off, and the touch sensor 41a is off or the launch stop switch 41b. If is on, the game ball will not be fired.

Further, an operation button 35 as an operation means is provided on the upper surface of the upper bulge portion 31. The operation button 35 is used when selecting an effect type (effect type), and the player can select the effect type by operating the operation button 35. As shown in FIG. 18, the operation buttons 35 include a decision button 35a arranged in the center, a left direction button 35b arranged on the left side of the decision button 35a, and a right direction button 35c arranged on the right side of the decision button 35a. And have. When selecting the effect type, the player selects the effect type by pressing the left direction button 35b and the right direction button 35c, and determines the effect type by pressing the decision button 35a arranged in the center. be able to. Further, on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31, a ball lending button (not shown) and a CR unit for instructing the lending of game balls within the range of the value balance (valuable balance) of the card inserted in the CR unit are provided. A return button (not shown) is provided to instruct the return of the inserted card.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, a passage forming unit 50 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 50 is made of synthetic resin, and a front door side upper plate passage 51 leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage 52 leading to the lower plate 34 are formed. In the passage forming unit 50, a receiving portion 53 projecting rearward and opening upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the front door side upper plate is formed by partitioning the receiving portion 53 to the left and right by a partition wall 54. The passage 51 and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage 52 on the front door side are formed. The front door side upper plate passage 51 and the front door side lower plate passage 52 are connected to the game ball distribution section 225 whose upstream side will be described later, and the game balls entering the front door side upper plate passage 51 are guided to the upper plate 33. The game ball that has entered the lower plate passage 52 on the front door side is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 6) on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts 61 and 62 are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts 61 and 62 form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of hook metal fittings 63 extending rearward are arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the rotation tip side (left side in FIG. 6) on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hook metal fittings 63 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 71 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. Support metal fittings 72 and 73 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 7) on the front surface of the resin base 71. Although not shown, shaft holes are formed in the support metal fittings 72 and 73, and by inserting the protruding shafts 61 and 62 of the front door frame 14 into these shaft holes, the front door is formed with respect to the inner frame 13. The frame 14 is rotatably supported.

An insertion hole 74 for inserting a hook metal fitting 63 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotation tip side (right side in FIG. 7) on the front surface of the resin base 71. The pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, when the hook metal fitting 63 is locked to the locking device through the insertion hole 74, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 in an unopenable manner.

A cylinder lock 75 for unlocking the locking device is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 71. The cylinder lock 75 is integrated with the locking device, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 75 is turned counterclockwise, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 75 is turned to the right, the inner frame 13 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 11. A substantially rectangular opening 71b penetrating inward and outward (that is, in the front-rear direction) is formed in the upper right corner of the resin base 71, that is, on the rotation tip side of the front door frame 14. The opening 71b is provided with a first monitoring device 250 that monitors the opening of the front door frame 14.

A substantially elliptical window hole 76 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 71. A game board 81 is detachably attached to the resin base 71. The game board 81 is made of plywood, and the game area 104 (see FIG. 8) formed on the front surface of the game board 81 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 76 of the resin base 71.

<Game board 81>
As shown in FIG. 8, the game board 81 is a substantially rectangular plate member formed of a veneer material or a synthetic resin material. The game board 81 has a guide portion 103 (hereinafter, also referred to as a guide rail) composed of two rails (inner rail 101 and outer rail 102) provided on the front surface (player side) and curved in a substantially circular shape. .. The guidance rail 103 has a function of guiding the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 110 to the upper left portion of the game board 81. The player operates the launch handle 41 to launch the game ball into the substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103, thereby playing the game. Further, a return portion 103a is provided at the end of the guide rail 103 so that the game ball launched into the game area 104 does not return to the inside of the guide rail 103. The game ball driven into the game area 104 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided on the back pack unit 15 (not shown), and the ball detection signal of the detection sensor is a hall computer (not shown). It is configured to be output to. In the present embodiment, the detection sensor is provided in the back pack unit 15, but it may be provided in another place, for example, the game board 81.

Further, the game board 81 is subjected to router processing, so that a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the plate thickness direction are formed at appropriate positions. Further, each opening of the game board 81 is provided with a general winning opening 82, a first starting opening 84a, a second starting opening 84b, a variable winning device 83, and an out opening 87. The position and number of openings formed in the game area 104 of the game board 81 can be appropriately changed as needed. The game board 81 is provided with through gates 85 on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion. The main display device 98 is provided at a position on the game board 81 that can be visually recognized by the player. A variable display unit 86 is provided at the center of the game board 81. The game board 81 is provided with a large number of game nails 89 in the game area 104, and a rotation guide member 88 (so-called “windmill”) is arranged on the right side of the game board 81. The rotation guide member 88 is arranged on the game board 81 so as to rotate freely by the contact of the game ball flowing down the game area 104. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the game area 104 comes into contact with the game nail 89 and the rotation guide member 88, the flow direction of the game ball changes irregularly (randomly).

In the present embodiment, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area 104 after passing through the opening, but also the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area 104 is continued without being discharged from the 104. Further, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 87, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 85 means that after passing through the gate provided in the game area 104, the ball continues to flow down the game area 104 without being discharged from the game area 104. The entry into the through gate 85 is also referred to as winning in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings. Further, it is also referred to as rolling that the game ball flows down the game area 104 while contacting the game nail 89 and / or the rotation guide member 88 or the like.

<Starting winning opening>
As shown in FIG. 8, the first starting port 84a and the second starting port 84b are arranged in a vertical positional relationship, that is, in the vertical direction. Here, the first starting port 84a located on the upper side is a constantly open type winning opening that always opens upward in the game area 104. Further, on both left and right sides of the second starting port 84b located on the lower side, an electric accessory (so-called electric tulip (electric tulip)) composed of a pair of opening / closing members 84b1 configured to open / close the second starting port 84b. Is provided. An electric accessory driving unit 84b2 as a driving means is connected to the pair of opening / closing members 84b1, and the pair of opening / closing members 84b1 closes the second starting port 84b as the electric accessory driving unit 84b2 is driven. It is configured to displace between the position and the open position. In the present embodiment, a pair of opening / closing members 84b1 for opening / closing the second starting port 84b are arranged on the left and right side portions sandwiching the second starting port 84b, and the pair of opening / closing members 84b1 are driven by driving the electric accessory driving unit 84b2. Driven so that the mutual positions are close and separated.

That is, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 84a is configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area 104 can always win a prize with a certain probability, and the second starting port 84b drives the electric accessory driving unit 84b2. It is configured so that the winning probability of the game ball is variable. Here, in a state in which the opening / closing members 84b1 provided on both the left and right sides sandwiching the second starting port 84b are displaced to the closed position (hereinafter, the electric service closed state), the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b is prevented. Therefore, the probability that the game ball will win the second starting port 84b is lower than the probability that the game ball will win the first starting port 84a. Further, in the state where the opening / closing member 84b1 is displaced to the open position (hereinafter, the electric service open state), the game ball received by the opening / closing member 84b1 is guided to the second starting port 84b and the game is played to the first starting port 84a. The probability that the game ball will win the second starting port 84b is higher than the probability that the ball will win.

In addition, in the electric accessory, instead of the above-mentioned electric service closed state and electric service open state, it is difficult for the game ball to win in the second starting port 84b (unlike the electric service closed state, the game ball can be entered. A state in which the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 84b may be switched.

<Variable winning device>
As shown in FIG. 8, the variable winning device 83 has a rectangular plate-shaped opening / closing door that opens and closes a special winning opening 83a (hereinafter, a large winning opening) as a special winning means that opens in the game area 104. (Opening / closing member, opening / closing means) 83b is provided, and the opening / closing door 83b is displaced between a closed state and an open state when the variable winning drive unit 83c as a driving means is driven. In this embodiment, the opening / closing door 83b swings in the front-rear direction to open / close the special winning opening. In FIG. 8, the opening / closing door 83b closes the large winning opening 83a. Shown.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 83b is set to a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize in the normal state. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is entered, the open / close door 83b is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize. The opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the opening / closing door 83b is set to the open state and a game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 83a. Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing door 83b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again in one round game, but the opening / closing door 83b in one round game The number of opening and closing is arbitrary. For example, the opening / closing number of the opening / closing door 83b in one round game may be set to a plurality of times (twice or more). In this case, the opening / closing state and the closed state of the opening / closing door 83b are set a plurality of times in one round game. It will be.

The player maximizes the amount of rotational operation of the launch handle 41, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area 104 from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 103 is formed to the side of the opposite side. By shifting to (so-called right-handed), the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 83 while avoiding the variable display unit 86 and the like.

<Detection sensor>
The game board 81 detects the entry of a game ball in the vicinity of the general winning opening 82, the first starting opening 84a, the second starting opening 84b, and the various winning openings of the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83. It includes detection sensors 152 to 154b (see FIG. 17). Further, these detection sensors 152 to 154b are arranged on the back side of the game board 81, the detection sensor 152 detects the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 82, and the detection sensor 154a goes to the first starting port 84a. The detection sensor 154b detects the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 84b, and the detection sensor 153 detects the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83. Is detected. The detection sensors 152 to 154b are wired and connected to the main control board 301 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the detection sensors 152 to 154b detect the game ball (general winning opening 82, first starting port 84a). , A predetermined number of prize balls (game balls obtained by winning) are paid out in the wake of (winning of game balls to various prize openings of the second starting port 84b and the large prize opening 83a of the variable winning device 83). ing.

In the present embodiment, when the detection sensor 152 detects that the pachinko machine 10 has entered the general prize opening 82, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls, and the detection sensor 154a detects the entry into the first starting port 84a. When detected, three prize balls are paid out, and when the detection sensor 154b detects that the ball has entered the second starting port 84b, two prize balls are paid out, and the detection sensor 153 pays out the large variable winning device 83. When a ball entering the winning opening 83a is detected, 13 prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to various winning openings is not limited to these, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the first starting port 84a may be the same as the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 84b. Further, a plurality of (two or more) variable prize devices 83 are provided in the game area 104 of the game board 81, and the number of prize balls to be paid out for each prize in the large prize opening 83a of the plurality of variable prize devices 83 is different. Also, for example, when two variable winning devices 83 are provided, the number of prize balls paid out by winning a prize in the large winning opening 83a of each variable winning device 83 may be 13 and 14, respectively.

The out port 87 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 104 of the game board 81, and the game balls that have not entered the various winning openings and the like are discharged from the game area 104 through the out port 87. The out port 87 is arranged on the back side of the game board 81, and includes a detection sensor 156 that detects the entry of the game ball (see FIG. 17).

Further, each through gate 85 is arranged on the back side of the game board 81 and includes a detection sensor 155 for detecting the entry of the game ball (see FIG. 17). The detection sensors 155 and 156 are wired and connected to the main control board 301 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but the pachinko machine 10 has an out port unlike the case where a ball enters various winning openings. If a ball enters the 87 and each through gate 85, the prize ball will not be paid out.

It is sufficient that each of the detection sensors 152 to 156 can individually detect the entry of the game ball into the various winning openings, and for example, an electromagnetic induction sensor, a transmissive photo sensor, or the like can be used.

<Design display>
The main display device 98 includes a main display unit 93, a display unit for accessories 94, and a round display unit 97, and has a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display unit, and the like. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices. The main display device 98 is provided on the game board 81 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof, and can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. ing. Further, the distance (gap) between the main display device 98 and the window panel 22 is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball flows down in the gap between the main display device 98 and the window panel 22, that is, in front of the main display device 98.

<Main display unit 93>
The main display unit 93 is performed based on the first result display unit 93a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first starting port 84a and the winning of the second starting port 84b. A second result display unit 93b for displaying the result of the internal lottery is provided (see FIG. 17).

<First result display unit 93a>
The first result display unit 93a executes the variation display of the symbol triggered by the winning of the first starting port 84a, and as a result of stopping the variation display, is performed based on the winning of the first starting port 84a. Display the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first starting port 84a, the first result display unit 93a is sequentially turned on and off, and the fluctuating variable display is performed, and finally the first result display unit 93a is performed. Multiple types (types) of special symbols are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) in which is definitively lit. When the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 93a displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. ..

<Second result display unit 93b>
The second result display unit 93b executes the variation display of the symbol triggered by the winning of the second starting port 84b, and as a result of stopping the variation display, is performed based on the winning of the second starting port 84b. Display the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, when the game ball is won in the second starting port 84b, the second result display unit 93b is sequentially turned on and off, and a fluctuating variable display is performed, and finally the second result display unit 93b is performed. A plurality of types (types) of special symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as special symbols) are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) in which is definitively lit. When the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 93b displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. ..

Here, the special figure is a symbol for notifying indicating the result of an internal lottery such as whether or not it is a big hit (special game), and in the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b, the lighting position of the LED or the like It is possible to display multiple types of special figures. Specifically, the special figures that can be displayed on the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b include a plurality of types of special figures as jackpot display results that can recognize jackpots, and deviations that can recognize deviations. One type of special figure is set as a display result. Then, one special figure is determined according to the result of the lottery per special figure, and as a stop result of the variable display, the previously determined special figure is stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b. Will be done.

In the following description, the variation display performed by the first result display unit 93a is referred to as "special figure 1 variation display", and as a result of the special figure 1 variation display, a fixed stop display is displayed on the first result display unit 93a. The special figure is also called special figure 1. Similarly, the variation display performed by the second result display unit 93b is referred to as "second special figure variation display", and as a result of the second special figure variation display, the special figure displayed as a fixed stop display on the second result display unit 93b. Is also referred to as special figure 2.

<Display unit for accessories 94>
The accessory display unit 94 executes the variable display of the symbol triggered by the winning of each through gate 85, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of each through gate 85. Display the result of. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in each through gate 85, the accessory display unit 94 turns on and off in sequence, and a fluctuating variable display is performed. Finally, the accessory display unit 94 changes. A plurality of types of ordinary symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as ordinary symbols) are displayed according to the deterministic lighting position (stop result). When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 94 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. To do. In this electric service open state, the opening / closing member 84b1 of the electric accessory provided at the second starting port 84b is in the open state.

<Round display unit 97>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination is won, one jackpot game is determined from a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) described later. A plurality of types of jackpot games having different numbers of rounds are set, and the number of rounds of the winning jackpot game is notified by the round display unit 97. In the present embodiment, two types of "15 times" and "2 times" are set as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the number of rounds is notified by the lighting pattern of the LED provided in the round display unit 97. In the present embodiment, the round display unit 97 includes two LEDs arranged on the left and right, and when the LED on the left side lights up, it is notified that the number of rounds is "15 times", and the right side When the LED lights up, it is notified that the number of rounds is "2 times", which is a big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 93 and the accessory display unit 94 are configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as a segment display and a dot display, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix. Further, as the symbols to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 93 and the accessory display unit 94, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the round display unit 97 notifies the number of round games by a light emitting display using an LED, but the number of round games is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device, the organic EL display device, and the CRT , Dot matrix, and other types of display devices may be used to notify the number of round games. The display areas of the main display unit 93, the accessory display unit 94, and the round display unit 97 are set to be extremely small compared to the display areas such as the notification effect described later executed by the symbol display device 91. For a player who is paying attention to various effects executed by the symbol display device 91, each information can be easily recognized by the lighting state of the main display unit 93, the accessory display unit 94, and the round display unit 97. It's getting harder.

Further, the variable display unit 86 includes a symbol display device 91 for variable display (variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 86 includes a center frame 92 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 91. The upper portion of the center frame 92 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 91, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

<Design display device 91>
The symbol display device 91 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and is detachably attached to the game board 81 so that the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 faces the front side (player side) of the game board 81. Has been done. The symbol display device 91 displays a variable display of a decorative symbol for production (hereinafter, also referred to as a decorative symbol) when a predetermined condition is satisfied (a game ball is won in the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b). Start. That is, when the symbol display device 91 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 93a of the main display unit 93 and the variation display on the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93, the symbol display device 91 is adjusted accordingly. And execute the variable display. The symbol display device 91 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and the like, as well as a drum type symbol display device and a dot matrix type symbol display device. Various conventionally known display devices capable of stopping and variable display of various symbols such as the above can be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 9, the symbol display device 91 according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of rows of symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 capable of variablely displaying decorative drawings, and the first start port 84a or the second start With the winning of the mouth 84b as an opportunity, the decorative drawing starts to change in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3. Further, effective stop positions of decorative drawings are set in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3, respectively, and a stop symbol effective line that combines the effective stop positions of the respective symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 by the symbol variation effect. The design combination of the decorative drawing that is stopped and displayed on L is derived. In the symbol display device 91 of the present embodiment, three rows of symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are set side by side, and an effective stop position of a decorative drawing is set for each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3. Each location is set, and a pattern variation effect consisting of three rows of decorative drawings is performed. That is, one stop symbol effective line L is set in the symbol display device 91 of the present embodiment. In the following description, there are cases where the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z2, and the symbol row Z3 are in order from the left side.

Further, the display area of the decorative figure in each of the symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of the symbol display device 91 is composed of a larger area than the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b. The decorative drawing is displayed much larger than that of. Therefore, the player can visually recognize whether it is a big hit or a miss from the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L of the symbol display device 91.

The symbol display device 91 is configured to perform variation display so that the decorative figure moves along a predetermined variation direction (vertical direction from top to bottom in the present embodiment) at the start of the symbol variation effect. , The decorative drawings that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at the effective stop positions of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in a predetermined stop order. Further, the symbol display device 91 temporarily temporarily stops and displays a decorative figure at an effective stop position of each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 before the symbol variation effect is completed, and displays the decorative symbols of each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. By stopping and displaying the figure, one symbol variation effect is completed. That is, the symbol variation effect (special figure 1 variation display and second special figure variation display) is performed from the start of variation to the final stop of the decorative drawings (special figure 1 and special figure 2) performed based on one start hold information. It is designed to be executed once.

Here, the "variable display" is a state in which the decorative figures displayed at the effective stop positions are changed in a predetermined order in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Further, the "fixed stop" of the decorative drawing means that the decorative drawing is continuously placed at the effective stop position in each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3 for a predetermined special figure fluctuation interval time (for example, 600 ms (milliseconds)). It is the state where the stop is displayed. Further, the "temporary stop" of the decorative drawing means that the decorative drawing displayed so as to stay at the effective stop position in each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is not continuously stopped during the special figure fluctuation interval time. is there. That is, the temporary stop of the decorative drawing includes a state in which the decorative drawing is displayed in a fluctuating state at the effective stop position and a state in which the decorative drawing is stopped and displayed in a time shorter than the special drawing fluctuation interval time.

Further, in the first result display unit 93a and the symbol display device 91, the special figure 1 variation display and the symbol variation effect related to the special figure 1 variation display are started, and the special figure 1 and the decorative drawing are fixedly stopped and displayed. Similarly, in the second result display unit 93b and the symbol display device 91, the second special figure variation display and the symbol variation effect related to the second special figure variation display are started, and the special figure 2 and the decorative figure are fixedly stopped and displayed. To. In addition, the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b do not simultaneously perform the special figure variation display, and the special figure variation is performed by either the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b. When the display is performed, the other special figure variation display is not performed.

Here, in the symbol display device 91 according to the present embodiment, ten kinds of numbers "0" to "9" are set as basic decorative diagrams in each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. Is changed and displayed in order in each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3. The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 91 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol string, the scroll direction of each symbol string, the number of symbols of each symbol string, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol of each symbol string may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers. In addition, the decorative drawing may be given a first identification symbol that allows the player to definitively recognize that a probabilistic state (described later) is given after the jackpot game ends, and a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. It is classified as a second identification symbol that can be non-deterministically recognized as having.

Here, as the first identification symbol, a special decorative drawing other than the basic decorative drawing may be used even if it is appropriately set from the basic decorative drawings. For example, the odd-numbered symbols "1", "3", "5", "7", "9" and the even-numbered symbols "0", "2", "4", "6", "8" are the first. The identification symbol of "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8" can be used as the second identification symbol. In this way, the player can use the decorative drawings of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 that are fixedly stopped and displayed at the effective stop positions (stop symbol effective line L) of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 in the symbol display device 91. It is possible to grasp whether or not a winning game is given. In the present embodiment, as a winning symbol combination, the same decorative figure is fixedly stopped and displayed at the effective stop position of each symbol row (for example, "1.1.1", "2.2.2", etc.). Is set.

The symbol combination of the decorative figure that can recognize this jackpot becomes the hit display result, and the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is given after the symbol variation effect is completed. On the other hand, if even one of the symbols in all rows displayed as a fixed stop at the effective stop position of the symbol display device 91 is of a different type, in principle, the jackpot game is not given from the combination of the symbols. Can be recognized. The combination of decorative patterns that can recognize this deviation is the deviation display result.

Further, on the symbol display device 91, as a result of the special figure variation display on the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b, the symbol combination of the decorative figure corresponding to the displayed special figure is displayed. That is, the special figure displayed on the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b and the symbol combination of the decorative figure displayed on the symbol display device 91 correspond to each other, and when the symbol variation effect is completed. , The special figure is fixedly stopped on the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b, and the decorative drawing is fixedly stopped and displayed on each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the symbol display device 91. There is. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make one-to-one combination of decorative symbols for special symbols, and one special symbol may be associated with a plurality of decorative symbol combinations.

The center frame 92 includes a first holding lamp portion 95a provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 91, a second holding lamp portion 95b provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 91, and a symbol display. It is provided with a third holding lamp portion 96 provided in the upper region of the device 91.

<Hold lamp>
The first holding lamp unit 95a includes LEDs for displaying the number of holding number of winning game balls in the first starting port 84a, and the LEDs are lit by the same number as the number of holding number of game balls. The pachinko machine 10 can hold up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs included in the first holding lamp unit 95a is four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the first hold lamp unit 95a corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 93a and the symbol display device 91. That is, the number of holds displayed by the first hold lamp unit 95a is added by 1 when the game ball wins the first start port 84a, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display of the first result display unit 93a is performed. To.

The second holding lamp unit 95b includes LEDs that display the number of holding number of winning game balls in the second starting port 84b, and the LEDs are lit by the same number as the number of holding number of game balls. The pachinko machine 10 can hold up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs included in the second holding lamp unit 95b is four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the second hold lamp unit 95b corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 93b and the symbol display device 91. That is, the number of holds displayed by the second hold lamp unit 95b is added by 1 when the game ball wins the second start port 84b, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display of the second result display unit 93b is performed. To.

The third holding lamp unit 96 includes an LED that displays the number of holding number of winning game balls in each through gate 85, and the LED lights up according to the number of holding number of game balls. The third holding lamp unit 96 allows the pachinko machine 10 to hold up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs included in the third holding lamp unit 96 is four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the second hold lamp unit 95b corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 94. That is, the number of holds displayed by the third hold lamp unit 96 is added by 1 when the game ball wins a prize in each through gate 85, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display of the accessory display unit 94 is performed. ..

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the number of reserved game balls by turning on the LEDs of the holding lamp units 95a, 95b, and 96, but the symbol display device 91 is the first as an image. Other configurations may be used, such as notifying the starting port 84a, the second starting port 84b, and each through gate 85 of the number of reserved game balls that have won a prize. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of LEDs provided in each of the holding lamp units 95a to 96 is set to four corresponding to the maximum holding number 4, but for example, two LEDs are arranged side by side and the holding number is "1". In the case of "2", the LED is "lit" in order from the left or right, and in the case of "3" to "4", the number of holds is notified to the player by "blinking" in order from the left or right. You may try to do it.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game ball launching mechanism 110 is attached below the window hole 76 in the resin base 71. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes an electromagnetic solenoid 111, a launch rail 112, and a ball feed mechanism 113, and the output shaft of the solenoid 111 moves in the expansion / contraction direction by inputting an electric signal to the solenoid 111. , The ball feed mechanism 113 launches the game ball placed on the launch rail 112 toward the game area.

There is a gap of a predetermined interval between the launch rail 112 and the inner and outer rails 101 and 102 attached to the game board 81, and below this gap is a foul formed in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. A ball passage 55 is arranged (see FIG. 3). Therefore, if the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the upper part of the game area and reverts to the guide rail composed of the inner and outer rails 101 and 102, the foul ball fouls. Enter the ball passage 55. The foul ball passage 55 leads to the lower plate passage 52 on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage 55 is discharged to the lower plate 34.

In the resin base 71, a substantially rectangular opening 71c that penetrates inward and outward (that is, in the front-rear direction) is formed below the launch rail 112 (see FIG. 5). A second monitoring device 290 that monitors the opening of the inner frame 13 is fitted in the opening 71c. Details of the second monitoring device 290 will be described later.

On the left side of the launch rail 112 in the resin base 71, a passage forming portion (see FIG. 3) 121 is provided so as to penetrate the resin base 71 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 10, the passage forming portion 121 is formed with a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 leads to the game ball distribution unit 225, which will be described later. Further, the receiving portion 53 of the passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming portion 121, and the front door side upper plate passage 51 is below the main body side upper plate passage 122. The front door side upper plate passage 51 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123 (see FIG. 6).

In the resin base 71, below the passage forming portion 121, an opening / closing member 124 (see FIG. 10) for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof, and is urged to a front position for closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 (not shown). An urging member is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the drawing and closes the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage 122 or the main body side lower plate passage 123, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled can be prevented. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage 51 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage 52 communicate with each other.

Next, the back surface configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.
A locking device 131 is provided on the rotating tip side (left side in FIG. 10) on the back surface of the resin base 71, and the locking device 131 is interlocked with the key operation on the cylinder lock 75, and the inner frame 13 and the front door The frame 14 is unlocked. Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 10, a back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 is provided on the upper left side of the back surface of the inner frame 13.

A bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 10) on the back surface of the resin base 71. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. Further, on the back surface of the resin base 71, a hole 134 for fastening the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame 13 is provided.

A plurality of locking metal fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 71, and the game board 81 is attached to the resin base 71 by these locking metal fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 81 will be described. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board 81 as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 12 is a rear view showing a state in which the main control unit 160 is removed from the game board 81.

The variable display unit 86 arranged in the center of the game board 81 is provided with a synthetic resin frame cover 141 that covers the center frame 92 from behind, and is provided so as to project rearward from the rear side with respect to the frame cover 141. The symbol display device 91 described above is attached, and a display control device for driving the symbol display device is attached (not shown). The symbol display device 91 and the display control device are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction (the symbol display device is in front and the display control device is in back), and the voice lamp control device unit 142 is mounted behind the symbol display device 91 and the display control device. The voice lamp control device unit 142 includes a voice emission control device 400 (not shown in FIGS. 10 to 12) and a mounting base 144, and the voice light emitting control device 400 is mounted on the mounting base 144. Has been done.

The voice emission control device 400 includes a voice lamp control board that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device 500 according to instructions from the main control device 300 described later, and the voice lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed in a substrate box 145 and is configured.

On the back surface of the game board 81, a collecting plate unit (not shown) is provided below the variable display unit 86. The collecting board unit is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting the game balls that have won in various winning openings, a winning detection mechanism for detecting the winning of the game balls in various winning openings, and the like.

Explaining the game ball collection mechanism with reference to FIG. 8, the collecting plate unit has a game board opening of the general winning opening 82, the variable winning device 83, and the operating opening 84 (first and second starting ports 84a, 84b). A collection passage 151 is formed corresponding to the portion and gathers at one place on the downstream side. Therefore, all the game balls that have won the general winning opening 82 or the like are gathered below the game board 81 through the collection passage 151. Below the game board 81, there is a discharge passage described later, and the game balls gathered below the game board 81 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage 151. The out port 87 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won any prize is also led out into the discharge passage through the out port 87.

Similarly, the winning detection mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 12. The collecting plate unit is provided with detection sensors 152 at positions corresponding to the general winning openings 82 on the front side of the game board 81. Further, the detection sensors 153 are provided at positions corresponding to the variable winning device 83, and the detection sensors 154a and 154b are provided at positions corresponding to the first and second starting ports 84a and 84b. The winning of the game ball is detected by these detection sensors 152 to 154b. Further, on the right side of the variable display unit 86 outside the collecting plate unit, a detection sensor 155 for detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 85 is provided. Further, a detection sensor 156 (see FIG. 7) is provided at a position corresponding to the out port 87.

As shown in FIG. 11, the main control device unit 160 is mounted on the back surface of the game board 81 so as to cover the collecting plate unit from the rear side. The configuration of the main controller unit 160 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the main controller unit 160.
The main control device unit 160 has a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin, and the main control device 300 (not shown in FIG. 13) described later is mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 300 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the above.

The substrate box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion 164 as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions 164 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box base and the box cover can be formed by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the sealing portion 164. And are combined so that they cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed, and once opened. Even after this, it is possible to perform the sealing process again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of sealing portions 164. When the board box 163 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is connected. Disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it is easy to find out that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 163.

A plurality of coupling pieces 165 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 163 so as to project laterally. These coupling pieces 165 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces 166 formed on the mounting base 161, and the coupling piece 165 and the coupling piece 166 form between the substrate box 163 and the mounting base 161. Sealing process is performed.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described. FIG. 14 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.
The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board 203 (see FIG. 4), and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 86.

The base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack is provided by inserting the hooking pins 214 through the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13. The unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener 215 for fastening to the hole to be fastened 134 provided in the inner frame 13, and the fastener 215 is fitted into the hole to be fastened 134 to be fitted inside. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the frame 13.

The payout mechanism portion 202 is arranged on the base portion 211 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. That is, a tank 221 opened upward is provided at the uppermost portion of the back pack 201, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. A tank rail 222 that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected below the tank 221 and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided on the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. It leads to the upper plate 33 via the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage 51, and the central opening leads to the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage 52. The outer opening is formed so as to lead to the discharge passage.

A back pack substrate (power receiving unit or external power receiving unit) 229 is installed in the payout mechanism unit 202. For example, a main power supply of 24 volts AC is supplied to the back pack board 229, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 229a.

A discharge passage board 203 (see FIG. 4) and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board 203 is formed with a discharge passage that is open to the rear on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball led out from the above-mentioned collection passage 151 or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Is discharged to.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and the payout control device 242 and the power supply and launch control device 243 (hereinafter, also referred to as power supply / launch control device 243) are mounted on the mount base 241. There is. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in the board box 244. The signal of the payout command from the payout control device 242 to the payout device 224 is relayed by the back pack substrate 229 described above. Further, the payout control device 242 is provided with a state return switch 245. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 224 occurs, the ball jam is cleared.

An external terminal plate 213 is provided on the right side of the board box 244. The external terminal plate 213 has an output terminal for outputting various error information generated in the pachinko machine 10, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the inner frame 13 is opened, and a signal output when the front door frame 14 is opened. An output terminal or the like is provided for this purpose. Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state on the frame side is output to the management control device (or hall computer) on the game hall side.

In the power supply / launch control device 243, the power supply and the launch control board are housed in the board box 246, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and further, the launch handle by the player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of 41. Further, the power supply / emission control device 243 is provided with a RAM erase switch 247. This pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data so that it can retain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become. Therefore, if the power is shut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored in memory, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 247, the RAM data is initialized. It has become like.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 10, the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13 is equipped with the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290. Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 10, a back pack unit opening detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 is provided on the upper left side of the back surface of the inner frame 13. The first monitoring device 250 is arranged at the upper part on the opening / closing tip side of the inner frame 13, and the opening of the front door frame 14 is monitored by the first monitoring device 250. On the other hand, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged at the lower part of the inner frame 13. Specifically, the back pack unit 15 is arranged below the lower end edge of the back pack unit 15 in the closed state, and can be visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 5). The opening of the inner frame 13 is monitored by the second monitoring device 290. Further, the back pack unit opening detector 289 detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 10, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 are mounted on the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13. The first monitoring device 250 is arranged at the upper part on the opening / closing tip side of the inner frame 13, and the opening of the front door frame 14 is monitored by the first monitoring device 250. On the other hand, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged at the lower part of the inner frame 13. Specifically, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged below the lower end edge of the back pack unit 15 in the closed state of the back pack unit 15, and the game machine main body 12 is opened, in other words, the inner frame 13 Opening is being monitored.

The first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 have the same configuration, and their mounting directions and incidental configurations are different. Therefore, here, only the configuration of the first monitoring device 250 will be described, and the configuration of the second monitoring device 290 will be omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the first monitoring device 250 includes a housing case body 251 and a lid case body 280, and both case bodies 251, 280 are fixed by fasteners such as screws. The housing 252 is formed. The housing 252 (both case bodies 251,280) is made of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin material having light transmission, and the inside of the housing 252 is visible. Therefore, the inside of the first monitoring device 250 can be easily confirmed, and maintenance and the like are facilitated. As described above, since it is easy to check the inside of the first monitoring device 250, it is easy to detect fraudulent acts such as obstructing the monitoring function of the first monitoring device 250.

The first monitoring device 250 is arranged in the upper corner of the resin base 71 with the storage case body 251 on the front side and the lid case body 280 on the rear side. In the state of being arranged in this way, the resin base 71 is fixed to the back surface by fasteners such as bolts.
The storage case body 251 has a top plate portion 253, a bottom plate portion 254, a front plate portion 255, a left plate portion 256, and a right plate portion 257, and is a pachinko machine when attached to the upper part of the inner frame 13 on the opening / closing tip side. The rear side of the 10 is formed in an open box shape. The front plate portion 255 is substantially parallel to the back surface of the resin base 71. The front plate portion 255 is formed with an upper extending portion 258 extending upward from the boundary with the top plate portion 253 and a lower extending portion 259 extending downward from the boundary with the bottom plate portion 254. The protrusions 258 and 259 are in contact with the back surface of the resin base 71.

Both extending portions 258 and 259 are provided with round holes 258a and 259a into which columnar boss portions formed on the resin base 71 are fitted, respectively. Then, the cylindrical boss portions are fitted into the round holes 258a and 259a, respectively, so that the first monitoring device 250 is positioned in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Further, an overhanging portion 260 is formed in the lower part of the front plate portion 255 so as to project forward in a stepped shape, and an opening 71b corresponding to the overhanging portion 260 is formed in the resin base 71. Further, the opening 71b is a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer peripheral shape of the overhanging portion 260. By fitting the overhanging portion 260 into the opening portion 71b, the boundary portion between the resin base 71 and the first monitoring device 250 has a crank shape. As a result, the inconvenience that an illegal tool or the like is inserted from the boundary portion between the opening portion 71b and the overhanging portion 260 is suppressed. Further, the respective dimensions are set so that the front surface of the resin base 71 and the front surface of the overhanging portion 260 are substantially on the same surface, and the overhanging portion 260 does not protrude forward from the resin base 71. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the arrangement position of the first monitoring device 250 is displaced due to the overhanging portion 260 being caught during maintenance work or the like.

Inside the housing 252 (more specifically, inside the housing case body 251), there is a detection device 265 that detects the open / closed state of the front door frame 14, and an operating mechanism that continuously operates by being supplied with electric power. 275 and are installed.

The detection device 265 is arranged behind the opening 71b of the resin base 71, that is, behind the overhanging portion 260. More specifically, it is arranged on the rotating tip side of the front door frame 14 inside the housing case body 251. The detection device 265 includes a light emitting element 266 (photodiode) that emits light, a light receiving element 267 (phototransistor) that receives light from the light emitting element 266, and an accommodating body 268 that houses the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267. I have.

The accommodating body 268 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped main body portion 269 and projecting portions 269a and 269b protruding in the left-right direction at the lower portion of the main body portion 269. The housing body 268 is arranged so that the front surface is parallel to the front plate portion 255. The protruding portions 269a and 269b are formed in a plate shape parallel to the bottom plate portion 254, and the protruding portions 269a and 269b are fitted (inserted) into the first guide groove 270 formed in the housing case body 251. As a result, the detection device 265 is attached to the housing case body 251.
The first guide grooves 270 face each other and extend in the front-rear direction, and are opened to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 at the rear end, and the protrusions 269a and 269b are inserted into the first guide grooves 270. As a result, the outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 269a and 269b come into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the first guide groove 270, and the vertical and horizontal movements of the detection device 265 are restricted.

Further, a contact portion 271 to which the accommodating body 268 hits is provided at the front portion of the first guide groove 270. The contact portion 271 is raised inward of the housing case body 251 and has an upper contact surface 271a parallel to the inner surface of the bottom plate portion 254 and a rear contact surface 271b parallel to the inner surface of the front plate portion 255. doing. When the detection device 265 is pushed along the first guide groove 270, the accommodating body 268 and the rear contact surface 271b come into contact with each other. As a result, the forward movement of the detection device 265 is restricted. In the state where the forward movement is restricted in this way, a predetermined gap is secured between the front plate portion 255 of the accommodation case body 251 and the detection device 265. The accommodating body 268 is fixed to the accommodating case body 251 by fasteners such as screws in a state where movement in each of the forward, horizontal, and vertical directions is restricted as described above.

Through holes 269c and 269d penetrating in the front-rear direction are arranged side by side in the main body portion 269 of the accommodating body 268 with a predetermined interval. A light emitting element 266 and a light receiving element 267 are fitted into the through holes 269c and 269d, respectively, with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing forward. The through holes 269c and 269d are arranged above the upper contact surface 271a (contact portion 271) so that the passage of light between the elements 272 and 273 is not blocked by the contact portion 271. .. More specifically, the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 is emitted from the housing case body 251 without being blocked by the contact portion 271, and is emitted toward the back surface of the front door frame 14. Further, the central axes of the through holes 269c and 269d are orthogonal to the front plate portion 255, and the central axes of both elements 266 and 267 are also orthogonal to the front plate portion 255. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element 266 is incident on the front plate portion 255, so that it is difficult to be refracted or reflected.

As shown in FIG. 6, a light reflecting member 274 that reflects the light from the light emitting element 266 toward the light receiving element 267 is provided in front of the detection device 265, that is, on the back side of the front door frame 14. The light reflecting member 274 is fixed to the front door frame 14 by fasteners such as screws in a state of being housed in the storage recess 14a formed in the front door frame 14, and the protrusion from the back surface of the front door frame 14 is formed. It is suppressed.
The light reflecting member 274 is composed of a glass prism having light transmittance. When the front door frame 14 is not open, in other words, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the light from the light emitting element 266 is reflected by the light reflecting member 274, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving element 267. The door.
On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is open, in other words, when the front door frame 14 is not closed, the position of the light reflecting member 274 is displaced by opening the front door frame 14. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element 266 shifts in the direction reflected by the light reflecting member 274, and the reflected light is not received by the light receiving element 267.

Next, the operation mechanism 275 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the operating mechanism 275 is arranged on the side of the detection device 265, and its main configuration is a solenoid 276 provided as a power source of the operating mechanism 275 and a solenoid 276 thereof. It is provided with an operating shaft 277 inserted into the machine.

The solenoid 276 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction, and an attachment portion 278 to the housing case body 251 is provided above the solenoid 276. The mounting portion 278 is formed in a plate shape parallel to the top plate portion 253 of the housing case body 251 and is fitted in the second guide groove 279 formed in the top plate portion 253 and the left plate portion 256. These second guide grooves 279 face each other and extend in the front-rear direction, and their rear ends are opened to the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The operating mechanism 275 is mounted by inserting the mounting portion 278 from the rear end side of the second guide groove 279 and pushing in the solenoid 276. By inserting the mounting portion 278 into the second guide groove 279 in this way, the outer peripheral surface of the mounting portion 278 and the inner peripheral surface of the second guide groove 279 come into contact with each other. As a result, the movement of the operating mechanism 275 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is restricted. By pushing the operating mechanism 275 along the second guide groove 279, the mounting portion 278 and the front plate portion 255 of the housing case body 251 come into contact with each other, and the movement of the pachinko machine 10 forward is restricted. The operation mechanism 275 is fixed to the storage case body 251 by fasteners such as screws in a state where movement in each direction is restricted in this way. In the present embodiment, the second guide groove 279 is provided in order to improve the mounting workability of the operation mechanism 275, but a configuration in which these are not provided may be provided.

The operating shaft 277 has an iron cylindrical portion 277a extending in the vertical direction. Most of the columnar portion 277a is housed inside the solenoid 276. The central axis of the cylindrical portion 277a and the central axis of the solenoid 276 overlap, and the operating shaft 277 can move in the direction of the central axis of the solenoid 276. The lower end of the operating shaft 277 projects to the outside of the solenoid 276, and the lower end of the operating shaft 277 has a plate-shaped shielding portion 277b and a crank portion 277c that offsets the shielding portion 277b from the operating shaft 277 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is integrally molded. In the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 277a, the shielding portion 277b, and the crank portion 277c of the operating shaft 277 are integrally molded, but they can also be molded individually. For example, it is preferable that only the columnar portion 277a is made of iron, and the shielding portion 277b and the crank portion 277c are made of synthetic resin.

The shielding portion 277b is formed substantially parallel to the front plate portion 255, and moves in parallel with the front plate portion 255 following the vertical movement of the operating shaft 277. Further, the shielding portion 277b is arranged so as to be on the front side of the detection device 265 by the crank portion 277c, and a gap for its operation is provided by the space formed between the detection device 265 and the front plate portion 255. (Operating gap) is secured. The lower end of the shielding portion 277b comes into contact with the upper contact surface 271a at its lower limit position. In such a contact state, the shielding portion 277b is configured to overlap the light receiving element 267 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, the front side of the light receiving element 267 is covered. On the other hand, when the shielding portion 277b is in the upper limit position, the lower end portion of the shielding portion 277b is set to be above the light receiving element 267. In other words, it does not cover the front side of the light receiving element 267. A paint that absorbs light (paint with low light reflectance) is applied to the shield 277b so that light from other light sources is not reflected by the shield 277b and reaches the light receiving element 267. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the shielding portion 277b is configured to overlap only the light receiving element 267, but it may be configured to overlap the light emitting element 266 or may be configured to overlap both the light receiving element 267 and the light emitting element 266. ..

In the present embodiment, the operating shaft 277 is held at the upper limit position of the operating range when power is supplied to the solenoid 276, in other words, at a position that does not cover the front surface of the detection device 265 (hereinafter, also referred to as the first position). To. Here, the output of the solenoid 276 is set so large that the operating shaft 277 can be lifted against gravity in the energized state. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the operating shaft 277 is lowered by its own weight and is held at the lower limit position of the operating range, in other words, the position covering the front surface of the detection device 265 (hereinafter, also referred to as the second position). .. More specifically, when the shielding portion 277b comes into contact with the upper contact surface 271a, the operating shaft 277 is held at the second position. That is, in the operating shaft 277, the holding position changes between the first position and the second position depending on the presence or absence of power supply. In other words, the position of the shielding portion 277b is switched between the first position and the second position as the position of the operating shaft 277 is switched.

A predetermined gap region is set between the lower end portion of the shielding portion 277b at the first position and the upper end portion of the shielding portion 277b at the second position. In other words, the operating distance dimension of the operating shaft 277 is set to be larger than the axial length dimension of the shielding portion 277b, and the front plate portion 255 (detailed overhang) that overlaps the gap region in the front view of the pachinko machine 10. An insertion hole 260a that penetrates inside and outside (that is, in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10) is formed in a part of the portion 260). As shown in FIG. 6, the back surface of the front door frame 14 is provided with a protrusion 14b that can be inserted into the insertion hole 260a. The protrusion 14b is integrally molded with the front door frame 14, and extends to the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The tip of the protrusion 14b is located slightly behind the rear end of the shielding portion 277b. Since the protrusion 14b is provided on the front door frame 14 as described above, the protrusion 14b moves with the rotation of the front door frame 14. That is, the protrusion 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a when the front door frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 13, and is not inserted into the insertion hole 260a when the front door frame 14 is opened by a predetermined amount or more. It becomes a state.

In the state where the protrusion 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a, that is, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the shielding portion 277b and the protrusion 14b come into contact with each other to position both the first position and the second position of the shielding portion 277b. Movement between is restricted. More specifically, when the shielding portion 277b is in the first position and the protrusion 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a, the movement of the shielding portion 277b to the second position is restricted. Further, when the protrusion 14b is inserted while the shielding portion 277b is in the second position, the movement of the shielding portion 277b to the first position is restricted.

As described above, the front door frame 14 is rotatably provided with respect to the inner frame 13. Therefore, before the hook fitting 63 of the front door frame 14 and the bearing fitting 132 are locked, the relative positions of the protrusion 14b, the shielding portion 277b, and the insertion hole 260a may vary. For this reason, there is a concern that the protrusions 14b and the like may be caught and the closing work of the front door frame 14 may be hindered. At the same time, the insertion hole 260a has a tapered shape that widens toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, catching when the protrusion 14b is inserted is suppressed, and workability when the front door frame 14 is closed is ensured.

Next, the relative relationship between the protrusion 14b and the shielding portion 277b will be described in detail. When the front door frame 14 is closed, the rear end of the protrusion 14b projects slightly rearward from the rear end of the shielding portion 277b. Therefore, even if the position of the front door frame 14 in the front-rear direction is slightly different, the function of the protrusion 14b is guaranteed. When the front door frame 14 is opened, by opening it at a predetermined angle or more, the protrusion 14b moves to a position where the shielding portion 277b and the pachinko machine 10 do not overlap in a plan view. As a result, the movement restriction (regulation) of the shielding portion 277b is released.

Further, an opening flange 13a extending in front of the pachinko machine 10, that is, toward the front door frame 14, is integrally formed on the peripheral edge of the inner frame 13. Due to the opening flange 13a, the peripheral edge portion of the inner frame 13 and the peripheral edge portion of the front door frame 14 overlap each other in the side view and the plan view of the pachinko machine 10. By making the two overlap each other in this way, the inconvenience that an illegal tool or the like is inserted from the boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is suppressed. The amount of overlap between the protrusion 14b and the shielding portion 277b is set to be smaller than the amount of overlap between the opening flange 13a and the front door frame 14. More specifically, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the shielding portion 277b to the rear end portion of the protrusion 14b is the distance dimension in the front-rear direction from the front end edge of the opening flange 13a to the rear end edge of the front door frame 14. Is also set small. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 rotates and the protrusion 14b and the shielding portion 277b do not overlap with each other, the boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is not exposed by the opening flange 13a. That is, at a position where the front surface of the inner frame 13 can be visually recognized from the boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, the movement restriction of the shielding portion 277b by the protrusion 14b is released. ..

Next, the main configuration of the lid case body 280 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. The lid case body 280 has a top plate portion 281, a bottom plate portion 282, a back plate portion 283, a left side plate portion 284, and a right side plate portion 285, and has a box shape opened in front of the pachinko machine 10. The rear end opening edge of the storage case body 251 is housed in the open portion of the lid case body 280. Inside the lid case body 280, a relay board 286 electrically connected to the detection device 265 and the like by a harness (not shown) is arranged. The relay board 286 has a substantially plate shape parallel to the back plate portion 283, and is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate portion 283 by fasteners such as screws.

A communication hole 287 that penetrates inside and outside is formed behind the relay board 286, that is, at a portion of the back plate portion 283 that faces the relay board 286. A connector 288 is arranged behind the communication hole 287. In other words, the relay board 286 and the connector 288 are provided so as to face each other with the communication hole 287 interposed therebetween, and the relay board 286 and the connector 288 are electrically connected by a harness or the like (not shown). The connector 288 is fixed to the back surface of the back plate portion 283 by fasteners such as screws with its insertion port facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the first monitoring device 250 and the main control device 300 are electrically connected via a connector 288 by a harness (not shown). In the present embodiment, as described above, the lid case body 280 is configured to have light transmission, so that it is easy to confirm fraud or the like with respect to the first monitoring device 250. However, it is also possible that the lid case body 280 does not have light transmission. In this case, the lid case body 280 may be formed of, for example, an opaque synthetic resin material or a light metal material such as aluminum.

Next, the opening detection of the front door frame 14 in a state where power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
The solenoid 276 is excited when power is being supplied to the first monitoring device 250, that is, when the solenoid 276 is energized. As a result, the operating shaft 277 is held in the first position. In such a state, the shielding portion 277b does not exist in front of the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 reaches the light receiving element 267 via the light reflecting member 274. When the light reaches the light receiving element 267, the light receiving signal is output to the relay board 286. By reading this light receiving signal, it is detected that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

When the front door frame 14 is opened while power is being supplied to the first monitoring device 250, the relative positions of both elements 266 and 267 and the light reflecting member 274 change. In this case, the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 does not reach the light reflecting member 274, or even if it reaches the light reflecting member 274, the reflected light is emitted toward a portion other than the light receiving element 267. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element 266 does not reach the light receiving element 267. Therefore, a predetermined light receiving signal is not output. Then, by reading the change in the received light signal, it is detected that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

In this way, by making it possible to detect the opening of the front door frame 14 while the electric power is being supplied, it is possible to suppress the unauthorized opening of the front door frame 14 during the business of the hall. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of fraud against the pachinko machine 10.

Further, when the supply of electric power to the first monitoring device 250 is stopped due to the closing of the store or a power failure, the supply of electric power to the solenoid 276 is stopped, so that the excited state is released. In this case, the operating shaft 277 and the shielding portion 277b move downward due to their own weight and come into contact with the protrusion 14b. When the shielding portion 277b comes into contact with the protrusion 14b, its downward movement is restricted, and its movement to the second position is restricted. When the power supply is started again in this state, the solenoid 276 is in an excited state, and the operating shaft 277 is lifted upward by overcoming its own weight action. In this case, since the light from the light emitting element 266 can reach the light receiving element 267, it is possible to detect that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In this way, it is detected that the front door frame 14 was not opened while the power supply was stopped.

Next, a case where the front door frame 14 is opened and closed while the power supply is stopped will be described.
As the front door frame 14 is opened, the protrusion 14b is separated from the first monitoring device 250, so that the shielding portion 277b loses its support and moves downward (that is, the second position) by its own weight. When the shielding portion 277b moves downward, it comes into contact with the upper contact surface 271a, and further downward movement is restricted. When the front door frame 14 is closed again in this state, the protrusion 14b returns to the original position (the state in which the protrusion 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a), so that the upward movement of the shielding portion 277b is restricted. In this state, the shielding portion 277b is located in front of the light receiving element 267, and its vertical movement is restricted by the protrusion 14b and the upper contact surface 271a. By making the shielding portion 277b immovable from the second position in this way, the fact that the front door frame 14 has been opened is mechanically preserved.

When the power supply is started while the movement of the shield portion 277b from the second position is restricted, the solenoid 276 is excited and the shield portion 277b tries to move upward (that is, the first position). However, the shielding portion 277b hits the protrusion 14b, and its movement is hindered. That is, the state in which the light receiving element 267 is still covered by the shielding portion 277b is continued. When the power supply is started, the light emitting element 266 starts emitting light. The light emitted from the light emitting element 266 is emitted toward the light receiving element 267 via the light reflecting member 274. However, the shielding portion 277b located in front of the light receiving element 267 blocks the arrival of light at the light receiving element 267. Therefore, it is detected that the output of the received light signal is suppressed and the front door frame 14 is in an open state. Actually, the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, but it is detected that the front door frame 14 is opened when the power is cut off.

As described above, by opening the front door frame 14 again in the state where the opening of the front door frame 14 when the power is cut off is detected, the protrusion 14b is separated from the first monitoring device 250, and the shielding portion 277b is in the first position. Move to. That is, the movement restriction of the shielding portion 277b is released. By operating the front door frame 14 in this way, the illegal opening detection state is released and the normal state is restored. Further, with such a configuration, since the illegal opening detection state is reset by opening the front door frame 14, it is not necessary to provide a reset switch or the like, which contributes to simplification of the configuration. Further, since the front door frame 14 is opened by a predetermined operation (locking / unlocking operation), it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the illegal opening detection state is illegally released.

Similar to the first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290 also includes a housing case body 251, a lid case body 280, a detection device 265, an operating mechanism 275, a relay board 286, and a connector 288, and the second monitoring device 290 is also provided. A protrusion and a light reflecting member corresponding to the device 290 are provided on the outer frame 11.

In the above description, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 are configured to detect that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened even when the power supply is not supplied (specifically). Is provided with an operating mechanism 275), however, a configuration in which it is detected that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened when the power supply is not supplied is essential for this embodiment. It suffices to have a configuration in which it is detected that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened while power is being supplied. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 may include a detection device 265 that detects the open / closed state of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13.

In the above description, whether or not the detection device 265 includes a light emitting element 266 and a light receiving element 267, the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 is reflected by the light reflecting member 274, and the reflected light can be received by the light receiving element 267. Therefore, the open / closed state of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 is detected. However, in the present embodiment, it is sufficient that the open / closed state of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 can be detected. Therefore, for example, when the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267 are provided at opposite positions on the back side of the resin base 71 and the front door frame 14, respectively, and the front door frame 14 is closed, the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 is emitted. Can be received by the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 may not be received by the light receiving element 267 when the front door frame 14 is open. Similarly, for the detection of opening / closing of the inner frame 13, the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267 are provided at opposite positions on the front side of the resin base 71 and the inner frame 13, respectively, and the inner frame 13 is closed. The light emitted by the light emitting element 266 may be received by the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 may not be received by the light receiving element 267 when the inner frame 13 is open.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 is detected by using the optical elements of the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267, but the front door frame 14 and the inner frame are detected by another method. The opening and closing of 13 may be detected. For example, an ultrasonic oscillating element may be provided instead of the light emitting element 266, and an ultrasonic receiving element may be provided instead of the light receiving element 267 to detect the opening and closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13. Further, a magnet may be provided instead of the light emitting element 266, and a magnetic sensor may be provided instead of the light receiving element 267 to detect the opening / closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 10, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15, but the back pack unit 15 is provided. Various mechanisms can be adopted to detect the opening of the machine. For example, similarly to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290, the opening / closing of the back pack unit 15 may be detected by using the optical elements of the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267, or instead of the light emitting element 266. An ultrasonic oscillation element may be provided in the back pack unit 15 and an ultrasonic reception element may be provided instead of the light receiving element 267 to detect the opening / closing of the back pack unit 15. Further, a magnet may be provided instead of the light emitting element 266, and a magnetic sensor may be provided instead of the light receiving element 267 to detect the opening / closing of the back pack unit 15, or a mechanical contact sensor may be provided. May be good.

<Electrical configuration>
FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 300, a voice emission control device 400, and a display control device 500. These devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the pachinko machine 10 supplies necessary power to the payout control device 242 and the pachinko machine 10 that execute the payout control for causing the above-mentioned payout device 224 to pay out the game ball, and also supplies a power source for controlling the game ball launch mechanism 110. A launch control device 243 is provided, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit 15.

The main control device 300 includes a main control board 301 that controls the main control (main control) of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring board 303 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 300 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 301 and the like. The substrate box may have a trace structure that leaves a trace when opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 301 includes an MPU (Micro-Processing Unit) 302 mounted on the main control board 301, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 312 and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 313 constituting the MPU 302. There is. The MPU 302 is a semiconductor element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are integrated into one chip in addition to the ROM 312 and the RAM 313, and is a so-called one-chip microcomputer. is there. In the present embodiment, the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 302, but the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 may be individually chipped. Further, although the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 are physically separated separate memories, they may be one memory that is not physically separated, and the ROM 312 area and the RAM 313 area may be provided by a logical address. .. In this case, for example, a specific area in the RAM may be write-protected so as to have a ROM function. The same applies to the MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 300.

The ROM 312 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is used as the main storage device of the MPU 302. The ROM 312 is a non-volatile memory that does not require external power supply for holding stored information (data), and is a semiconductor element that cannot be written. The ROM 312 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses. For example, a pass / fail table storage area, a distribution table storage area, a reach table storage area, a variable table storage area, and the like. It has various areas. These areas will be described in detail later.

The RAM 313 is a semiconductor memory capable of arbitrarily writing and erasing information. The RAM 313 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when reading and executing a control program stored in the ROM 312, and requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a volatile memory. The RAM 313 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and includes various areas such as various counter areas, hold ball storage areas, electric service hold areas, and stop result storage areas. Have. These areas will be described in detail later. In the present embodiment, a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) or a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) is used as the RAM 313, but the RAM 313 is a MRAM (Magnetoresistive Memory) non-volatile memory such as a Magnetoresistive Memory. May be used. In the present embodiment, even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 313 is supplied with power for data storage and holding from the power supply / firing control board provided in the power supply / firing control device 243 to hold the data. It is composed.

The MPU 302 includes an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the MPU 302 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 303 provided in the main control device 300 and a plurality of detection sensors 152 to 156. The output port of the MPU 302 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 303, the payout control device 242, and the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 connected to the voice emission control device 400 will be described in detail later. Further, the output port of the MPU 302 includes an electric accessory drive unit 84b2 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 84b1 of the second starting port 84b, a variable winning drive unit 83c that opens / closes the opening / closing door 83b of the variable winning device 83, and a main display. It is connected to the unit 93 and the display unit 94 for accessories.

Here, the main control board 301 has a driver circuit (not shown), and the MPU 302 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 302 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 84b2 to open and close the opening / closing member 84b1. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 302 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 83c to open / close the opening / closing door 83b of the variable winning device 83. Further, in each game round, the MPU 302 executes the display control of the main display unit 93 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the starting ports 84a and 84b. Further, the MPU 302 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 94 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 85.

The power failure monitoring board 303 relays between the main control board 301 and the power supply / launch control device 243 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 243. .. The MPU 302 receives electric power (DC24V) via the power failure monitoring board 303. Further, the MPU 302 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning openings 82 to 84b, an out opening 87, and each through gate 85 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 152 to 156. The MPU 302 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b.

The payout control device 242 is a prize ball (a game ball obtained by winning a prize) or a rental ball (a game ball lent to a player) to the payout device 224 based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 300. Execute the payout control to make the payout of.

The power supply / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. The power supply / emission control device 243 includes an AC-DC converter that generates operating power required for each of the main control board 301, the payout control device 242, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply. The generated operating power is supplied to each device. The power supply / emission control device 243 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 313 of the main control device 300 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The power supply / launch control device 243 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 110. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 103 of the game board 81, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 103 toward the guide rail 103. When the power supply / launch control device 243 and the predetermined launch conditions (when the launch handle 41 is rotated, the touch sensor 41a is on, and the launch stop switch 41b is off) are met, this solenoid is used. The drive signal (launch permission signal) is supplied to launch the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launching mechanism 110 of the pachinko machine 10 adopts a method of launching a game ball by a linear expansion / contraction operation of a plunger type solenoid, but it is directly connected to the rotation axis of the rotary solenoid. The hitting mallet may operate to launch the game ball, or the hitting mallet supported at a different position may operate to launch the game ball in response to the rotation of the motor. Specifically, in the method of launching a game ball by a motor, the motor and the hitting mallet are supported at different positions, and the hitting mallet is operated by rotating the cam connected to the motor. The hitting mallet operated by the motor (cam) hits the game ball by operating in the opposite direction due to the elasticity of the connected spring or the like, and launches the game ball into the game area 104 of the game board 81. Further, in the method of launching the game ball by the rotary solenoid, the game ball is hit by rotating the rotation axis in response to the pulse from the power supply / launch control device 243, and the game ball is moved to the game area 104 of the game board 81. Be fired. The hitting mallet directly connected to the rotation axis of the rotary solenoid hits the game ball on the launch rail by rotating to the support position of the game ball, and the game ball is launched. After hitting the ball, the torque of the rotary solenoid disappears, and the hitting mallet rotates in the opposite direction due to the reaction of the collision with the stopper and its own weight, and the stopper stops the ball at the position before the operation. Further, in the method of launching the game ball by the plunger type solenoid, the ball hitting mallet is directly connected to the movable iron core of the plunger type solenoid, and the game ball is hit by the linear reciprocating motion of the mallet, and the game area 104 of the game board 81. A game ball is fired at. In addition, the plunger type solenoid is a type that launches a hitting mallet by energizing the solenoid, and a type that compresses the spring by retracting the hitting mallet by energizing the solenoid, and advances the hitting mallet by the elasticity of the spring to hit the game ball. Either may be used.

Further, the ball feeding device of the game ball launching mechanism 110 may be either a mechanical type or a magnet type. In the case of the mechanical type, the ball feeding device is operated by using the power of the motor that drives the ball hammer. In the case of the mechanical type, since the driving source of the hitting mallet and the ball feeding device is the same, it is possible to supply the game balls one by one to the launching rail according to the timing of the hitting ball with a simple structure. Is possible. Further, in the case of the magnet type, in addition to the operation of the hammer, the ball feed is operated by an independent solenoid to supply the ball game balls one by one onto the launch rail. The magnet type is preferably adopted when the game ball launching mechanism 110 launches a game ball using a rotary solenoid or a plunger type solenoid.

The first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the back pack unit open detector 289 are connected to the main control board 301 via a built-in relay board (not shown). The first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the back pack unit open detector 289 operate by receiving power supplied from the main control board 301.

<Internal lottery>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery. The "internal lottery" is a special game state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is won in the start winning openings (first and second starting openings 84a and 84b) provided on the game board. It is a lottery to decide whether or not to transfer. As shown in FIG. 19, the MPU 302 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 302 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for generating jackpots, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and draws whether or not to generate reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 302 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 93 and the symbol display device 91. Further, the MPU 302 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not to open the opening / closing member 84b1 of the second starting port 84b. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas (see FIG. 19) of the RAM 313.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added (incremented) to the previous value each time it is updated, reaches a predetermined maximum value, and then returns to 0. Each counter is updated periodically (eg, every 4 msec). The updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 313. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is the timing at which the game ball wins the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b. It is stored in the holding ball storage area (see FIG. 19) provided in the RAM 313 as the acquisition information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the electric service holding area (see FIG. 19) of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 85. To.

The holding ball storage area includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The holding area Ra for the first result display unit provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 302 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in chronological order in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 84a. That is, the values acquired earlier are sequentially stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4. Specifically, the MPU 302 holds information in the order of first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4 when winning a prize in the first starting port 84a occurs a plurality of times in succession. To store.

In the present embodiment, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit has four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the first starting port 84a are held. There is. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has a storage area for writing the number of holds, which is the number of sets of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is provided. The number of holdings related to the first starting port 84a is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, for example, any one of 1 to 3 or 5 or more.

The second result display unit holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 302 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b. That is, the values acquired earlier are sequentially stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4. Specifically, the MPU 302 holds information in the order of first area Rb1 → second area Rb2 → third area Rb3 → fourth area Rb4 when winning a prize in the second starting port 84b occurs a plurality of times in succession. Is stored in chronological order.

In the present embodiment, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit has four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the second starting port 84b are held. There is. Further, the holding area Rb for the second result display unit has a storage area for writing the number of holdings, which is the number of sets of each value of the holding jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is provided. The number of holdings related to the second starting port 84b is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, for example, any one of 1 to 3 or 5 or more.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 461 and 462, the execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This is an area for moving.

Since the electric service holding area has four storage areas, a maximum of four game balls can be held for each through gate 85. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with two through gates 85, but regardless of which through gate 85 is won, if one of the through gates 85 is won, the through gate 85 will be in the electric service holding area. The winning of the game ball is suspended. The number of holdings related to the second starting port 84b is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, for example, any one of 1 to 3 or 5 or more.

<Explanation of each counter>
Next, the details of each counter will be described.
<Electric accessory release counter C4>
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time the update is performed, reaching the maximum value of 250, and then returning to 0. ing. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is used as the electric function of the RAM 313 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins at each through gate 85. Stored in the hold area. The MPU 302 draws a lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) as to whether or not to open the opening / closing member 84b1 of the second starting port 84b based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area. Execute.

<Support mode>
Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of modes (hereinafter, support modes) in which the opening / closing member 84b1 that enables the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b is opened at different frequencies. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-frequency support mode in which the opening / closing member 84b1 is set in the open state relatively low, and a high-frequency support mode in which the opening / closing member 84b1 is set in the open state relatively frequently. And have.

The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both are 4/5), but the high-frequency support mode is the low-frequency support mode. As compared with the above, when the electric service open state is won, the opening / closing member 84b1 is set to the open state more frequently, and the opening time for setting the opening / closing member 84b1 to the open state is also longer. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the opening / closing member 84b1 to the closed state during each opening in the one electric service open state is shorter than the opening time per opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is the minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the physical display unit 94) is shortened.

In the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the second starting port 84b than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the first start port 84a than the second start port 84b, and in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a second higher probability than the first start port 84a. The probability of winning a prize in the starting port 84b is high. Further, when the winning of the second starting port 84b is detected by the detection sensor 154b, a predetermined number (for example, two) of prize balls are paid out, so that the player can play the game in the high frequency support mode. You can play with almost no reduction in the number of balls.

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to the above. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of securing times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter securing time can be easily selected as compared with the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected securing times may be set. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the opening / closing member 84b1 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode compares the frequency of setting the opening / closing member 84b1 to the open state with the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high. Further, the types of support modes are not limited to two types, but may be arbitrary, and may be, for example, three or more types.

<Big hit random number counter>
Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI to determine the next value (initial value) when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed by a value with contingency. A big hit lottery will be held according to the method. Specifically, in the jackpot random number counter C1, the random number advances from the initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, and when the count progresses to the maximum value of 599, the next value does not become 0 and the random number is initially set. The value obtained from the value counter CINI is the initial value. Here, assuming that 100 is acquired from the random number initial value counter CINI as the initial value, the jackpot random number counter C1 advances counting to 100, 101, 102, and when counting to 599, returns to 0 and advances counting to 99. , The initial value is acquired again from the random number initial value counter CINI random. That is, in this method, since the initial value is changed every time the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the periodicity does not appear at the timing when a specific random number appears.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b. Is stored in the holding ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 84a, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 84b. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning a prize. Then, the MPU 302 executes a lottery for generating a big hit (win / fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the values of random numbers that win the jackpot generation. Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is set as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area of ROM 312 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means, as shown in FIG. It is remembered.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / failing lottery: a low-probability mode in which it is difficult to win a big hit (hereinafter, also referred to as a normal state) and a high-probability mode in which it is easy to win a big hit (hereinafter, also referred to as a probabilistic state). Has a mode. The pass / fail tables are the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability (normal) pass / fail information group) shown in FIG. 20 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability) shown in FIG. 20 (b). (Probability change) Appropriateness information group). The MPU 302 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / fail tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

These winning / failing tables have the results (winning / failing results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result". Specifically, under the gaming state (normal state) in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 20A, the random numbers that become the "big hit winning" The value is two. In addition, under the gaming state (probability variation state) in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. It is an individual. Here, the value of the big hit winning random number stored in the low probability mode winning / failing table is included in the value of the "big hit winning" random number stored in the high probability mode winning / winning table.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / losing table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the random number values that are stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and become the "big hit winning".

In addition, in each winning / losing lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that is the "big hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is lost. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result (small hit result)" and a "normal deviation result". All of these out-of-order results are common in that they do not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special deviation result" is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. .. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b. Is stored in the holding ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 84a, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 84b. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning a prize. Then, the MPU 302 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the value of a random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 21, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is stored in the distribution table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the ROM 312 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as an information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 21 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 21 (b). ing.
The MPU 302 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the first starting port 84a. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)" and "unspecified small round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to small round)". ) ”,“ Explicit small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”are set as the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14". (Probability 1/6) is assigned to "Unspecified low round high probability result", "15-19" (Probability 1/6) is assigned to "Explicit low round high probability result", and "20 to 29" (Probability) 1/3) is assigned to the "most advantageous result".

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the second starting port 84b. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 21B, the second distribution table has two distribution results, a “low probability result” and a “most advantageous result”, as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability results" and "10 to 29". "(Probability 2/3) is assigned to the" most advantageous result ".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 83 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described. The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. The "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result" have a high probability of winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described. The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The “unspecified small round high accuracy result” is a distribution result in which the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is maintained as it is. Here, if the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery. The "explicit small round high accuracy result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 83 in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

<Reach random number counter>
Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 238, and then returning to 0. .. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b. Is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 84a, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 84b. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning a prize. Then, the MPU 302 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The MPU 302 compares the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area with the reach table when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery. , A lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is information on the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the ROM 312.

Here, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is assigned to the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 91 stops the same odd number or the same even number. The combination of symbols having is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, when the winning / losing lottery is a "big hit" and the lottery is sorted to a "low probability result", the symbol display device 91 stops the combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result. Stop display on the symbol valid line L. Furthermore, when the winning / fail lottery is a "big hit" and the lottery is divided into "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result", or "big hit winning" in the winning / failing lottery. If the result is a "special deviation result", the symbol display device 91 is selected when the stop result is not a combination of symbols having the same number but a "normal deviation result" in the winning / failing lottery. A combination of special symbols having different numbers that do not exist is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery, and it is divided into the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. In the case of), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (“big hit winning” in the winning / failing lottery, “unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high” in the distribution lottery. It does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the case of being distributed to the "probable result" or the case of "special loss result" without being "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery.

In the reach display mode, among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91, the stop symbol of a specific symbol row (in the present embodiment, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) is valid. A game in which a reach state (reach) is generated by displaying a stop on the line L and displaying the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2 in the present embodiment) in a variable manner (reach display). It is structured so that one can recognize it. Specifically, the reach display is a combination of symbols in which the same decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3, for example, "1 ・ ↓ ・ 1", "2 ・ ↓ ・ 2" ("↓" is It means that it is changing). In addition, the symbols of the specific symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) forming the reach display are in the state of temporary stop display, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the remaining symbol rows (symbol row Z2). After being displayed), the decorative drawings of all the symbol rows are displayed as fixed stop.

By generating the reach display, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / losing lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 91 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, and is distributed. It is possible to make the player expect that the lottery was assigned to the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result". The reach display mode is not limited to this, and after stopping and displaying a part of the symbol strings, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

In the present embodiment, the main control board 301 of the main control device 300 is provided with the reach random number counter C3, and the MPU 302 is stored in the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 312 and the hold ball storage area. By comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3, a lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by the main control device 300, but the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is performed by the voice emission control device 400. It may be configured to be executed.

<Expected production>
The pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 91. The expected effect is to make the player expect that the winning / losing lottery will be a "big hit" after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 91 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. Refers to the production. The above-mentioned reach display is also an expected effect that occurs when the result is a “normal loss result” without being a “big hit” in the winning / losing lottery, and the pachinko machine 10 has two of the above-mentioned reach display and the notice display. It has a kind of expected production. Since the reach display has already been described, the notice display will be described below.

<Notice display>
The notice display will not be a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery if it becomes a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery, or if it becomes a "special loss result" without becoming a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. This is an expected production that makes it easier to generate the production than when the result is "normally out of order". This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate, or may combine these, instead of making it easier to generate the effect. In the present embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by the main control device 300, whereas the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is performed by the voice emission control device 400. Is executed.

In the mode of the advance notice display, among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed, or a part of the symbol rows (for example). , The symbol string Z1) is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L, and then a plurality of symbol columns (for example, the symbol columns Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner. In a situation where a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image screen. Display on G. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done. The notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the notice display may be displayed by changing the form of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 198, and then returning to 0. .. The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed. Then, the MPU 302 sets the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 93 and the symbol on the symbol display device 91 based on the comparison between the variation table and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. Determine the display duration. The variation table is information on the value of a random number related to the display duration, and is stored in the variation table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the ROM 312 as described above.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, random numbers are generated by a counter circuit (counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4) which is an IC for generating random numbers, but program control by software (so-called soft random numbers) is performed. ), It is possible to count at extremely high speed. Also, in the case of soft random numbers, since they are processed as part of the program control of the game machine, it becomes a burden on the software under the limited memory space, but in the case of hard random numbers, the random numbers are generated by the hardware. As a result, it is possible to generate a random number having a count value several times that of the soft random number without imposing a burden on the software.

<About various processes executed by the main control device 300>
The MPU 302 of the main control device 300 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order. The MPU 302 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, as well as NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 302 periodically (for example, a 2 msec cycle) executes steps S101 to S108, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 302 reads the states (detection states) of the plurality of detection sensors 152 to 156, determines the states, and stores the winning detection information in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 has determined that the detection sensors 152 to 154b provided in the general winning openings 82, the first starting opening 84a, the second starting opening 84b, and the various winning openings of the large winning opening 83a have detected the winning of the game ball. In this case, a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball is set, and the set command is transmitted to the payout control device 242. For example, when the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the variable winning device 83 determines that the winning of the game ball is detected, the MPU 302 transmits a prize ball command instructing the payout of 13 prize balls to the payout control device 242. To do.
Further, in step S101, the MPU 302 reads the signal (received signal) input from the first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the back pack unit open detector 289. The information of this read signal is stored and held in the register of the MPU 302. In this case, the MPU 302 is provided with at least the first register to the third register, the signal information of the first monitoring device 250 is stored and held in the first register, and the signal information of the second monitoring device 290 is the second. It is stored in a register, and the signal of the back pack unit open detector 289 is stored and held in a third register. This also applies to the following description regarding the registers of the MPU 302.

In step S102, the front door frame opening monitoring process is executed. In the front door frame opening monitoring process, processing related to monitoring the opening of the front door frame 14 in a situation where power is being supplied from an external power source is executed based on an input signal from the first monitoring device 250. The details of the front door frame opening monitoring process will be described later.

In step S103, the inner frame opening monitoring process is executed. In the inner frame opening monitoring process, processing related to monitoring the opening of the game machine main body 12, in other words, the inner frame 13 in a situation where power is being supplied from an external power source based on the input signal from the second monitoring device 290 is performed. Execute. The details of the inner frame opening monitoring process will be described later.

In step S104, the back pack release detection process is executed. In the back pack open detection process, based on the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289, the back pack unit 15 open detection process is executed in a situation where power is being supplied from an external power source. Specifically, it is determined whether the input signal (input voltage) from the back pack unit open detector 289 is LOW or HIGH. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the back pack unit 15 is not opened, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes LOW, and when the back pack unit 15 is opened, the back pack unit 15 is opened. The input signal from the unit open detector 289 is HIGH, but a different method may be used. For example, when the back pack unit 15 is not opened, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes HIGH, and when the back pack unit 15 is open, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes HIGH. May be LOW. When the release of the back pack unit 15 is detected in step S104, the MPU 302 sets the back pack unit release command in the RAM 313. The back pack unit release command set in the RAM 313 is transmitted from the main control device 300 (MPU302) to the voice emission control device 400 (MPU402).

In step S105, the MPU 302 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the MPU 302 updates by adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 313. If the MPU 302 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0.

In step S106, the MPU 302 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 302 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 313. The MPU 302 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 when the maximum value is reached when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once.

In step S107, the MPU 302 executes a winning process for thru. Specifically, when the MPU 302 determines that the detection sensor 155 provided on each through gate 85 has detected the winning of the game ball, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S106 is electrified. Store in the role holding area. Further, the MPU 302 sets a command to execute a variable display of the symbol of the character display unit 94, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 85 on the character display unit 94. Let me. Based on the command instruction in the MPU 302, the accessory display unit 94 performs a blinking and fluctuating variable display that turns on and off in sequence, and finally the lighting position (stop) in which the accessory display unit 94 is definitively lit. As a result), the command is displayed. Further, the MPU 302 sets a command for instructing the lighting of the third hold lamp unit 96, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 turns on the third hold lamp unit 96 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 302. The maximum number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 85 is 4, and the third reserved lamp unit 96 lights up in the same number as the reserved number.

In step S108, the MPU 302 executes a winning process for the starting port. Hereinafter, the winning process for the starting port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for starting port>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the starting port.
In step S201, whether the MPU 302 has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 84a based on whether or not the detection sensor 154a provided in the first starting port 84a has detected the entry of the game ball. Judge whether or not. When the MPU 302 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 84a (YES), in step S202, the MPU 302 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit. The reserved number is set as the first start reserved storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 302 processes the steps after step S205.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won in the first starting port 84a (NO), in the MPU 302, in step S203, the detection sensor 154b provided in the second starting port 84b is the game ball. It is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second starting port 84b based on whether or not the ball has been detected. When it is determined in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting opening 84b (NO), the MPU 302 ends the winning process for the starting opening. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 84b (YES), in step S204, the MPU 302 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. Then, the reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 302 processes the steps after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, in step S205, the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is. When it is determined in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value (NO), the MPU 302 ends the winning process for the start port. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value (YES), the MPU 302 adds 1 to the value of the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) in step S206. Update.

In step S207, the MPU 302 sets each value set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the hold area for the result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 302 has the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing. The set is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, the MPU 302 is a storage area corresponding to “4” of the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206 when “3” is set in the first start hold storage number RaN in step S202. Hold information is stored in 4 area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 302 is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of timer interrupt processing. The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. For example, the MPU 302 is a storage area corresponding to “4” of the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206 when “3” is set in the second start hold storage number RbN in step S204. Hold information is stored in the 4 area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 302 sets a command for instructing the lighting of the first hold lamp unit 95a or the second hold lamp unit 95b, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 400. After that, the MPU 302 finishes the winning process for the starting port. The voice emission control device 400 turns on the first hold lamp unit 95a or the second hold lamp unit 95b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 302. Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b is four. Further, the first hold lamp unit 95a or the second hold lamp unit 95b is lit by the same number (corresponding) as the number of holds.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. The normal process is the main process for advancing the game. Specifically, the MPU 302 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute. The "remaining time" is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the time required for the processing of steps S301 to S309 from the cycle time (4 msec).

In step S301, the MPU 302 executes an external output process of transmitting the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and when it is determined that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 302 issues the prize ball command to the voice emission control device 400 or the payout control device 242. Send to. Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round and a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, and is used for the effect. When it is determined that the command of is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400.

In step S302, the MPU 302 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, the MPU 302 is updated by adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, and the updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 313. If the MPU 302 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the value of the variation type counter CS is returned to 0.

In step S303, the MPU 302 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes a winning / failing lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 91, and finally stops and displays the symbol on the main display unit 93. Determine the relevant information, etc.

In step S304, the MPU 302 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode. The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 302 executes the demo display execution determination process. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round, and starts the game. When it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 302. This demo display execution process will be described in detail later.

Here, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, when the start waiting period is 3 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 302 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 3000 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). Further, if the MPU 302 starts a new game round while counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 302 resets the count value.

In step S306, the MPU 302 executes a process of executing opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 84b1 provided in the second starting port 84b (hereinafter, electric service support process). Specifically, when the MPU 302 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area of the RAM 313 and wins the electric accessory opening lottery, The opening / closing process of the opening / closing member 84b1 is executed. Further, the MPU 302 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 94 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 302 executes the game ball launch control process. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes launch control for launching a game ball to the power supply / launch control device 243 based on the player's rotational operation so that the player rotates the launch handle 41 clockwise (clockwise). Let me. More specifically, the power supply / launch control device 243 excites the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) to cause the game ball launch mechanism 110 to launch the game ball. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 41. Specifically, the larger the amount of rotation of the firing handle 41, the stronger the excitation, so that the firing intensity of the game ball becomes stronger. The power supply / launch control device 243 launches a game ball when predetermined launch conditions (when the launch handle 41 is rotated, the touch sensor 41a is on, and the launch stop switch 41b is off) are met. A drive signal is output to the solenoid of the mechanism 110 to launch the game ball.

In step S308, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 313. The power failure flag is set in the RAM 313 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 303 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 302. The power failure monitoring board 303 outputs this power failure signal when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed. The power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as RAM 313, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is set (YES), the MPU 302 executes the power failure processing in step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing in step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 302 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 302 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 313). In step S314, the MPU 302 prohibits access to the RAM 313. After that, the MPU 302 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), whether or not the timing for executing the next normal processing has been reached in step S309, that is, from the time when the current normal processing is started. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4 msec) has elapsed. When the MPU 302 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not been reached (NO), that is, when the cycle time of 4 msec has not elapsed and the remaining time has occurred, in step S310. , The random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 302 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached (the cycle time of 4 msec has elapsed).

The MPU 302 executes step S301 again when it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached (YES), that is, when the cycle time of 4 msec has elapsed and the remaining time has not occurred. By doing so, the next normal processing is started.

<Main processing>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In step S401, the MPU 302 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, a waiting time is provided for waiting for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 400, etc.) to become operable. Specifically, the MPU 302 waits until a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) elapses after the power is turned on.

In step S402, the MPU 302 determines whether or not 1 sec, which is a period for prohibiting access to the RAM 313 (hereinafter, a period for prohibiting permission) has elapsed. The MPU 302 repeatedly executes the process of step S402 until it is determined that 1 sec has elapsed in step S402. That is, if it is not determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 302 repeatedly executes the process of step S402, and if it determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, it executes the processes of step S403 and subsequent steps.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 302 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 302 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission / prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission / prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In step S403, the MPU 302 permits access to the RAM 313. In step S404, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / emission control device 243 is turned on. When the MPU 302 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S409. If the MPU 302 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S409. Further, when the MPU 302 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405 (YES), the MPU 302 calculates the RAM determination value (checksum) in step S406. In step S407, the MPU 302 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 302 compares the RAM determination value (checksum) calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value (checksum) stored in step S313 (processing at the time of power failure) of normal processing. If they match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is normal, and if they do not match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal.

The MPU 302 executes the processes after step S409 when it is determined in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal (NO), that is, when it is determined that the checksum values do not match. Further, the MPU 302 is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313 in step S408 when it is determined in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal (YES), that is, when it is determined that the checksum values match. Clear the power failure flag.

In the present embodiment, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 is confirmed by using the checksum, but the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 is a method of confirming the consistency of the checksum values. It may be determined by a method different from the above. For example, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 is confirmed by writing a keyword in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 in the power failure processing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main processing. You may. Further, the hash value of CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) or MD5 (Hash Function) may be used to confirm the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313. The checksum calculation method is very simple. For example, the lower 1 word of the total of each word in the word string may be used as the code value as it is. Therefore, the effectiveness of data confirmation by checksum is lower than that of other error detection codes, but the algorithm is very simple, so it does not burden the MPU 302 even under limited memory space. Can be calculated in.

The MPU 302 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on (YES), in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), or in step S407 that the RAM is determined. If it is determined that the value is not normal (NO), the processes after step S409 are executed.

In step S409, the MPU 302 outputs a voice lamp initialization command to the voice emission control device 400. As a result, the initialization of the RAM data and the abnormality of the data stored and held by the RAM determination value are notified.
In step S410, the MPU 302 outputs a payout initialization command or the like in order to initialize the payout control board or the like that is the control board on the slave side.
In step S411, the MPU 302 clears the work area of the RAM 313, and in step S412, the RAM 313 is initialized (initial setting).

Therefore, for example, the manager of the amusement park can initialize the data stored in the RAM 313 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erasing switch at the start of business of the amusement park. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 313 even when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 303 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S412, the MPU 302 executes the open monitoring process for power recovery. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes the detection state grasping process in step S413. In the detection state grasping process, the signal input from the first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the back pack unit open detector 289 is read in the same manner as the signal reading process in step S101 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22). This is performed, and the information of this read signal is stored and held in the register of the MPU 302.

In step S414, the comparison process is executed. In the comparison process, the value of the signal of the first monitoring device 250 stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the detection state grasping process is compared with the determination reference value stored in the ROM 312. Further, in the comparison process, the value of the signal of the second monitoring device 290 stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the detection state grasping process is compared with the determination reference value stored in the ROM 312.

In step S415, it is determined whether or not the signal value of the first monitoring device 250 compared in the comparison process exceeds the determination reference value, and the signal value of the second monitoring device 290 exceeds the determination reference value. Judge whether or not. As a result, when both are equal to or greater than the determination reference value, the process of step S417 is executed. If either one is smaller than the determination reference value, it means that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened while the power is shut off, so the process of step S416 is executed.

In step S416, the power recovery notification process is executed. In the power recovery notification process, a power recovery notification command is output to the voice emission control device 400. As a result, the notification sound is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the error display lamp unit 24 is lit, and the notification display is performed by the symbol display device 91. It should be noted that these notification modes may be different from the notification modes based on the normal notification command. Further, in the voice emission control device 400, various notifications are continued until the notification release operation such as opening / closing the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is performed (when the notification release operation is performed, the main control device 300 (MPU302) starts. The door opening notification release command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400 (MPU402)). That is, not only the mode of notification but also the mode of canceling notification is different between the normal time and the time of power recovery. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of notification and the mode of canceling notification may be the same between the normal time and the time of power recovery.

Further, in the power recovery notification process, a power recovery notification signal is output to the hall computer provided in the game hall via the external terminal plate 213. In this case, the hall computer targets a process of storing identification information such as the date and time when the signal for power recovery notification is input from the pachinko machine 10 and the machine number of the pachinko machine 10 as a history, and a surveillance camera provided in the game hall. A process such as pointing at the pachinko machine 10 is executed.
By executing the above-mentioned notification process for power recovery, if the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened while the power is cut off, it can be notified to the manager of the game hall or the like. , If it is an unauthorized release, it can be dealt with.

It should be noted that, in the power recovery notification process, the information form of the power failure notification command or the power cut release detection signal differs depending on whether the front door frame 14 has been opened or the inner frame 13 has been opened. May be different. In this case, the mode of notification can be different in the pachinko machine 10 itself or the hall computer depending on whether the front door frame 14 is opened while the power is cut off or the inner frame 13 is opened while the power is cut off. It is possible to have the manager of the game hall take appropriate measures. Further, the power recovery notification process is not limited to the above, and may be configured to output only one of the power recovery notification command and the power recovery notification signal. Further, as processing based on the output of the power recovery notification command, only a part of the notification sound output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, or the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is displayed. It may be configured to be executed.

In step S417, the MPU 302 permits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the MPU 302 shifts to the normal processing described with reference to FIG. 24. As a result, the state before the power is cut off is restored.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game time control process.
In step S501, the MPU 302 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 302 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (YES), the MPU 302 ends the game times control process without executing the processes after step S502. That is, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 302 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the starting ports 84a and 84b is detected.

Here, the MPU 302 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 313. The same applies to each of the following steps. Further, the MPU 302 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (NO), in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 93 is in the variable display, that is, whether or not the game is in progress. judge. When the MPU 302 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 93 is not in the variable display (NO), the MPU 302 executes the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 93 is in the variable display (YES), the MPU 302 executes the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S509.

In step S503, the MPU 302 recognizes the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When it is determined in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 ends the game times control process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less (NO), in step S504, the MPU 302 is set to the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. Executes the data setting process for setting the stored hold information for the digestion of the game times. After that, in step S505, the MPU 302 causes the main display unit 93 and the symbol display device 91 to start the variation display to execute the variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process. The data setting process in step S504 will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

In step S502, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the main display unit 93 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 93 is in the variable display (YES), the game round progress in steps S506 to S509. Execute the processing.

In step S506, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 28) described later has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 313 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 302 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 302 updates the display of the main display unit 93 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game times control process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed (YES), the MPU 302 executes the variation end processing in step S508. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 302 finally stops the information (finally stopped at the main display unit 93) stored in the RAM 313 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 28) described later. (Information related to the symbol to be displayed) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 302 executes the display control of the main display unit 93 so that the symbol corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 93 during the variable display.

Here, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 93 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the amusement park, for example, can easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to make the pachinko machine 10 perform the same behavior as when the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done

The display area of the main display unit 93 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 91, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 are the symbol rows Z1 to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91. Compared to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 instead of the main display unit 93. The degree of attention to the screen G increases.

In step S509, the MPU 302 sets the variable end command. The MPU 302 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game times control process. The voice emission control device 400 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 302. Here, the voice emission control device 400 may be configured to independently end the production of the game times without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process in step S504 of FIG. 26 will be described in detail. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In step S601, the MPU 302 has a second start hold storage number RbN of "0" or less in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the above-mentioned winning process for the start port (see FIG. 23). It is determined whether or not it is. When the MPU 302 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less (YES), the data for the first result display unit (for the first start port 84a) of steps S602 to S606. When the setting process is executed and it is determined in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less (NO), it is for the second result display unit of steps S607 to S611 (for the second start port 84b). Execute the data setting process of.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described. In step S602, the MPU 302 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, and the first start hold stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. The value of the storage number RaN is updated. In step S603, the MPU 302 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.

In step S604, the MPU 302 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 302 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra4. Shift to area Ra3. That is, in steps S603 and S604, the shift processing of the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is executed by the FIFO (First In, First Out) method.

In step S605, the MPU 302 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 313. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b, the main display unit 93, has started the variable display at the time of digestion of the game round. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 302 has cleared the second result display unit flag, it changes to the first result display unit 93a based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a when the game round is digested. Indicates that the display should be started.

In step S606, the MPU 302 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 400, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a. It contains information for the device 400 to recognize.

The voice emission control device 400 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 95a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the voice emission control device 400 reduces the number of game balls held in the first start port 84a, that is, the number of first start hold storages stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. As RaN decreases, the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 95a is reduced.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described. In step S607, the MPU 302 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, and the second start hold stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. The value of the storage number RbN is updated. In step S608, the MPU 302 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb2 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.

In step S609, the MPU 302 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 302 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area. Shift to area Rb3. That is, in steps S608 and S609, the shift processing of the data stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is executed by the FIFO (First In First Out, FIFO) method.

In step S610, the MPU 302 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 313. In this step S610, since the MPU 302 sets the second result display unit flag, it changes to the second result display unit 93b based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 84b at the time of digesting the game times. Indicates that the display should be started.

In step S611, the MPU 302 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the pending information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control device 400, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 84b. It contains information for the device 400 to recognize. The voice emission control device 400 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 95b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the voice emission control device 400 reduces the number of reserved game balls winning in the second starting port 84b, that is, the second starting reserved storage number RbN stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. The number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 95b is reduced as the number of lamps is reduced.

As described above, in the data setting process in FIG. 27, the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is set for the digestion of the game times for the first result display unit (for the first start port 84a). ) Data setting process (S602 to S606) and the second result display unit (for the second start port 84b) that sets the hold information stored in the second result display unit reservation area Rb for digestion of game times. Data setting processing (S607 to S611) is provided. When the MPU 302 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the MPU 302 sets the data for the second result display unit without executing the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute the process. When the MPU 302 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the prize of the game ball to the second start port 84b, the MPU 302 wins the game ball to the first start port 84a. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially used for digesting the game. Set to.

<Variable disclosure processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing of step S505 of FIG. 26 will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In step S701, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 302 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode (NO), in step S702, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 20A) is displayed from the winning / failing table storage area of ROM 312. read out. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode (YES), in step S703, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 20B) is used as the winning / failing table of ROM 312. Read from the storage area.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 302 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S704. Specifically, the MPU 302 includes the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE and the pass / fail table for the low probability mode read in step S702 or the pass / fail table for the high probability mode read in step S703. The result of the winning / failing lottery (winning / failing result) is determined by comparison with. The winning / failing result is either "big hit winning", "special losing result", or "normal losing result", and the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" regardless of whether the mode is low probability mode or high probability mode. , "Special off result", and "Normal off result".

In step S705, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is "big hit winning". When the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" (YES), the processing after step S706 is executed, and when it is determined in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning" ( NO), the processing after step S712 is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" (YES), the MPU 302 determines in step S706 whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313.

Here, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313, it is shown that the first result display unit 93a based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a starts the variable display. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313 (NO), in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 21 (a)) is ROM 312. Read from the distribution table storage area of.

Further, when the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313, it indicates that the second result display unit 93b based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 84b starts the variable display. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313 (YES), in step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 21B) is ROM 312. Read from the distribution table storage area of.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 302 executes the distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 302 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S707 or step S708 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S710, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93, and the determined information. That is, the information related to the symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored in the RAM 313. Here, the MPU 302 provides information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 312. To determine. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 differently for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 302 sets a flag in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 302 identifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag, and when it specifies that it is an "unspecified low round high probability result", When the implicit small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified that it is the "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified that it is the "most advantageous result". If so, set the most favorable result flag. After that, the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S716. In the processing of each of the following steps, the MPU 302 determines the distribution result with reference to the presence / absence of the flag set in the RAM 313.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not a "big hit winning" (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S712 whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is a "special loss result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S712 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the process after step S713 is executed, and in step S712 it is determined that the hit / fail result is not a "special miss result". If (NO), the processes after step S715 are executed.

In step S713, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 302 determines and determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93. The information, that is, the information related to the symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored in the RAM 313. Here, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 312. The mode of the symbol set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the mode of the symbol set in the stop result table for the jackpot result. In step S714, the MPU 302 sets a special disengagement flag in the RAM 313. In each of the following processes, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" by referring to the presence / absence of the special miss flag set in the RAM 313.

In step S715, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 313. Here, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 312. It should be noted that the mode of the symbol set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the mode of the symbol set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 302 executes a display duration (display duration) setting process in step S716. The process of setting the display duration (display duration) will be described in detail later.

In step S717, the MPU 302 sets a variation command and a type command. The MPU 302 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). The voice emission control device 400 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302, and the process will be described in detail later.

The variable command includes information related to the display duration, but does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs. In addition, the type command includes information related to the result of success or failure and information related to the result of distribution. More specifically, the type command includes each information related to "big hit winning", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to the winning / failing result. In addition, in the type command, as information related to the distribution result, each information related to "low probability result", "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result". It is included. In the following description, the winning / failing result and the sorting result are also collectively referred to as a game result. That is, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313, and causes the main display unit 93 to start the variable display based on the determination result. Here, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313, variable display is started on the first result display unit 93a based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a at the time of digesting the game times. It shows that it is made to do.

Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 causes the first result display unit 93a to start the variable display in step S718. Further, when the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313, the second result display unit 93b starts the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 84b at the time of digesting the game times. It is shown that. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 causes the second result display unit 93b to start the variable display in step S718.

<Display duration setting process>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the display duration setting process.
In step S801, the MPU 302 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 313. Further, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the reach display occurs on the symbol display device 91. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines in step S802 whether the distribution result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result".

In step S802, when the distribution result is the “low probability result” or the “most advantageous result” (YES), the MPU 302 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure determined in step S704 of FIG. 28 is the “normal result”. Is determined. When the MPU 302 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure is a "normal result" (YES), in step S804, the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 312 and the reach random number stored in the holding ball storage area. The reach generation lottery is executed by comparing with the value of the counter C3.

In step S805, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the reach display is generated in the reach generation lottery in step S804. When the MPU 302 determines in step S805 that the reach display will occur (YES), the MPU 302 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 312 in the step S806. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S802 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" (NO), or when it is determined in step S803 that the hit / fail result is not a "normal deviation result". (NO), or when it is determined in step S805 that the reach display does not occur (NO), in step S807, the reach non-generation display duration table stored in the ROM 312 is referred to.

In step S808, the MPU 302 determines the display duration after executing the process of step S806 or step S807. Specifically, the MPU 302 is a variation type counter CS acquired from the movement type counter buffer based on the reach generation display duration table referred to in step S806 or the reach non-generation display duration table referred to in step S807. Determines the display duration corresponding to the value of. Further, the MPU 302 sets the display duration determined in step S807 to the display duration counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313.

In the present embodiment, as described with reference to steps S804 to S808 of FIG. 29, the MPU 302 has a reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 312 and a reach stored in the hold ball storage area. A lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by comparing with the value of the random number counter C3, but the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by the voice emission control device 400. It may be configured as.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of held items increases. That is, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the first start port 84a is set so as to become shorter as the number of hold items related to the first start port 84a increases. Further, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the second start port 84b is set so as to become shorter as the number of hold items related to the second start port 84b increases. If the number of reserved balls exceeds the maximum value (4) and the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b is won, the prize balls can be paid out, but the big hit lottery cannot be received. However, as in the present embodiment, as the number of reserved pieces increases, the display duration is shortened and the game times are digested faster, so that the maximum value of the number of reserved pieces is exceeded and a prize is won (the prize ball is paid out). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the player cannot receive the lottery of the jackpot), and it is possible to provide a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the display duration table for non-reach occurrence, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the display duration is set shorter than when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. That is, when the number of holdings is the same, the display duration of the high frequency support mode is set shorter than the display duration of the low frequency support mode. Further, the display duration table for reach generation and the display duration table for non-reach generation are set so that the display durations are different from each other.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table are defined. They are different from each other. Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variation command, the reach display is performed by the voice emission control device 400, which is the control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display duration. Can be determined whether or not In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

In the present embodiment, the display duration table for non-reach generation has a shorter display duration as the number of holds increases, but the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases. The relationship may be set to the opposite of that of the above, and the display duration may not change (change) depending on the number of holdings and the support mode. Further, the display duration table for reach generation and the display duration table for non-reach generation may be the same. In this case, regardless of whether or not reach has occurred, the same display duration table is referred to to determine the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the motion type counter buffer, and various counters of the RAM 313 are determined. It may be set in the display duration counter provided in the area. Further, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the winning / failing result and the sorting result.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In step S901, the MPU 302 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 302 is not in the open / close execution mode (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes of steps S902 to S910. If the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that it is in the open / close execution mode (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes of steps S911 to S914.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S902 whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 93 is completed. When it is determined in step S902 that the variation display of the main display unit 93 has not been completed (NO), the MPU 302 ends the game state transition process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display unit 93 is completed (YES), in step S903, whether or not the result of hit / fail corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. judge. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the pass / fail result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (NO), that is, when it determines that the pass / fail result is the "normal deviation result", the game state transition process is performed. finish. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode (YES), the MPU 302 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 313, and then in step S904, the hit / fail result. Is a "special deviation result" or not.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S904 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the MPU 302 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOCs provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 in step S905. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times that the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83 is opened / closed by the MPU 302 when shifting to the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S904 that the win / fail result is not a "special miss result" (NO), that is, when it determines that the win / fail result is a "big hit win", the distribution result is small in step S906. It is determined whether or not the round high probability result (“unspecified low round high probability result” or “explicit low round high probability result”).

When the MPU 302 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result (YES), in step S907, "2" is set in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result (NO), that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result". In step S908, the round counter RC is set to "15". This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 302 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the end conditions are different from each other. Specifically, as the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and an opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC. The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning opening 83a. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 83a corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of times the round game is executed.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 83a once for each round game. Further, one round game is continued until one of the following two conditions (1) and (2) is satisfied. That is, in the present embodiment, after setting the opening / closing door 83b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the opening / closing door 83b by satisfying one of the following two conditions (1) and (2). Is set to the closed state again.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 83a reaches the predetermined upper limit.

After executing any of the processes of step S905, step S907, or step S908, the MPU 302 sets the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 as a waiting time (standby period) for opening in step S909. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the game state and the winning symbol (special symbol).

In this way, when the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the timer counter T sets the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. .. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, the waiting time may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S910, the MPU 302 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game state transition process. Here, the opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode, and the MPU 302 was set in step S910 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). The opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress (YES), the MPU 302 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S911. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening in step S911 will be described in detail later.

In step S912, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S911. judge.

When it is determined in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the game state transition process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less (YES), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S913. It is determined whether or not it is as follows.

When it is determined in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the game state transition process. When the MPU 302 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 313 in step S914, and then opens / closes. Executes the migration process at the end of the mode. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game state transition process.

Next, the opening / closing process of the large winning opening in step S911 of FIG. 30 will be described in detail.
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In step S1001, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the large winning opening 83a is open. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 83a is not open (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1002. If the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1006.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 83a is not open (NO), the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" in step S1002. It is determined whether or not it is as follows. When it is determined in step S1002 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less (YES), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S1003. It is determined whether or not it is less than or equal to. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S1004. The large winning opening opening process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32.

In step S1005, the MPU 302 sets the release command. Further, the MPU 302 transmits the release command set in step S1005 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). After that, the MPU 302 finishes the large winning opening opening / closing process. The voice emission control device 400 recognizes that the opening / closing door 83b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S1006, that is, opening the large winning opening. It is determined in step S1103 or step S1106 of the process (see FIG. 32) whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed.

When it is determined in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S1007 whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 83a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 83a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the large winning opening 83a.

When it is determined in step S1007 that no prize has been generated in the large prize opening 83a (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. Further, when it is determined in step S1007 that a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 83a (YES), the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S1008.

In step S1009, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. When it is determined in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the closing execution process in step S1010. In this closing execution process, the MPU 302 sets the opening / closing door 83b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 83c.

In step S1011 the MPU 302 sets the close command. The MPU 302 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). The voice emission control device 400 recognizes that the opening / closing door 83b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1012 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1018 described later.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1012 that the hit / fail result is not the "special miss result" (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1013. In step S1013, the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC. Further, in step S1014, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 302 finishes the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is an open standby until the opening / closing door 83b is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 83b is set to the closed state again, and the opening / closing door 83b is set to the open state again. The time is specified. In the present embodiment, the open standby time is set to 1 sec, but the open standby time is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode and the progress status.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1016. In step S1016, the MPU 302 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the game state and the winning symbol (special symbol).

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S1017, the MPU 302 sets the ending command. The MPU 302 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). After that, the MPU 302 finishes the large winning opening opening / closing process. The voice emission control device 400 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1010 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1012 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC in step S1018.

In step S1019, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1019 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1015 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1019 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the above-mentioned processes after S1016.

Next, the large winning opening opening process in step S1004 of FIG. 31 will be described in detail.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In step S1101, the MPU 302 sets "8" in the winning counter PCs provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 313. In step S1102, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1102 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1103. As described above, the MPU 302 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1102 that the winning / failing result is not a "special deviation result" (NO), the distribution result is a small round high probability result ("unspecified small round high probability result" or in step S1104. It is determined whether or not the result is "explicit small round high accuracy result").

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1104 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result (YES), the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1103 described above. As described above, the MPU 302 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1104 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result (NO), the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1105. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1105, the MPU 302 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 83a in step S1106. In this open execution process, the MPU 302 sets the open / close door 83b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 83c. After that, the MPU 302 finishes the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1101 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 83a. Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1105 defines the upper limit duration from setting the opening / closing door 83b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 302 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 302 sets a long-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 110 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 110 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, the MPU 302 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 83a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC. Therefore, the upper limit duration (30 sec) of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls in the large winning opening 83a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and thus is the upper limit of eight. It is easy to make the game ball of No. 3 win the grand prize opening 83a. On the other hand, since the upper limit duration (0.17 sec) of the short-time mode is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball, it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 83a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to have about one game ball win in the large winning opening 83a.

Next, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S914 of FIG. 30 will be described in detail.
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In step S1201, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" (YES), the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 in step S1202. The MPU 302 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode as the high frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 302 clears the number-of-times limit flag stored in the RAM 313.
Here, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, the high-frequency support mode is continued until at least a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In step S1204, the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning / failing lottery mode as the high probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 302 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

At the end of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 302 sets a flag (low probability result flag, unspecified small round high probability result flag, explicit small round height) set in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result. Clear the probability result flag and the most advantageous result flag) and the special off flag. Further, in step S701 of the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 28), the MPU 302 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 313, thereby determining whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Is judged.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" (NO), the distribution result is "unspecified small round height" in step S1205. It is judged whether or not it is a "certain result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is an "unspecified low round high accuracy result" (YES), the MPU 302 determines in step S1206 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313. ..

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1203 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 313 (NO), the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 313 in the step S1207. The MPU 302 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning / failing lottery mode as the high probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 302 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not the "unspecified low round high probability result" (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S1208 whether or not the distribution result is the "low probability result". ..

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1208 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (NO), that is, when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "special deviation result", the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode ends. To finish.
Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1208 that the distribution result is a "low probability result" (YES), the MPU 302 clears the high probability mode flag in step S1209. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit" and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1210, the MPU 302 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode as the high frequency support mode. In step S1211, the MPU 302 sets "100" to the value of the game counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 313. In step S1212, the MPU 302 sets the number limit flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. After that, the MPU 302 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter, is set. Continue until digested. The MPU 302 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. The MPU 302 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the above-mentioned normal process (see FIG. 24), but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the gaming state is the current gaming state. Regardless of the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode), the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big hit" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, if the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit" and the sorting result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the sorting lottery, the game state After the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode), shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big hit" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the sorting result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result". , The game state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode). The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big hit" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes a "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is in the open / close execution mode (that is, the number of rounds) regardless of the current game state. After the end of the default mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is a low-frequency support when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. Move to mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

Next, the front door frame opening monitoring process in step S102 of FIG. 22 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the front door frame opening monitoring process.

In the front door frame opening monitoring process, first, the comparison process is executed in step S1301. In the comparison process, the detection state information (light receiving signal) stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the signal read process is compared with the determination reference value stored in the ROM 312. In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the value of the signal compared in the comparison process exceeds the determination reference value.

When the signal value is smaller than the determination reference value (NO) in step S1302, it means that the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. When the signal value does not reach the determination reference value in this way, in order to notify that the front door frame 14 has been opened with respect to the inner frame 13 in a situation where power is being supplied from an external power source. In step S1303, the normal time notification process is executed.

In the normal time notification process, a normal time notification command is set. This set normal notification command is output to the voice emission control device 400 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 23). In the voice emission control device 400, the notification sound is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the error display lamp unit 24 is turned on, and the symbol display device 91 further displays the notification. The voice emission control device 400 continues various notifications until a notification release operation such as opening / closing the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is performed (when the notification release operation is performed, a door opening notification release command is transmitted to the MPU 402. ). The voice emission control device 400 may stop the various notifications after continuing the various notifications for a predetermined notification time (notification period). As the notification time, for example, 10 sec or the like can be considered.

Further, in the normal time notification process, the normal time notification signal is output to the hall computer provided in the game hall via the external terminal plate 213. In this case, the hall computer stores identification information such as the date and time when the normal time notification signal is input from the pachinko machine 10 and the machine number of the pachinko machine 10 as a history, and the pachinko targeting the surveillance camera provided in the game hall. A process such as pointing to the machine 10 is executed.

In a situation where power is being supplied from an external power source, if the above-mentioned normal time notification process is executed at the timing when the front door frame 14 is opened, not at the timing when the front door frame 14 is closed. , It is possible to make the manager of the game hall deal with the illegal opening of the front door frame 14.

The normal time notification process is not limited to the above, and may be configured to output only one of the normal time notification command and the normal time notification signal. Further, as processing based on the output of the normal time notification command, only a part of the output of the notification sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, or the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is executed. It may be configured to be used. After executing the normal notification process in step S1303, the front door frame opening monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the signal value is equal to or greater than the determination reference value in step S1302 (YES), in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the normal time notification command has already been set.
If the normal notification command has already been set in step S1304 (YES), the notification release process is executed in step S1305.
When the signal value is equal to or greater than the determination reference value in step S1302, it means that the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, when the normal time notification command is already set in step S1304, it means that notification has been performed. In this way, when the signal value is equal to or higher than the judgment reference value and the normal time notification command is already set, the front door frame 14 becomes the inner frame 13 in a situation where power is being supplied from an external power source. On the other hand, since it means that the closing operation (notification release operation) has been performed, the notification release process is executed in step S1305.

In step S1306, the set normal time notification command is released, in other words, the flag of the normal time notification command is cleared (value is 0).
In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22), after the front door frame opening monitoring process is executed in step S102, the second monitoring device 290 in a situation where power is supplied from an external power source in step S103. As the monitoring process of the inner frame 13 via, the inner frame opening monitoring process and the opening detection of the back pack unit 15 via the back pack unit opening detector 289 are executed.

In the inner frame opening monitoring process, when the detection status information (light receiving signal) of the second monitoring device 290 grasped by the signal reading process is smaller than the determination reference value stored in the ROM 312, the above-mentioned normal time notification The process is executed and the detection status information is updated. Further, when the detection status information (light receiving signal) of the second monitoring device 290 grasped by the signal reading process is equal to or higher than the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312, the normal time notification command is already set. If the normal notification command has already been set, the notification cancellation process is performed. Since this specific processing configuration is the same as the front door frame opening monitoring processing, duplicate description will be omitted. Further, in the open detection of the back pack unit 15, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open based on the output signal (High or Low) from the back pack unit open detector 289.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 400 and display control device 500>
FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device. As shown in FIG. 35, the voice emission control device 400 includes a voice emission control board 401, an MPU 402 mounted on the voice emission control board 401, and a ROM 412 and a RAM 413 constituting the MPU 402. Here, the MPU 402 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit (RTC), a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into chips in addition to the ROM 412 and the RAM 413.

The ROM 412 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The ROM 412 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and stores various control programs and fixed value data used when executing processing according to the programs in each area. ing. The MPU 402 controls the execution of the effect based on the instruction from the main control device 300 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 412. Since the ROM 412 is chipped with the CPU and connected by an internal bus, it is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity, and specifically, its data capacity is 2 Mbytes.

The RAM 413 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and is the same. When compared with the data capacity of, the time required for reading is faster than that of ROM412. The RAM 413 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and has various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas, for example. The RAM 413 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 412 is executed. It is not essential that the ROM 412 and the RAM 413 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 402, and each may be individually chipped.

The voice emission control board 401 includes an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the voice emission control board 401 is connected to the main control device 300. Further, the input port of the voice emission control board 401 is connected to the operation button 35. The output port of the voice emission control board 401 is connected to the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, the error display lamp unit 24, the first to third hold lamp units 95a to 96, the speaker units 26A to 26C, the display control device 500, and the like. There is. The MPU 402 controls drive of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, the error indicator lamp units 24, the first to third hold lamp units 95a to 96, the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the like based on the command transmitted from the main control device 300. To execute.

Further, the MPU 402 analyzes the command transmitted from the main control device 300, determines the content of the effect in a predetermined period, and transmits the command according to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 500. A signal path provided to connect the MPU 402 and the MPU 502 is used for this command transmission. The voice emission control device 400 is electrically connected to the display control device 500 via a connector unit (connection unit) such as a harness provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

When the MPU 402 determines the content of the effect in the predetermined period, it executes the light emission control of not only the display control device 500 but also the display lamp devices 23A and 23B. In this case, in FIG. 35, it is described that the voice emission control board 401 and the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are directly connected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound emission control board 401 is displayed. A relay board may be interposed between the lamp devices 23A and 23B.

The MPU 402 executes drive control of the speaker units 26A to 26C when the content of the effect in the predetermined period is determined. The sound output LSI 403 and the common ROM 404 are used for drive control of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

The common ROM 404 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. Since the common ROM 404 is not directly connected to the MPU 402 but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 403, it is easier to increase the data capacity than the ROM 412. Specifically, the data capacity is 1 Gbyte. However, this data capacity is arbitrary and may be 500 Mbytes or 4 Gbytes.

The sound output LSI 403 includes an I / F 403a, a register 403b, a sound data processing unit 403c, a DAC 403d, and a data transfer unit 403e. The sound output LSI 403 executes control for outputting sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C according to the data transmitted from the MPU 402.

The I / F 403a is an interface for the sound output LSI 403 to communicate with the MPU 402 via a bus B1 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication. The bus B1 connected to the I / F 403a is composed of eight signal paths, and data is transmitted / received between the MPU 402 and the sound output LSI 403 via each signal path.

The register 403b has a function as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output LSI 403, and uses a memory that requires external power supply for storage holding for both reading and writing. It is configured to do. In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404.

The register 403b has a data capacity of a large number of bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time, and has a data capacity of a unit of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 10 kilobytes.

The sound data processing unit 403c converts the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the MPU 402 and stored in the register 403b so that they can be used for sound output, and from the contents of the conversion result and the common ROM 404. It has a function to create digital music sound data by using the read sound data. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, timbre, etc. of the sounds at a predetermined timing. There is.

Further, the sound data processing unit 403c has a function of a plurality of sounding channels so as to be able to output a plurality of different sounds at the same time, and synthesizes digital musical sound data created for each sounding channel to obtain digitally synthesized musical sound data. Has the function of creating. It should be noted that the plurality of sounding channels have the functions of 16 channels, but the number of channels is arbitrary. Further, by using the virtual track, a number of tracks (for example, 64 tracks) larger than the actual number of sounding channels can be used, but the virtual track may not be used.

The DAC403d is a digital / analog converter and includes an amplifier circuit for analog signals. The DAC 403d has a function of amplifying an analog audio signal obtained by converting digital musical tone data or digital synthetic musical tone data created by the sound data processing unit 403c into an analog signal and then outputting it to the speaker units 26A to 26C.

The data transfer unit 403e is connected to the common ROM 404 via a bus B2 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication, and has a function of transferring the data read from the common ROM 404 to the register 403b. ing. The bus B2 provided between the data transfer unit 403e and the common ROM 404 is composed of 16 signal paths, and the number of the signal paths is larger than that of the bus B1 between the MPU 402 and the I / F 403a. It is a number. The data communication speed between the data transfer unit 403e and the common ROM 404 is faster than the data communication speed between the MPU 402 and the I / F 403a. The data transfer unit 403e reads the sound data necessary for sound output from the common ROM 404 and stores it in the register 403b based on the data converted from the sequence data and the parameter data by the sound data processing unit 403c.

Here, the data transfer unit 403e not only has a function of transferring the sound data required by the sound data processing unit 403c to the register 403b, but also reads the data required by the MPU 402 from the common ROM 404 and stores it in the register 403b. It has a function of transferring the data stored in the register 403b to the MPU 402. The configuration related to data transfer will be described below.

<Data structure of ROM412 and common ROM404>
First, the data structures of the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the ROM 412, and FIG. 36B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the common ROM 404.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the ROM 412 contains the program and processing data (1), the program and processing data (2), and the like for executing the processing for effect control and abnormality notification by the MPU 402. ..., The program and processing data (P) are stored in advance. These programs and processing data include a data table used to execute each effect, sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output LSI 403. All the programs and processing data necessary for executing the effect control processing in the MPU 402 are stored in the ROM 412. The program and processing data for executing the abnormality notification process are used in the program and processing data used in the power recovery notification process of FIG. 25 and in the normal time notification process of FIG. 34. It is different from the program and processing data. Therefore, the sound data described later is reproduced in different modes between the power recovery notification process and the normal notification process.

The ROM 412 contains not only program and processing data (1), program and processing data (2), ..., Program and processing data (P), but also indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and an error indicator lamp unit 24. The light emission data (1), the light emission data (2), ..., And the light emission data (Q) used for controlling the light emission of the above are stored in advance. In each of these light emission data, information on the type of light emitting unit to be lit, the lighting period, and the lighting order of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is set in a predetermined effect period, and information on these light emission patterns is set. The content is different depending on the type of each light emission data. Each light emission data stored in the ROM 412 has a different target light emission control period and a different light emission pattern content.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36B, the common ROM 404 has sound data (1), sound data (2), ..., Which are used to output a predetermined sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C. , Sound data (S) is stored in advance. Each of these sound data includes waveform data obtained by sampling a melody or sound actually produced by an instrument corresponding to various tones, and a melody with lyrics is produced by an instrument corresponding to various tones. In addition to the melody that has been made, the waveform data obtained by sampling the sound is included. All the sound data is stored in the common ROM 404. The sound data stored in the common ROM 404 includes music (BGM) used in the effects A to D of FIG. 41, which will be described later, and sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the voice, as well as FIG. Abnormal notification used in the notification process for power recovery of 25 and the notification process for normal time in FIG. 34 (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, even during normal time. For example, sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to "the door is open!", "The door is closed!" When returning from the door opening, etc., first mode M1 to FIG. 43 Sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the music and voice used in the production of the fifth mode M5, and sound data corresponding to the music and voice used in the production MA to MC of the fourth mode of FIG. 49 (music data and voice data). Music data and voice data) etc. are included.

The sound data is digital signal data obtained by converting an analog signal into a pulse train at a predetermined sampling frequency and a predetermined number of quantization signals by pulse code modulation (PCM). Specifically, the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz and the number of quantization signals is 16 bits. Therefore, the waveform data of the sound composed of the analog signal for 1 sec has a data amount of 1 × 44.1 k × 16 bits. Incidentally, the sampling period T1 in this case is 22.7 μsec.

The sound data is set to be readable from the common ROM 404 for each pulse code-modulated data for one pulse, that is, for each sample of data. That is, the address is set for each sample of data, and the data transfer unit 403e of the sound output LSI 403 can transfer data from the common ROM 404 in units of one sample of data.

The sampling frequency is not limited to 44.1 kHz as long as good sampling can be achieved, and may be, for example, 32 kHz, 48 kHz, or 96 kHz. Further, the number of quantization signals is not limited to 16 bits, and the number of bits may be other than 16 bits as long as good quantization can be realized.

Further, in the common ROM 404, not only sound data (1), sound data (2), ... sound data (S), but also light emission data (Q + 1), light emission data (Q + 2), ..., Light emission data (R) is stored in advance. Here, the light emitting data stored in the common ROM 404 includes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp unit 24 used in the power recovery notification process of FIG. 25 and the normal time notification process of FIG. 34. It contains luminescence data used to control the luminescence of. Each of these light emission data has a different target light emission control period and a different light emission pattern content.

Here, the light emission patterns of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are different in the power recovery notification process (step S416) of FIG. 25 and the normal time notification process (step S1303) of FIG. 34. Specifically, in the power recovery notification process, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 emit light, whereas in the normal time notification process, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 are emitted. The light emission data is specified so that the light is not emitted. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the normal time notification process, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is open, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off so as not to emit light. The light emission data is specified as follows.

In this embodiment, by using different light emitting data in the power recovery notification process of FIG. 25 and the normal time notification process of FIG. 34, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 can be used in the normal time notification process. The indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured so as not to emit light when the lamps are open, but the same light emitting data is used in the power recovery notification process of FIG. 25 and the normal time notification process of FIG. 34. In the normal time notification process, a light bulb in which light emitting elements such as LEDs (light emitting diodes), filaments, and discharge elements of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are enclosed in a glass shell so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body such as the above may be stopped. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is bothered by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced. Of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is configured so as not to emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened. You may. In this case as well, the light emission data of the normal notification process may be specified so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the light emission data of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 may be specified. The supply of light-emitting power to a light-emitting body such as a light bulb in which a light-emitting element such as an LED (light-emitting diode), filament, or discharge element of the display lamp device on the open side is enclosed in a glass bulb may be stopped.

The light emission data used in the MPU 402 as described above is stored not only in the ROM 412 directly connected to the MPU 402 via the bus, but also in the common ROM 404 connected to the sound output LSI 403. In other words, the light emission data is distributed and stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404.

By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 404 in this way, it is possible to increase the data capacity of the light emission data without increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 412. In particular, as described above, the ROM 412 is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity due to being connected via the internal bus in the MPU 402, and attempts to increase the data capacity are attempted. Then, it becomes necessary to expand the internal bus width, and it is not easy to deal with it. On the other hand, as described above, the common ROM 404 is not directly connected to the MPU 402, but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 403, thereby increasing its data capacity. That is relatively easy. Then, by storing the light emission data in the common ROM 404, it is possible to cope well with the increase in the data capacity of the light emission data.

Further, basically, when setting data in the ROM, about several% (for example, about 2%) of the total data capacity is blank (unused area). In this case, for example, assuming that the data capacity of the common ROM 404 is 1 Gbyte, the blank is 20 Mbytes. This data capacity is larger than the data capacity of the ROM 412, which is 2 Mbytes. According to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data by using such a blank.

Furthermore, since the sound data corresponds to the melody and voice for a predetermined period, the data capacity for performing a series of outputs is relatively large. Then, the data capacity of the sound data becomes difficult to be flexible, and from this point as well, a blank is likely to occur in the common ROM 404. Then, according to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data by using such a blank.

The light emission data stored in the common ROM 404 is used by the MPU 402, and when it becomes necessary to use the MPU 402, it is commonly used by the sound output LSI 403 in response to a transfer instruction from the MPU 402. The light emission data from the ROM 404 is read out, and the read light emission data is transferred to the MPU 402. Then, in this transfer, the bus B1 that connects the MPU 402 and the sound output LSI 403 is used. That is, the light emission data distributed and stored in the common ROM 404 is transferred to the MPU 402 by using the signal path for data transfer from the MPU 402 to the sound output LSI 403 or the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402. As a result, for example, as compared with a configuration in which a ROM different from the ROM 412 is externally attached to the MPU 402 and the surplus light emission data is stored in the ROM, the surplus light emission data is obtained without increasing the number of signal paths. Can be memorized.

Of the program and processing data used in the MPU 402 and the light emission data, all of the program and processing data are stored in the ROM 412, and a part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 404. By doing so, it becomes possible to satisfactorily distribute the data. That is, if the program and processing data are distributed to the common ROM 404, the program and processing data for transferring the program and processing data to the RAM 413 of the MPU 402 are separately required, which complicates the program design. It will be something like that. On the other hand, the light emission data is a method in which the address where the light emission data is originally stored is grasped, the light emission data is read out and transferred based on the address, and the light emission data is developed so that it can be used. Therefore, even if the light emission data is distributed, the program design is unlikely to be complicated.

Further, when the effect system command is transmitted from the main control device 300, the MPU 402 first executes a predetermined process corresponding to the command by using a program, and uses the light emission data in the execution process of the predetermined process. Then, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are controlled. That is, the program needs to be read suddenly in response to the reception of the command from the main control device 300, and the timing of reading is highly arbitrary, whereas the light emission data is used in the execution process of a predetermined process. The arbitrary reading timing is low. Further, since the light emitting data is used on the premise of executing a predetermined process using the program, the priority of reading is higher in the program, and if the read of the program is delayed, the process waits. Under such circumstances, the program is stored in the ROM 412, and at least a part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 404, so that the program can be independently read by the MPU 402 regardless of the state of the sound output LSI 403. It is possible to satisfactorily increase the amount of data for luminescence data, which tends to have a larger amount of data than the program.

Furthermore, instead of storing all of the light emission data in the common ROM 404, a part of the light emission data is stored in the ROM 412 and the rest is stored in the common ROM 404. Therefore, the data capacity of the common ROM 404 can be increased. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the excessive increase.

<Structure of register 403b of sound output LSI 403>
Next, refer to FIG. 37 for the configuration of the register 403b used for instructing the sound output LSI 403 from the MPU 402 to output sound and transferring the sound data stored in the common ROM 404 from the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402. I will explain while. FIG. 37 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the register 403b.

As shown in FIG. 37, the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403 is based on the areas 9523a to 9523e where data is set when the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to output sound, and the data transfer instruction from the MPU 402. Buffers 9524a to 9524e for temporarily storing and holding the data read from the common ROM 404, an area 9525 for setting data when issuing a data transfer instruction to the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403. Areas 9526 for recognizing the internal state in the MPU 402 are provided separately.

More specifically, the areas 9523a to 9526 described above are the area 9523a for the first parameter, the area 9523b for the second parameter, and the area 9523c for the third parameter as areas for which data is set when the sound output instruction is given. It also has a plurality of parameters 9523a to 9523d such as an area 9523d for the fourth parameter. In addition, an area 9523e for sequence data is provided.

In the areas 9523a to 9523d for each parameter, parameter data necessary for outputting a melody or a sound effect is stored, and parameter data necessary for outputting voice is stored. By providing a plurality of parameter areas 9523a to 9523d in this way, it is possible to simultaneously pronounce a plurality of sounds. Further, the sequence data already described is stored in the sequence data area 9523e.

By the way, since the sound output LSI 403 has a function for 16 channels, parameter data for a plurality of (specifically, 4) channels are stored in the area for one parameter. Further, in the configuration using the virtual track, a larger number of parameters may be stored in the area for one parameter.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is provided as an area where data is set when a data transfer instruction is given from the MPU 402 to the sound output LSI 403. In the transfer instruction area 9525, the address data of the light emission data required for the MPU 402 is stored, and the data for giving the transfer instruction of the light emission data read from the common ROM 404 to the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402 is stored. ..

A plurality of external read buffers 9524a to 9524e are provided as areas for temporarily storing and holding the data read from the common ROM 404 based on the data transfer instruction from the MPU 402. The light emission data required for the MPU 402 is temporarily stored in the buffers 9524a to 9524e for external reading, and is transferred to the MPU 402 when a predetermined reading timing is reached.

A flag area 9526 is provided as an area for recognizing the internal state of the sound output LSI 403 in the MPU 402. As the flag area 9526, for example, a read completion flag is provided, and when the transfer of the corresponding data from the common ROM 404 to the external read buffers 9524a to 9524e is completed in response to the data transfer instruction from the MPU 402. In addition, "1" is stored in the read completion flag, and the fact is grasped by the MPU 402.

The areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 9524e are all accessible from the MPU 402, but the areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 9524e are simultaneously accessed. Instead, the accessible target can be switched. That is, the number of areas that can be accessed simultaneously in the MPU 402 corresponds to the number of the first signal paths to the eighth signal paths (eight in the present embodiment) constituting the bus B1 between the MPU 402 and the sound output LSI 403. There is.

Specifically, as the first area 9521a corresponding to the first signal path constituting the bus B1, the area 9523a for the first parameter and the buffer 9524a for external reading of 1 are assigned to form the bus B1. As the second area 9521b corresponding to the second signal path, the area 9523b for the second parameter and the buffer 9524b for external reading of 1 are assigned, and the third area corresponding to the third signal path constituting the bus B1 is assigned. Area 9523c for the third parameter and buffer 9524c for external reading of 1 are assigned as 9521c, and area 9523d for the fourth parameter is assigned as the fourth area 9521d corresponding to the fourth signal path constituting the bus B1. And 1 buffer 9524d for external reading is allocated. Further, as the fifth area 9521e corresponding to the fifth signal path constituting the bus B1, the area 9523e for sequence data and the buffer 9524e for external reading of 1 are allocated.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is assigned as an area corresponding to the sixth signal path constituting the bus B1, and a flag area 9526 is assigned as an area corresponding to the seventh signal path constituting the bus B1. ..

Selectors 9522a to 9522e are provided for the register 403b corresponding to each of the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e, and the selectors 9522a to 9522e use the MPU 402 as the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e. The accessible area can be switched. Then, this switching is performed through binary switching to the selector area 9527 provided in the register 403b corresponding to the eighth signal path constituting the bus B1.

Specifically, when the information in the selector area 9527 is "0", which is the initial value, the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e are controlled by sound output by setting the access target area by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. It corresponds to the areas 9523a to 9523e. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value, the MPU 402 can access the areas 9523a to 9523d for each parameter and the area 9523e for the sequence data, and sounds to the sound output LSI 403. It becomes possible to give the output instruction of. That is, the sound output LSI 403 is in the first interference state with the MPU 402.

When the information of the selector area 9527 is "1" which is the switching execution value, the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e are the buffers for external reading 9524a depending on the setting of the access target area by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. It corresponds to ~ 9524e. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the switching execution value, the MPU 402 can access the buffers 9524a to 9524e for external reading, and can read the data for which the transfer instruction has been given. It becomes. That is, the sound output LSI 403 is in a second interference state with the MPU 402.

On the other hand, the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527 are not subject to switching by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. Therefore, the MPU 402 can access the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527 regardless of the interference state of the sound output LSI 403.

The display control device 500 includes a display control board 501, an MPU 502, a program ROM 512 and a work RAM 513 constituting the MPU 502, a video display processor (VDP) 505, a character ROM 506, and a video RAM 507. Here, the MPU 502 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 512 and the work RAM 513. The MPU 502, VDP 505, character ROM 506, and video RAM 507 are mounted on the display control board 501.

The MPU 502 controls the VDP 505 based on a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400. Specifically, the MPU 502 controls the VDP 505 by analyzing a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 and generating a command for the VDP 505 based on the analysis result.

The program ROM 512 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile memory that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information, and cannot be written. It is a semiconductor element. This program ROM 512 has various areas such as various data storage areas. These areas will be described in detail later.

The work RAM 513 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 512, and is volatile that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a memory. The work RAM 513 has various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas. These areas will be described in detail later. In the present embodiment, a volatile memory such as DRAM or SRAM is used as the work RAM 513, but a non-volatile memory such as MRAM may be used.

The VDP505 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 91. Since the VDP505 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 505 reads image data from the character ROM 506 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 502, and stores the image data in the video RAM 507.

The character ROM 506 stores in advance various image data (image information) including sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 91, background data, and moving image data, and functions as an image data library. The character ROM 506 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM 507 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 91, and the display content of the symbol display device 91 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 507.

Returning to the explanation of the voice emission control device 400, the MPU 402 recognizes that it is necessary to start the effect for the game round by receiving the variable command transmitted from the main control device 300, and the effect for the game round. Execute the start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 300, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and executes the effect end process for the game round. Further, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 300, it is recognized that the jackpot effect needs to be started or progressed, and the jackpot effect process is executed. Further, by receiving the demo display command transmitted from the main control device 300, it is recognized that the demo display needs to be started, and the demo display process is executed. The command reception from the main control device 300 in the MPU 402 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 300, and may be a configuration in which the command relayed by the relay board is received. ..

In the game rounding effect start processing, based on both the variable command and the type command, the variable display time grasping process for grasping the variable display time (display duration) of the corresponding game round and the presence / absence of reach display are grasped. The reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and the jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. In addition, based on the grasp results in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the display effect for determining the type of display effect to be performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 in this game round. In addition to executing the grasping process, the symbol type grasping process for determining the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 is executed in this game. Then, based on the results of each of these grasping processes, the display control device 500 displays a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designation command including information on the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. Send to.

Further, in the game rounding effect start process, in addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for whether or not to display a notice is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the notice display is also executed. Then, if the notice display is won, a notice command including information on the type of the notice display is transmitted to the display control device 500. Further, in the game round effect start processing, based on each of the above processing results, the game round light emission data (including sequence data and parameter data) and the game round sound data (including sequence data and parameter data). Is read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and the light emitting mode by the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the output mode from the speaker units 26A to 26C are defined.

In the game round production end process, the light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the audio output control of the speaker units 26A to 26C in the current game round are terminated. Further, in the game rotation effect end process, an end command including information for ending the game rotation effect is transmitted to the display control device 500. In the jackpot production process, based on the various commands for jackpot production received, the production mode at the opening, each round, between each round, and at the ending is grasped, and the jackpot production corresponding to the grasped result is grasped. Command is transmitted to the display control device 500. Further, based on the grasping result, the display data for the jackpot effect, the sequence data for the jackpot effect, the parameter data and the sound data, and the light emission data are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and the display lamp devices 23A and 23B during the jackpot effect are read. The mode of light emission and the mode of sound output from the speaker units 26A to 26C are defined.

In the demo display process, the demo display effect mode is grasped based on the received demo display command, and the demo display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 500. Further, based on the grasping result, the light emission data for demo display (including sequence data and parameter data) and the sound data for demo display (including sequence data and parameter data) are read from ROM 412 and common ROM 404. The light emitting mode of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound output mode from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the demo display are defined. The process executed by the MPU 402 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 300 includes a process for controlling light emission of various lamp units 95 to 97 in addition to the above process.

Further, the MPU 402 recognizes that the operation button 35 has been operated by receiving the operation signal transmitted from the operation button 35 based on the operation of the operation unit of the operation button 35, and performs the operation correspondence process. Execute. In addition, even when the operated state is released, it is recognized by the falling edge of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding process is executed. In the operation correspondence process, the operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and the operation generation command including the information that the operation button 35 is operated and the information of the operation mode is transmitted to the display control device 500. Further, in the operation correspondence process, when the operation of the operation unit is canceled (cancelled), the operation release command is transmitted to the display control device 500. Further, in the operation correspondence process, in addition to the transmission of the above command, the light emission mode of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound output mode from the speaker units 26A to 26C are made to correspond to the operation of the operation button 35. Prescribe.

Next, the connection relationship between the DAC 403d included in the sound output LSI and the speaker units 26A to 26C will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC and the speaker unit included in the sound output LSI.
As shown in FIG. 38, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from a sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and an amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c that amplify the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. .. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker unit 26A, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2b is output to the speaker unit 26B, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2c is the speaker. It is output to unit 26C.
That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can independently control the magnitude of the volume output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 35, the program and processing data for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 are different from the power recovery notification process and the normal notification process. It's different. Specifically, the parameter data that defines the playback volume in each of the speaker units 26A to 26C included in the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c, is at least different. More specifically, the notification process for power recovery is different from the notification process for normal operation. Specifically, the parameter data that defines the playback volume in each of the speaker units 26A to 26C included in the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c, is at least different.

More specifically, in the power recovery notification process, the parameter data is provided so that the playback volume in each of the speaker units 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c are the same. On the other hand, in the normal time notification process, the reproduction volume in the speaker unit 26A included in the pachinko machine 10 is amplified so as to be smaller than the reproduction volume in the other speaker units 26B and 26C. The parameter data is defined so that the amplification factor of the circuit 403d2a is smaller than the amplification factor of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is open, the playback volume in the speaker unit 26A is set to be lower than that in the other speaker units 26B and 26C. ing. In the present invention, "reducing the reproduction volume" includes a mode in which the reproduction volume is zero or substantially zero.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 reduces the playback volume of the speaker units 26A among the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, so that the pachinko machine 10 can play a game in the adjacent seat. The risk that the playing player will be annoyed by the notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the game machine being played from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is a speaker arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame body (inner frame 13 or front door frame 14), in other words, a side closer to the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened. The playback volume of unit 26A is reduced. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress that the music and voice output from the game machine being played are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.
Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a speaker unit 26B and a speaker arranged on the support side of the frame body (inner frame 13 or front door frame 14), in other words, on the far side for the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened. Do not reduce the playback volume of unit 26C. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player sitting next to the seat will be annoyed by the notification sound, and at the same time, reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee will miss the abnormality notification.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device. The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 402 executes the timer interrupt process of FIG. 39 periodically (for example, in a 2 msec cycle).

In step S1401, the MPU 402 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 402 receives a command from the MPU 302, the MPU 402 stores the received command in the RAM 413. Specifically, the RAM 413 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 302, and the MPU 402 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 302. The MPU 402 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

For example, the MPU 302 is a production control that includes basic information necessary for the game, such as the result of the jackpot lottery (the lottery result of jackpot or loss, the jackpot type if it is a jackpot), the number of balls on hold, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. A command (type command, variation pattern command, decoration drawing designation command) is transmitted, and the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 receives this. Further, the MPU 302 transmits an effect control command (effect stop command) instructing the effect stop after a predetermined time (special symbol fluctuation time) has elapsed, and the MPU 402 receives this. Further, regarding the information for designating the game state, the MPU 302 transmits an effect control command (game state designation command or jackpot middle command) including the information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the transition of the game state occurs). Then, the MPU 402 receives this. As a result, the current gaming state is grasped by the MPU 402, in other words, the voice emission control device 400, and the mode is controlled to shift to a predetermined effect mode.

In step S1402, the MPU 402 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300. In the effect determination process, the MPU 402 executes an effect for the game round, an effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In step S1403, the MPU 402 executes the demo display execution process based on the command received from the MPU 302. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 402 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting the demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. The effect determination process in step S1402 will be described in detail later.

In step S1404, the MPU 402 controls the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the first to third holding lamp units 95a to 96 based on the contents of the effect determination process of step S1402 and the demo display execution process of step S1403. Executes the light emission control process of. In step S1405, the MPU 402 executes a voice control process for voice control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the contents of the effect determination process of step S1402 and the demo display execution process of step S1403.

In step S1406, the MPU 402 is based on the contents of the power recovery notification process (step S416) of the main process (see FIG. 25) and the normal time notification process (step S1303) of the front door frame opening monitoring process (FIG. 34). Then, an abnormality notification process is performed. The details of this abnormality notification process will be described later.
After that, the MPU 402 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process. The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like.

In step S1501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1501 that each command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1509. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that each command has been received in step S1501 (YES), the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" based on the content of the type command in step S1502. It is determined whether or not it is.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1502 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" (YES), the MPU 402 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S1503. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the stop symbol effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "1.1.1" or "2.2.2") is determined and the game result is determined to be "low probability result", the stop symbol effective line Information on a combination of symbols (for example, "2.2.2") having the same even number as the stop result to be finally displayed on L is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1502 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" (NO), in step S1504, the game result is "normally out of order" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not it is a "result". When the MPU 402 determines in step S1504 that the game result is not the "normal deviation result" (NO), that is, the game result is the "special deviation result", the "unspecified small round high probability result", and the "explicit small round height". If it is determined to be one of the "confirmed results", the common symbol determination process is executed in step S1505. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result for finally displaying a stop on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 402 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out-of-order result" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1504 that the game result is a "normal deviation result" (YES), the MPU 402 executes a symbol determination process for normal deviation in step S1506. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 402 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variable command.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the MPU 402 determines the information related to the combination of the reach display symbols as the stop display that is finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 402 determines the information related to the combination of symbols different from the combination of the above-mentioned symbols as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 402 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from the combination of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S1503, step S1505, or step S1506, the MPU 402 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1507. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 402 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the data stored in advance in the ROM 412. Specifically, the MPU 402 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. Further, the MPU 402 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and voice control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1508, the MPU 402 includes a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S1503, step S1505, or step S1506, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S1507. Is transmitted to the display control device 500. Based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 creates a data table for executing the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 91 from various data storage areas of the program ROM 512. read out. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the effect for the game round based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400, and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 402 on the stop symbol effective line L. Finally stop display.

After executing the process of step S1508, or when it is determined in step S1501 that the change command and the type command have not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1509. In step S1509, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1509 that the opening command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1513. Further, when it is determined in step S1509 that the MPU 402 has received the opening command (YES), the MPU 402 determines the type of the game result based on the content of the opening command in step S1510.

In step S1511, the MPU 402 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the game result determined in step S1510. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1510 that the game result is a "special deviation result" or a "non-explicit small round high accuracy result", the MPU 402 acts as an effect for the open / close execution mode. Select production A.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 402 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 402 selects the effect C as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 402 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode. The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, in step S1511, the MPU 402 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and voice control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

In step S1512, the MPU 402 transmits a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S1511 to the display control device 500. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads from the program ROM 512 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 91 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 402. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

When the MPU 402 determines that the opening command has not been received after executing the process of step S1512 or in step S1509 (NO), the effect of causing the player to select the mode effect after the jackpot game ends in step S1513. It is determined whether or not to generate the type selection process, and the effect type selection process is executed according to the determination result. This effect type selection process will be described in detail later.

In step S1514, the MPU 402 executes the effect transition process. In the effect transition process, the MPU 402 performs a process of shifting to the mode effect after the jackpot game selected in step S1513 is completed. The details of the effect transition process in step S1514 will be described later.

In step S1515, the MPU 402 performs other processing. In other processes, the MPU 402 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode and the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302. .. After that, the MPU 402 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction. As shown in FIG. 41, the pachinko machine 10 has the winning / failing results of the “big hit winning” and the “special losing result”, the “unspecified small round high probability result”, and the “explicit” as the game results excluding the “normal loss result”. It has "small round high probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" distribution result.

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 41, the "special loss result" is a game result selected when the "big hit winning" is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure). Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The content such as the game state is arbitrary.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the "special loss result" does not shift to the winning / failing lottery mode. In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 2 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode. Will be done. In addition, in the "unspecified small round high probability result", the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. As described above, the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" are different in the type of opening / closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode. doing.

Further, in the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect A. This effect A includes an effect for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device in the open / close execution mode, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode. It is composed as a series of productions. In addition, the support mode does not shift in the "special off result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result". Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the symbol display device 91 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is the "special deviation result" or the "unspecified small round high probability result" by checking the stop result and the effect A. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in "unspecified small round high probability result" and the mode shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 91 will draw a winning / failing lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The mode is disguised as if it has not changed. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode. To. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B. This effect B includes an effect for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode, as a series of effects. It is configured. In addition, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the symbol display device 91 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is 15 in a long time mode. Executed times. Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the open / close execution mode. The production of is production C. This effect C includes an effect for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode, as a series of effects. It is configured.

Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. This effect D includes an effect for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode, as a series of effects. It is configured.

In this embodiment, the production time of each opening effect is the same. Further, in the present embodiment, the production time of each ending effect is the same. However, the production time of the opening effect and the production time of the ending effect are arbitrary, and the production time of the opening effect and the production of the ending effect may be different. Further, the production time may be different for each game result, that is, for each opening effect, or the production time may be different only for a part of the opening effects. Further, the production time may be different for each game result, that is, for each ending effect, or the production time may be different only for a part of the ending effects.

<Abnormality notification processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormality notifications will be omitted.

In step S1601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. If it is determined in step S1601 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1604. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1601 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S1602. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 provides a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S1603, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in a state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed). That is, since the front door frame 14 is not in a state of being opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat feels annoyed with the abnormality notification. Therefore, in the program for notification at the time of power recovery and the processing data, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open is the same or substantially the same, in other words, the amplifier circuits 403d2a to The parameters are specified so that the amplification factors of 403d2c are the same or substantially the same.

In step S1604, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the normal time notification commands in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 are stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1604 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1609 described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S1604 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S1605. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S1606, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. In this normal time notification program and processing data, the playback volume of the speaker unit 26A when notifying an abnormality that the door is open is set to be lower than the playback volume of the other speaker units 26B and 26C. In other words, the parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is smaller than the amplification factor of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. Further, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S1607, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM playback is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM playback when the door opening notification is released. When restarting the playback of the BGM when the door opening notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts the playback of the BGM from the address, thereby restarting the playback from the position where the BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that no sound is output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S1608, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S1603 or step S1606. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data that started reading in step S1603 or step S1606 and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is the speaker unit 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from ~ 26C. As a result, an abnormality notification (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, and "The door is open!" Is heard from the speaker units 26A to 26C. And the output of the warning sound) is started. Further, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S1603 or step S1606. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S1609, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit release command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the back pack unit release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1609 that the back pack unit release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1611. If the MPU 402 determines in step S1609 that it has received the back pack unit release command (YES), in step S1610, the MPU 402 will notify the abnormality output from the speaker units 26A to 26C (“The door is open”. Instruct the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the playback volume (output of voice and warning sound such as "Open!"). Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce the reproduction volume such as the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, the control for reducing the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification or the like output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S1610 may be controlled so as to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the speakers. Only the playback volume of the specific speaker unit 26A among the units 26A to 26C, for example, the speaker unit 26A closest to the ear of the player playing in the left adjacent seat when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened is reduced. It may be controlled to. In step S1610, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be reduced, the sound output LSI 403 opens the back pack unit 15 with a parameter that defines the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. By updating to the parameter of the case and reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. When controlling so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a of the speaker unit 26A. Control to do.

In step S1611, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the door opening notification release command transmitted from the MPU 302 to release the door opening notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door opening notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1611 that the door opening notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S1612. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1611 that the door opening notification release command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1612.
In step 1612, the MPU 402 transmits a door opening notification release command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S1613, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door opening notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S1613, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads and reproduces the voice data “door closed!” From the common ROM 404. As a result, the voice "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S1614, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S1615, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S1607. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S1607, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM from the address. Playback resumes from the position. Further, when the BGM is muted in step S1607, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S1607, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the playback is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. The process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value may be performed. In this case, in step S1608, when the sound data read out in step S1603 or step S1606 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or the warning sound is processed so as to gradually increase to a predetermined value. You may. Further, in step S1607, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the playback is continued without stopping the BGM, the playback of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S1613. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S1615, when the playback of the BGM is restarted, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. With this configuration, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and it is possible to return without causing a sense of discomfort due to switching to BGM.

Further, in the above description, in step S1609, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command is received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command is received (YES), the process of step S1610 is executed. Therefore, the playback volume of the warning sound and the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must open the back pack unit 15 after opening the inner frame 13, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15, so that the inner frame 13 is opened. There is a high possibility that the back pack unit 15 will be opened for maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal profits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside. Since it takes time to perform this, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has received the back pack unit release command, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is open. In this case, the warning sound and the like are reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is opened not for maintenance but for fraud. In addition, the processing of steps S1609 and S1610 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

<Game flow>
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 10. When the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the game is started from the first mode M1. The "first mode" (normal mode) is a mode in which the winning / losing lottery mode is a low-probability mode and there is no support mode in the gaming state. In the first mode M1, by inserting the game ball into the first start port 84a, the special figure 1 starts to fluctuate and the game progresses.

If the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the second mode M2 (takeoff mode). The "second mode" is a mode in which the winning / losing lottery mode is a high-probability mode and there is no support mode in the game state. The second mode M2 is a mode in which the next big hit is guaranteed, and the high probability mode continues until the next big hit.

Further, if the "explicit small round high accuracy result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the third mode M3 (flight mode). The "third mode" is a mode in which the winning / losing lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a gaming state with no limit on the number of times. The third mode M3 is a mode in which the next big hit is promised, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big hit.

Further, if the "most advantageous result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). The "fourth mode" is a mode in which the winning / losing lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a gaming state with no limit on the number of times. The fourth mode M4 is a mode in which the next big hit is promised, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big hit. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of types of effects MA to MC (three types in the present embodiment) having different effects as the effects of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

In the present embodiment, during the production of the opening / closing execution mode of the "most advantageous result", more specifically, during the round game, the effect type selection effect for selecting the effect type in the fourth mode M4 is executed, and the fourth mode An image for selecting the effect of M4 is displayed on the display screen G. When the player operates the operation button 35 and selects a favorite effect from the effects MA to MC displayed on the display screen G, the effect in the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the game of the "most advantageous result" is selected. It will be a directed production. In the fourth mode M4, since the next big hit is promised, the fourth mode M4 continues until the next big hit.

Further, if the "low probability result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the fifth mode M5 (revenge mode). The "fifth mode" is a game state mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode up to a limit of 100 times. In the 5th mode M5, the next jackpot is not guaranteed, and if the jackpot is won again by the limit of 100 times in the support mode, the revenge will be successful, but by the limit of 100 times in the support mode. If the jackpot is not won again, the revenge fails, the high frequency support ends, and the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the first mode M1 which has a low probability mode and no support mode.

The game flow shown in FIG. 43 shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all the game flows of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. For example, in the present embodiment, the mode shift is not performed for the special deviation result (small hit result), but as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the "special deviation result (small hit result)". The "special loss result" does not trigger the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode, but it does trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it may be configured to shift to the mode when the "special loss result" is won.

<Example of production image>
Next, the effect image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with an example. When the jackpot internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by the MPU 302 of the main control device 300, and the fluctuation display is performed in the main display unit 93. As described above, the main display unit 93 The display area of is set to be extremely small, and it is difficult for a player who is paying attention to various effects executed by the symbol display device 91 to easily recognize each information in the lit state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIG. 3, a variable display effect using a decorative figure, which is an effect pattern, is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91. Note that the background image is not shown in FIG. 44 described below.

<Before fluctuation display>
FIG. 44 (A): In the state before the special figure 1 starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large column of decorative figures, which is an effect pattern, is displayed in the screen of the display screen G. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the decorative drawings of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are also in a state of being stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Start of variable display production>
FIG. 44 (B): In synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the fluctuation display effect is started by scrolling the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen of the display screen G. That is, in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, each decorative figure of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction in the display screen of the display screen G, so that the variable display effect is produced. To be started. In FIG. 44, the variation display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Will be done.

The background image in this case is, for example, a representation of a landscape such as an airfield. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, the "first mode". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the "first mode" is a gaming state (normal mode) in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode. The pachinko machine 10 is also provided with various effect modes, and different background images are prepared for each effect mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal difference between the "win / fail lottery mode" and the "support mode". Although not particularly shown in FIG. 44, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a specific character, item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

<Stop display of symbol string Z1>
FIG. 44 (C): When a predetermined time (for example, about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the symbol sequence Z1 first stops the fluctuation display. In this example, it means that the decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Stop display of symbol string Z3>
FIG. 44 (D): Following the symbol string Z1, the symbol string Z3 stops the variable display. In this example, it means that the decorative figure representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear from the appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "slip pattern" is, for example, once the decorative figure representing the number "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed by sliding one symbol string. It is to develop into reach by. Alternatively, once the decorative drawing representing the number "9" is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative drawing slides in the opposite direction by one symbol and the decorative drawing representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed, thereby reaching the reach. Evolving patterns are also possible. In addition, after a temporary stop display of an effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is displayed, a character appears on the screen and the variable display of the symbol string Z3 is restarted. A pattern is also conceivable in which the decorative figure representing "is stopped and displayed and develops into reach.

<Stop display effect>
FIG. 44 (E): The last symbol sequence Z2 stops the variable display in synchronization with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the combination of non-winning (missing) is also stopped and displayed in the decorative drawing. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 44 (E), it means that the decorative drawing representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In this case, the combination of the decorative drawings is "8.1".・ Because it is an outlier of "3", it is expressed in the production that it corresponds to the normal "outlier" in this fluctuation.

As described above, with reference to FIG. 44, an example of the fluctuation display and the stop display (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the decorative drawing for each fluctuation has been described. Through the effect displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91, the player is expected to win or lose the jackpot, and finally the result of the internal lottery is clearly taught in the effect. Can be done.

<Example of variable display effect>
45 and 46 show the case where the big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery in the first mode M1 (the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and there is no support mode), and the result is distributed to the “best result” ( It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the production C executed in the so-called first hit). In the following description, the description of matters common to the above-mentioned production examples will be omitted. Note that the background image is not shown in FIGS. 45 and 46.

<Before the start of variable display production>
FIG. 45 (A): The symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in large size on the display screen G. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the combination of decorative figures representing the numbers "9.1.3" is stopped and displayed.

<Start of variable display production>
FIG. 45 (B): The variation display effect is started by scrolling the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G.

<Stop display of symbol string Z1>
FIG. 45 (C): The symbol string Z1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In FIG. 45 (C), the decorative drawing representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display of symbol string Z3>
FIG. 45 (D): The symbol sequence Z3 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In FIG. 45 (D), the decorative drawing representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display effect>
FIG. 45 (E): The symbol sequence Z2 is stopped and displayed in synchronization with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Normally, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a detached symbol, the decorative symbol, which is an effect symbol displayed on the display screen G, is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. However, in FIG. 45 (E), the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "most advantageous result", and the decorative figure representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed in the symbol string Z2.

<Production in open / close execution mode>
When the combination of the jackpot decorative drawings is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, the opening / closing execution mode is set after that, and the effect of the opening / closing execution mode according to the lottery result of the jackpot is executed on the display screen G. Specifically, the effect C is executed as an effect of the opening / closing execution mode of the "most advantageous result" which is the result of the internal lottery.

FIG. 46 (F): The opening effect is executed when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. In this opening effect, for example, the background image displayed on the display screen G is greatly changed, and the character image G1 such as "BONUS!" Is displayed on the display screen G in a large size, and the player wins the jackpot. Be notified. If the player can be notified that the jackpot has been won, the player may be notified in another mode (for example, audio output).

FIG. 46 (G): Next, in order to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed, for example, a character image G2 of "Right-handed!" And a right-pointing arrow are displayed large on the display screen G. To. At this time, a right-pointing arrow is displayed on the right side of the character image G3 of "Right-handed!" So that the right-handed game is emphasized. Further, in accordance with the notification of the right-handed game on the display screen G, for example, the voice of "Right-handed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 2, a variable winning device 83 is provided on the right side of the game board 81, and in order to make the game ball win the big winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83, the firing handle 41 The amount of rotation is maximized, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area 104 is shifted from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 103 is formed to the side of the opposite side (so-called right-handed strike). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (G), the player is notified that the right-handed game is to be performed. The right-pointing arrow and the character image G3 of "Right-handed!" May be displayed so as to flow from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen. As a result, even a player who cannot understand Japanese can intuitively understand that he / she plays a right-handed game. Further, in the following description, the right-handed navigation that is a suggestion of the right-handed game in the jackpot game state is also referred to as a right-handed navigation for the jackpot game.

FIG. 46 (H): Following the opening effect, an effect of a situation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed is executed. In this production, for example, a battle production is performed. This battle effect is performed for the purpose of notifying the player that the character on the player side and the enemy character battle and win the battle to shift to the high probability mode after the big hit game. Further, on the upper end side of the display screen G, a plurality of characters "right-handed" and a plurality of right-pointing arrows "→" are displayed to indicate that the right-handed game is to be continued. Further, the character "right-handed" and the right-pointing arrow "→" may be displayed so as to flow from the left end to the right end of the display screen G.

FIG. 46 (I): Further, during the production of the situation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, the production type that allows the player to select the production mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, which was described in step S1513 of FIG. 40. The selection effect is executed. In this effect type selection effect, the player presses down the left-direction button 35b and / or the right-direction button 35c of the operation button 35, and prefers from the images GA to GC indicating the effect type displayed on the display screen G. Select an image that shows the type of effect. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (I), the image GA is an image representing the effect MA, the image GB is an image representing the effect MB, and the image GC is an image representing the effect MC. When the player presses the operation button 35 to select one of the images GA to GC, the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other unselected images and is selected. Is configured to be explicitly stated. When the player selects a desired effect and then presses down the decision button 35a of the operation button 35, the effect corresponding to the selected image is determined as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

In the present embodiment, when the player does not select and determine the desired effect within a predetermined time, specifically, by the 15th round, which is the final round, the effect determined in advance by the initial setting (this implementation). In the form, the effect MA) is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4. If the player does not select / determine the effect mode within the predetermined time, the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4 when the predetermined time elapses. You may do so. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (I), the effect MB corresponding to the selected image GB (the image GB displayed larger than the other images on the display screen G) is automatically set as the effect in the fourth mode M4. Is selected for.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 46 (I), the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other images, but the player can use the left direction button 35b of the operation button 35 and the left direction button 35b. When the / or right direction button 35c is pressed down, the images GA to GC corresponding to the effects MA to MC may be moved to the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (J), since the image GB corresponding to the effect MB is selected, the image GB is arranged in the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (J), the selected image GB arranges the display screen G in the center and is selected in order to clearly show the selected image to the player. The image GB is displayed on the outermost surface by superimposing (superimposing) on the non-image GA and GC, and it is clearly shown that the image GB is selected. In addition, in order to show the selected image more clearly to the player, the selected image GB may be displayed larger than the other unselected images GA and GC.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (J), the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected may be displayed as a gauge. For example, a gauge image G4 indicating the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is displayed below the image GB, the remaining time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is shown in red, and the gauge image G4 is displayed with the passage of time. The red region G4a (shaded region in FIG. 46 (J)) is reduced, specifically, the boundary line L1 between the red region G4a (shaded portion) and the white region G4b (white portion) becomes with the passage of time. It may be configured to move to the left side toward the display screen G. Further, the red region G4a (shaded portion in FIG. 46 (J)) of the gauge image G4 increases with the passage of time, specifically, the red region G4a (shaded portion) and the white region G4b (white portion). The boundary line L1 may move to the right side toward the display screen G with the passage of time. Further, details of the selected effect, for example, an explanation of what kind of effect the selected effect is, may be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the attribute information (metadata) in which each effect content is described is stored in the ROM 412 or the like, and the MPU 402 stores the attribute information (metadata) of the selected effect based on the operation signal of the operation button 35 in the ROM 412. Read from, and transmit a command instructing the display control device 500 to display the read attribute information on the display screen G. Further, the attribute information of the effect is stored in various data storage areas of the program ROM 512, and the attribute information (metadata) of the effect being selected by the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 based on the operation signal of the operation button 35. May be transmitted from the various data storage areas of the program ROM 512 to instruct the display control device 500 to display the information on the display screen G. Further, the music used in the selected effect may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. At this time, the music output in the current production is temporarily stopped, and the music used in the selected production is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In this way, by presenting the details of the selected effect to the player, the player can easily select the effect that suits his / her taste, and the interest is enhanced.

<Production type (type) selection process>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type (type) selection process. As described above, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process in step S1513 of the effect determination process of FIG. 40.
In step S1701, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1501 of FIG. 40. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1701 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1701 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S1702 whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the opening command. The MPU 402 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S1702 is executed. For example, when the predetermined time is 10 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S1702 is 2 msec, the MPU 402 counts the number of times the process of step S1702 is executed and reaches 5000 times, and 10 sec has elapsed. judge. The configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, the predetermined time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). When it is determined in step S1702 that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the reception of the opening command (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

Further, when the predetermined time has elapsed in step S1702 (YES), the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so as to start the effect type selection effect in step S1703. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 to display the image of the effect type selection effect on the display screen G. As described above, the production type selection production is a production of three different types of the production of the fourth mode M4, which shifts when the player wins a big hit in the winning / losing lottery and is assigned to the "most advantageous result". The type mode is selected from MA, MB, and MC. In this effect type selection effect, the player operates the operation button 35 to select a desired effect mode.

In step S1704, the MPU 402 accepts the selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses down the left-direction button 35b and / or the right-direction button 35c of the operation button 35, and selects an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. .. In step S1704, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the selected image GA is displayed larger than the other image GBs and GCs. To do. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 to display the selected image GA larger than the other image GBs and GCs.

Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the selected image GB is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GCs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other image GAs and GCs. Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GC, the selected image GC is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GBs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GC larger than the other image GAs and GBs.

In step S1705, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player operates the operation button 35 to determine the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the determination button 35a is accepted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1705 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has been accepted (YES), the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, in step S1705, when the determination operation is accepted in the state where the image GA is selected, the MPU 402 in step S1706 shifts the effect MA after the first mode M1 in the fourth mode M4. Set as a production. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S1705, when the determination operation is accepted in the state where the image GB is selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MB after the first mode M1 in step S1706. To do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Further, in step S1705, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GC selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MC after the first mode M1 in step S1706. To do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413.

Further, when it is determined in step S1705 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S1707 whether the predetermined time has elapsed. The MPU 402 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S1707 is executed. For example, when the predetermined time is 10 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S1707 is 2 msec, the MPU 402 counts the number of times the process of step S1707 is executed and reaches 5000 times, and 10 sec has elapsed. judge. Further, the configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, the predetermined time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

If the predetermined time has elapsed in step S1707 (YES), the MPU 402 sets in step S1708 a predetermined effect (in this embodiment, effect MA) as the effect in the fourth mode M4. To do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. As described above, in step S1707, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. Good.

Further, in step S1707, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

<Other examples of production type selection processing>
Instead of measuring the predetermined time in steps S1702 and S1707 of FIG. 47, the determination process of S1702 and step S1707 may be performed based on the number of rounds of the jackpot game. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be counted based on the number of received open commands and round start commands (hereinafter, also referred to as open commands) in step S1005 of FIG. In this case, in step S1702, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the number of received open commands and the like is 3 (third round), and if the number of received open commands and the like is 3, the effect type selection effect of step S1703 is performed. In step S1707, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the number of received open commands and the like is 15 (the 15th round, which is the final round), and if the number of received open commands and the like is 15, in step S1708. You may set the default effect of.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart in another example of the effect type selection process. As described above, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process in step S1513 of the effect determination process of FIG. 40.
In step S1801, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1501 of FIG. 40. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1801 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1801 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (YES), the MPU 402 sets a counter in step S1802 to measure the number of open commands and the like received after receiving the opening command. ..

In step S1802, the MPU 402 determines whether the gaming state is the third round of the jackpot game. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time the reception of the release command or the like is received, and determines whether or not the number of receptions of the release command or the like is 3 (third round). When it is determined in step S1803 that the number of received open commands and the like is not 3 or more (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

Further, when the number of received commands such as the release command is 3 or more in step S1803 (YES), the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so as to start the effect type selection effect in step S1804. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 to display an image of the effect type selection effect, specifically, the image shown in FIG. 46 (I) on the display screen G. indicate.

In step S1805, the MPU 402 accepts the selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses down the left-direction button 35b and / or the right-direction button 35c of the operation button 35, and selects an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. .. In step S1805, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the selected image GA is displayed larger than the other image GBs and GCs. To do. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 to display the selected image GA larger than the other image GBs and GCs.

Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the selected image GB is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GCs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other image GAs and GCs. Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GC, the selected image GC is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GBs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GC larger than the other image GAs and GBs.

In step S1806, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player operates the operation button 35 to determine the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the determination button 35a is accepted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1806 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has been accepted (YES), the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. That is, in step S1806, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GA selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MA as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1 in step S1807. To do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S1806, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GB selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MB after the first mode M1 in step S1807. To do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Further, in step S1806, when the determination operation is accepted in the state where the image GC is selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MC after the first mode M1 in step S1807. To do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413.

In step S1808, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a release command or the like has been received. If it is determined in step S1808 that the release command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process. If it is determined in step S1808 that the release command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S1809 whether the gaming state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time it receives the release command, etc., and determines whether the number of received release commands, etc. is 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round. judge.

If it is determined in step S1809 that the number of received commands and the like is not 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (NO), the MPU 402 cancels the effect determined for the player in step S1810. Instruct to give a notification to confirm. Specifically, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so as to display a character image confirming whether to cancel the determined effect such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" On the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402, and displays a character image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" On the display screen G. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that the voice of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads out the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice of "Cancel the effect?" Stored in the common ROM 404 of the ROM 412, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, in step S1809, when it is determined that the number of received open commands and the like is 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (YES), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

In step S1811, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect determined in step S1806 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect has been canceled based on the operation of the player's operation button 35. If it is determined in step S1811, that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 402 returns to the operation of step S1805. If it is determined in step S1811, that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

Further, when it is determined in step S1806 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines whether or not the release command or the like has been received in step S1812. If it is determined in step S1812 that the release command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process. If it is determined in step S1812 that a release command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S1813 whether the gaming state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time it receives a release command or the like, and has the number of received release commands or the like reached 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round? Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S1813 that it is the 15th round (YES), the MPU 402 performs the effect (in this embodiment, the effect MA) predetermined by the initial setting in step S1814 in the fourth mode M4. Set as. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. If it is determined in step S1813 that it is the final round (15th round) (YES), the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G is automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. You may do so. When the effect is set in step S1814, the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

If it is not determined in step S1813 that it is the final round (15th round) (NO), the MPU 402 instructs the player to notify the player to select / determine the effect in step S1815. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the display control device 500 so as to display a character image prompting the selection / decision of the effect such as "determine the effect!" Or "determine the effect!" On the display screen G. Control. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402, and the display screen G displays the effects such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!". Display a character image that prompts the selection / decision of. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that sounds such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 collects sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to voices such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Stored in the common ROM 404 of the ROM 412. It is read out and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that sounds such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. ..

It should be noted that the timing at which the effect type selection effect is started is arbitrary, and for example, the number of received open commands and the like may be 1 (1st round) or more and 15 or less (15th round). Further, the number of rounds for starting the effect type selection effect may be randomly determined using the counter stored in the RAM 413. Further, in the above explanation, the effect can be canceled according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (specifically, the effect can be canceled up to the 14th round), but until the predetermined time or the number of rounds elapses. The configuration may be such that the production can be canceled.

<Direction transition processing>
Next, a process of shifting to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) when a jackpot is won in the winning / losing lottery and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" will be described. Normally, when a big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery, the production of the opening / closing execution mode according to the distribution result is executed, and after the ending period ends, the production of the next mode is started. However, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result", the effect C of the opening / closing execution mode according to the most advantageous result is executed. Then, the production of the fourth mode M4 is started during the ending period of the production C.

Specifically, it is controlled so that the output of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is started during the ending period of the production C corresponding to the most advantageous result. In the present embodiment, the timing of starting the output of music and sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C changes according to the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47. In the following description, in the production of the fourth mode M4, the music production is referred to as a music production, and the video production displayed on the display screen G is also referred to as a video production.

Hereinafter, the transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 49. In this embodiment, there are three types of effects of the fourth mode M4, the effects MA to MC, and the transition process is different for each effect MA to MC. The details of the transition processing of each effect MA to MC will be described below. In the following description, the right-handed navigation that is a suggestion of the right-handed game at the time of transition to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) is also referred to as a right-handed navigation for RUSH.

<Transition process to production MA: Fig. 49 (a)>
First, a case where the effect MA is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the production MA, the output of the intro part of the music used in the production MA of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T1 at the start of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "most advantageous result". Is controlled to start. Here, in the production MA, the ending period of the production C and the period of the intro portion of the music used in the production MA of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends at T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process to the effect MA, the sound of "A RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "A RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW1 and is output at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW1 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "ARUSH rush" from the ending period or the output period of the intro portion. For example, when the ending period or the output period of the intro portion is 10 sec and the output time of the voice of "ARUSH rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW1 is 8 sec. In this case, the output of the “ARUSH rush” voice is controlled to start 8 seconds after the start of the ending period T1.

At the end of the ending period, at T2, a voice of "right-handed" for suggesting a right-handed game is output, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the output of the "right-handed" voice is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the video production of the production MA is controlled to be started. At the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Be controlled.

<Transition process to production MB: Fig. 49 (b)>
Next, a case where the effect MB is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the production MB, the output of the intro part of the music used in the production MB of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T1 at the start of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "most advantageous result". Is controlled to start. Here, in the production MB, the period of the intro part of the music used in the production MB of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period of the production C. Therefore, the output of the intro portion continues even after T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process to the effect MB, the sound of "BRUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "B RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW2, and is output at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW2 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "BRUSH rush" from the output period of the intro portion. For example, when the output period of the intro portion is 11 sec and the output time of the voice of "BRUSH rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW2 is 9 sec. In this case, the output of the “BRUSH rush” voice is controlled to start 9 seconds after the start of the ending period T1.

Here, in the transition process to the effect MB, the sound of "BRUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C over T2 at the end of the ending period. Therefore, when the voice of "right-handed" for suggesting a right-handed game is output at T2 at the end of the ending period, the voice of "BRUSH rush" and the voice of "right-handed" are output in an overlapping manner. Will be done. Therefore, in the transition process to this production MB, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game are displayed at T2 at the end of the ending period without outputting the voice of "Right-handed". Is displayed on the display screen G, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the display of characters such as "Please hit right" on the display screen G is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the video production of the production MB is controlled to be started.

<Transition process to production MC: Fig. 49 (c)>
Next, a case where the effect MC is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the production MC, the output of the intro part of the music used in the production MC of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T1 at the start of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "most advantageous result". Is controlled to start. Here, in the production MC, the period of the intro part of the music used in the production MC of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period of the production C. Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends before T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process to the effect MC, the sound of "CRUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "C RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW3, and is output at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW3 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "CRUSH rush" from the output period of the intro portion. For example, when the output period of the intro portion is 6 sec and the output time of the voice of "CRUSH rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW3 is 4 sec. In this case, the output of the “CRUSH rush” voice is controlled to start 4 seconds after the start of the ending period T1.

In addition, in the production MC, following the output of the voice of "CRUSH rush", the voice of "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game is output, and at the end of the ending period, it is simultaneously or omitted from T2. At the same time, the output of the "Please hit right" voice is controlled to end. In other words, the voice output time of "Please hit right" is the time obtained by subtracting the output period of the intro part from the ending period. In addition, in the transition process to the production MC, at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. It is controlled so that the right-handed navigation for RUSH starts.

<Production data>
Next, the data used for the process of shifting to the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. The music data and the voice data used in each of the effects MA to MC of the fourth mode M4 are stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 of the voice emission control device 400 as sequence data, parameter data and sound data as described with reference to FIG. 37, respectively. It is stored. Specifically, the ROM 412 stores sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C used in the effects MA to MC, and the common ROM 404 is used in the effects MA to MC, respectively. Sound data corresponding to the music data A to C to be performed is stored. Then, the MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to read the sequence data and the parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C from the ROM 412 and the sound data from the common ROM 404 and output the sound data from the speaker units 26A to 26C as needed. .. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the read music data A to C are set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data A to C are output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. ) Is controlled by the sound output LSI 403.

Here, the music data A is associated with the effect MA, the music data B is associated with the effect MB, and the music data C is associated with the effect MC by the data table stored in the ROM 412. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 uses the ROM 412 and the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A. It is read from the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MB, the MPU 402 shares the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B with the ROM 412. It is read from the ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MC, the MPU 402 shares the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C with the ROM 412. It is read from the ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

The music data A to C include an intro part (prelude), an A melody part (the first melody of the song), a B melody part (the melody that comes after the A melody), a chorus part (chorus), an interlude, and an out mouth. It is composed of multiple sections such as (sequel). An example of a general music composition is shown below. The following Examples A and B are merely examples, and the composition of music used in this embodiment is not limited to the examples shown below.
Example A) Intro → A verse → B verse → Sabi → Interlude → A verse → B melody → Sabi → Interlude → C verse → Sabi → Outro Example B) Intro → A melody → B melody → Sabi → Interlude → B melody → Sabi → C melody → outro

Further, the common ROM 404 and the ROM 412 store the voice data A to E and the voice start times TW1 to TW3 described with reference to FIG. 49, respectively. Here, the voice data A to C and the voice start times TW1 to TW3 are associated with each other. The MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to read the voice data stored in the common ROM 404 and output it from the speaker units 26A to 26C as needed. Here, the voice data A is "A RUSH rush", and the voice data B is "B RUSH rush", voice data C is "C RUSH rush", voice data D is "right-handed", and voice data E is "right-handed" as voice data.

Further, the ROM 412 stores the time TE corresponding to the ending period described with reference to FIG. 49. The MPU 402 refers to the time TE corresponding to the ending period stored in the ROM 412 when determining whether or not the ending period has ended.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 412, the audio data A is associated with the effect MA, the audio data B is associated with the effect MB, and the audio data C is associated with the effect MC. Further, the audio data D is associated with the effect MA, and the audio data E is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 reads out the audio data A and the audio data D and outputs them from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to do so. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data A and the voice data D are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the voice data A and the voice data D are set. Controls the sound output LSI 403 so that is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MB, the MPU 402 reads the audio data B and outputs the sound output LSI 403 from the speaker units 26A to 26C. To control. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data B are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the audio data B is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be (reproduced).
Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MC, the MPU 402 reads out the audio data C and the audio data E and outputs them from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The loudspeaker output LSI 403 is controlled. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data C and the voice data E are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the voice data C and the voice data E are set. Controls the sound output LSI 403 so that is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

The MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to read the sound data corresponding to the voice data A to C from the common ROM 404 and output the sound data from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the voice start times TW1 to TW3. Specifically, when the MPU 402 outputs the voice data A, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data A after the voice start time TW1 elapses from the start T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 49). Is read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to output the data from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the MPU 402 outputs the voice data B, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice data B are stored in the ROM 412 and after the voice start time TW2 elapses from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 49). The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to read data from the common ROM 404 and output data from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the MPU 402 outputs the voice data C, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice data C are stored in the ROM 412 and after the voice start time TW3 elapses from the start T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 49). The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to read from the common ROM 404 and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Further, the video data used in each effect of the fourth mode M4 is stored in the effect data storage area 1032 of the program ROM 512 included in the MPU 502 of the display control device 500. Specifically, the video data A to D are stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G in accordance with the instruction from the MPU 402.

Here, the video data A is associated with the effect MA, the image data B is associated with the effect MB, and the image data C is associated with the effect MC according to the data table. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MA, the MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data A and display it on the display screen G. .. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MB, the MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data B and display it on the display screen G. Further, the MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data C and display it on the display screen G when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MC.

The video data D is image data for right-handed navigation for RUSH. The MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G when performing the right-handed navigation for RUSH. When the video data D for right-handed navigation for RUSH is stored in the character ROM 506 and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is performed, the MPU 502 reads the video data D from the character ROM 506 and displays it on the display screen G. May be instructed to.

<Transition process to 4th mode (RUSH mode)>
Next, the transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode). Here, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 for the transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) described with reference to FIG. 49 will be described.

In step S1901, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. In step S1901, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4 in step S1902. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4 based on the type of the flag set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S1706 or step S1708 of FIG. 47. Further, in step S1901, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

When the determination result in step S1902 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 executes the transition process to the effect MA in step S1903. The process of shifting to the effect MA in step S1903 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. Further, when the determination result in step S1902 is the effect MB, the MPU 402 executes the transition process to the effect MB in step S1904. The process of shifting to the effect MB in step S1904 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, when the determination result in step S1902 is the effect MC, the MPU 402 executes the transition process to the effect MC in step S1905. The process of shifting to the effect MC in step S1905 will be described with reference to FIG. 53.

In step S1906, the MPU 402 clears the flags set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S1706 or step S1708 of FIG. 47.

<Transition process to production MA>
Next, the process of shifting to the effect MA in step S1903 of FIG. 50 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MA is set.
In step S2001, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2004, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the voice start time TW1 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and TW1 is set to "2sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "1000" as the standby time (standby period) for TW1. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2002, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2006, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2003, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the production MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A for the production MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data A is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data A is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2004, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the voice start time TW1 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2001. When the MPU 402 determines that the sound start time TW1 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 402 starts outputting the sound for the effect MA in step S2005. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data A "A RUSH rush" for the effect MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data A is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data A "A RUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when it is determined in step S2004 that the voice start time TW1 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MA.

In step S2006, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2002. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S2007. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data D “right-handed” for the effect MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data D is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data D "right-handed" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. Further, when it is determined in step S2006 that the ending period has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MA.

In step S2008, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data A stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data A from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S2004 and step S2006 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to production MB>
Next, the process of shifting to the effect MB in step S1904 of FIG. 50 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MB is set.
In step S2101, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2104, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the voice start time TW2 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and TW2 is set to "3 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "1500" as the standby time (standby period) for TW2. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2102, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2106, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2103, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the production MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B for the production MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data B is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data B is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2104, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the voice start time TW2 has elapsed since receiving the ending command based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2101. When the MPU 402 determines that the sound start time TW2 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 402 starts outputting the sound for the effect MB in step S2105. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data B “B RUSH rush” for the effect MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data B is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data B "BRUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when it is determined in step S2104 that the voice start time TW2 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MB.

In step S2106, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2102. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the hitting navigation in step S2107. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data D from the production data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. .. Further, when it is determined in step S2106 that the ending period has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MB.

In step S2108, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data B stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data B from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S2104 and step S2106 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to production MC>
Next, the process of shifting to the effect MC in step S1905 of FIG. 50 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MC is set.
In step S2201, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2204 described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the voice start time TW3 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and "1 sec" is set for TW3, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "500" as the standby time (standby period) for TW3. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2202, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2206 described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2203, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the production MC. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C for the production MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data C is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data C is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2204, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the voice start time TW3 has elapsed since receiving the ending command based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2201. When the MPU 402 determines that the sound start time TW3 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 402 starts outputting the sound for the effect MC in step S2205. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data C “CRUSH rush” for the effect MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data C is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data C "CRUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Further, in step S2205, after the output of the voice data C “CRUSH rush” for the production MC, the MPU 402 shares the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data E “Please hit right” with the ROM 412. It is read from the ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data E is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data E "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data C "CRUSH rush" is output and then the voice data E "Please hit right" is output. Therefore, from the speaker units 26A to 26C, after the voice of "CRUSH rush" is output, the voice of "Please hit right" is continuously output. Further, when it is determined in step S2204 that the voice start time TW3 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MC.

In step S2206, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2202. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the hitting navigation in step S2207. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data D from the production data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. .. Further, when it is determined in step S2206 that the ending period has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MC.

In step S2208, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data C stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data C from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S2204 and step S2206 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

In the present embodiment, the transition process to each of the effects MA to MC has been described assuming that the effect types of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are the effects MA, MB, and MC, but the fourth mode M4 The type of production is not limited to the above three types, and may be arbitrary, and may be two types or four or more types.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the left side of the outer frame 11. It is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 with the portion as the support side. When opening the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is opened so as to rotate forward (player side) with the support side as a rotation axis. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat, and the speaker unit 26A of the player playing in the left adjacent seat Closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A is reduced when notifying an abnormality that the door is open. The parameters may be specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero. When muting, it may be an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a, or it may be an output open type circuit that disconnects the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. If it is supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, they should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the right seat. In this case, in other words, the amplification circuit 403d2b is amplified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker units 26A and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. The parameters of the program and the processing data stored in the ROM 412 of the speaker light emission control board 401 may be specified so that the rate becomes smaller than the amplification rate of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c.

Further, the front door frame 14 is supported on both side portions of the inner frame 13 with the right side portion and the left side portion (hereinafter, also referred to as both side portions) of the inner frame 13 as support sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both side portions of the outer frame 11. In other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double door structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected when the pachinko machine 10 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects to which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided. The volume of either the speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B may be reduced based on the detection result in the above.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the left side as the support side, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is made to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat. It will be opened, and the speaker unit 26A will be closest to the ear of the player playing in the left seat. Therefore, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is increased so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker units 26B and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. The program and processing data whose parameters are specified so as to be smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c are read from the ROM 412 of the voice emission control board 401 to reproduce the alarm sound and voice notifying the abnormality. Just do it. The parameters may be specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero. When muting, it may be an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a, or it may be an output open type circuit that disconnects the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like.

Further, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, the detector opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. , The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the right seat. Therefore, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is increased so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker units 26A and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. The program and processing data whose parameters are specified so as to be smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c are read from the ROM 412 of the voice emission control board 401 to reproduce the alarm sound and voice notifying the abnormality. Just do it. The parameters may be specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes zero. When muting, the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2b may be short-circuited (connected to GND), or the output may be an open-type circuit in which the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2b is cut by a selector or the like.

<About another example of abnormality notification processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double door structure. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormality notifications will be omitted.

In step S2301, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2301 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2304. Further, when it is determined in step S2301 that the MPU 402 has received the power recovery notification command (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2302. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 provides a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2303, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. In this power recovery notification program and processing data, the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying an abnormality that the door is open is the same or substantially the same, in other words, the amplification of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c. The parameters are specified so that the rates are the same or substantially the same.

In step S2304, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the normal time notification commands in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 are stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2304 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2311 described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2304 that it has received the normal time notification command (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2305. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2306, the MPU 402 opened the detector with the left side of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 as the support side, in other words, the detector opened the right side of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13. It is determined whether or not it is detected.

When it is determined in step S2306 that the right side portion is open (YES), the MPU 402 starts reading the data for normal time notification for opening the right side portion in step S2307. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification for opening the right side portion, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. In the normal time notification program and processing data for opening the right side portion, the playback volume of the speaker unit 26A when notifying an abnormality that the door is open is higher than the playback volume of the other speaker units 26B and 26C. In other words, the parameters are defined so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is smaller than the amplification factor of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. The parameters may be specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero. When muting, it may be an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a, or it may be an output open type circuit that disconnects the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like. Further, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2306 that the right side portion is not open (NO), the MPU 402 starts reading the data for normal notification for opening the left side portion in step S2308. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification for opening the left side portion, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. In this program for normal notification for opening the left side portion and processing data, the playback volume of the speaker unit 26B when notifying an abnormality that the door is open is higher than the playback volume of the other speaker units 26A and 26C. In other words, the parameters are defined so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is smaller than the amplification factor of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c. The parameters may be specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26B may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes zero. When muting, the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2b may be short-circuited (connected to GND), or the output may be an open-type circuit in which the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2b is cut by a selector or the like. Further, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S2309, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM playback is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM playback when the door opening notification is released. When restarting the playback of the BGM when the door opening notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts the playback of the BGM from the address, thereby restarting the playback from the position where the BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that no sound is output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2310, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S2303, step S2307 or step S2308. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data that started reading in step S2303, step S2307 or step S2308, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is generated. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be reproduced (output) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, an abnormality notification (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, and "The door is open!" Is heard from the speaker units 26A to 26C. And the output of the warning sound) is started. Further, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2303, step S2307, or step S2308. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2311, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit release command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the back pack unit release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2311 that the back pack unit release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2313. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2311 that it has received the back pack unit release command (YES), in step S2312, the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification (normal time notification) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Instruct the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the playback volume of the voice and warning sound such as "The door is open!" Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce the reproduction volume such as the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, the control for reducing the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification or the like output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2312 may be controlled so as to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the speakers. Of the units 26A to 26C, only the playback volume of the specific speaker unit, for example, the speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B that is closest to the ear of the player playing in the adjacent seat when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened. It may be controlled to be small. Here, in step S2306, if the right side portion is open, the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, and if the left side portion is open, the sound output LSI 403 is controlled. Control is performed so that only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B is reduced.

In step S2312, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be reduced, the sound output LSI 403 opens the back pack unit 15 with a parameter that defines the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. By updating to the parameter of the case and reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. When controlling so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker unit 26A. To control. Further, when controlling so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker unit 26B. To control.

In step S2313, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the door opening notification release command for canceling the door opening notification transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door opening notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2313 that the door opening notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S2314. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2313 that the door opening notification release command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2314.
In step 2314, the MPU 402 transmits a door opening notification release command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2315, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door opening notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S2315, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads and reproduces the voice data “door closed!” From the common ROM 404. As a result, the voice "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2316, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S2317, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2309. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S2309, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM from the address. Playback resumes from the position. Further, when the BGM is muted in step S2309, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2309, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the playback is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. The process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value may be performed. In this case, in step S2310, when the sound data started to be read in step S2303, step S2307 or S2308 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or the warning sound is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. May be processed. Further, in step S2309, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the playback is continued without stopping the BGM, the playback of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S2315. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2317, when the playback of the BGM is resumed, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. With this configuration, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and it is possible to return without causing a sense of discomfort due to switching to BGM.

Further, in the above description, in step S2311, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command is received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command is received (YES), the process of step S2312 is executed. Therefore, the playback volume of the warning sound and the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must open the back pack unit 15 after opening the inner frame 13, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15, so that the inner frame 13 is opened. There is a high possibility that the back pack unit 15 will be opened for maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal profits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside. Since it takes time to perform this, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has received the back pack unit release command, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is open. In this case, the warning sound and the like are reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is opened not for maintenance but for fraud. In addition, the processing of steps S2311 and S2312 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

In the present embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured so as not to emit light, the indicator lamp device 23A is used in the normal time notification process while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process. , 23B may be configured to stop the supply of light emitting power to the light emitters of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B so that the light is not emitted. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 It may be configured so as not to emit light. Also in this case, the light emission data of the normal time notification process may be defined so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the inner frame 13 or the front door may be specified. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body of the indicator lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 may be stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is bothered by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units) provided on the frame body. 26A to 26C), a detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, second monitoring device 290) that detects the opening of the frame, and a plurality of acoustic devices when the detection device detects the opening of the frame. It is provided with an abnormality notification means (MPU402) that controls and notifies an abnormality. Then, when the abnormality notification means notifies the abnormality, the reproduction volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is made smaller than the reproduction volume of the other acoustic devices (in the present embodiment, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26A). The volume is turned down). Therefore, the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the game machine being played from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

(2) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side or the left side as the support side. The abnormality notification means (MPU402) sets the reproduction volume of the sound device (speaker unit 26A) arranged on a side different from the support side among the plurality of sound devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) to another sound device (speaker unit). Make it lower than the playback volume of 26B, 26C). In other words, the pachinko machine 10 reduces the playback volume of the sound device arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame body, in other words, on the side closer to the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty in hearing the music and voice output from the game machine being played due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

(3) The abnormality notification means (MPU402) of the pachinko machine 10 does not reduce the reproduction volume of the acoustic devices (speakers 26B, 26C) arranged on the support side among the plurality of acoustic devices (speakers 26A to 26C). In other words, the volume of the audio equipment (speakers 26B, 26C) arranged on the distant side for the player sitting next to the frame when the frame is opened is not reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player sitting next to the seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound, and reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee will miss the abnormality notification sound.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. By making the volume lower than the notification sound reproduction volume of other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I try to reduce the risk of thinking. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 provided with a dedicated speaker unit for notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Game board 81>
FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes a speaker unit 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened in the upper right portion on the front side of the game board 81. As shown in FIG. 55, the speaker unit 26D is provided outside the substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103 so as not to interfere with the game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame 13 is opened at a position where it does not interfere with the back pack unit 15 on the rear side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the back side of the game board 81 (where the back pack unit 15 is provided)). A speaker unit 26E for notifying that the pachinko machine has been used is provided. Other configurations are the same as those of the game board 81 included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Omit.

The speaker unit 26D may not move with the rotation of the front door frame 14 when the front door frame 14 is opened. In other words, the direction in which the sound of the speaker unit 26D is output when the front door frame 14 is opened does not have to be the direction facing the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing the game in the adjacent seat. Therefore, the place where the speaker portion 26D is provided is not limited to the upper right portion of the game board 81, and may be provided in the upper left portion or the lower left portion of the game board 81. Even in this case, it is preferable to provide the game outside the substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103 so as not to interfere with the game. In addition, the speaker unit 26D may be provided on the front surface of the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13.

Further, since the speaker unit 26E is provided on the back surface side of the inner frame 13 (game board 81), when the inner frame 13 is opened, the speaker unit 26E moves with the rotation of the inner frame 13, but the sound of the speaker unit 26E is heard. The output direction is not the direction facing the right or left side of the upper body of the player playing the game in the next seat. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. The place where the speaker portion 26E is provided is not limited to the upper right portion on the back surface side of the game board 81, and may be provided on the upper left portion or the lower left portion on the back surface side of the game board 81. Even in this case, it is preferable to provide the game board 81 at a position where it does not interfere with the back pack unit 15 or the like supported on the back surface.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 400 and display control device 500>
FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment further includes speaker units 26D and 26E for notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, and the speaker units 26D and 26E are provided. It is connected to the output port of the voice emission control board 401. More specifically, the speaker units 26D and 26E are connected to the output port of the DAC403d of the sound output LSI403 provided with the voice emission control board 401. The DAC 403d converts the digital musical tone data or the digital synthetic musical tone data created by the sound data processing unit 403c into an analog signal, amplifies it, and then outputs it to the speaker units 26D and 26E.

FIG. 57 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC 403d and the speaker units 26A to 26E included in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
In the example shown in FIG. 57 (a), the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and three amplifier circuits that amplify the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. It includes a 403d2a, an amplifier circuit 403d2d, and an amplifier circuit 403d2e. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e is output. Is output to the speaker unit 26E.

In the example shown in FIG. 57A, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment amplifies the analog signal output to the speaker units 26A to 26C by the common amplifier circuit 403d2a. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (op amps) can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 57A, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D. The amplifier circuits 26A to 26C, the speaker units 26D, and the speaker unit 26E are provided with different amplifier circuits so that the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e is output to the speaker unit 26E. As shown in the example shown in FIG. 57B, the amplifier circuit included in the DAC 403d is used as one, the selector 403f is arranged after the amplifier circuit 403d2, and the output destination of the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2 is set to the speaker unit. It may be configured to switch to 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (op amps) can be further reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be further reduced.

In the present embodiment, the playback volume in the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker units 26D, and the speaker unit 26E of the program and processing data for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412, in other words, the amplifier circuit. The parameter data that defines the amplification factors of the 403d2a, the amplifier circuit 403d2d, and the amplifier circuit 403d2e may be the same, and the speaker units 26D and 26E are amplified in order to prevent the hall operator and employees from missing the abnormality notification. Parameter data may be specified so that the amplification factor of the circuits 403d2d and 403d2e is larger than the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2a of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the game board 81 attached to the inner frame 13 with a dedicated speaker unit 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened, the front door frame 14 has been opened. At that time, the direction of the speaker unit 26D does not become the direction facing the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player who plays the game in the adjacent seat. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a dedicated speaker unit 26E for notifying that the inner frame 13 has been opened on the back surface side of the game board 81 attached to the inner frame 13, and when the inner frame 13 is opened. The speaker unit 26E does not face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing the game in the adjacent seat. Therefore, when notifying that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 have been opened from the speaker units 26D and 26E, it is not necessary to reduce the playback volume of the dedicated speaker units 26D and 26E, and the player is abnormal. The risk of annoying the notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the game machine being played from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

<Abnormality notification processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The operation of the abnormality notification processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is substantially the same as the operation of the abnormality notification processing in the first embodiment, but there are some differences, so the present embodiment is referred to with reference to FIG. The operation of the abnormality notification processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above will be described.

When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, the abnormality notification processing when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormal notifications will be omitted.

In step S2401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2401 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2404. Further, when it is determined in step S2401 that the MPU 402 has received the power recovery notification command (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2402. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 provides a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2403, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. Here, since the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in the state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed), the volume output from the speaker units 26D and 26E becomes small outside the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the parameters are defined so that the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the parameters are specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C becomes a predetermined value and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E. The parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e becomes zero so that becomes zero.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26D and 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E becomes zero. When muting, the output of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e may be short-circuited (connected to GND) as an output short-type circuit, or as an output open-type circuit that disconnects the input to the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e by a selector or the like. May be good.

When the speaker units 26D and 26E perform abnormality notification, as described above, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in a state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed), so that the speaker unit 26D , The volume output from 26E becomes smaller outside the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E in the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery may be increased. In this case, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e of the speaker units 26D and 26E in the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery becomes larger than the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e of the speaker units 26D and 26E in the abnormality notification at the normal time. The parameters may be specified as such.

In step S2404, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the normal time notification commands in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 are stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2404 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2411 described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2404 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2405. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2406, the MPU 402 determines whether the received normal time notification command is due to the opening of the front door frame 14. If the determination result in step S2406 is due to the opening of the front door frame 14 (YES), the MPU 402 starts reading the data for normal time notification for opening the front door frame in step S2407. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification for opening the front door frame, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. Here, in the present embodiment, the parameters are defined so that when the front door frame 14 is open, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26D. Specifically, the parameters are defined so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2d becomes a predetermined value so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26D becomes a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C and 26E. The parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e becomes zero so that Further, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26A to 26C, 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C, 26E becomes zero. When muting, the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e may be short-circuited (connected to the GND), or the output may be opened by cutting the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e by a selector or the like. It may be a type circuit. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 57B, when one amplifier circuit is used, the output destination of the amplifier circuit 403d2 may be the speaker unit 26D by the selector 403f.

If the determination result in step S2406 is not due to the opening of the front door frame 14 (NO), the MPU 402 starts reading the data for normal notification for opening the inner frame in step S2408. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification for opening the inner frame, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. Here, in the present embodiment, the parameters are defined so that when the inner frame 13 is open, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26E. Specifically, the parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2e becomes a predetermined value so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26E becomes a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26D is zero. The parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d becomes zero. Further, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26A to 26D may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26D becomes zero. When muting, the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d may be short-circuited (connected to GND), or the output may be opened by cutting the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d by a selector or the like. It may be a type circuit. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 57B, when one amplifier circuit is used, the output destination of the amplifier circuit 403d2 may be the speaker unit 26E by the selector 403f.

In step S2409, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM playback is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM playback when the door opening notification is released. When restarting the playback of the BGM when the door opening notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts the playback of the BGM from the address, thereby restarting the playback from the position where the BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that no sound is output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2410, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S2403, step S2407 or step S2408. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data whose reading was started in step S2403, step S2407 or step S2408, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is generated. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E. As a result, an abnormality is notified from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" Output of voice such as "Open!" And warning sound) is started. Further, the MPU 402 causes the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2403, step S2407, or step S2408. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2411, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit release command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the back pack unit release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2411 that the back pack unit release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2413. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2411 that the back pack unit release command has been received (YES), in step S2412, the MPU 402 uses the speaker unit 26D (when the front door frame 14 is opened) or A sound to reduce the playback volume of the abnormality notification (output of voice such as "Door is open!" For normal notification and warning sound) output from the speaker unit 26E (when the inner frame 13 is opened). Instruct the output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification or the like output from the speaker unit 26D or the speaker unit 26E based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

In step S2413, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the door opening notification release command transmitted from the MPU 302 to release the door opening notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door opening notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2411 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S2414.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S2413 that it has received the door open notification release command (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the door open notification release command to the display control device 500 in step S2414. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.
In step S2415, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker unit 26D or the speaker unit 26E based on the door opening notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" Normally, the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound) is stopped. Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S2415, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data “door closed!” Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads and reproduces the voice data “door closed!” From the common ROM 404. As a result, the voice "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2416, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S2417, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2409. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S2409, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM from the address. Playback resumes from the position. Further, when the BGM is muted in step S2409, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2409, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the playback is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. The process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value may be performed. In this case, in step S2409, when the sound data started to be read in step S2403, step S2407 or S2408 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or warning sound is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. May be processed. Further, in step S2409, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed while the playback is continued without stopping the BGM, the abnormality notification from the speaker unit D or the speaker unit 26E is performed in step S2415. The playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2417, when the playback of the BGM is restarted, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually reduced to a predetermined value. You may try to raise it. With this configuration, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and it is possible to return without causing a sense of discomfort due to switching to BGM.

Further, in the above description, in step S2411, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command is received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command is received (YES), the process of step S2412 is executed. Therefore, the playback volume of the warning sound or the like from the speaker unit D or the speaker unit 26E is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must open the back pack unit 15 after opening the inner frame 13, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15, so that the inner frame 13 is opened. There is a high possibility that the back pack unit 15 will be opened for maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal profits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside. Since it takes time to perform this, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has received the back pack unit release command, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is open. In this case, the warning sound and the like are reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game or the maintenance worker in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is opened not for maintenance but for fraud. In addition, the processing of steps S2411 and S2412 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

[Modified example of the second embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes a speaker unit 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened, but the speaker unit 26D has a speaker for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened. It may be used not only as a unit but also as a speaker unit that also serves as a speaker unit 26A.
FIG. 59 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the modified example of the second embodiment. When the speaker unit 26D is used not only as a speaker unit that notifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened but also as a speaker unit that also serves as the speaker unit 26A, the front door frame 14 is closed (as shown in FIG. 59). When the door is closed), the sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26D can be heard by providing an opening 14c having a plurality of through holes in the area of the front door frame 14 (mesh portion in FIG. 59) at a position facing the speaker unit 26D. It is preferable to make it difficult to attenuate.

FIG. 60 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC and the speaker unit included in the sound output LSI of the game machine according to the modified example of the present embodiment.
In a modified example of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the DAC 403d amplifies the DAC circuit 403d1 that converts the digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal and the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. It is provided with three amplifier circuits 403d2a, an amplifier circuit 403d2d, and an amplifier circuit 403d2e. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26B and 26C, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e is output. Is output to the speaker unit 26E.

Then, in the normal abnormality notification described with reference to FIG. 58, when the front door frame 14 is open, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26D. While the parameters of the program and the processing data for executing the processing for abnormality notification stored in the ROM 412 are defined so that the amplification factor of the circuit 403d2d becomes a predetermined value, the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26E The parameters of the program and the processing data for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e becomes zero so that the reproduction volume becomes zero are specified. ing.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26B, 26C, 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26B, 26C, 26E becomes zero. When muting, the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e may be short-circuited (connected to the GND), or the output may be opened by cutting the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e by a selector or the like. It may be a type circuit.

Further, in the normal abnormality notification described with reference to FIG. 58, when the inner frame 13 is open, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26E. Therefore, in the modified example of the present embodiment, the amplifier circuit is used. While the program and processing data parameters for executing the abnormality notification processing stored in the ROM 412 are specified so that the amplification factor of the 403d2e becomes a predetermined value, the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26D are reproduced. The parameters of the program and the processing data for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d becomes zero so that the volume becomes zero are specified. There is.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26B, 26C, 26D may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26B, 26C, 26D becomes zero. When muting, the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d may be short-circuited (connected to GND), or the output may be opened by cutting the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d by a selector or the like. It may be a type circuit.

In the present embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured so as not to emit light, the indicator lamp device 23A is used in the normal time notification process while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process. , 23B may be configured to stop the supply of light emitting power to the light emitters of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B so that the light is not emitted. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 It may be configured so as not to emit light. Also in this case, the light emission data of the normal time notification process may be defined so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the inner frame 13 or the front door may be specified. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body of the indicator lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 may be stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is bothered by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 has a first frame body (inner frame 13) that is openable and closable to a fixed frame (outer frame 11) and a second frame body that is openable and closable to a first frame body. (Front door frame 14), first acoustic devices (speaker units 26D, 26E) provided in the first frame body, and a plurality of second acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the second frame body. When the detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290) for detecting the opening of the first and second frames and the detection device detects the opening of the first frame or the second frame. It is provided with an abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) that controls the first sound device to notify an abnormality. That is, the first acoustic device is provided in the first frame body and does not rotate with the second frame body to be opened. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound from the first sound device is not output to the player who plays the game in the adjacent seat. As a result, the risk that the player is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the game machine being played from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

(2) The detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290) of the pachinko machine 10 include a first detection device (second monitoring device 290) that detects the opening of the first frame body (inner frame 13). It is provided with a second detection device (first monitoring device 250) that detects the opening of the second frame body (front door frame 14). Therefore, even if any of the first and second frames is opened, the opening can be detected and an abnormality can be notified.

(3) The first frame body (inner frame 13) of the pachinko machine 10 has a game board (game board 81) through which the game ball flows down, and the first sound device (speaker units 26D, 26E) is the first frame. It is provided on the game board of the body (inner frame 13). Therefore, the degree of freedom in the arrangement position (layout) of the first acoustic device is improved. Further, since it is attached to the game board, the first acoustic device can be easily attached.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. By making the volume lower than the notification sound reproduction volume of other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I try to reduce the risk of thinking. In the present embodiment, a cover member for attenuating the notification sound when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened is provided, and any one of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is provided by the cover member. By making the reproduction volume of one or more notification sounds lower than the notification sound reproduction volume of other audio devices, the risk that the player playing the game in the next seat will be annoyed by the abnormal notification sound is reduced. Will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Outlined configuration of speaker and cover members included in the game machine>
FIG. 61 is a schematic configuration diagram of the speaker portion 26A and the cover member 27 included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the speaker portion 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 (hereinafter, 61 (b) is a front view of a state in which the speaker portion 26A is covered by the cover member 27 (hereinafter, also referred to as a second state), FIG. 61 (c) is a front view of the first state. 61 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX, and FIG. 61 (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line YY of FIG.

The cover member 27 is attached to the pachinko machine 10 and has a plate-shaped first member 27a (front member) facing the speaker portion 26A and a lower side to the back side (back side) of the first member 27a. A plate-shaped second member 27b (lower side surface member) extending in the direction of the first member 27a and a plate-shaped second member 27b extending in the direction from the upper side to the back surface side (back side) of the first member 27a and facing the second member 27b. 3rd member 27c (upper side member) and a plate extending in the direction from the left side side of the first member 27a to the back side side (back side side) and connecting the second member 27b and the left side side of the third member 27c. It is a box-shaped member that is composed of a fourth member 27d (left side member) and has an open right side. Further, the second member 27b of the cover member 27 is provided with a slide gear 27e that meshes with the drive gear 30a of the cover member drive unit 30, which will be described later.

Further, an origin projection 27f1 for the origin detection sensor 28 is provided at the left end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27, and a maximum point detection sensor 29 is provided at the right end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27. The maximum point protrusion 27f2 is provided. Here, the origin detection sensor 28 is provided at the position of the origin projection 27f1 of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 when the cover member 27 is in the first state (origin position). Further, the maximum point detection sensor 29 is provided at the position of the maximum point projection 27f2 of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 when the cover member 27 is in the second state (maximum point position).

In the present embodiment, a rack-and-opinion method is adopted as a configuration for driving the cover member 27, and the cover member 27 is covered by the cover member 27 in the vicinity of the cover member 27, and the speaker portion 26A is covered by the cover member 27. A cover member driving unit 30 is provided for changing the first state (origin position) that is not set and the second state (maximum point position) in which the speaker unit 26A is covered by the cover member 27.
The cover member drive unit 30 includes a cover member drive motor (not shown) and a drive gear 30a which is a gear, and when the cover member drive motor is driven, it meshes with the slide gear 27e of the cover member 27. The drive gear 30a rotates to drive the cover member 27, and the position of the cover member 27 changes between the first state and the second state.

The cover member drive motor is, for example, a stepping motor, which is driven by a pulse signal applied from a driver (not shown) to drive and rotate the drive gear 30a at a predetermined step angle. Instead of the stepping motor, a DC motor or the like with an encoder that detects the amount of rotation may be used. The drive mechanism of the cover member 27 can be configured at a lower cost than the stepping motor.

The slide gear 27e is obtained by cutting the second member of the cover member 27 into teeth, and is tooth-engaged to the drive gear 30a so that it can reciprocate in the left-right direction as the drive gear 30a rotates. .. Therefore, by driving and rotating the drive gear 30a in step units by the cover member drive motor, the slide gear 27e moves in the left-right direction in step units, and accordingly, the cover member 27 is moved from the origin position to the maximum point. It can be driven within the range up to the position.

Further, on the right side of the speaker portion 26A of the front door frame 14, two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 formed so as to project to the front side are formed. The two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 are formed so as to be separated by a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the speaker portion 26A. The two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 cooperate with the cover member 27 to guide the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A to the opening 14d formed on the right side surface of the front door frame 14. Functions as. That is, in the first state in which the speaker portion 26A is not covered by the cover member 27, the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A is transmitted from the opening 14c provided on the front side of the front door frame 14 to the front door frame 14. It is radiated forward. On the other hand, in the second state in which the speaker portion 26A is covered by the cover member 27, the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A is the front door frame by the guide path 14e formed by the cover member 27 and the rib portions 14b1 and 14b2. It is guided to the opening 14d formed on the right side surface of 14, and is radiated from the opening 14d of the front door frame 14 toward the right side of the front door frame 14.

<Outline configuration of origin detection sensor>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an origin detection sensor.
Next, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 28 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 28. Since the maximum point detection sensor 29 has the same configuration as the origin detection sensor 28, the description thereof will be omitted.

The origin detection sensor 28 includes a light emitting element mounting portion 28a to which a light emitting element (not shown) is attached, a light receiving element mounting portion 28b to which a light receiving element (not shown) is attached, and one end of the light emitting element mounting portion 28a. It is a U-shaped sensor composed of a connecting portion 28c that connects one end of the light receiving element mounting portion 28b so that the light emitting element and the light receiving element are arranged so as to face each other at a predetermined distance from each other. The detection groove 28d is formed by the portion 28a, the light receiving element mounting portion 28b, and the connecting portion 28c.

When there is no insert (protrusion for origin 27f1) in the detection groove 28d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element mounting portion 28a is directly received by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element mounting portion 28b. To. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 28d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element mounting portion 28a is blocked, and the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element mounting portion 28b receives the light. Can not. The origin detection sensor 28 outputs an off signal when light is received by the light receiving element and an on signal when it does not receive light, so that in the voice emission control device 400 that receives the signal, something is formed in the detection groove 28d. It can be determined whether or not the insert has been inserted.

In the origin detection sensor 28, the light emitting element mounting portion 28a is arranged on the front side in front view, the light receiving element mounting portion 28b is arranged on the rear surface side in front view, the connecting portion 28c is arranged on the lower side in front view, and the cover member 27 is at the origin position. The origin projection 27f1 provided at the left end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 is inserted into the detection groove 28d, so that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. There is. Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 28 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the origin detection sensor 28 outputs an on signal, so that the voice emission control device 400 can perform the sound emission control device 400. It can be determined that the cover member 27 has reached the origin position.

Further, the maximum point detection sensor 29 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 28, the cover member 27 is at the maximum point position, and the maximum point protrusion provided at the right end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27. The 27f2 is attached so as to block the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element by being inserted into the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 29. Therefore, when the maximum point detection sensor 29 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the maximum point detection sensor 29 outputs an on signal to control the sound emission control device. The 400 can determine that the cover member 27 has reached the maximum point position.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device>
FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes an origin detection sensor 28 and a maximum point detection sensor 29. The origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 are connected to the input port of the voice emission control board 401, and the on signal output from the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 is sent to the voice emission control board 401. Is entered. The MPU 402 is in a state in which the cover member 27 is in the origin position, in other words, the speaker portion 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 (first state) by the on signal output from the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29. It is determined whether the cover member 27 is in the maximum point position, in other words, the speaker portion 26A is in a state of being covered by the cover member 27 (second state).

Further, the cover member driving unit 30 is connected to the output port of the voice emission control board 401. The cover member drive unit 30 drives the cover member 27 between the origin position and the maximum point position based on the control signal from the MPU 402 input via the output port of the sound emission control board 401, and the speaker unit 26A The first state not covered by the cover member 27 and the second state in which the speaker portion 26A is covered by the cover member 27 are changed.

In this embodiment, since the reproduced sound output from the speaker unit 26A is attenuated by the cover member 27, unlike the first embodiment, a parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412. The value of is not different between the speaker unit 26A and the speaker units 26B and 26C. In other words, the values of the parameters that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412 are the same in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

<Connection relationship between the DAC and speaker section of the sound output LSI>
FIG. 64 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC 403d and the speaker units 26A to 26C included in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
In the example shown in FIG. 64, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in order to attenuate the reproduced sound output from the speaker unit 26A by the cover member 27, the analog signal output to the speaker units 26A to 26C can be amplified by the common amplifier circuit 403d2. It is not necessary to prepare different amplifier circuits for the speaker units 26A to 26C as in the first embodiment. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (op amps) can be reduced, and the load of arithmetic processing of the MPU 402 can be reduced because it is not necessary to control each of a plurality of amplifier circuits.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the analog signal output to the speaker units 26A to 26C is amplified by the common amplifier circuit 403d2, the program for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 and the program. It is not necessary to prepare parameter data for each of the speaker units 26A to 26C that defines the playback volume of the processing data in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the opening of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is detected by the first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290, any one or more of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C ( In the present embodiment, the cover member 27 provided at or near the speaker unit 26A) changes from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound output from the speaker unit 26A to the front is attenuated by the cover member 27 and becomes smaller. As a result, the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. Further, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the pachinko machine 10 being played from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the pachinko machine 10 are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is reduced.

<Abnormality notification processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormality notifications will be omitted.

In step S2501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2501 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2504. Further, when it is determined in step S2501 that the MPU 402 has received the power recovery notification command (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2502. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 provides a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2503, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in a state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed). That is, since the front door frame 14 is not in a state of being opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat feels annoyed with the abnormality notification. Therefore, in the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery, the MPU 402 performs the abnormality notification without driving the cover member 27 from the origin position to the maximum point position. In other words, the MPU 402 performs abnormality notification in the first state in which the speaker unit 26A is not covered by the cover member 27. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the front of the front door frame 14.

In step S2504, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the normal time notification commands in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 are stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2504 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2510 described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2504 that it has received the normal notification command (YES), the MPU 402 controls the cover member driving unit 30 in step S2505 to move the position of the cover member 27 from the origin position. Drive to the maximum point position. In other words, the MPU 402 controls the cover member driving unit 30 to change from the first state in which the speaker unit 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 to the second state in which the speaker unit 26A is covered by the cover member 27. Let me. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14.

In step S2506, the MPU 402 transmits a normal time notification command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal time notification command.
Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2507, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S2508, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM playback is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM playback when the door opening notification is released. When restarting the playback of the BGM when the door opening notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts the playback of the BGM from the address, thereby restarting the playback from the position where the BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that no sound is output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2509, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S2503 or step S2507. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data that started reading in step S2503 or step S2507 and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is the speaker unit 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from ~ 26C. As a result, an abnormality notification (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, and "The door is open!" Is heard from the speaker units 26A to 26C. And the output of the warning sound) is started. Further, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2503 or step S2507. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2510, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit release command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the back pack unit release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2510 that the back pack unit release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2512. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2510 that it has received the back pack unit release command (YES), in step S2511 the MPU 402 will notify an abnormality (normal time notification) output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Instruct the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the playback volume of the voice and warning sound such as "The door is open!" Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce the reproduction volume such as the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, the control for reducing the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification or the like output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2511 may be controlled so as to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the speakers. Only the playback volume of the specific speaker unit 26A among the units 26A to 26C, for example, the speaker unit 26A closest to the ear of the player playing in the left adjacent seat when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened is reduced. It may be controlled to. In step S1610, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be reduced, the sound output LSI 403 opens the back pack unit 15 with a parameter that defines the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. By updating to the parameter of the case and reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. When controlling so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker unit 26A. (In this case, a dedicated amplifier circuit is provided in the speaker unit 26A).

In step S2512, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the door opening notification release command transmitted from the MPU 302 to release the door opening notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door opening notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2512 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S2513.
If the MPU 402 determines in step S2512 that it has received the door open notification release command (YES), the MPU 402 controls the cover member drive unit 30 in step S2513 to position the cover member 27. Is driven from the maximum point position to the origin position. In other words, the MPU 402 controls the cover member drive unit 30 to change from the second state in which the speaker unit 26A is covered by the cover member 27 to the first state in which the speaker unit 26A is not covered by the cover member 27. Let me. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the front of the front door frame 14.

In step S2514, the MPU 402 transmits a door opening notification release command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2515, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door opening notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S2515, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads and reproduces the voice data “door closed!” From the common ROM 404. As a result, the voice "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2516, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S2517, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2508. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S2508, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM from the address. Playback resumes from the position. Further, when the BGM is muted in step S2508, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2508, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for production) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the playback is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. The process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value may be performed. In this case, in step S2509, when the sound data whose reading was started in step S2503 or step S2507 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or the warning sound is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may. Further, in step S2508, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the playback is continued without stopping the BGM, the playback of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S2515. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2517, when the playback of the BGM is restarted, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. With this configuration, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and it is possible to return without causing a sense of discomfort due to switching to BGM.

Further, in the above description, in step S2510, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command is received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command is received (YES), the process of step S2511 is executed. Therefore, the playback volume of the warning sound and the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must open the back pack unit 15 after opening the inner frame 13, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15, so that the inner frame 13 is opened. There is a high possibility that the back pack unit 15 will be opened for maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal profits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside. Since it takes time to perform this, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has received the back pack unit release command, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is open. In this case, the warning sound and the like are reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is opened not for maintenance but for fraud. In addition, the processing of steps S2510 and S2511 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 has the left side of the outer frame 11. It is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 as a support side. When opening the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is opened so as to rotate forward (player side) with the support side as a rotation axis. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat, and the speaker unit 26A of the player playing in the left adjacent seat Closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the speaker portion 26A is in a second state of being covered with the cover member 27 when notifying an abnormality that the door is open.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. If it is supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, they should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the right seat. In this case, the cover member 27, the cover member driving unit 30, the origin detection sensor 28, and the maximum point detection sensor 29 are provided in the vicinity of the speaker portion 26B, and the rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 constituting the guideway 14e are formed. The speaker unit 26B is configured to be in the second state covered with the cover member 27 when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. Further, in this case, the opening 14d is formed on the left side surface of the front door frame 14, and the notification sound is radiated from the left side surface of the front door frame 14.

Further, the front door frame 14 is supported on both side portions of the inner frame 13 with the right side portion and the left side portion (hereinafter, also referred to as both side portions) of the inner frame 13 as support sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both side portions of the outer frame 11. In other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double door structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected when the pachinko machine 10 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects to which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided. Based on the detection result in the above, either the speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B may be configured to be in the second state covered with the cover member 27.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the left side as the support side, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is made to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat. It will be opened, and the speaker unit 26A will be closest to the ear of the player playing in the left seat. Therefore, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the speaker unit 26A may be set as the second state covered with the cover member 27, and the alarm sound and the sound notifying the abnormality may be reproduced.
Further, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. , The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the right seat. Therefore, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the speaker unit 26B may be set as the second state covered with the cover member 27, and the alarm sound and the sound notifying the abnormality may be reproduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide path 14e is formed on the right side of the speaker unit 26A, and the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14. The direction in which the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the 26A is emitted may be a direction other than the front surface of the front door frame 14. For example, a guide path 14e is formed above the speaker portion 26A and is reproduced by the speaker portion 26A. An abnormality notification sound may be emitted toward the upper side of the front door frame 14. When the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, a guide path 14e is formed on the left side of the speaker portion 26B, and the abnormal notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26B is emitted from the front door. It may be configured to be radiated toward the left side of the frame 14, a taxiway 14e is formed on the upper side of the speaker portion 26B, and an abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26B is radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14. It may be configured as a speaker.

In the present embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured so as not to emit light, the indicator lamp device 23A is used in the normal time notification process while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process. , 23B may be configured to stop the supply of light emitting power to the light emitters of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B so that the light is not emitted. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 It may be configured so as not to emit light. Also in this case, the light emission data of the normal time notification process may be defined so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the inner frame 13 or the front door may be specified. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body of the indicator lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 may be stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is bothered by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of audio devices (speaker units) provided on the frame body. 26A to 26C), detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and when the detection device detects the opening of the frame, a plurality of acoustic devices notify the abnormality. It has an abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403), a first state provided in one or more of a plurality of acoustic devices or in the vicinity thereof and not covering the acoustic device, and a second state covering the acoustic device. It includes a cover member (cover member 27) and a driving means (cover member driving unit 30) that changes the cover member from the first state to the second state when the detection device detects the opening of the frame body. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound output forward from the sound device (speaker unit 26A) is attenuated by the cover member (cover member 27) and becomes smaller. As a result, the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the game machine being played from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

(2) When the pachinko machine 10 is in the second state of covering the sound device (speaker section 26A), the pachinko machine 10 outputs an abnormality notification sound output from the sound device (speaker section 26A or speaker sections 26B, 26C) into a frame (inner frame). 13. It has a taxiway (14b) that guides the front door frame 14) in a direction other than the front. Therefore, when the cover member (cover member 27) is in the second state of covering the acoustic device, the abnormality notification sound output from the acoustic device is emitted from the guide path in a direction other than the front of the frame, for example, the side of the pachinko machine 10. It is guided to the direction (side surface side), upward (top surface side), and downward (bottom surface side). Therefore, when the frame of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, the risk of annoying the abnormality notification sound to the player located in front of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. Further, since the induced abnormality notification sound is output from a direction other than the front of the frame, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the hall operator or employee misses the abnormality notification.

(3) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported on one of the right side or the left side of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side or the left side as the support side. The cover member (cover member 27) is a sound device (speaker unit 26A or speaker units 26B, 26C) or a sound device (speaker unit 26B, 26C) arranged on a side different from the support side among a plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C). It is provided in the vicinity. Therefore, the volume of the sound device arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame body, in other words, a side closer to the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened, is reduced by the cover member 27. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty in hearing the music and voice output from the game machine being played due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. By making the volume lower than the notification sound reproduction volume of other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I try to reduce the risk of thinking. In the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the direction of the speaker unit is changed to output from any one or more of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. The radiation direction of the reproduced sound is changed. A pachinko machine 10 will be described in which the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Outlined configuration of speaker and cover members included in the game machine>
FIG. 66 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a partial cross-sectional view of the line segment ZZ of FIG. 66, and shows a schematic configuration diagram showing a speaker unit and its peripheral structure included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 (a) is a partial cross-sectional plan view showing a first state in which the speaker unit 26A faces the front of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 67 (b) shows the direction of the speaker unit 26A of the pachinko machine 10 (front door). In FIG. 67 (c), a partial cross-sectional plan view showing the process of changing from the front surface to the right side surface of the frame 14), the speaker unit 26A faces the right side surface of the pachinko machine 10 (front door frame 14). It is a partial cross-sectional plan view which shows 2 states. As shown in FIG. 67, the speaker unit 26A includes a cone paper 26a and a cone paper vibration unit 26b, and is configured to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 26c by the speaker unit drive unit 26d.

When the game is being played without any abnormality or when the abnormality is notified at the time of power recovery, as shown in FIG. 67A, the speaker unit 26A has the cone paper 26a in front of the front door frame 14 (front side). ) Is facing (first state), and BGM, sound effects, and abnormality notification (for example, "power supply") are transmitted through the opening 14c formed in the area on the front side of the front door frame 14 facing the speaker portion 26A. The door was opened during the shutoff! ”, Etc.) is output toward the front (player) of the front door frame 14.

On the other hand, in the normal time abnormality notification, a normal time notification command indicating that fact is output from the main control device 300 to the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 outputs a signal for generating an abnormality notification to the speaker units 26A to 26C and outputs a drive signal to the speaker unit drive unit 26d based on the reception of the normal time notification command. The speaker unit 26A is rotated counterclockwise (CCW) about the rotation shaft 26c, and is controlled so as to face the right side of the front door frame 14. As a result, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the speaker unit 26A rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 26c, and finally, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the speaker unit 26A It is in a state of being rotated by about 90 degrees, in other words, a state in which the speaker unit 26A faces the right side surface of the front door frame 14 (second state). In this state, constant notification (for example, "the door is open while the power is cut off!") Is sent through the opening 14d formed in the area on the right side of the front door frame 14 facing the speaker portion 26A. It is output toward the right side of 14 (the direction in which there is no player).

Here, the speaker unit drive unit 26d is configured by, for example, a stepping motor, is driven by a pulse signal applied from a driver (not shown), and drives and rotates the speaker unit 26A at a predetermined step angle. Instead of the stepping motor, a DC motor or the like with an encoder that detects the amount of rotation may be used. The drive mechanism of the speaker unit 26A can be configured at a lower cost than the stepping motor.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is also formed so as to project to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 on the right side of the speaker portion 26A of the front door frame 14 as in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. Two rib portions may be formed, and a guide path may be provided to guide the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A to the opening 14d formed on the right side surface of the front door frame 14. By providing the taxiway in this way, it is possible to reduce the component radiated to the front side of the front door frame 14 in the reproduced sound output from the speaker unit 26A in the abnormality notification in the normal time.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device>
FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a speaker unit drive unit 26d that changes the direction of the speaker unit 26A. The speaker unit drive unit 26d is connected to the output port of the voice emission control board 401. The speaker unit drive unit 26d is in the first state and front in which the speaker unit 26A faces the front of the front door frame 14 based on the control signal from the MPU 402 input via the output port of the voice emission control board 401. The door frame 14 is changed from the second state facing other than the front.

In the present embodiment, the speaker unit drive unit 26d changes the direction of the speaker unit 26A from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14. , Unlike the first embodiment, the values of the parameters that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412 are not different between the speaker unit 26A and the speaker units 26B and 26C. In other words, the values of the parameters that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412 are the same in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

<Connection relationship between the DAC and speaker section of the sound output LSI>
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in order to change the radiation direction of the reproduced sound output from the speaker unit 26A by the speaker unit drive unit 26d, different amplifier circuits are prepared for the speaker units 26A to 26C as in the first embodiment. You don't have to. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described with reference to FIG. 64, and the DAC403d is a digital input from the sound data processing unit. A DAC circuit 403d that converts a signal into an analog signal and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d are provided, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C. To. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare different amplifier circuits for the speaker units 26A to 26C as in the first embodiment. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (op amps) can be reduced, and the load of arithmetic processing of the MPU 402 can be reduced because it is not necessary to control each of a plurality of amplifier circuits.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the analog signal output to the speaker units 26A to 26C is amplified by the common amplifier circuit 403d2a, a program and processing for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412. It is not necessary to prepare parameter data for each of the speaker units 26A to 26C, which defines the playback volume of the data for the speaker units 26A to 26C.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the opening of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is detected by the first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290, the speaker unit drive unit 26d among the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. From the first state in which any one or more of the above (speaker unit 26A in the present embodiment) faces the front of the front door frame 14, the second state in which the direction other than the front of the front door frame 14 (right side in the present embodiment) faces. Change to. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound is not output to the player located in front of the frame body, in other words, the player playing the game in the adjacent seat. Therefore, the possibility that the player is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the game machine being played from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

<Abnormality notification processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormality notifications will be omitted.

In step S2601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When it is determined in step S2601 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2604. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2601 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2602. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 provides a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2603, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in a state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed). That is, since the front door frame 14 is not in a state of being opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat feels annoyed with the abnormality notification. Therefore, in the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery, the MPU 402 performs the abnormality notification without changing the direction of the speaker unit 26A from the first state to the second state. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the front of the front door frame 14.

In step S2604, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the normal time notification commands in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 are stored. When it is determined in step S2604 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2610 described later. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2604 that it has received the normal time notification command (YES), the MPU 402 controls the speaker unit drive unit 26d in step S2605 to direct the speaker unit 26A to the front door frame. The first state of the 14 facing forward is changed to the second state of the front door frame 14 facing other than the front. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14.

In step S2606, the MPU 402 transmits a normal time notification command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal time notification command.
Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2607, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. Here, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S2608, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM playback is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM playback when the door opening notification is released. When restarting the playback of the BGM when the door opening notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts the playback of the BGM from the address, thereby restarting the playback from the position where the BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that no sound is output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2609, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S2603 or step S2607. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data that started reading in step S2603 or step S2607 and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is the speaker unit 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from ~ 26C. As a result, an abnormality notification (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, and "The door is open!" Is heard from the speaker units 26A to 26C. And the output of the warning sound) is started. Further, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2603 or step S2607. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2610, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit release command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the back pack unit release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2610 that the back pack unit release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2612. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2610 that it has received the back pack unit release command (YES), in step S2611 the MPU 402 will notify the abnormality (normal time notification) output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Instruct the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the playback volume of the voice and warning sound such as "The door is open!" Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce the reproduction volume such as the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, the control for reducing the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification or the like output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2611 may be controlled so as to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the speakers. Only the playback volume of the specific speaker unit 26A among the units 26A to 26C, for example, the speaker unit 26A closest to the ear of the player playing in the left adjacent seat when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened is reduced. It may be controlled to. In step S2611, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be reduced, the sound output LSI 403 opens the back pack unit 15 with a parameter that defines the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. By updating to the parameter of the case and reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. When controlling so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker unit 26A. To control.

In step S2612, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the door opening notification release command transmitted from the MPU 302 to release the door opening notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door opening notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2612 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S2613.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S2612 that it has received the door open notification release command (YES), the MPU 402 controls the speaker unit drive unit 26d in step S2613 to control the front door frame 14. The direction of the speaker unit 26A is changed (returned) from the second state facing other than the front to the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the front of the front door frame 14.

In step S2614, the MPU 402 transmits a door opening notification release command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2615, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door opening notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S2615, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads and reproduces the voice data “door closed!” From the common ROM 404. As a result, the voice "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2617, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S2618, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2608. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S2608, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM from the address. Playback resumes from the position. If the BGM has been muted in step S2608, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2608, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the playback is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. The process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value may be performed. In this case, in step S2609, when the sound data started to be read in step S2603 or step S2607 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or the warning sound is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may. Further, in step S2608, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the playback is continued without stopping the BGM, the playback of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S2615. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2617, when the BGM playback is restarted, the BGM playback volume is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. With this configuration, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and it is possible to return without causing a sense of discomfort due to switching to BGM.

Further, in the above description, in step S2610, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command is received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command is received (YES), the process of step S2611 is executed. Therefore, the playback volume of the warning sound and the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must open the back pack unit 15 after opening the inner frame 13, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15, so that the inner frame 13 is opened. There is a high possibility that the back pack unit 15 will be opened for maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal profits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside. Since it takes time to perform this, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has received the back pack unit release command, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is open. In this case, the warning sound and the like are reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is opened not for maintenance but for fraud. In addition, the processing of steps S2610 and S2611 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 has the left side of the outer frame 11. It is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 as a support side. When opening the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is opened so as to rotate forward (player side) with the support side as a rotation axis. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat, and the speaker unit 26A of the player playing in the left adjacent seat Closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when notifying an abnormality that the door is open, the speaker unit 26A is directed to the front of the front door frame 14 from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14. It is changing to the second state facing other than.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. If it is supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, they should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the right seat. In this case, the direction of the speaker unit 26B is changed from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14.

Further, the front door frame 14 is supported on both side portions of the inner frame 13 with the right side portion and the left side portion (hereinafter, also referred to as both side portions) of the inner frame 13 as support sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both side portions of the outer frame 11. In other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double door structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected when the pachinko machine 10 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects to which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided. Based on the detection result in, the direction of the speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B is changed from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the left side as the support side, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is made to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat. It will be opened, and the speaker unit 26A will be closest to the ear of the player playing in the left seat. Therefore, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the direction of the speaker unit 26A changes from the first state in which the front door frame 14 faces the front to the second state in which the front door frame 14 faces other than the front. Change.
Further, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. , The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the right seat. Therefore, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the direction of the speaker unit 26B changes from the first state in which the front door frame 14 faces the front to the second state in which the front door frame 14 faces other than the front. Change.

Further, in the present embodiment, by changing the direction of the speaker unit 26A to the right side surface of the front door frame 14, the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14. However, the direction in which the abnormal notification sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is emitted may be a direction other than the front surface of the front door frame 14, for example, the direction of the speaker unit 26A is changed to the upper side of the front door frame 14. By doing so, the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26A may be radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14. When the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, the speaker unit 26B reproduces the sound by changing the direction of the speaker unit 26B to the left side surface of the front door frame 14. The abnormality notification sound may be radiated toward the left side of the front door frame 14, and by changing the direction of the speaker unit 26B to the upper side of the front door frame 14, the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26B can be generated. It may be configured to be radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14.

In the present embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured so as not to emit light, the indicator lamp device 23A is used in the normal time notification process while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process. , 23B may be configured to stop the supply of light emitting power to the light emitters of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B so that the light is not emitted. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 It may be configured so as not to emit light. Also in this case, the light emission data of the normal time notification process may be defined so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the inner frame 13 or the front door may be specified. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body of the indicator lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 may be stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is bothered by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of sound devices (speaker units) provided on the frame body. 26A to 26C), detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and when the detection device detects the opening of the frame, a plurality of acoustic devices notify the abnormality. When the abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) and the detection device detect the opening of the frame, one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices are oriented from the first state facing the front of the frame. It is provided with a driving means (speaker unit driving unit 26d) for changing to a second state facing other than the front of the frame body.
That is, when the detection device detects the opening of the frame, the orientation of any one or more of the plurality of sound devices changes from the first state to the second state, and the player located in front of the frame, In other words, the abnormality notification sound is not output to the player who plays the game in the next seat. Therefore, the possibility that the player is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the game machine being played from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

(2) When the sound device (speaker units 26A to 26C) is in the second state, the pachinko machine 10 provides a taxiway that guides an abnormality notification sound output from the sound device in a direction other than the front of the frame. Be prepared. Therefore, when the acoustic device is in the second state, the abnormal notification sound output from the acoustic device is emitted from the guide path in a direction other than the front of the frame, for example, the side (side surface side) and the upper side (upper surface side) of the gaming machine. ), It is guided downward (bottom side). Therefore, when the frame of the game machine is opened, the risk of annoying the abnormality notification sound to the player located in front is reduced. Further, since the induced abnormality notification sound is output from a direction other than the front of the frame, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the hall operator or employee misses the abnormality notification.

(3) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is the fixed frame (outer frame 13) with either the right side portion or the left side portion as the support side. It is supported by either the right side portion or the left side portion of the frame 11), and the driving means (speaker unit driving unit 26d) is arranged on a side of a plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) different from the supporting side. The direction of the sound device (speaker unit 26A or speaker units 26B, 26C) is changed. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty in hearing the music and voice output from the game machine being played due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. By making the volume lower than the notification sound reproduction volume of other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I try to reduce the risk of thinking. In the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. A pachinko machine 10 will be described in which the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Connection relationship between the DAC and speaker section of the sound output LSI>
In the present embodiment, in order to notify that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. Unlike the embodiment, the values of the parameters that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412 are not different between the speaker unit 26A and the speaker units 26B and 26C. In other words, the values of the parameters that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412 are the same in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

FIG. 70 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC 403d and the speaker units 26A to 26C included in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
In the example shown in FIG. 70, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, different amplifier circuits are not prepared for the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (op amps) can be reduced, and the load of arithmetic processing of the MPU 402 can be reduced because it is not necessary to control each of a plurality of amplifier circuits.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the analog signal output to the speaker units 26A to 26C is amplified by the common amplifier circuit 403d2a, the program for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 and the program. Parameter data that defines the playback volume of the processing data in the speaker units 26A to 26C is not prepared for each speaker unit 26A to 26C.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound output forward from the speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. As a result, the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. Further, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the pachinko machine 10 being played from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the pachinko machine 10 are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is reduced.

<About the time change of the playback volume of the speaker section>
FIG. 71 is a conceptual diagram of the time change of the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As described above, the MPU 402 of the pachinko machine 10 gradually or gradually reduces the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened. Control so that it becomes smaller. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71, the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced at a constant rate (for example, by 1db) at predetermined time intervals T (for example, 5 sec).

The time interval T for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is not limited to 5 sec and is arbitrary. However, if the time interval T for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is too long, It is preferable that the length is not too long because the player sitting next to the seat may be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced every time the sound of the abnormality notification (for example, "the door is open!") Is played, instead of the time interval. You may do so.

<Abnormality notification processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, an abnormality notification process when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormality notifications will be omitted.

In step S2701, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2701 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2705. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2701 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2702. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received power recovery notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 provides a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2703, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in a state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed). That is, since the front door frame 14 is not in a state of being opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat feels annoyed with the abnormality notification. For this reason, in the program for notification at the time of power recovery and the processing data, processing is performed to gradually or gradually reduce the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying an abnormality that the door is open. Absent.

In step S2704, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S2703. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data started to be read in step S2703 and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is transmitted from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it is output. As a result, abnormality notification (for example, output of a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" And a warning sound) is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 causes the error display lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2703.

In step S2705, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the normal time notification commands in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 are stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2705 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2712 described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2705 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2706. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal time notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2707, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. Here, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S2708, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM playback is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM playback when the door opening notification is released. When restarting the playback of the BGM when the door opening notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts the playback of the BGM from the address, thereby restarting the playback from the position where the BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that no sound is output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2709, the MPU 402 sets a counter to measure the number of times the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the number of times to reduce the reproduction volume in the counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 413. For example, when "4" is set in the counter, the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced in five steps. The value set in this counter is subtracted by 1 each time a predetermined time described with reference to FIG. 73 elapses, and when the value becomes zero, the process of reducing the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually decreased, but if the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C becomes too small, the abnormality notification becomes meaningless. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the counter in step S2709, the number of times the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced is set, and the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C becomes too small, which is abnormal. It prevents the notification from becoming meaningless. Although the value of the counter set in step S2709 is not limited, it is preferable that the value is set so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C does not become too low.

In step S2710, the MPU 402 performs sound data reproduction processing. In the sound data reproduction process of step S2710, the MPU 402 controls so that the volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. The details of the sound data reproduction process in step S2710 will be described with reference to FIG. 73, which will be described later.

In step S2711, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2707. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2712, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the door opening notification release command transmitted from the MPU 302 to release the door opening notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door opening notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2712 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S2713.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S2712 that the door opening notification release command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the door opening notification release command to the display control device 500 in step S2713. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2714, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door opening notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S2714, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads and reproduces the voice data “door closed!” From the common ROM 404. As a result, the voice "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2715, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S2716, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2708. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S2708, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM from the address. Playback resumes from the position. If the BGM has been muted in step S2708, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2708, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the playback is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. The process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value may be performed. Further, in step S2708, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the playback is continued without stopping the BGM, the reproduction of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S2714. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2716, when the playback of the BGM is restarted, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. With this configuration, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and it is possible to return without causing a sense of discomfort due to switching to BGM.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C gradually or gradually decreases with the passage of time, as will be described with reference to FIG. 73 described later. .. Therefore, it is not determined whether or not the back pack unit release command is received. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment with the back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15. In this embodiment as well, as in the other embodiments, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command is received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command is received (YES), a warning is given. It may be configured to reduce the reproduction volume of sound or the like (two-step control). This further reduces the risk that the player playing the game in the next seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound during time-consuming maintenance or the like. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is opened not for maintenance but for fraud.

<Sound data reproduction processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the sound data reproduction process (process of step S2710) of FIG. 72.
In step S2801, the MPU 402 sets a timer counter to measure the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets "2500" as a time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C in the timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is 5 sec. The time interval for reducing the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. However, if the time interval for reducing the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is too long, the next seat It is preferable not to make it too long because the sitting player may be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound.

In step S2802, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) the sound data whose reading was started in step S2707 of FIG. 72. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data that started reading in step S2707 and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is transmitted from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it is output. As a result, abnormality notification (for example, output of a voice such as "the door is open!" And a warning sound) is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2803, the MPU 402 subtracts 1 from the counter value set in step S2708 of FIG. For example, if the values of the counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 413 are set to 4 in step S2708 of FIG. 72, the MPU 402 sets the values of the counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 413 to 3. Update to.

In step S2804, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter set in step S2801 is zero. If the value of the timer counter is not zero (NO) in step S2804, the MPU 402 ends the sound data reproduction process without performing the subsequent processing. When the value of the timer counter is zero (YES) in step S2804, the MPU 402 reduces the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. More specifically, the MPU 402 changes the value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a to reduce the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C (step S2805).

In step S2806, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the counter set in step S2709 of FIG. 72 is zero. If the value of the counter is not zero (NO) in step S2806, the MPU 402 ends the sound data reproduction process without performing the subsequent processing. When the value of the counter is zero (YES) in step S2806, the MPU 402 prevents the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C from becoming lower than this. More specifically, in the MPU 402, the value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is fixed in the subsequent processing.

[Other Examples of Fifth Embodiment]
In the above description, the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10 is gradually or gradually reduced, but the volume output (reproduced) from each of the speaker units 26A to 26C. The size of the speaker may be controlled independently. In other words, like the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 38, the DAC 403d is converted by the DAC circuit 403d1 that converts the digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal and the DAC circuit 403d1. The amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c for amplifying the analog signal are provided, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker unit 26A, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2b is output to the speaker unit 26B. The analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2c may be configured to be output to the speaker unit 26C.
In this case, in the audio data reproduction process (process in step S2710 of FIG. 72) described with reference to FIG. 73, only the volume parameter of the amplifier circuit 403d2a that outputs the analog signal to the speaker unit 26A is set every predetermined time or the predetermined number of notifications. It is controlled so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A is gradually or gradually reduced by changing each time.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the left side of the outer frame 11. Since the portion is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 with the portion as the support side, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, the support side is used as the rotation axis and the front side (player side). ) To open by rotating. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat, and the speaker unit 26A of the player playing in the left adjacent seat Closest to the ear. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the loudness of the volume output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C can be controlled independently as described above. Only the volume parameter of the amplifier circuit 403d2a that outputs an analog signal to the speaker unit 26A is changed every predetermined time or every predetermined number of notifications, and the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A gradually or gradually decreases. It should be controlled as follows.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. If it is supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, they should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the right seat. In this case, the volume parameter of the amplifier circuit 403d2b that outputs an analog signal to the speaker units 26B and 26C is changed every predetermined time or every predetermined number of notifications, and the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26B is stepwise. Alternatively, control may be performed so as to gradually decrease.

Further, the front door frame 14 is supported on both side portions of the inner frame 13 with the right side portion and the left side portion (hereinafter, also referred to as both side portions) of the inner frame 13 as support sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both side portions of the outer frame 11. In other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double door structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected when the pachinko machine 10 is supported on both sides of the outer frame 11. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects to which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided. Based on the detection result in the above, control may be performed so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from either the speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B is gradually or gradually reduced.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the left side as the support side, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is made to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat. It will be opened, and the speaker unit 26A will be closest to the ear of the player playing in the left seat. Therefore, control is performed so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A when notifying the abnormality that the door is open is gradually or gradually reduced.
Further, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. , The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the right seat. Therefore, when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified, the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26B may be controlled so as to gradually or gradually decrease.

In the present embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured so as not to emit light, the indicator lamp device 23A is used in the normal time notification process while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process. , 23B may be configured to stop the supply of light emitting power to the light emitters of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B so that the light is not emitted. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the capacity for storing the light emission data can be reduced.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 It may be configured so as not to emit light. Also in this case, the light emission data of the normal time notification process may be defined so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the inner frame 13 or the front door may be specified. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body of the indicator lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 may be stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is bothered by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of audio devices (speaker units) provided on the frame body. 26A to 26C), detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and control of the plurality of acoustic devices when the detection device detects the opening of the frame. It is provided with an abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) for notifying an abnormality. The abnormality notifying means gradually or gradually reduces the volume of the plurality of sound devices when notifying the abnormality. That is, the notification is performed at a loud volume at first, but the volume is gradually or gradually reduced. Therefore, the operator of the hall effectively reduces the risk that the player sitting next to the seat will be annoyed by the abnormal notification sound. It is possible to reduce the risk that employees will miss the abnormality notification.

(2) The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) of the pachinko machine 10 makes the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) stepwise than the volume of the other acoustic devices. Or gradually reduce it. That is, when notifying an abnormality, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of sound devices is reduced, but the volume output from the other sound devices is not reduced, so that the music or voice output from the game machine is used. It is possible to reduce the risk that the player loses the exhilaration and immersive feeling that occurs and the player gets excited, and more effectively reduces the risk that the hall operator or employee misses the abnormality notification.

(3) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side or the left side as the support side. , The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) is a sound device (speaker unit 26A or speaker units 26B, 26C) arranged on a side different from the support side among a plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C). The volume is gradually or gradually reduced from the volume of another audio device (speaker units 26B, 26C or speaker unit 26A) (including an embodiment in which the reproduction volume is set to zero or substantially zero). Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty in hearing the music and voice output from the game machine being played due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the volume of the speaker units 26A to 26E, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed according to the parameters stored in the ROM 412, but the volume of the speaker units 26A to 26E is changed by the volume setting. It may be configured to cause.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the music data (BGM) and the audio data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are individually stored in the common ROM 404 of the audio emission control device 400, and the music used in the effects MA to MC. Separately from the data (BGM) A to C, the voice data A to C of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are read and output respectively. However, as explained with reference to FIG. 49, during the output of the intro part of the music used in the productions MA to MC, the sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are heard. Each is output. Therefore, the intro portion of the music data A to C may include the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. In the present embodiment, the present embodiment in which the intro portions of the music data A to C include the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively, will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Production data>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing music data stored in the common ROM 404. In the present embodiment, as described above, the intro portion of each of the music data A to C includes audio data of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. If you include a voice such as "Please hit right" in the intro part of the music, when you perform so-called loop processing, which is to return to the beginning and restart the output of music after the music playback ends, "Right hit" A voice such as "Please" is output even during a loop (during the second and subsequent playbacks). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is preferable not to include the intro portion in the loop processing.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the music data used in each of the effects MA to MC are divided into an intro portion and other loop portions. It is stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. More specifically, the music data A to C exclude the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data of only the intro part including the voice data such as "Please hit right", and the intro part. The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data after the A-melody portion are divided and stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404.

Then, for example, when the music data A used in the production MA is looped, the MPU 402 reproduces the music data of the intro portion and then continuously reproduces the music data of the loop portion at the time of outputting the music for the first time, and loops. When the music data of the part is completed, a process of outputting the music data of the loop part again (hereinafter, also referred to as a loop process) is performed. By performing the same processing as above for the music data B and C used in the production MB and MC, the voice such as "Please hit right" is played during the second and subsequent playbacks (loop) during the loop processing. It is prevented from being output even during processing).

The sound of "A RUSH rush" included in the intro part of music data A is set so that the output of the sound of "A RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of music data A ends. ing. Further, the sound of "B RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data B is set so that the output of the sound of "B RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data B ends. ing. Further, the sound of "C RUSH rush" included in the intro part of music data C is set so that the output of the sound of "C RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of music data C ends. ing.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 412, the music data A is associated with the effect MA, the music data B is associated with the effect MB, and the music data C is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 outputs the sound so as to read the music data A and output it from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Controls the LSI 403. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MB, the MPU 402 reads the music data B and outputs it from the speaker units 26A to 26C. To control. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MC, the MPU 402 reads the music data C and outputs it from the speaker units 26A to 26C. To control. More specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 based on the program and processing data stored in the ROM 412, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. .. The sound output LSI 403 outputs (reproduces) music data A to C from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the data set in the register 403b.

Further, the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 store sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data D and E. The MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 as necessary and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the voice data D and E are speakers. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output (reproduced) from units 26A to 26C. Here, the voice data D is the voice of "right-handed" and the voice data E is the voice of "please right-handed". Here, the audio data D is associated with the effect MA, and the audio data E is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 outputs sound so as to read the audio data D and output it from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Controls the LSI 403. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MC, the MPU 402 reads the audio data E and outputs the sound output LSI 403 from the speaker units 26A to 26C. To control.

<Transition process to production MA>
Next, the transition process to the effect MA in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the effect MA of the present embodiment.
In step S2901, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2903 described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2902, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data A is transmitted from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it is output. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data A is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, the intro portion of the music data A includes the voice data of "A RUSH rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW1) has elapsed from the start of output of the intro portion of the music data A, the voice "A RUSH rush" is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C in accordance with the intro portion of the music data A.

In step S2903, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2901. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S2904. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data D “right-handed” from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the voice data D in the register 403b. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data D "right-handed" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. If the MPU 402 does not determine that the ending period has ended in step S2903 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process.

In step S2905, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data A stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data A from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

In step S2906, the MPU 402 performs a loop process. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the music data A has ended, and when the output of the music data A has ended, the MPU 402 corresponds to the loop portion (excluding the intro portion) of the music data A. The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data to be output are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C so that the loop portion of the music data A is output (reproduced). Controls the output LSI 403. Further, the MPU 402 does not read the loop portion of the music data A when the output of the music data A is not completed.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S2903 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to production MB>
Next, the transition process to the effect MB in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the effect MB of the present embodiment.
In step S3001, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S3003 described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3002, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data B is transmitted from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it is output. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data B is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the intro part of the music data B includes the voice data of "BRUSH rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW2) has elapsed from the start of output of the intro portion of the music data B, the voice "BRUSH rush" is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C in accordance with the intro portion of the music data B.

In step S3003, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S3001. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S3004. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data D from the production data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. .. If the MPU 402 does not determine in step S3003 that the ending period has ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process.

In step S3005, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data B stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data B from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

In step S3006, the MPU 402 performs a loop process. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the music data B has ended, and when the output of the music data B has ended, the MPU 402 corresponds to the loop portion of the music data B (excluding the intro portion). The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data to be output are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C so that the loop portion of the music data B is output (reproduced). Controls the output LSI 403. Further, the MPU 402 does not read the loop portion of the music data B when the output of the music data B is not completed.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S3003 is arbitrary, and for example, a real-time clock (RTC) may be used for measurement.

<Transition process to production MC>
Next, the transition process to the effect MC in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the effect MC of the present embodiment.
In step S3101, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S3103, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3102, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data C is transmitted from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it is output. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data C is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, the intro part of the music data C includes the voice data of "CRUSH rush" and "Please hit right". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW3) has elapsed from the start of output of the intro portion of the music data C, the voice "C RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in accordance with the intro portion of the music data C, and the voice "C RUSH rush". After the output of "," the voice of "Please hit right" is output (played).

In step S3103, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S3101. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the hitting navigation in step S3104. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data D from the production data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. ..

In step S3105, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MC. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data C stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data C from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402. If it is not determined in step S3103 that the ending period has ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process.

In step S3106, the MPU 402 performs a loop process. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the music data C has ended, and when the output of the music data C has ended, the MPU 402 corresponds to the loop portion (excluding the intro portion) of the music data C. The sequence data, parameter data and sound data to be output are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output is performed so that the loop portion of the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Controls LSI 403. Further, the MPU 402 does not read the loop portion of the music data C when the output of the music data C is not completed.

The configuration for measuring the time in step 3103 is arbitrary, and for example, a real-time clock (RTC) may be used for measurement.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" in the intro part of the music data (BGM) A to C, respectively. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately store the music data and the voice data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) in the storage means (ROM412 and the common ROM404), and also "A RUSH rush" and "B RUSH rush". , It is not necessary to measure the time in order to take the timing to output the voice of "CRUSH rush". Therefore, the storage capacity of the storage means (ROM412 and common ROM404) can be saved. Moreover, the arithmetic processing of the MPU 402 can be reduced. In addition, the player can recognize the gaming state by the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" included in the first data. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, and the expectation for the game can be improved. In addition, the data of the intro part containing the audio data of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" is not repeatedly played, and the data after the verse excluding the intro part is repeated. Since the data is reproduced, the sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are repeatedly played back, and the player does not feel annoyed. Other effects are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

In the first and sixth embodiments, the transition process to each of the productions MA to MC has been described assuming that the production types of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are the productions MA, MB, and MC. The type of effect of the fourth mode M4 is not limited to the above three types, and may be any, two types, or four or more types.

Further, in the first and sixth embodiments, the embodiment in which the intro portion of the music is reproduced at the time of transition to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) is described, but the application of the present invention is the fourth mode M4. It can be applied to all mode transitions that involve changes in music, not just when transitioning to.

[7th Embodiment]
The first and sixth embodiments are the first and sixth embodiments in which the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403, and the common ROM 404 are mounted on the voice emission control board 401 of the voice emission control device 400. In the first and sixth embodiments, the MPU 402 determines the content of the effect for a predetermined period based on the command received from the main control device 300, and performs light emission control for the various lamp units according to the content. It has a function. Further, the MPU 402 gives a sound output instruction to the sound output LSI 403 according to the content of the determined effect, and causes the sound output LSI 403 to control the sound output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, an embodiment in which a sound light SOC (System On a Chip) 620 and a sound light ROM 610 are provided on a sound light emission control board 401 will be described. The sound and light SOC620 includes a control core 621 that determines the execution content of the effect according to the command received from the main control device and controls the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 according to the determined effect content. , The sound output core 622 that controls the sound output of the speaker units 26A to 26C according to the effect content determined by the control core 621, and the address data and address data transmitted from the data transfer unit (DMA: Direct Memory Access) 621c of the control core 621. A memory controller 624 that executes reading of data from the sound / light ROM 610 according to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 622c of the sound output core 622 is built in. In this case, the sound output core 622 has priority over the control core 621 when reading data.

<Electrical configuration related to production control>
Hereinafter, an electrical configuration for controlling the execution of the effect of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 78. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

A voice emission control device 400 is provided as a control device for controlling the execution of the effect based on the instruction from the main control device 300. As shown in FIG. 78, the voice emission control device 400 includes a voice emission control board 401 on which the SOC620 for sound light, the ROM 610 for sound light, and the amplifier circuit 630 are mounted. The sound / light SOC 620 includes a control core 621, a sound output core 622, a sound data processing unit 625, and a memory controller 624, and the sound / light SOC 620 is configured by integrating each of these elements into one chip.

The control core 621 determines the specific content of the effect based on the command received from the main control device 300, and executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 according to the determined content. Further, the control core 621 sets data according to the content of the determined effect to the register 622a provided in the sound output core 622, and issues a command according to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 500. Send to. As a result, the sound output core 622 executes sound output control in a manner in accordance with the contents instructed by the control core 621, and the display control device 500 performs display control in a manner in accordance with the contents instructed by the control core 621. Execute. Incidentally, the data setting for the register 622a of the sound output core 622 by the control core 621 is performed through the data bus SL that electrically connects the control core 621 and the sound output core 622 in the sound / light SOC 620. The control core 621 and the sound output core 622 can be bidirectionally communicated with each other through the data bus SL, and the data is set from the control core 621 to the sound output core 622 as described above, and the sound output core is set. A signal indicating that sound is being output is transmitted from 622 to the control core 621.

The control core 621 is used for reading program data and control data stored in advance in the sound and light ROM 610 in addition to the CPU 621a, which is a central processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit, and executes a program. A RAM 621b for temporarily storing necessary data is built in. The RAM 621b is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and is the same. When compared in terms of the data capacity of, the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound / light ROM 610. The data capacity of the RAM 621b has a data capacity of a large number of bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time, and has a data capacity of a unit of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 4 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound / light ROM 610. However, the data capacity of the RAM 621b is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as the control core 621 can suitably execute the control.

Further, the control core 621 also has a built-in data transfer unit 621c that gives a data read instruction from the sound / light ROM 610 to the memory controller 624 based on the instruction from the CPU 621a. When the data corresponding to the data read instruction is written to the internal register of the data transfer unit 621c by the CPU 621a, the data transfer unit 621c tells the memory controller 624 until all the data corresponding to the read instruction is read into the RAM 621b. And sends the address data for data read instruction. The transmission of the address data is performed in synchronization with the clock signal periodically transmitted from the clock circuit built in the data transfer unit 621c (for example, 4 MHz).

The sound output core 622 executes the sound output control of the speaker units 26A to 26C according to the content of the effect determined by the control core 621. The sound output core 622 contains a register 622a, an HWD622b, an SCM622d, and a data transfer unit 622c.

The register 622a has a function as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output core 622, and can be used for both reading and writing a memory that requires external power supply for storage retention. It is configured to be used. In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound / light ROM 610. The register 622a has a data capacity of a large number of bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time, and has a data capacity of a unit of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 2 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound / light ROM 610 and smaller than the data capacity of the RAM 621b of the control core 621. However, the data capacity of the register 622a is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as the sound output core 622 can be suitably controlled.

The HWD622b and SCM622d have a function of creating digital musical tone data by using the sound data transmitted from the control core 621 and stored in the register 622a and read from the sound / light ROM 610 according to the sequence data and the parameter data. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, timbre, etc. of the sounds at a predetermined timing. There is. These sequence data and parameter data are set as a pair of data corresponding to each other, and a series of sound output is possible by using these pair of sequence data and parameter data. In addition, the period of sound output determined by a set of sequence data and parameter data is constant at a specific time regardless of the type of sequence data and parameter data. For example, one game or one opening / closing execution. It is 2.1 sec, which is shorter than the mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be shorter or longer than 2.1 sec. Further, the configuration may be a series of melody components, and in this case, the period of sound output determined by the sequence data and the parameter data varies depending on the type of the data.

The HWD622b creates digital musical tone data in order to reproduce pre-sampled recorded data, and by creating sinusoidal data using the recorded data for HWD stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 610. , Enables playback of recorded data. The recorded data may be compressed data such as MP3 or uncompressed data. The SCM622d does not create digital music data from recorded data for a predetermined time, but creates digital music data by combining square wave data stored in advance in the sound light ROM 610 in chronological order, thereby creating electronic music data. It enables reproduction of sound (so-called pico-pico sound).

Here, the configuration of the register 622a used for creating digital musical tone data in the HWD 622b and the SCM 622d will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 79. The register 622a is provided with a sequence area 711, a parameter area 712, an HWD area 713, and an SCM area 714. The sequence data already described is written in the sequence area 711, and the parameter data already described is written in the parameter area 712.

The HWD622b reads the recorded data stored in the sound / light ROM 610 into the HWD area 713 by referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 711 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 712, and records the recording data. By creating digital music sound data from the data, it is possible to output the recorded sound. The HWD area 713 is provided with the first CH area 713a to the 16th CH area 713p, and it is possible to create digital musical tone data based on different recording data in each CH area 713a to 713p. This makes it possible to simultaneously output sounds corresponding to a plurality of different recorded data.

The SCM622d reads the square wave data stored in the sound / light ROM 610 into the SCM area 714 by referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 711 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 712, and the square wave data thereof. Electronic sound can be output by creating digital music sound data from wave data. The SCM area 714 is provided with the first CH area 714a to the 16th CH area 714p, and different digital musical tone data can be created in each of the CH areas 714a to 714p. This makes it possible to output a plurality of different electronic sounds at the same time.

The 1st CH area 713a to 16th CH area 713p of the HWD area 713 and the 1st CH area 714a to 16th CH area 714p of the SCM area 714 each have an area that can store two created digital musical tone data. It is provided, and while sound output control is being performed using digital musical tone data created in one of the memorable areas, digital corresponding to the next execution period with respect to the execution period of the sound output control. Musical tone data is created in the other memorable area. As a result, it is possible to continuously create the digital musical tone data required for the next execution period of the sound output control while outputting the sound, and it is possible to continuously output the sound.

Returning to the description of FIG. 78, the sound data processing unit 973 of the sound / light SOC620 has a function as a digital / analog converter, and the digital music data and the SCM area created in the HWD area 713 of the register 622a. The digital music sound data created in 714 is converted into an analog sound signal and output to the amplification circuit 630 formed on the display control board 501. The amplifier circuit 630 amplifies the output level of the analog sound signal to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume, and outputs the amplified sound signal to the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when digital music data is simultaneously created in a plurality of CH areas 713a to 713p in the HWD area 713, the sound data processing unit 973 synthesizes the digital music data and also in the SCM area 714. When digital music sound data is simultaneously created in a plurality of CH areas 714a to 714p, the digital music sound data are combined. Further, when digital musical tone data is created in each of the HWD area 713 and the SCM area 714, the digital musical tone data are combined. When the synthesis is performed in this way, the digitally synthesized musical tone data after the synthesis is converted into an analog sound signal, amplified by the amplifier circuit 630 as described above, and then output to the speaker units 26A to 26C. This makes it possible to simultaneously output a plurality of different sounds from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

As described above, when the sound is output, the sound data, which is either the recorded data or the rectangular wave data, is read from the sound / light ROM 610 to the register 622a, but the sound data is read out to the sequence area 711 of the register 622a. It is performed by the data transfer unit 622c of the sound output core 622 based on the stored sequence data.

More specifically, the sequence data SD is defined with pointer data set in accordance with the processing timing of the sound output core 622, using the explanatory diagram of FIG. 80 showing an example of the sequence data. , The content data of the sound output and the content data of the data transfer are defined corresponding to each pointer data. The processing timing of the sound output core 622 is generated in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from a clock circuit (not shown) built in the sound output core 622. In this case, the period of the clock signal is shorter than the period of the clock signal of the data transfer unit 622c, and specifically, it is 10 MHz. When the processing timing of the sound output core 622 comes, each of the HWD 622b, the SCM 622d, and the data transfer unit 622c performs an operation corresponding to the sequence data and the parameter data.

The content data of the sound output in the sequence data SD is used in HWD622b and SCM622d to create digital musical tone data for each channel. In this case, the content data of the sound output is set corresponding to the pointer data, and the creation of digital music sound data based on the content data of the sound output set corresponding to each pointer data is transferred to the register 622a in advance. It is performed using the sound data.

The content data of the data transfer in the sequence data SD is used in the data transfer unit 622c to specify the data read timing from the sound / light ROM 610, and is in the area of the sound / light ROM 610 in which the data to be read is stored. It is used to identify the address data. The content data of the data transfer is data so that there are a plurality of predetermined pointer data between the read timing of the sound data corresponding to one channel and the read timing of the sound data corresponding to the next channel. Read instruction data is set. In the data of the data read instruction of 1, data for reading the sound data of the data amount capable of outputting the sound for a predetermined time is set, and the sound data is 1 for any of HWD622b and SCM622d. It corresponds to one channel. Therefore, when a plurality of digital musical tone data are combined and sound is output, data reading instructions for the number of the digital musical tone data are given. Further, the sound data read based on the data read instruction of 1 corresponds to the data that enables sound output over 700 μsec as the predetermined time in the corresponding channel. In this case, the HWD 622b and the SCM 622d each have 16 channels, and the time required to read 700 μsec of sound data for all of these 16 channels is shorter than 700 μsec. As a result, it is possible to create digital musical tone data for enabling continuous output of sound for the next predetermined time for the predetermined time while outputting sound for the predetermined time.

Data is read from the common sound / light ROM 610 by the data transfer unit 621c of the control core 621 and the data transfer unit 622c of the sound output core 622, respectively. The sound / light ROM 610 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention as read-only. Specifically, although the NOR type flash memory is used as the sound / light ROM 610, a NAND type flash memory may be used. The sound and light ROM 610 stores various control programs and fixed value data used when executing processing according to the programs.

The data structure of the sound and light ROM 610 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 81. In the sound / light ROM 610, program data (1), program data (2), ..., Program data (L) for executing a process for effect control by the CPU 621a of the control core 621 are stored in advance. It is remembered. By using these program data, the CPU 621a executes main processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the processing data (1), the processing data (2), ..., The processing data (M) are stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 610. These processing data include a data table used to execute each effect, sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output core 622. Further, command data (1), command data (2), ..., Command data (N) are stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 610. These command data are used in the CPU 621a of the control core 621 to instruct the display control device 500 of the effect content.

In the sound and light ROM 610, in addition to the data used for executing the processing by the CPU 621a of the control core 621 as described above, the light emitting data (1), the light emitting data (2), ..., The light emitting data (P) is stored, and sound data (1), sound data (2), ..., Sound data (Q) are stored. In each light emission data, information on the type of light emitting unit to be lit by the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, the lighting period, and the lighting order is set in a predetermined effect period, and the contents of these light emission patterns are set. It is different depending on the type of each light emission data. Each light emission data stored in the sound light ROM 610 has a different light emission control period and a different light emission pattern content. Further, each sound data includes recorded data composed of a sine wave and also includes square wave data used for outputting an electronic sound.

As shown in FIG. 78, the sound / light ROM 610 is electrically connected to the memory controller 624 of the sound / light SOC 620 via the address bus SL1 and the data bus SL2. The memory controller 624 is electrically connected to the control core 621 via the address bus SL3 and the data bus SL4, and is also electrically connected to the sound output core 622 via the address bus SL5 and the data bus SL6. ..

The address data to be read-instructed is transmitted from the data transfer unit 621c of the control core 621 to the memory controller 624 via the address bus SL3. The memory controller 624 includes a control side address buffer 624a for storing the address data received from the data transfer unit 621c, and newly addresses data from the data transfer unit 621c in a situation where the unprocessed address data is not stored. Is received, the address data is stored in the control side address buffer 624a. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 624 to the data transfer unit 621c via the data bus SL4, whereby the data transfer unit 621c normally accepts the address data. It is identified that it was done. On the other hand, when the unprocessed address data is newly received from the data transfer unit 621c in the situation where the unprocessed address data is stored in the control side address buffer 624a, the address data is not stored in the control side address buffer 624a. In this case, since the normal reception signal is not transmitted to the data transfer unit 621c, it is specified that the data transfer unit 621c needs to transmit the same address data again.

When corresponding to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 621c, the memory controller 624 transmits the address data via the address bus SL1 to the sound and light ROM 610, and the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. Is received from the sound / light ROM 610. Then, the received data is transmitted to the internal register of the RAM 621b of the control core 621 or the CPU 621a via the data bus SL4.

The data transfer unit 622c of the sound output core 622 transmits the address data to be read-instructed to the memory controller 624 via the address bus SL5. The memory controller 624 includes a sound output side address buffer 624b for storing the address data received from the data transfer unit 622c, and newly addresses from the data transfer unit 622c in a situation where the unprocessed address data is not stored. When the data is received, the address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 624b. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 624 to the data transfer unit 622c via the data bus SL6, whereby the data transfer unit 622c normally receives the address data. It is identified that it was done. On the other hand, when the unprocessed address data is newly received from the data transfer unit 622c in the situation where the unprocessed address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 624b, the address data is not stored in the sound output side address buffer 624b. In this case, since the normal reception signal is not transmitted to the data transfer unit 622c, it is specified that the data transfer unit 622c needs to transmit the same address data again.

When corresponding to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 622c, the memory controller 624 transmits the address data to the sound and light ROM 610 via the address bus SL1, and the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. Is received from the sound / light ROM 610. Then, the received data is transmitted to the register 622a of the sound output core 622 via the data bus SL6.

A clock circuit is built in the memory controller 624, and processing in the memory controller 624 is performed in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from the clock circuit. In this case, the period of the clock signal is shorter than the period of the clock signal of the data transfer unit 622c and the period of the clock signal of the sound output core 622, specifically 15 MHz.

[8th Embodiment]
In the first to seventh embodiments, the case where the ending period of the jackpot game is fixed has been described. In the present embodiment, all round games of the jackpot game are completed according to the type of the jackpot, specifically, the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10. An embodiment in which the ending period is changed will be described later. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to seventh embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the pachinko machine 10 major winning opening opening / closing process according to the present embodiment.
In step S3201, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the large winning opening 83a is open. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the large winning opening 83a is not open (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3202. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3206.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the large winning opening 83a is not open (NO), the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" in step S3202. It is determined whether or not it is as follows. When it is determined in step S3202 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less (YES), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3202 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S3203. It is determined whether or not it is less than or equal to. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3203 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3203 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S3204. Since the large winning opening opening process has already been described with reference to FIG. 32, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In step S3205, the MPU 302 sets the release command. Further, the MPU 302 transmits the release command set in step S3205 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). After that, the MPU 302 finishes the large winning opening opening / closing process. The voice emission control device 400 recognizes that the opening / closing door 83b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S3206, that is, opening the large winning opening. It is determined whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S3203 or step S3206 of the process.

When it is determined in step S3206 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 detects whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 83a in step S3207. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 83a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the large winning opening 83a.

When it is determined in step S3207 that the winning opening 83a has not been won (NO), the MPU 302 ends the opening / closing process of the winning opening. Further, when it is determined in step S3207 that a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 83a (YES), the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S3208.

In step S3209, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. When it is determined in step S3209 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3209 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the closing execution process in step S3210. In this closing execution process, the MPU 302 sets the opening / closing door 83b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 83c.

In step S3211, the MPU 302 sets the closure command. The MPU 302 transmits the closing command set in step S3211 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). The voice emission control device 400 recognizes that the opening / closing door 83b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S3212, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3212 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3218 described later.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3212 that the hit / fail result is not the "special miss result" (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3213. In step S3213, the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC. Further, in step S3214, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3214 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S3215. After that, the MPU 302 finishes the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S3215 is an opening standby until the opening / closing door 83b is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 83b is set to the closed state again, and the opening / closing door 83b is set to the open state again. The time is specified. In the first embodiment, the open waiting time is set to 1 sec, but the open waiting time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the open / close execution mode.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3214 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3216. In step S3216, the MPU 302 performs an ending period setting process. In this ending period setting process, the MPU 302 refers to the ending period determination table, determines the ending period according to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the special symbol, and corresponds to the determined ending period. Set the value in the timer counter T. The details of the ending period setting process will be described later.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S3217, the MPU 302 sets the ending command. The MPU 302 transmits the ending command set in step S3217 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). After that, the MPU 302 finishes the large winning opening opening / closing process. The voice emission control device 400 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3206 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3210 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3212 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the MPU 302 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC in step S3218.

In step S3219, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3219 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3215 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3219 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the above-mentioned processes after S3215.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a data table of the ending period determination table stored in the ROM 312 of the main control device 300 of the present embodiment. More specifically, it is an ending period determination table for determining the ending period after all the round games in the jackpot game are completed. In the present embodiment, the ending period is determined according to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the special symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, in the case of special symbol 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as special figure 1), if the mode is a high probability mode, “10 sec” is determined as the ending period, and the mode is the low probability mode. If so, "5 sec" is determined as the ending period. Further, in the case of special symbol 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as special figure 2), "5 sec" is determined as the ending period if the mode is a high probability mode, and "2 sec" is determined as the ending period if the mode is a low probability mode. Is decided.

In the example shown in FIG. 83, when the special symbols are the same, the ending period is set to be different depending on whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, but the special symbols are the same. In some cases, the ending period may be the same regardless of whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. The ending period shown in FIG. 83 is merely an example, and is not limited to the time shown in FIG. 83 (10 sec, 5 sec, 2 sec), and the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability mode or low). The ending period may be different depending on the probability mode).

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ending period setting process of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the process of setting the ending period will be described with reference to FIG. 84.
In step S3301, the MPU 302 confirms the game state at the time of winning the jackpot game. Specifically, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot game is confirmed based on the contents of the flags (flags corresponding to the type commands transmitted from the main control device 300) stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 313. Next, in step S3302, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the special figure 1. In step S3302, when the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is special figure 1 (YES), in step S3303, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the mode is a high probability mode. When the mode is the high probability mode in step S3303 (YES), in step S3304, the MPU 302 sets the ending period to "10 sec" with reference to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83) stored in the ROM 312. .. Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets "5000" corresponding to the ending period of 10 sec in the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313.

Further, when the mode is not the high probability mode (NO) in step S3303, in other words, when the mode is the low probability mode, in step S3305, the MPU 302 refers to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83) stored in the ROM 312. , Set the ending period to "5 sec". Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets "2500" corresponding to the ending period of 5 sec in the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313.

Further, in step S3302, when the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is not special figure 1 (NO), in other words, when the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is special figure 2, in step S3306, the mode of the MPU 302 has a high probability. Determine if it is in mode. When the mode is the high probability mode in step S3306 (YES), in step S3305, the MPU 302 sets the ending period to "5 sec" with reference to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83) stored in the ROM 312. .. Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets "2500" corresponding to the ending period of 5 sec in the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313.

Further, when the mode is not the high probability mode (NO) in step S3306, in other words, when the mode is the low probability mode, in step S3307, the MPU 302 refers to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83) stored in the ROM 312. , Set the ending period to "2 sec". Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets "1000" corresponding to the ending period of 5 sec in the timer counter T.

The value set in the timer counter T in steps S3304, S3305, and S3307 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. The configuration for measuring the ending period is arbitrary, and for example, a real-time clock (RTC) may be used for measurement.

FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the notification timing of the RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 85, in the present embodiment, the ending period changes depending on whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 was selected by the MPU 302. The notification timing of RUSH rush and right-handed navigation for RUSH (suggestion of right-handed game at the time of transition to the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode)) is changed according to the ending period. Hereinafter, the transition process of the RUSH mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 85.

<Pattern A>
First, referring to FIG. 85 (a), the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX and the RUSH right-handed navigation notification time (voice output time) TY. A case where (TE ≧ (TX + TY)) will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH, the RUSH rush from the speaker units 26A to 26C Notification (specifically, voice output (playback) of "○○ RUSH rush") and notification time of right-handed navigation for RUSH from speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, "Please hit right" Audio output (reproduction)) is controlled to be performed within the ending period TE.

More specifically, the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" starts from T1 at the start of the ending period after the voice start time TW4, and after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush", "Please hit right". Audio output is started. Here, the voice start time TW4 is a value obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ending period TE, and the ending period. At the end of, the voice output of "Please hit right" is controlled to end at the same time as T2 or almost at the same time.

If the ending period TE is the same as the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH, the time of TW4 is 0 sec. Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 85 (a), the music in the RUSH mode, which shifts from T1 at the start of the ending period to after the jackpot game, is controlled so as to start output (reproduction). Specifically, the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is controlled from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T1 at the start of the ending period TE. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 85A, the period of the intro part of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period TE. Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends before T2 at the end of the ending period TE. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85A, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled to output the “RUSH rush” voice during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the audio output of "RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW4, and the output of the "RUSH rush" audio ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled. In addition, following the output of the voice of "RUSH rush", the voice of "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game is output, and at the end of the ending period, "Right-handed" is output at the same time as or almost at the same time as T2. It is controlled so that the output of the voice of "Please" ends. Therefore, the game state can be changed without dividing the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of flow of the game state, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned. At the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Please hit right", characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the 4th mode M4 (RUSH mode). Is controlled.

<Pattern B>
Next, referring to FIG. 85 (b), the ending period TE is calculated from the time obtained by adding the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX and the RUSH right-handed navigation notification time (voice output time) TY. The case where the time is short (TE <(TX + TY)) and the notification time (voice output time) of RUSH rush is TX or more (TE ≧ TX) will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), when the ending period TE is shorter than the sum of the RUSH rush notification time TX and the RUSH right-handed navigation notification time TY, and is equal to or greater than the RUSH rush notification time TX. , Notification of RUSH rush from speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, voice output (reproduction) of "OO RUSH rush") is performed during the ending period TE, and notification of right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically). Is controlled so that the voice output (playback) of "Please hit right" is performed after the ending period TE.

More specifically, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period to 5 after the audio start time TW5. Here, the voice start time TW5 is a value obtained by subtracting the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX from the ending period TE, and at the same time as or substantially at the same time as T2 at the end of the ending period, "OO RUSH rush" The audio output of is controlled to end. Further, after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush", in other words, the voice output of "Please hit right" is started at the same time as or substantially at the same time as T2 at the end of the ending period.

If the ending period TE is the same as the RUSH rush notification time TX, the TW5 time is 0 sec. Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 85 (b), the music in the RUSH mode, which shifts from T1 at the start of the ending period to after the jackpot game, is controlled to start output (reproduction). Specifically, the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is controlled from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T1 at the start of the ending period TE. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 85B, the ending period TE and the period of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends at T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85B, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled to output the “RUSH rush” voice during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the audio output of "RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW5, and the output of the "RUSH rush" audio ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to do. Further, at the end of the ending period, a voice of "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is output at T2, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the output of the "Please hit right" voice is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the video production of the production MA is controlled to be started. Therefore, the game state can be changed without dividing the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of flow of the game state, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned. At the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Please hit right", characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the 4th mode M4 (RUSH mode). Is controlled.

<Pattern C>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (c), the ending period TE is calculated from the time obtained by adding the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX and the RUSH right-handed navigation notification time (voice output time) TY. The case where the time is short (TE <(TX + TY)) and the notification time (voice output time) of RUSH rush is shorter than TX (TE <TX) will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (c), when the ending period TE is shorter than the RUSH rush notification time TX, the RUSH rush notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, the voice of "OO RUSH rush"). The output (reproduction)) and the notification of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically, the voice output (reproduction) of "please right-handed") are controlled to be performed after T2 at the end of the ending period TE.

More specifically, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE. Further, in the case shown in FIG. 85C, right-handed navigation for RUSH by video is started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE. If you start the voice output of "Please hit right" after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush", the right-handed navigation for RUSH has not started even though you have already entered RUSH mode. It becomes disadvantageous to the player. Also, if the voice of "Please hit right" is output at the same time as entering the RUSH mode, the voice will overlap with the voice of "RUSH rush". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 85 (c), the right-handed navigation for RUSH by the image is started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE without outputting the sound of "right-handed", and "right-handed" is started. The voice output of "Please" is started after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

Also in the example shown in FIG. 85 (c), the music in the RUSH mode, which shifts from T1 at the start of the ending period to after the jackpot game, is controlled to start output (reproduction). Specifically, the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is controlled from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T1 at the start of the ending period TE. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 85 (c), the period of the intro part of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period TE. Therefore, the output of the intro portion continues even after T2 at the end of the ending period TE. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85 (c), the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the audio output of "RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW6, and the output of the "RUSH rush" audio ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to do. Here, the voice start time TW6 is the same as the ending period TE. In the example shown in FIG. 85 (c), the voice of "RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C at T2 at the end of the ending period TE. Therefore, when the voice of "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game is output at the end of the ending period TE, the voice of "RUSH rush" and the voice of "Please hit right" Are overlapped and output. Therefore, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85 (c), the voice of "Please hit right" is not output to T2 at the end of the ending period TE, and a right-handed game is suggested at T2 at the end of the ending period TE. Characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the display of characters such as "Please hit right" on the display screen G is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Therefore, the game state can be changed without dividing the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of flow of the game state, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect transition process to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the effect transition process to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86.
In step S3401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3401 that it has received the ending command (YES), in step S3402, the MPU 402 acquires the ending period TE based on the ending command. The ending period TE may be acquired by including the information of the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control device 300, or the ending period determination table shown in FIG. 83 may be obtained. Is also stored in the ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400, and the type (type) and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the special symbol is determined from the command type so that the ending period TE is recognized. May be good. Further, in step S3401, if it is not determined that the ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In step S3403, the MPU 402 starts outputting RUSH mode music that shifts after the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) in the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is set to the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music in the RUSH mode is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3404, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the time (TE ≧ (TX + TY)) obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. In step S3404, when the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (YES), in step S3405, the MPU 402 is set to step S3409 described later. Timer counters T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 are set in order to measure the time of. Specifically, the data table stored in the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the TW 4 is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3404, when the ending period TE is not equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (NO), the MPU 402 has the ending period TE in step S3406. , It is determined whether or not the notification time TX or more (TE ≧ TX) of the RUSH rush. In step S3406, when the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the RUSH entry notification time TX (YES), the MPU 402 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S3409 described later in step S3407. The timer counter T is set. Specifically, the data table stored in the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the TW 5 is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If the ending period TE is not equal to or greater than the RUSH entry notification time TX in step S3406 (NO), the MPU 402 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in step S3408 to measure the time in step S3409 described later. Set the timer counter T. Specifically, the data table stored in the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3409, the MPU 402 determines whether the time set in step S3405, step S3407, or step S3408 has elapsed, that is, whether the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. If the time set in step S3405, step S3407, or step S3408 has not elapsed in step S3409 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

Further, if the time set in step S3405, step S3407 or step S3408 has elapsed in step S3409 (YES), in step S3410, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the RUSH rush. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush voice data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the RUSH rush voice data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3411, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the voice data of the RUSH entry is completed. When the output of the RUSH rush voice data is completed in step S3411 (YES), in step S3412, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the sound of the RUSH rush. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the output of the RUSH rushing audio data is not completed in step S3411 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In addition, in FIGS. 85 and 86, the ending period TE determined according to whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, the notification time TX of RUSH rush, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH. The notification timing of "RUSH rush" and "Please hit right" is determined based on the comparison with the notification time TY of, but whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. The ending period TE determined accordingly and the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH are known in advance. Therefore, depending on whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode, the notification timings of "RUSH rush" and "please hit right" may be determined in advance.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a data table of a notification timing determination table for RUSH rushing and right-handed navigation for RUSH stored in ROM 412 of the voice emission control device of the present embodiment. More specifically, it is a data table for determining the notification timing of the RUSH rush that notifies the player of the RUSH mode that shifts after the jackpot game. The notification timing of RUSH rush is determined with reference to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the special symbol. For example, in the case of the special figure 1, "TW4" is determined as the notification timing when the mode is the high probability mode, and "TW5" is determined as the notification timing when the mode is the low probability mode. Further, in the case of the special figure 2, "TW5" is determined as the notification timing when the mode is the high probability mode, and "TE" is determined as the notification timing when the mode is the low probability mode.

Here, "TW4", "TW5", and "TE" are waiting times (waiting times) from T1 at the start of the ending period, and when "TW4" is determined as the notification timing, at the start of the ending period. Notification of "RUSH rush" is started after T1 to TW4. When "TW5" is determined as the notification timing, the notification of "RUSH rush" is started after TW5 from T1 at the start of the ending period. Further, when "TE" is determined as the notification timing, the notification of "RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period to after TE, that is, at the end of the ending period.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing another example of the flowchart of the effect transition processing to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, another example of the flowchart of the effect transition processing to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88.
In step S3501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3501 that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S3502, the MPU 402 provides information on whether the type and mode of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. get. Specifically, the MPU 402 acquires whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode based on the type command received from the main control device 300. Further, in step S3501, if it is not determined that the ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In step S3503, the MPU 402 starts outputting RUSH mode music (BGM) that shifts after the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data in the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is stored in the speaker units 26A to 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music in the RUSH mode is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3504, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S3504, when the type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 402 sets various counters of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S3509 described later in step S3505. The timer counter T provided in the area is set. Specifically, the value corresponding to TW4 is set in the timer counter T with reference to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 87) stored in the ROM 412. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3504, when the special symbol type of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), the MPU 402 has the special symbol type of special figure 1 and the mode is low in step S3506. It is determined whether or not the mode is the probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S3506, when the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 402 is set to step S3507. Therefore, timer counters T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 are set in order to measure the time in step S3509, which will be described later. Specifically, the value corresponding to TW5 is set in the timer counter T with reference to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 87) stored in the ROM 412. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3506, when the special symbol type is special figure 1 and the mode is low probability mode, and the special symbol type is special figure 2 and the mode is not high probability mode (NO), the MPU 402 is set in step S3508. , A timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set in order to measure the time in step S3509, which will be described later. Specifically, the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set in the timer counter T with reference to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 87) stored in the ROM 412. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3509, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the time set in step S3505, step S3507 or step S3508 has elapsed, that is, whether or not the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. If the time set in step S3505, step S3507 or step S3508 has not elapsed in step S3509 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

Further, in step S3509, when the time set in step S3505, step S3507 or step S3508 has elapsed (YES), in step S3510, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the RUSH entry. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush voice data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the RUSH rush voice data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3511, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the voice data of the RUSH entry is completed. When the output of the RUSH rush voice data is completed in step S3511 (YES), in step S3512, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the sound of the RUSH rush. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the output of the RUSH rushing audio data is not completed in step S3511 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In the above description, in the pattern B of FIG. 85 (b), the ending period TE adds the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. If it is shorter than the time (TE <(TX + TY)) and the RUSH rush notification time (audio output time) is TX or more (TE ≧ TX), the audio output of "OO RUSH rush" is at the start of the ending period. It starts from T1 after the voice start time TW5, and is controlled so that the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as T2 at the end of the ending period. However, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" may be started from T1 at the start of the ending period. Further, in this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

As described above, in the pattern B of FIG. 85 (b), when the audio output of “○○ RUSH rush” is controlled to be started from T1 at the start of the ending period, the timer counter T is in step S3407 of FIG. The value set to 0 may be set to 0, or if the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the RUSH rush notification time TX in step S3406 of FIG. 86 (YES), the MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S3410. Good.

Further, in the pattern B of FIG. 85 (b), when the voice output of “○○ RUSH rush” is controlled to start from T1 at the start of the ending period, the value of TW5 of the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. May be 0, and in step S3506 of FIG. 88, when the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode. (YES), the MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S3510.

Further, in the above description, in the pattern C of FIG. 85 (c), the ending period TE adds the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. If it is shorter than the time (TE <(TX + TY)) and shorter than the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX (TE <TX), the RUSH rush notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically). Is the voice output (playback) of "○○ RUSH rush" and the notification of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically, the voice output (playback) of "Please hit right") at the end of the ending period TE after T2. Controlled to be done. However, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" may be started from T1 at the start of the ending period. Further, in this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

In this way, in the pattern C of FIG. 85 (c), when the audio output of “○○ RUSH rush” is controlled to start from T1 at the start of the ending period, the timer counter T is in step S3408 of FIG. The value set to may be set to 0, or in step S3406 of FIG. 86, when the ending period TE is not equal to or longer than the notification time TX of RUSH entry (NO), the MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S3410. ..

Further, in the pattern C of FIG. 85 (c), when the voice output of “○○ RUSH rush” is controlled to start from T1 at the start of the ending period, the value of TE in the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. May be set to 0, and in step S3506 of FIG. 88, when the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, and the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is not the high probability mode ( NO), the MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S3510.

Next, another example of the transition process to the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode) of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In the example shown in FIG. 89, the transition process when the ending period TE and the length of the intro portion of the music (BGM) of the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, referred to as the intro length TI) is different will be described. Hereinafter, another example of the transition process to the RUSH mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 89.

<Migration process A>
First, a case where the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI (when 10 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (a). In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI, the output of the intro ends during the ending period TE. Therefore, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. In this first special effect, for example, a voice such as "Begin!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and a video corresponding to this voice (for example, a video in which the character is speaking) is displayed on the display screen G. It is controlled so that the player is allowed to shift to the RUSH mode, and an effect of giving a feeling of anticipation and an uplifting feeling is executed.

Specifically, from T1 at the start of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. Further, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the ending period TE, T2 is controlled so that the video effect of the effect is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that a character such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed. Further, in the example of FIG. 89A, the RUSH rush notification is performed before the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed after the right-handed navigation.

<Migration process B>
Next, a case where the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI (when 5 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI, the intro is output even after the ending period TE ends. Therefore, the second special effect is executed from the end of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. In this second special production, the number of prize balls and the logo mark acquired in the jackpot game are displayed on the display screen G, and even though the RUSH mode is entered, it feels as if the ending period is continuing. The effect given to the player is executed. If the difference between the ending period TE length and the intro length TI is long (large), the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game and the logo mark may be displayed on the display screen G, or any character may be displayed. May be controlled to adjust the time by displaying.

Specifically, the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is controlled from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T1 at the start of the ending period TE. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. In addition, the second special effect is executed from T2 at the end of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the intro output, T4 is controlled so that the video effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that a character such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed. Further, in the example of FIG. 89 (b), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Migration process C>
Next, a case where the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI (when 2 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (c). .. In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI, the ending period TE ends with almost no output of the intro portion during the ending period TE. Therefore, in the case shown in FIG. 89C, the intro output is started after the ending period TE is completed. Further, after the output of the intro is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output.

Specifically, from T2 at the end of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the ending period TE, T2 is controlled so that the video effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that a character such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed.

When the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI (when 2 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84), the output of the intro portion is as shown in FIG. 89 (d). The output of the verse portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode may be started from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T2 at the end of the ending period TE without performing the above. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 89 (c) and 89 (d), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Direction transition processing>
Next, the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 89 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the RUSH mode. Here, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 for the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described.

In step S3601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3601 that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S3602, the MPU 402 provides information on whether the type and mode of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. get. Specifically, the MPU 402 acquires whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode based on the type command received from the main control device 300. Further, in step S3601, if it is not determined that the ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In step S3603, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S3603, when the type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 402 is the transition process A (YES) described in step S3604 with reference to FIG. 89 (a). (When the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI) is executed. The details of the migration process A will be described later.

In step S3603, when the special symbol type of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), the MPU 402 has the special symbol type of special figure 1 and the mode is low in step S3605. It is determined whether or not the mode is the probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S3605, when the special symbol type is special figure 1 and the mode is low probability mode, or the special symbol type is special figure 2 and the mode is high probability mode (YES), the MPU 402 is set to step S3606. Then, the transition process B (when the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI) described with reference to FIG. 89B is executed. The details of the migration process B will be described later.

In step S3605, when the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), the MPU 402 refers to FIGS. 89 (c) and 89 (d) in step S3607. The transition process C described above (when the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI) is executed. The details of the migration process C will be described later.

<Migration process A>
Next, the transition process A in step S3604 of FIG. 90 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process A.
In step S3701, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T1 and T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of steps S3703 and S3705 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T1 with a value corresponding to the ending period TE (10 sec) as the measurement time, and sets the timer counter T2 with the value corresponding to the intro length TI as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T1 to "5000", and when the intro length TI is 7 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "3500". .. The values set in the timer counters T1 and T2 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3702, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode production from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data in the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, the MPU 402 starts displaying a production image during the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the effect video of the ending period is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the effect video of the ending period is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S3703, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM is completed based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3701 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has not been completed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process A without executing the processes after step S3704. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has been completed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S3704.

In step S3704, the MPU 402 starts the first special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "Begin!" From the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets "Begin!" The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of the above is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "Begin!" Is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that the image corresponding to this voice (for example, the image in which the character is speaking) is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a first special effect start command to the display control device 500 so that an image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G based on the first special effect start command transmitted from the MPU 402.

Further, in step S3704, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "RUSH rush" for RUSH rush from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, following the voice of "Begin!" It is set in the register 403b of the output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of "RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the sound of "RUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, "Begin!" May be displayed in characters on the display screen, and the voice of "RUSH rush" may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the voice of "Begin!" May be output from the speaker units 26A to 26A. It is possible to output from 26C and display the characters "RUSH rush" on the display screen G.

In step S3705, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3701 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process A without executing the processes after step S3706. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S3706. In step S3706, the MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to end the first special effect. As a result, the output (reproduction) of voice such as "Begin!" Is stopped from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 transmits the first special effect stop command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the display of the image corresponding to the sound on the display screen G is stopped based on the first special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S3707, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S3708, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data for the RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S3703 and step S3705 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process B>
Next, the transition process B in step S3606 of FIG. 90 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process B.
In step S3801, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T1 and T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of steps S3803 and S3806 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the value corresponding to the ending period TE (5 sec) in the timer counter T1 as the measurement time, and sets the value corresponding to the intro length TI in the timer counter T2 as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T1 to "2500", and when the intro length TI is 7 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "3500". .. The values set in the timer counters T1 and T2 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3802, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode production from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data in the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, the MPU 402 starts displaying a production image during the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the effect video of the ending period is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the effect video of the ending period is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S3803, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3801 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process B without executing the processes after step S3804. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S3804. In step S3804, the MPU 402 starts the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to display a character image (for example, a logo-ized Arabic numeral) corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game on the display screen G. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display a character image corresponding to the number of prize balls on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

In step S3805, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S3806, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM is completed based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3801 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has not been completed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process B without executing the processes after step S3807. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has been completed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S3807.
In step S3807, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to stop the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a second special effect stop command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the display of the character image corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game on the display screen G is stopped based on the second special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 402. I do.

In step S3808, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the “RUSH rush” voice for RUSH rush from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the “RUSH rush”. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of "" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the sound of "RUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, "RUSH rush" may be displayed in characters on the display screen, and the sound of "RUSH rush" may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3809, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data for the RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S3803 and step S3806 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process C>
Next, the transition process C in step S3607 of FIG. 90 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process C.
In step S3901, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T1 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S3902, which will be described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE (2 sec) in the timer counter T1 as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T1 to "1000". The value set in the timer counter T1 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3902, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3901 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process B without executing the processes after step S3903. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S3903.

In step S3903, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode production from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data in the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, the MPU 402 starts displaying the production image in the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the production image of the RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the RUSH mode production image is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S3904, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S3902 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 provides the player with a transition means (MPU302) for shifting the gaming state from the jackpot game (first gaming state) to the RUSH mode (second gaming state) and the RUSH mode (second gaming state). Notification control that performs RUSH rush notification (first notification) that enables recognition at different timings depending on the type of jackpot game, specifically, the type and mode of the special symbol, depending on whether the mode is high probability mode or low probability mode. Means (MPU 402, speaker units 26A to 26C) are provided. The length of the ending period of the pachinko machine may differ depending on the type of jackpot, specifically the type and mode of the special figure, depending on whether the mode is high probability mode or low probability mode. In such a case, the ending period If the first notification is performed without considering the length of the game, the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first notification is performed after entering the RUSH mode (with a slight delay). There is a possibility that the first notification will be notified at a timing when there is a sense of incongruity. However, since the pachinko machine 10 notifies the RUSH rush (first notification) at different timings depending on the type of the jackpot game (first game state), the RUSH rush notification (first notification) does not cause a sense of discomfort to the player. The first notification) can be performed, and the interest is improved.

(2) The notification control means (MPU402, speaker units 26A to 26C) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment notifies the RUSH rush (first) according to the length of the ending period of the jackpot game (first game state). Notification) is performed at different timings. For this reason, the RUSH rush notification (first notification) is performed without considering the length of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the RUSH mode is entered. It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing with a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed later (with a slight delay).

(3) The notification control means (MPU402, speaker units 26A to 26C) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment notifies that the length of the ending period of the jackpot game (first game state) is RUSH rush (first notification). The RUSH rush notification (first notification) is performed at different timings depending on whether or not the time is shorter than the time required for. For this reason, the RUSH rush notification (first notification) is performed without considering the length of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the RUSH mode is entered. It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing with a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed later (with a slight delay).

[9th Embodiment]
In the first to eighth embodiments, the embodiment in which the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect is selected during the round of the jackpot game has been described. In the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the type of effect of the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode) is selected during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

FIG. 94 is a schematic view showing the timing of the effect type selection process of the present embodiment. In FIG. 94, for comparison, the timing of the effect type selection process corresponding to the first to eighth embodiments and the timing of the effect type selection process corresponding to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a diagram showing a flow when the selection effect is executed during the round game of the first to eighth embodiments. FIG. 94B is a diagram showing a flow when the selection effect is executed during the ending period of the present embodiment. In FIG. 94, "OP" indicates the opening, "ED" indicates the ending, and "R" indicates the round.

First, with reference to FIG. 94 (a), the flow of the effect during the jackpot game when the selection effect is executed during the round game will be described. In the voice emission control device 400, the opening effect is started with the start of the jackpot game (time point t10). Next, when the opening time ends, the voice emission control device 400 ends the opening effect, starts the round game, and starts the round effect (time point t11). After that, when the round game of a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) is completed, the sound emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process as a round effect (time point t12).

In the voice emission control device 400, when the effect type selection process is executed during the round game, the selection effect is executed in the same display mode as when the effect type selection process is executed as the ending effect. After that, when all the round games are completed, the voice emission control device 400 ends the round effect and starts the ending effect (time point t13). After that, when the ending period ends, the voice emission control device 400 ends the ending effect and ends the jackpot game (time point t14). Then, after the jackpot game is completed, the selected effect mode (for example, effect MB) is set, and the voice emission control device 400 displays the background image corresponding to the effect MB.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94 (b), the flow of the effect during the jackpot game when the selected effect is executed during the ending period will be described. In the voice emission control device 400, the opening effect is started with the start of the jackpot game (time point t20). Next, when the opening time ends, the voice emission control device 400 ends the opening effect, starts the round game, and starts the round effect (time point t21).

After that, when all the round games (for example, 15 times) are completed, the voice emission control device 400 ends the round effect and starts the ending effect (time point t22). At this time, the voice emission control device 400 executes the selection effect as the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 400 displays operation images corresponding to the effects MA to MC in the RUSH mode. Further, in the voice emission control device 400, the information corresponding to the currently selected effect MB is displayed larger than the information corresponding to the effect MA and MC different from the currently selected effect MB.

Further, when the operation button 35 is operated during the execution of the selected effect and the selected effect is changed, the information corresponding to the newly selected effect MA is not selected in the voice emission control device 400. It is displayed larger than the information corresponding to the production MB and MC (time point t23). After that, when the ending period ends, the voice emission control device 400 ends the ending effect (selection effect) and ends the jackpot game (time point t24). Then, after the jackpot game is completed, the selected effect mode (here, effect MA) is set, and the voice emission control device 400 displays the background image corresponding to the effect MA.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type selection process of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the effect type selection process is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the point that the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process after receiving the ending command in step S1514 of FIG. 40 is the effect determination process of the first to eighth embodiments. different. Hereinafter, the effect type selection process of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95.

In step S4001, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the received type command. When the MPU 402 determines in step S4001 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S4001 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (YES), has the ending command been received in step S4002 (the flag of the ending command is stored in various flag areas of the RAM 413)? Whether or not it is determined. When the MPU 402 determines in step S4002 that the ending command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

In step S4002, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S4003, the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set to the ending period TE in order to measure the ending period. Set the corresponding value. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4004, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so as to start the effect type selection effect. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 to display an image of the effect type selection effect, specifically, the image shown in FIG. 46 (I) on the display screen G. indicate.

In step S4005, the MPU 402 accepts the selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses down the left-direction button 35b and / or the right-direction button 35c of the operation button 35, and selects an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. .. In step S4005, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the selected image GA is displayed larger than the other image GBs and GCs. To do. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 to display the selected image GA larger than the other image GBs and GCs.

Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the selected image GB is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GCs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other image GAs and GCs. Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GC, the selected image GC is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GBs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GC larger than the other image GAs and GBs.

In step S4006, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player operates the operation button 35 to determine the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the determination button 35a is accepted. When it is determined in step S4006 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has been accepted (YES), in step S4007, the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the RUSH mode effect. That is, when the determination operation is accepted in the state where the image GA is selected in step S4006, in step S4007, the MPU 402 sets the effect MA as the effect of the RUSH mode in which the effect MA shifts after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the RUSH mode.

Further, in step S4006, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GB selected, in step S4007, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as the effect of the RUSH mode in which the effect MB shifts after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the RUSH mode. Further, in step S4006, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GC selected, in step S4007, the MPU 402 sets the effect MC as the effect of the RUSH mode in which the effect MC shifts after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MC as the effect of the RUSH mode in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413.

In step S4008, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE set in step S4003 has elapsed based on the value of the timer counter. If it is determined in step S4008 that the ending period TE has elapsed (YES), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process. Further, in step S4008, when it is determined that the ending period TE has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 instructs the player in step S4009 to notify the player whether to cancel the determined effect. ..

Specifically, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so as to display a character image confirming whether to cancel the determined effect such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" On the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402, and displays a character image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" On the display screen G. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that the voice of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads out the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice of "Cancel the effect?" Stored in the common ROM 404 of the ROM 412, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4010, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect determined in step S4006 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect has been canceled based on the operation of the player's operation button 35. If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 402 returns to the operation of step S4005. If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

Further, when it is determined in step S4006 that the pressing operation of the enter button 35a is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S4011 whether or not the ending period set in step S4003 has ended. Judgment is based on the value of. If it is determined in step S4011 that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 sets a predetermined effect (for example, effect MA) by the initial setting as the effect in the RUSH mode in step S4012. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the RUSH mode. If it is determined in step S4011 that the ending period has ended (YES), the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the RUSH mode. When the effect is set in step S4012, the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

If it is not determined in step S4011 that the ending period has ended (NO), the MPU 402 instructs the player in step S4013 to notify the player to select / determine the effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the display control device 500 so as to display a character image prompting the selection / decision of the effect such as "determine the effect!" Or "determine the effect!" On the display screen G. Control. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402, and the display screen G displays the effects such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!". Display a character image that prompts the selection / decision of. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that sounds such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 collects sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to voices such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Stored in the common ROM 404 of the ROM 412. It is read out and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that sounds such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. ..

FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the notification timing of the RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the present embodiment, the RUSH effect is determined during the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is used for RUSH entry and RUSH according to the remaining time of the ending period after the effect is determined. The notification timing of right-handed navigation (suggestion of right-handed game at the time of transition to right-handed navigation (RUSH mode)) is changed. Hereinafter, the transition process to the RUSH mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 96.

In this embodiment, since the RUSH mode production is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode production is not determined at the start of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output (played) from the start of the ending period. )Can not do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96A to 96C, the output (playback) of the music (BGM) in the RUSH mode is started from T3 when the production of the RUSH mode is determined. Is controlled by.

<Pattern A>
First, with reference to FIG. 96 (a), the remaining time TR (hereinafter, also referred to as the remaining time TR) of the ending period TE after the determination of the RUSH mode production is the notification time (audio output time) TX of the RUSH rush. A case where the time (TR ≧ (TX + TY)) is equal to or longer than the sum of the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH and RUSH will be described.

As shown in FIG. 96A, when the remaining time TR is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH, the RUSH rush from the speaker units 26A to 26C Notification (specifically, voice output (playback) of "○○ RUSH rush") and notification time of right-handed navigation for RUSH from speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, "Please hit right" Audio output (reproduction)) is controlled to be performed within the remaining time TR.
More specifically, the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" is the notification time (voice output time) of RUSH rush from the remaining time TR from T3 when the production is decided, and the notification time (voice) of the right-handed navigation for TX and RUSH. Output time) It starts after the time (TR- (TX + TY)) obtained by subtracting TY, and after the notification of RUSH rush, the voice output of "Please hit right" is started.

<Pattern B>
Next, referring to FIG. 96 (b), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE after the determination of the RUSH mode production is the notification time (voice output time) of the RUSH rush and the notification time of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. A case where the time is shorter than the time obtained by adding the (voice output time) TY (TR <(TX + TY)) and the notification time (voice output time) of the RUSH rush is TX or more (TR ≧ TX) will be described. As shown in FIG. 96B, when the remaining time TR is shorter than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH, and is equal to or longer than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush. , Notification of RUSH rush from speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, voice output (playback) of "OO RUSH rush") is performed within the remaining time TR, and notification of right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically). Is controlled so that the voice output (playback) of "Please hit right" is performed after the ending period ends.

More specifically, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is the elapse of the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the RUSH rush notification time (audio output time) TX from the remaining time TR from T3 at the time of determining the production. It will be started later, and then the voice output of "Please hit right" will be started.

<Pattern C>
Next, referring to FIG. 96 (c), when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE after the determination of the production of the RUSH mode is shorter than the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush (TR <TX). Will be described. As shown in FIG. 96 (c), when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is shorter than the RUSH rush notification time TX, the RUSH rush notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, "○○ RUSH"). The audio output (reproduction) of "rush" is controlled to be performed after T2 at the end of the ending period TE.

More specifically, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is started from T3 at the time of determining the production, after the remaining time TR has elapsed. Further, in the case shown in FIG. 96 (c), right-handed navigation for RUSH by video is started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE. If you start the voice output of "Please hit right" after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush", the right-handed navigation for RUSH has not started even though you have already entered RUSH mode. It becomes disadvantageous to the player. Also, if the voice of "Please hit right" is output at the same time as entering the RUSH mode, the voice will overlap with the voice of "RUSH rush". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 96 (c), the right-handed navigation for RUSH by the image is started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE without outputting the sound of "Please hit right", and "right-handed". The voice output of "Please" is started after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

In this embodiment, since the RUSH mode production is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode production is not determined at the start of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output (played) from the start of the ending period. )Can not do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the output (reproduction) of the music (BGM) in the RUSH mode is controlled to be started from the time when the production of the RUSH mode is determined.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the transition process to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. In this embodiment, since the RUSH mode production is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode production is not determined at the start of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output (played) from the start of the ending period. )Can not do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the output (playback) of the music (BGM) in the RUSH mode is started from the time when the production of the RUSH mode is determined.

In step S4101, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If it is determined in step S4101 that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S4102, the MPU 402 acquires the ending period TE. Here, the acquisition of the ending period TE may be obtained by including the information of the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control device 300, or the ending period TE may be acquired. The time may be stored in advance in the ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400 so that it can be acquired.

Next, in step S4103, the MPU 402 starts a timer to calculate the remaining time TR in step S4106, which will be described later. Further, in step S4101, if it is not determined that the ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

Next, in step S4104, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect to be shifted after the jackpot game is determined. In step S4104, when the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect to be transferred after the jackpot game is determined (YES), in step S4105, the MPU 402 outputs the output of the RUSH mode music (BGM) to be transferred after the jackpot game. Start. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the determined effects MA to MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music in the RUSH mode corresponding to the effect determined from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started.

More specifically, when the effect MA is determined, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and outputs the sound. It is set in the register 403b of the LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. When the effect MB is determined, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and registers 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Is set to, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the effect MC is determined, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and registers 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Is set to, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Next, in step S4106, the MPU 402 calculates the remaining time TR (hereinafter, also referred to as the remaining time TR) of the ending period TE. Specifically, the MPU 402 calculates the time (hereinafter, also referred to as measurement time) of stopping the timer started in step S4103, starting in step S4103, and stopping in step S4106. Next, the MPU 402 subtracts the measurement time from the ending period TE to calculate the remaining time TR of the ending period TE. Further, in step S4104, when it is not determined that the type of the RUSH mode effect to be transferred after the big hit game is determined (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In step S4107, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the remaining time TR is equal to or greater than the time (TR ≧ (TX + TY)) obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. In step S4107, when the remaining time TR is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (YES), the MPU 402 is set to the step described later in step S4108. A timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set to measure the time of S4112. Specifically, the value corresponding to the time (TR- (TX + TY)) obtained by subtracting the notification time (audio output time) TX of the RUSH rush from the remaining time TR and the notification time (audio output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. Is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4107, when the remaining time TR is shorter than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (NO), the MPU 402 sets the remaining time TR in step S4109. Is determined whether or not the notification time of RUSH rush is TX or more (TE ≧ TX). If the remaining time TR is equal to or greater than the RUSH entry notification time TX in step S4109 (YES), the MPU 402 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S4112 described later in step S4110. The timer counter T is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX from the remaining time TR is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4109, when the remaining time TR is shorter than the notification time TX of RUSH entry (NO), the MPU 402 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S4112 described later in step S4111. The timer counter T is set. Specifically, the value corresponding to the remaining time TR is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4112, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the time set in step S4108, step S4110 or step S4111 has elapsed, that is, whether or not the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. If the time set in step S4108, step S4110 or step S4111 has not elapsed in step S4112 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

If the time set in step S4108, step S4110, or step S4111 has elapsed in step S4112 (YES), in step S4113, the MPU 402 starts outputting audio data for RUSH entry. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush voice data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the RUSH rush voice data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4114, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the RUSH rush voice data has been completed. When the output of the RUSH rush voice data is completed in step S4114 (YES), in step S4115, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the sound of the RUSH rush. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the output of the RUSH rushing audio data is not completed in step S4114 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In the above description, in the pattern B of FIG. 96 (b), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is the notification time (voice output time) of the RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. If the time is shorter than the time obtained by adding TY (TE <(TX + TY)) and the notification time (audio output time) of RUSH rush is TX or more (TE ≧ TX), the audio output of "OO RUSH rush" is It is controlled so that the start is started after the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX from the remaining time TR from T3 at the time of determining the effect. However, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" may be started from T3 when the production is determined. Further, in this case as well, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

In this way, in the pattern B of FIG. 96 (b), when the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is controlled to start from T3 when the effect is determined, the timer counter T is set in step S4110 of FIG. The value to be set may be 0, and in step S4109 of FIG. 97, when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is equal to or greater than the RUSH rush notification time TX (YES), the MPU 402 performs the operation of step S4113. It may be.

Further, in the above description, in the pattern C of FIG. 96 (c), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is the notification time (voice output time) of the RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) of the right-handed navigation for TX and RUSH. If it is shorter than the time obtained by adding TY (TE <(TX + TY)) and shorter than the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX (TE <TX), the RUSH rush notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C (Specifically, the audio output (reproduction) of "○○ RUSH rush") is controlled to be performed after T2 at the end of the ending period TE. However, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" may be started from T3 when the production is determined. Further, in this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time as the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

In this way, in the pattern C of FIG. 96 (c), when the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is controlled to start from T3 at the time of determining the effect, the timer counter T is in step S4111 of FIG. The value set to 0 may be set to 0, and if the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is not equal to or greater than the RUSH rush notification time TX (NO) in step S4109 of FIG. 97, the MPU 402 performs the operation of step S4113. It may be.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 recognizes the transition means (MPU302) that shifts the game state from the jackpot game (first game state) to the RUSH mode (second game state) that shifts after the jackpot game, and the RUSH mode to the player. Notification control means (MPU402, speaker units 26A to 26C) for notifying RUSH rush (first notification), and operating means (operation) for accepting determination of the effect type in RUSH mode (second game state). A button 35) is provided, and the notification control means performs RUSH rush notification (first notification) at different timings according to the timing when the effect type of the RUSH mode (second game state) is determined.

There is a pachinko machine that selects the production type of the RUSH mode that shifts after the jackpot game during the ending period of the jackpot game. In such a case, if the RUSH rush notification is given without considering the timing when the production type of the RUSH mode is determined, in other words, the length of the remaining time of the ending period, the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode are set. There is a possibility that the first notification will be notified at a timing that makes the first notification feel uncomfortable, such as the first notification being performed straddling the first notification or the first notification being performed after entering the RUSH mode (with a slight delay). However, according to the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the RUSH rush is notified at different timings according to the timing when the selection of the RUSH mode production type is accepted, so that the RUSH rush can be performed without causing discomfort to the player. Notification can be performed and the interest can be improved.

(2) The notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment notifies the RUSH rush at different timings according to the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot technique. Therefore, the RUSH rush is notified without considering the length of the remaining time of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after the RUSH mode is entered ( It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing with a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed (with a slight delay).

(3) The notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment notifies the RUSH rush depending on whether the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot technique is shorter than the time required for the RUSH rush notification. At different timings. Therefore, the RUSH rush is notified without considering the length of the remaining time of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after the RUSH mode is entered ( It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing with a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed (with a slight delay).

[Modifications of the 8th and 9th embodiments]
Even when the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10 described in the eighth embodiment, the ninth embodiment It is possible to apply a form of selecting the type of effect in the RUSH mode during the round game of. In this case, the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10, and during this changing ending period, the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect. ) Will be selected.

However, during the ending period, the first notification ("RUSH rush") and the second notification ("Please hit right") are performed, or only the first notification is performed during the ending period, and the second notification is performed when the RUSH mode is entered. Whether to perform the first notification or the second notification when the RUSH mode is entered without performing the first and second notifications during the ending period depends on the remaining time TR of the ending period. Therefore, when the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol of the eighth embodiment and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10, the round game of the ninth embodiment is performed. When applying the mode of selecting the type of effect in the RUSH mode, the flow chart of the transition process described with reference to FIG. 97 can be used.

Specifically, when the ending command is received in step S4101 of FIG. 97 (YES), in step S4102 of FIG. 97, the type and mode of the jackpot game symbol (high probability mode or not) as in step S3402 of FIG. The ending period TE is acquired according to the low probability mode). Then, when calculating the remaining time TR in step S4106 of FIG. 97, the measurement time is subtracted from the ending period TE according to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the symbol of the jackpot game, and the ending period. By calculating the remaining time TR of TE, when the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol of the eighth embodiment and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10. A mode in which the type of effect in the RUSH mode is selected during the round game of the ninth embodiment can be applied.

<Migration process A>
First, a case where the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI (for example, when the effect is selected immediately after the start of the ending period TE) will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (a). In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI, the output of the intro ends during the ending period TE. Therefore, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. In this first special effect, for example, a voice such as "Begin!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and a video corresponding to this voice (for example, a video in which the character is speaking) is displayed on the display screen G. It is controlled so that the player is allowed to shift to the RUSH mode, and an effect of giving a feeling of anticipation and an uplifting feeling is executed.

Specifically, from T3 when the production of the RUSH mode is determined, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. Further, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the ending period TE, T2 is controlled so that the video effect of the effect for RUSH is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that a character such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed. Further, in the example of FIG. 98 (a), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Migration process B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (b), a case where the remaining time TR is shorter than the intro length TI (for example, when the effect is selected after a few seconds have elapsed from the start of the ending period) will be described. .. In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is shorter than the intro length TI, the intro is output even after the ending period TE ends. Therefore, the second special effect is executed from the end of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. In this second special production, the number of prize balls and the logo mark acquired in the jackpot game are displayed on the display screen G, and even though the RUSH mode is entered, it feels as if the ending period is continuing. The effect given to the player is executed. If the difference between the remaining time TR length and the intro length TI is long (large), the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game and the logo mark may be displayed on the display screen G, or any character may be displayed. May be controlled to adjust the time by displaying.

Specifically, from T3 when the effect of the RUSH mode is determined, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effect of the fourth mode M4 is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. In addition, the second special effect is executed from T2 at the end of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the intro output, the video production of the RUSH mode production is controlled to be started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that a character such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed. Further, in the example of FIG. 98 (b), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Migration process C>
Next, a case where the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI (for example, when the effect is selected immediately before the end of the ending period TE) will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (c). In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI, the ending period TE ends with almost no output of the intro portion during the ending period TE. Therefore, in the case shown in FIG. 98 (c), the output of the intro is started after the ending period TE ends. Further, after the output of the intro is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output.

Specifically, from T2 at the end of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is controlled to start. That is, the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled to be started at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the ending period TE, T2 is controlled so that the video effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that a character such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed.

When the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the speaker units 26A to 26C are started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE without outputting the intro portion. It may be controlled so that the output of the verse part of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode is started from. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 98 (c) and 98 (d), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Direction transition processing>
Next, the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 98 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 99 to 103. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the RUSH mode. Here, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 for the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 98 will be described.

In step S4201, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S4201 that it has received the ending command (YES), in step S4202, the MPU 402 acquires the ending period TE based on the ending command. The ending period TE may be acquired by including the information of the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control device 300, or a value corresponding to the indicated ending period TE. May be stored in the ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400, and the jackpot type may be determined from the command type to recognize the ending period TE. Further, in step S4201, if it is not determined that the ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In step S4203, the MPU 402 starts a timer to calculate the remaining time TR in step S4205, which will be described later.
Next, in step S4204, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect to be shifted after the jackpot game is determined. In step S4204, when the type (type) of the effect of the RUSH mode to be transferred after the jackpot game is not determined (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.
Further, in step S4204, when the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect to be shifted after the jackpot game is determined (YES), in step S4205, the MPU 402 calculates the remaining time TR. Specifically, the MPU 402 stops the timer started in step S4203, subtracts the time measured by the timer from the ending period TE acquired in step S4202, and calculates the remaining time TR of the ending.

In step S4206, the MPU 402 determines whether the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI of the selected directed music (BGM). In step S4206, when the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI (YES), the MPU 402 executes the transition process D (when the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI) in step S4207. The details of the migration process D will be described later.

If the remaining time TR is not longer than the intro length TI in step S4206 (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S4208 whether the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI. In step S4208, when the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI (YES), the MPU 402 executes the transition process E (when the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI) in step S4209. The details of the migration process E will be described later.

In step S4208, if the remaining time TR is not the same as the intro length TI (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S4210 whether the remaining time TR is longer than half the intro length TI (TI / 2). Is determined. In step S4210, if the remaining time TR is longer than half the length TI of the intro (TI / 2) (YES), the MPU 402 is determined in step S4211 with reference to FIG. 98 (b). (When the remaining time TR is longer than half of the intro length TI (TI / 2)) is executed. The details of the migration process F will be described later.

If the remaining time TR is not longer than half the intro length TI (TI / 2) in step S4210 (NO), the MPU 402 will refer to FIGS. 98 (c) and 98 (d) in step S4212. The transition process G described above (when the remaining time TR is not longer than half of the intro length TI (TI / 2)) is executed. The details of the migration process G will be described later.

In step S4210, the case is divided by taking the case where the remaining time TR is not longer than half (TI / 2) of the intro length TI as an example, but the length of the remaining time TR to be classified in step S4210. Is arbitrary, and may be classified into cases of 2 sec or less, for example.

<Migration process D>
Next, the transition process D in step S4207 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process D.
In step S4301, the MPU 402 calculates the absolute value | TR-TI | of the value obtained by subtracting the intro length TI from the remaining time TR.
In step S4302, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T2 and T3 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of steps S4304 and S4306 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets a value corresponding to the intro length TI in the timer counter T2 as the measurement time, and sets the timer counter T3 in the value corresponding to the absolute value (| TR-TI |) calculated in step S4301. Is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the intro length TI is 10 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "5000", and when the absolute value is 2 sec, the MPU 402 is a timer counter. Set "1000" to T3. The values set in the timer counters T2 and T3 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4303, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode production from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data in the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4304, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S4302 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has not been completed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process D without executing the processes after step S4305. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion is completed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4305.

In step S4305, the MPU 402 starts the first special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "Begin!" From the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets "Begin!" The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of the above is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "Begin!" Is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that the image corresponding to this voice (for example, the image in which the character is speaking) is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a first special effect start command to the display control device 500 so that an image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G based on the first special effect start command transmitted from the MPU 402.

Further, in step S4305, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "RUSH rush" for RUSH rush from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, following the voice of "Begin!" It is set in the register 403b of the output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of "RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the sound of "RUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, "Begin!" May be displayed in characters on the display screen, and the voice of "RUSH rush" may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the voice of "Begin!" May be output from the speaker units 26A to 26A. It is possible to output from 26C and display the characters "RUSH rush" on the display screen G.

In step S4306, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T3 set in step S4302 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process D without executing the processes after step S4307. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4307. In step S4307, the MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to end the first special effect. As a result, the output (reproduction) of voice such as "Begin!" Is stopped from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 transmits the first special effect stop command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the display of the image corresponding to the sound on the display screen G is stopped based on the first special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S4308, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S4309, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data for the RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in steps S4304 and S4306 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process E>
Next, the transition process E in step S4209 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process E.
In step S4401, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S4403 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets a value corresponding to the intro length TI as the measurement time in the timer counter T2. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the intro length TI is 10 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to “5000”. The value set in the timer counter T2 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 99, since the intro length TI and the remaining time TR have the same length, instead of setting the timer counter T2 with the value corresponding to the intro length TI in step S4401 A value corresponding to the remaining time TR may be set in the timer counter T4.

In step S4402, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode production from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data in the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4403, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM is completed based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S4402 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has not been completed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process D without executing the processes after step S4405. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has been completed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4404.

In step S4404, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S4405, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data for the RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S4403 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process F>
Next, the transition process F in step S4211 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process F.
In step S4501, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T2 and T4 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of steps S4503 and S4506 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 with a value corresponding to the intro length TI as the measurement time, and sets the timer counter T4 with the value corresponding to the remaining time TR as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the intro length TI is 10 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "5000", and when the remaining time TR is 7 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer. Set "3500" in the counter T4. The values set in the timer counters T2 and T4 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4502, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode production from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data in the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4503, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T4 set in step S4501 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process F without executing the processes after step S4504. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4504. In step S4504, the MPU 402 executes the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to display a character image (for example, a logo-ized Arabic numeral) corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game on the display screen G. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display a character image corresponding to the number of prize balls on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

In step S4505, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S4506, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM is completed based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S4501 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has not been completed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process F without executing the processes after step S4507. Further, when it is determined that the output of the intro portion is completed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4507.
In step S4507, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to stop the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a second special effect stop command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the display of the character image corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game on the display screen G is stopped based on the second special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 402. I do.

In step S4508, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the “RUSH rush” voice for RUSH rush from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the “RUSH rush”. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of "" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C start the "RUSH rush" notification, in other words, the output (reproduction) of the "RUSH rush" voice. In addition, "RUSH rush" may be displayed in characters on the display screen, and the sound of "RUSH rush" may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4509, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data for the RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in steps S4503 and S4506 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process G>
Next, the transition process G in step S4212 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the migration process G.
In step S4601, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T4 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S4602 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets a value corresponding to the remaining time TR in the timer counter T4 as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the remaining time TR is 2 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T4 to “1000”. The value set in the timer counter T4 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4602, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T4 set in step S4601 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process G without executing the processes after step S4603. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4603.

In step S4603, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for the RUSH mode production from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the music data in the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, the MPU 402 starts displaying the production image in the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the production image of the RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the RUSH mode production image is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S4604, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the audio data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S4602 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

[10th Embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 having a so-called latent probability changing function, which hides the pachinko machine without explicitly indicating that it is in the probability changing state, will be described. The latent probability change is executed in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the player has transitioned to the probability change state in which the jackpot probability is high. In the following description, in the above embodiment, the same configurations as those already described will be designated by the same reference numerals, duplicated description will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing the value of a random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 104, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is stored in the distribution table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the ROM 312 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as an information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 104 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 104 (b). ing. The MPU 302 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the first starting port 84a. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 104 (a), the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round)", Multiple distribution results of "small round low probability result (low probability result corresponding to small round)" and "most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" are set as distribution destinations. Since the second distribution table is the same as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 21, overlapping description will be omitted.

Each distribution result shown in FIG. 104 has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 83 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described. The "low probability result" and the "small round low probability result" are distribution results in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. The "small round high probability result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described. The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The “small round high probability result” and the “small round low probability result” are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times). The "most advantageous result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery.

Since the difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 83 in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) has already been described, a duplicate description will be omitted.

<Reach display>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit winning" and the pachinko machine 10 is distributed to the "most advantageous result" in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 91 has the same stop result. A combination of symbols having an odd number (for example, "1.1.1") or the same even number (for example, "2.2.2") is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the symbol display device 91 stops the same even number (for example, "2.2"). -The combination of symbols having "2") is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, when the winning / losing lottery is a "big hit" and the lottery is divided into a "small round high probability result" or a "small round low probability result", the symbol display device 91 has the same stop result. A combination of symbols having an even number (for example, "4, 4, 4") is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Further, when a "special loss result" is obtained without being a "big hit" in the winning / failing lottery, the symbol display device 91 is not a combination of symbols having the same number as a stop result, but is a "normal loss" in the winning / failing lottery. A combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when the result is "result" (for example, "3.4.1") is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

Reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (“big hit win” in the winning / losing lottery, “most advantageous result”, “low probability result”, “small” in the distribution lottery. In the case of "round high probability result" or "small round low probability result"), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is a "special miss result" when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / losing lottery, and it does not become a "big hit winning" in the distribution lottery. In the case of), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing of step S505 of FIG. 26 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28. Only the steps different from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described, and duplicate description will be omitted.

(Step S711)
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the MPU 302 sets a flag in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, the MPU 302 sets the low probability result flag when it is specified that the distribution result is "low probability result", and when it is specified that it is "small round high probability result", it is small round. If you set the high probability result flag and identify that it is a "low round low probability result", if you set the low probability result flag for a small round and specify that it is the "best result", the most advantageous result flag To set. After that, the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S716.

<Display duration setting process>
Next, the process of setting the display duration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 105.

In step S4701, the MPU 302 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 313. Further, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the reach display occurs on the symbol display device 91. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines in step S4702 whether the distribution result determined in step S709 is a "special deviation result".

In step S4702, when the distribution result is not the "special deviation result" (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S4703 whether the winning / failing result determined in step S704 of FIG. 105 is the "normal deviation result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S4703 that the pass / fail result is a "normally out of order result" (YES), in step S4704, the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 312 and the reach random number stored in the hold ball storage area. The reach generation lottery is executed by comparing with the value of the counter C3.

In step S4705, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the reach display is generated in the reach generation lottery in step S4704. When the MPU 302 determines in step S4705 that the reach display will occur (YES), the MPU 302 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 312 in the step S4706. Further, the MPU 302 determines in step S4702 that the distribution result is a "special deviation result" (YES), in step S4703 that the winning / failing result is not a "normal deviation result" (NO), or When it is determined in step S4705 that the reach lottery has not been won, in other words, the reach display does not occur (NO), in step S4707, the reach non-generation display duration table stored in the ROM 312 is referred to.

In step S4708, the MPU 302 determines the display duration after executing the process of step S4706 or step S4707. Specifically, the MPU 302 is a variation type counter CS acquired from the movement type counter buffer based on the reach generation display duration table referred to in step S4706 or the reach non-generation display duration table referred to in step S4707. Determines the display duration corresponding to the value of. Further, the MPU 302 sets the display duration determined in step S4707 to the display duration counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313.

In this embodiment as well, the voice emission control device 400 may be configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to generate this reach display.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Only the steps different from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described, and duplicate description will be omitted.

(Step S906)
When the MPU 302 determines in step S904 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the MPU 302 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOCs provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 in step S905. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 302 opens / closes the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83 when shifting to the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S904 that the win / fail result is not a "special miss result" (NO), that is, when it determines that the win / fail result is a "big hit win", the distribution result is small in step S906. It is determined whether or not the result is a round result (“small round high probability result” or “small round low probability result”).

<Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode>
Next, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail.
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
In step S4801, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S4801 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" (YES), the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 in step S4802. The MPU 302 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode as the high frequency support mode.

In step S4803, the MPU 302 clears the number-of-times limit flag stored in the RAM 313.
Here, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, the high-frequency support mode is continued until at least a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In step S4804, the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning / failing lottery mode as the high probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 302 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 302 sets a flag (low probability result flag, low round high probability result flag, small round low probability result flag) set in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result. , And the most advantageous result flag) and the special off flag are cleared. Further, in step S701 of the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 27), the MPU 302 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 313, thereby determining whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Is judged.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S4801 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S4805 whether or not the distribution result is a "small round high probability result". .. When the MPU 302 determines in step S4805 that the distribution result is a "small round high accuracy result" (YES), the MPU 302 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 313 in step S4806. The MPU 302 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode as the high frequency support mode.

In step S4807, the MPU 302 sets “100” to the value of the game counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 313. In step S4808, the MPU 302 sets the number limit flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter, is set. Continue until digested. The MPU 302 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. The MPU 302 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the above-mentioned normal process (see FIG. 23), but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In step S4809, the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning / failing lottery mode as the high probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 302 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S4805 that the distribution result is not the "small round high probability result" (NO), in step S4810, whether or not the distribution result is the "small round low probability result" is determined. judge. When the MPU 302 determines in step S4810 that the distribution result is a "small round low probability result" (YES), the MPU 302 clears the high probability mode flag in step S4811. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued until at least the winning / failing lottery becomes a "big win" and the distribution result is other than the "small round low probability result" or the "low probability result".

In step S4812, the MPU 302 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode as the high frequency support mode. In step S4813, the MPU 302 sets "100" to the value of the game counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 313. In step S4814, the MPU 302 sets the number limit flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. After that, the MPU 302 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter, is set. Continue until digested. The MPU 302 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. The MPU 302 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the above-mentioned normal process (see FIG. 23), but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S4810 that the distribution result is not a "small round low probability result" (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S4815 whether or not the distribution result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 302 determines in step S4815 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (NO), that is, when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "special deviation result", the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode ends. To finish.
Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S4815 that the distribution result is a "low probability result" (YES), the MPU 302 clears the high probability mode flag in step S4816. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit" and the distribution result is other than the "small round low probability result" or the "low probability result".

In step S4817, the MPU 302 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode as the high frequency support mode. In step S4818, the MPU 302 sets "100" to the value of the game counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 313. In step S4819, the MPU 302 sets the number limit flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. After that, the MPU 302 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter, is set. Continue until digested. The MPU 302 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. The MPU 302 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the above-mentioned normal process (see FIG. 23), but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" or the "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the gaming state becomes the current gaming state. Regardless, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. Here, when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until at least the "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery. In addition, when the distribution result is "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the high probability mode continues at least until the winning / fail lottery becomes "big hit winning", and the high frequency support mode is the specified number of times (100). Continue until (times).

In addition, if the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes a "low probability result" or a "small round low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is irrespective of the current game state. After the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) is completed, the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is a low-frequency support when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. Move to mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt processing, the MPU 402 executes the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 107 periodically (for example, in a 2 msec cycle).

In step S4901, the MPU 402 executes the command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 402 receives a command from the MPU 302, the MPU 402 stores the received command in the RAM 413. Specifically, the RAM 413 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 302, and the MPU 402 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 302. The MPU 402 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

For example, the MPU 302 is a production control that includes basic information necessary for the game, such as the result of the jackpot lottery (the lottery result of jackpot or loss, the jackpot type if it is a jackpot), the number of balls on hold, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. A command (type command, variation pattern command, decoration drawing designation command) is transmitted, and the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 receives this. Further, the MPU 302 transmits an effect control command (effect stop command) instructing the effect stop after a predetermined time (special symbol fluctuation time) has elapsed, and the MPU 402 receives this. Further, regarding the information for designating the game state, the MPU 302 transmits an effect control command (game state designation command or jackpot middle command) including the information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the transition of the game state occurs). Then, the MPU 402 receives this. As a result, the current gaming state is grasped by the MPU 402, in other words, the voice emission control device 400, and the mode is controlled to shift to a predetermined effect mode.

In step S4902, the MPU 402 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300. In the effect determination process, the MPU 402 executes an effect for the game round, an effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In step S4903, the MPU 402 executes the demo display execution process based on the command received from the MPU 302. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 402 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting the demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. Since the effect determination process in step S4902 has already been described, duplicate description will be omitted.

In step S4904, the MPU 402 controls the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the first to third hold lamp units 95a to 96 based on the contents of the effect determination process of step S4902 and the demo display execution process of step S4903. Executes the light emission control process of. In step S4905, the MPU 402 executes a voice control process for voice control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the contents of the effect determination process of step S4902 and the demo display execution process of step S4903.

In step S4906, the MPU 402 is based on the contents of the power recovery notification process (step S416) of the main process (see FIG. 25) and the normal time notification process (step S1303) of the front door frame opening monitoring process (FIG. 34). Then, an abnormality notification process is performed. Since the details of this abnormality notification process have already been described, duplicate explanations will be omitted.

In step S4907, the MPU 402 executes a result display process. In the result display process, a process for displaying the result screen is executed when the high frequency support mode (time reduction) ends without winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the probability change state. The details of the result display process will be described later.

In step S4908, the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect processing. In the suggestion effect processing, the MPU 402 executes an effect suggesting that the state of the pachinko machine 10 may be in a probabilistic state at a predetermined timing. The details of the suggestion effect processing in step S4908 will be described later.
After that, the MPU 402 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like.

In step S5001, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302. When it is determined in step S5001 that the MPU 402 has not received each command (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S5009. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that each command has been received in step S5001 (YES), in step S5002, the game result is "out of place result" ("special out of place result", based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the command is "small round high probability result", "small round low probability result", "most advantageous result", "low probability result").

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5002 that the game result is not the "outlier result" (NO), the MPU402 determines in step S5003 whether or not the game result is the "special outlier result". When the MPU 402 determines in step S5003 that the game result is not a "special deviation result" (NO), the MPU 402 executes a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of game result in step S5004. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the stop symbol effective line L. Information on a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "1.1.1" or "2.2.2") is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "small round high probability result" or a "small round low probability result", the same even number as the stop result to finally display the stop on the stop symbol effective line L. Information on a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "4, 4, 4") is determined. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the symbol having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L (for example, "2.2").・ Determine the information related to the combination of 2 ”).

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S5003 that the game result is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 402 executes a common symbol determination process in step S5005. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result for finally displaying a stop on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 402 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out-of-order result" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S5002 that the game result is a "disengagement result" (YES), in other words, when it is determined in step S5002 that the game result is a "normal deviation result", the symbol for normal deviation is determined in step S5006. Execute the process. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 402 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variable command.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the MPU 402 determines the information related to the combination of the reach display symbols as the stop display that is finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 402 determines the information related to the combination of symbols different from the combination of the above-mentioned symbols as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 402 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from the combination of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S5004, step S5005, or step S5006, the MPU 402 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S5007. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 402 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the data stored in advance in the ROM 412. Specifically, the MPU 402 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. Further, the MPU 402 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and voice control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S5008, the MPU 402 includes a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S5003, step S5005, or step S5006, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S5007. Is transmitted to the display control device 500. Based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 creates a data table for executing the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 91 from various data storage areas of the program ROM 512. read out. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the effect for the game round based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400, and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 402 on the stop symbol effective line L. Finally stop display.

After executing the process of step S5008, or when it is determined in step S5001 that the change command and the type command have not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes of step S5009 and subsequent steps. In step S5009, the MPU 402 performs the open / close execution mode process. In the open / close execution mode process of step S5009, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the opening command has been received, and if it determines that the opening command has not been received, executes the processes after step S5010. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the opening command has been received, it determines the type of the game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the determined type of the game result. Execute the process.

In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 402 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode when it determines that the game result is a “special deviation result”. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "small round high probability result" or a "small round low probability result", the MPU 402 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 402 selects the effect C as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 402 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode. The duration of the effect A corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

Next, the MPU 402 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and voice control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the selection results of the effects A to D. Next, the MPU 402 transmits a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the determined game result to the display control device 500. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads from the program ROM 512 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 91 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 402. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

After executing the process of step S5009, the MPU 402 determines in step S5010 whether or not to generate an effect type selection process that causes the player to select the mode effect after the jackpot game ends, and determines whether or not to generate the effect type selection process according to the determination result. Execute the selection process. This effect type selection process will be described in detail later.

In step S5011, the MPU 402 executes the effect transition process. In the effect transition process, the MPU 402 performs the process of shifting to the mode effect after the jackpot game selected in step S5010. The details of the effect transition process in step S5011 will be described later.

In step S5012, the MPU 402 performs other processing. In other processes, the MPU 402 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode and the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302. .. After that, the MPU 402 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction. As shown in FIG. 109, the pachinko machine 10 has the winning / failing results of the "big hit winning" and the "special losing result", the "small round high probability result", and the "small round low" as the game results excluding the "normal loss result". It has a distribution result of "probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result".

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 109, the "special loss result" is a game result selected when the "big hit winning" is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure). Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The content such as the game state is arbitrary.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the "special loss result" does not shift to the winning / failing lottery mode. In addition, in the "special off result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols (for example, "3.4.1"). In addition, in the "special out-of-order result", the support mode is not entered.

In the "small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a long-time mode. .. In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "4.4.4"). Further, in the "small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the symbol display device 91 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.

In the "small round low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a long-time mode. .. In addition, in the "small round low probability result", the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Further, in the "small round low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "4.4.4"). Further, in the "small round low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode. Further, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number (for example, "1.1.1" or "2.2.2". ), The winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "best result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times.

In the "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode. Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. Further, in the "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the effect.
The effect selected in the "special off result" is effect A. The effect A includes an effect A1 for opening the open / close execution mode, an effect A2 in which the variable winning device in the open / close execution mode is opened and closed, and an effect A3 during the ending of the open / close execution mode. There is.

The effect selected in "Small round high accuracy result" is effect B. The effect B includes an effect B1 for opening the open / close execution mode, an effect B2 in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, an effect B3 during the ending of the open / close execution mode, and an effect in the high frequency support mode. B4 and are included.

The effect selected in the "small round low probability result" is the same effect B as the "small round high probability result". The effect B includes an effect B1 for opening the open / close execution mode, an effect B2 in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, an effect B3 during the ending of the open / close execution mode, and an effect in the high frequency support mode. B4 and are included.

The effect selected in the "most advantageous result" is the effect C. The production C includes a production C1 for opening the opening / closing execution mode, a production C2 in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, a production C3 during the ending of the opening / closing execution mode, and a production in the high frequency support mode. C4 and are included.

The effect selected in the "low probability result" is the effect D. The effect D includes an effect D1 for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect D2 in which the variable winning device is opened and closed, an effect D3 during the ending of the open / close execution mode, and an effect in the high frequency support mode. D4 and are included.

As described above, the "small round high probability result" and the "small round low probability result" differ depending on whether the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode or the low probability mode, but the large winning opening 83a It is common in that opening and closing is executed twice in a long-time mode, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, and the effect is effect B. Further, in the "small round high probability result", the symbol display device 91 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. Therefore, the player confirms the stop result (when the stop result of the "small round high probability result" is a combination of symbols having the same even number), and the game result is the "small round high probability result". And it is not possible to know which of the "small round low probability results". In other words, the "small round high probability result" is a latent probability change, and even when the distribution lottery results in a "small round high probability result" and the mode shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 91 Is disguised as if the winning / losing lottery mode has not changed in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

However, even though it is a high-probability mode, the latent mode that does not notify that fact is a mode in which it is difficult to determine whether the current mode is a high-probability mode, so depending on the player, a big hit. Expectations for the game may soon decline, and the game may be stopped even though the player is in the latent mode. Therefore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an effect suggesting the possibility of a latent probability change state is executed at a predetermined timing. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the gaming state and can enjoy the game without stress. In addition, you can enjoy playing while watching the timing at which the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability change state appears.

In this embodiment, the production time of the opening production in each production is the same. Further, in the present embodiment, the production time of the ending production in each production is the same. However, the production time of the opening effect and the production time of the ending effect are arbitrary, and the production time of the opening effect and the production of the ending effect may be different. In addition, the production time may be different for each game result (excluding the small round high probability result and the small round low probability result), that is, for each opening production, or even if only some of the opening productions have different production times. Good. Further, the production time may be different for each game result (excluding the small round high probability result and the small round low probability result), that is, for each ending effect, or even if only some ending effects have different production times. Good.

The production of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not necessarily have to be configured as a series of productions. For example, depending on the model of the game machine, "promotion effect" or "step-up notice effect" may be performed. When the promotion effect is performed, the promotion generation effect is performed as the promotion effect while the variable winning device 83 is operating (during the opening / closing execution mode). In addition, when performing a step-up notice effect, the content of the effect differs depending on how far the step-up is performed. In this way, when performing a promotion effect or a step-up effect, at least a part of the effect is different, so it is not always necessary to make a series of effects.

In the "promotion effect", the combination of the jackpot results with even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed on one effective line regardless of whether the game times that result in the jackpot result are a low probability result or the most advantageous result. In addition to the stop result, an effect indicating whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode during the opening / closing execution mode that occurs after that is included. For example, in the open / close execution mode after the most advantageous result, a promotion occurrence effect is performed as a promotion effect, and in the open / close execution mode after a low probability result or a small round low probability result, a promotion non-generation effect is performed as a promotion effect. Will be done.

In addition, the "step-up notice production" is to give a big hit notice step by step while changing the notice contents and the reliability of the notice. Specifically, in the step-up notice effect, a predetermined effect step including the display of the effect image on the symbol display device 91 is executed up to a predetermined stage among a plurality of stages (for example, 5 stages) according to the jackpot reliability. To. That is, in the step-up notice production, the jackpot reliability is set to increase as the stage of the production step progresses.

<About the suggestion effect processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
11 to 117 (excluding FIG. 112) are diagrams showing a flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (S4908 of FIG. 107) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment grasps whether the lottery result of the jackpot game is a “small round high probability result” (latent probability) or a “small round low probability result” (gase). Although it is configured so that it cannot be done, depending on the player, the expectation for the jackpot will soon decline, and the game will be stopped even though it is in the latent probability mode (latent probability change state). There is. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect (suggestion effect) suggesting the possibility of a latent probability change state at a predetermined timing. Hereinafter, the suggestion effect by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 117 (excluding FIG. 112).

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a flowchart when performing a suggestion effect during the high frequency support mode (during a short time). Hereinafter, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 when the suggestion effect is executed during the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 111. The suggestion effect is executed before the number of fluctuations in the high frequency support mode reaches the specified number (100 times), but here, the suggestion effect is performed at the nth time (n is an integer of 0 or more and less than 100). Described as being executed.

In step S5101, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the type command of "small round high accuracy result". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high accuracy result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S5101 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5101 that it has received the type command of "small round high probability result" (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5102 whether the high frequency support mode after the jackpot game is started. judge. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "high frequency support mode" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. If the MPU 402 determines in step S5102 that the high frequency support mode has not been started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestion effect execution process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5102 that the high frequency support mode has been started (YES), the MPU 402 sets a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations in the high frequency support mode in step S5103. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets "n" (n is an integer of 0 or more and less than 100) in the fluctuation number counter FC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413. This fluctuation number counter FC is a counter for specifying the number of fluctuations in the high frequency support that shifts after the big hit game with the MPU 402 when the game result is a “small round high probability result”.

In step S5104, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the variation end command has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the variable end command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S5104 that the variation end command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5104 that it has received the fluctuation end command (YES), the MPU 402 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the fluctuation counter FC in step S5105.
In step S5106, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the fluctuation counter FC is “0” or less. When it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the fluctuation counter FC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestion effect processing.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S5106 that the value of the fluctuation counter FC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect processing in step S5107. As an example of the suggestion effect, the MPU 402 is performed by any one or combination of audio, light emission, video, and movable accessory. For example, when outputting voice, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read the sound data suggesting that it is a latent probability change from the common ROM 404 and reproduce it. Based on the instruction of the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403 reads out the sound data suggesting that it is a latent probability variation from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it (outputs from the speaker units 26A to 26C).

Further, when it is suggested that the latent probability change is caused by the light emission, the MPU 402 reads the light emitting data suggesting the latent probability change from the ROM 412 or the common ROM 404, and based on the read light emitting data, the indicator lamp device 23A, Make 23B emit light. Further, when suggesting that the latent probability is changed by the image, the MPU 402 transmits a latent probability suggestion command for displaying an image (including an image) suggesting that the latent probability is changed to the display control device 500. The display control device 500 causes the display screen G to display a video (including an image) suggesting that the latent probability is changed based on the latent probability suggestion command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 (MPU402). When suggesting that the latent probability is changed in the video (image), for example, the effect B4 in the high frequency support mode between the low-round high-probability result and the low-round low-probability result described in FIG. The background color, the displayed character, etc. may be slightly different. Further, in this case, in the battle effect described with reference to FIG. 46 (H) described above, the player indicates that the character on the player side and the enemy character battle each other and win the battle to obtain a latent probability change. May be suggested to.

In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect is fixed (after the nth change), but the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, numerical values 1 to 49 are determined by lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) before step S5103. In step S5103, the MPU 402 sets a value determined by lottery in the fluctuation number counter FC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413. In addition, a lottery for whether or not the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect is performed for each game (variation) in the high frequency support mode (during the time reduction), and the number of games (number of fluctuations) during the high frequency support mode (during the time reduction) is performed. If the above lottery is won within the specified number of times (same as)), the suggestion effect is executed, and the number of games played in the high frequency support mode (during time reduction) is up to 100 times, which is the specified number of times. If the lottery is not won, the suggestion effect may be executed at the time of the final game (100th variation). In addition, the content of the suggestion effect may be changed according to the number of games won in the lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestion effect. In this case, since the content of the suggestion effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestion effect is won, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of seeing various suggestion effects.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment cannot grasp whether the gaming result is a "small round high probability result" or a "small round low probability result". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an effect suggesting the possibility of a latent probability change state is executed at a predetermined timing (during the high frequency support mode (during a short time)). As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the gaming state and can enjoy the game without stress. In addition, it is possible to play while enjoying the timing at which the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability change state appears during the time reduction.

Next, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 when the suggestion effect is executed when the result screen is displayed after the high frequency support mode will be described. In the following description, in order to explain the mode in which the suggestion effect is executed on the presentation screen (result screen) of the number of prize balls won after the high frequency support mode, the result display in step S4907 of FIG. 107 is described. After explaining the processing, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 when the suggestion effect is executed after the high frequency support mode (when the result screen is displayed) will be described.

The result screen is a screen showing information about the privilege given to the player in the high probability mode. For example, when a jackpot is won and the mode shifts to the high probability mode, the jackpot may be won again during the high probability mode and the high probability mode may continue. Information on the benefits given to the player in the high-probability mode, such as the number of times the jackpot was won again during the high-probability mode and the high-probability mode was entered, and information on the prize balls paid out by winning the jackpot. Is displayed on the symbol display device 91 as a result screen.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the result display processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the result display process will be described with reference to FIG. 112. The result display process is executed by the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (step S4907 in FIG. 107).

In step S5201, the result display aggregation process is executed. The result display aggregation process calculates the information required to display the result screen based on the prize ball command sent from the main control device 300, the command indicating the number of times the jackpot was won in the high probability mode, and the like. To do.

In step S5202, it is determined whether or not the final special game round end command has been received from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300. If it is determined in step S5202 that the final special game round end command has been received from the MPU 302 (YES), the process proceeds to step S5203, and the result display start command is transmitted to the display control device 500. The display control device 500 that has received the result display start command executes a process for displaying the result screen on the symbol display device 91. After that, the process for displaying this result is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5202 that the final special game round end command has not been received from the MPU 302 (NO), the result display process is terminated without executing step S5203.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a flowchart for executing a suggestion effect when displaying the result screen after the high frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 when the suggestion effect is executed when the result screen is displayed after the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 113.

In step S5301, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the type command of "small round high accuracy result". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high accuracy result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S5301 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5301 that it has received the type command of "small round high accuracy result" (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5302 whether the result display start command has been transmitted to the display control device 500. To do. When the MPU 402 determines that the result display start command has been transmitted in step S5302 (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process in step S5303. Since the example of the suggestion effect has been described in step S5107 of FIG. 111, a duplicate description will be omitted.

When suggesting that the latent probability is changed by the image, the MPU 402 transmits a latent probability suggestion command for displaying an image (including an image) suggesting that the latent probability is changed to the display control device 500. The display control device 500 superimposes an image (including an image) suggesting a latent probability change on the result screen based on the latent probability suggestion command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 (MPU402), and displays the display screen G. To display. Further, in the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect is immediately after the result screen is displayed on the display screen G after it is determined that the result display start command has been transmitted. The timing for executing the suggestion effect may be as long as the result screen is displayed on the display screen G. Further, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect may be after the result screen is displayed. In this case, in step S5302 of FIG. 113, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a "result display stop command" for ending the display of the result screen has been transmitted to the display control device 500, and "result display" to the display control device 500. When the "stop command" is transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 may be configured to execute the suggestion effect process in step S5303.

In addition, on the result screen after the high frequency support mode, the number of times the jackpot game is continued (so-called number of consecutive villas), the type of each jackpot game (number of rounds and name of the jackpot game), the total number of winning prize balls, etc. are displayed on the display screen G. You may try to do it. In addition, when displaying the type of each jackpot game (number of rounds and name of jackpot game) on the result screen, it is determined for each jackpot game whether the lottery was won in the probabilistic state or the lottery in the normal state as a suggestion effect. It may be displayed on the display screen G. Furthermore, when the number of consecutive villas is large, the amount of information displayed on the result screen also increases. Therefore, the time for displaying the result screen on the display screen G may be changed according to the number of consecutive villas. For example, the time for displaying the result screen on the display screen G may be lengthened by a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) each time the number of consecutive villas increases once.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a flowchart for executing the suggestion effect processing during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 114, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 when the suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high frequency support mode will be described.

In step S5401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the type command of "small round high accuracy result". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high accuracy result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S5401 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5401 that it has received the type command of "small round high probability result" (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5402 whether or not the high frequency support mode after the jackpot game is started. To judge. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "high frequency support mode" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. If the MPU 402 determines in step S5402 that the high frequency support mode has not been started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestion effect execution process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5402 that the high frequency support mode has been started (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5403 whether or not the jackpot has been won. Specifically, the MPU 402 can be selected from "small round high probability result", "small round low probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" corresponding to various flag storage areas of RAM 413. Determine if the corresponding flag is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5403 that the jackpot has not been won (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

In step S5404, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in step S5403 (YES), the MPU 402 determines whether or not the jackpot winning in step S5403 is before the end of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored, in other words, whether or not the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is cleared. .. When it is determined in step S5404 that the high frequency support mode is not before the end, in other words, the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is cleared (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S5404 that the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode has not been cleared, that is, the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode has not been cleared (YES), the MPU 402 has a suggestion effect in step S5405. Executes the processing of. Since the example of the suggestion effect has been described in step S5107 of FIG. 111, a duplicate description will be omitted.

In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect is when the jackpot is won, but the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, a lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) determines in which round of the jackpot game won in step S5403 the suggestion effect is executed. The MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect of step S5405 at the time of the round game determined by the lottery. In addition, if the lottery for whether or not the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect is performed for each round and the above lottery is won until the ending command is received or the final round (second round) of the winning jackpot game is won. If the above lottery is not won until the ending command is received or the final round of the winning jackpot game is executed, the suggestion effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game or the final round of the winning jackpot game. It may be. In addition, the content of the suggestion effect may be changed according to the number of rounds won in the lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestion effect. In this case, since the content of the suggestion effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestion effect is won, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of seeing various suggestion effects.

Further, in the above description, the suggestion effect processing is executed during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high frequency support mode, but the suggestion effect process may be executed during the jackpot game. Specifically, in step S5401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the type command of "small round high accuracy result" is received, and receives the type command of "small round high accuracy result" in step S5401. If it is determined (YES), the MPU 402 may be configured to execute the processing of the suggestion effect in step S5405.

In this case as well, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect may be when the jackpot is won, or the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, a lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) determines in which round of the jackpot game the suggestion effect is to be executed. The MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect of step S5405 at the time of the round game determined by the lottery. In addition, if the lottery for whether or not the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect is performed for each round and the above lottery is won until the ending command is received or the final round (second round) of the winning jackpot game is won. If the above lottery is not won until the ending command is received or the final round of the winning jackpot game is executed, the suggestion effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game or the final round of the winning jackpot game. It may be. In addition, the content of the suggestion effect may be changed according to the number of rounds won in the lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestion effect. In this case, since the content of the suggestion effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestion effect is won, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of seeing various suggestion effects.

FIGS. 115 to 117 are diagrams showing a flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggested when there is an operation reception) of the gaming machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment. Here, a mode in which the suggestion effect processing is executed when the player's operation is accepted will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 115, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestion effect when the player's operation is accepted during the high frequency support mode will be described.

In step S5501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the type command of "small round high accuracy result". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high accuracy result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S5501 that the type command of "small round high probability result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5501 that it has received the type command of "small round high accuracy result" (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5502 whether or not the high frequency support mode after the jackpot game is started. judge. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "high frequency support mode" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. If the MPU 402 determines in step S5502 that the high frequency support mode has not been started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestion effect execution process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5502 that the high frequency support mode has been started (YES), the MPU 402 sets a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations in the high frequency support mode in step S5503. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the specified number of times "100" in the fluctuation number counter FC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413. This fluctuation number counter FC is a counter for specifying the number of fluctuations in the high frequency support that shifts after the big hit game with the MPU 402 when the game result is a “small round high probability result”.

In step S5504, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation button 35 as the operation means has been pressed down. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5504 that the player's operation is being accepted (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process in step S5505. Since the example of the suggestion effect has been described in step S5107 of FIG. 111, a duplicate description will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5504 that the player's operation is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines whether or not the variation end command has been received in step S5506. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the variable end command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S5506 that the variation end command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5506 that it has received the fluctuation end command (YES), the MPU 402 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the fluctuation counter FC in step S5507.
In step S5508, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the fluctuation counter FC is “0” or less. When it is determined in step S5508 that the value of the fluctuation counter FC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestion effect processing.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S5508 that the value of the fluctuation counter FC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect processing in step S5505. Since the example of the suggestion effect has already been described, the duplicate description will be omitted.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment cannot clearly grasp whether the gaming result is a "small round high probability result" or a "small round low probability result". However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the player's operation is accepted, an effect suggesting the possibility of a latent probability change state is executed. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the gaming state and can enjoy the game without stress. Further, even if the player's operation is not accepted, the player can surely grasp the transition of the gaming state because the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability change state is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode. If the player's operation is not accepted, the suggestion effect processing may be terminated without executing the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability change state at the end of the high frequency support mode (time reduction). Further, in the explanation with reference to FIG. 115, the end of the high frequency support mode is detected when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, but the high frequency support mode transmitted from the main control unit 300 indicates the end. The frequency support mode end command may be received to detect the end of the high frequency support mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestion effect when the player's operation is accepted during the display of the result screen of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. explain.
In step S5601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the type command of "small round high accuracy result". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high accuracy result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S5601 that the type command of "small round high accuracy result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5601 that it has received the type command of "small round high accuracy result" (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5602 whether the result display start command has been transmitted to the display control device 500. To do. When the MPU 402 determines that the result display start command has been transmitted in step S5602 (YES), in step S5603, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation button 35 as the operation means has been pressed down. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5603 that the player's operation is being accepted (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process in step S5604. Since the example of the suggestion effect has been described in step S5107 of FIG. 111, a duplicate description will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5603 that the player's operation is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S5605 whether or not the result display end command has been transmitted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5605 that the result display start command has been transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process. If the MPU 402 determines in step S5605 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment cannot grasp whether the gaming result is a "small round high probability result" or a "small round low probability result". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the player's operation is accepted, an effect suggesting the possibility of a latent probability change state is executed. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the gaming state and can enjoy the game without stress. Further, even if the player's operation is not accepted, the player can surely grasp the transition of the game state because the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability change state is executed at the end of the result screen display. If the player's operation is not accepted, the suggestion effect processing may be terminated without executing the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability change state at the end of the high frequency support mode (time reduction).

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, sound emission in the case of executing a suggestion effect that the player's operation is accepted during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high-frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The operation of the control device 400 will be described. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggested when there is an operation reception) of the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 117, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestion effect that the player's operation is accepted during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high frequency support mode will be described.

In step S5701, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the type command of "small round high accuracy result". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high accuracy result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S5701 that the type command of "small round high accuracy result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5701 that it has received the type command of "small round high accuracy result" (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5702 whether or not the high frequency support mode after the jackpot game is started. To judge. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "high frequency support mode" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5702 that the high frequency support mode has not been started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5702 that the high frequency support mode has been started (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5703 whether or not the jackpot has been won. Specifically, the MPU 402 can be selected from "small round high probability result", "small round low probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" corresponding to various flag storage areas of RAM 413. Determine if the corresponding flag is stored. When it is determined in step S5703 that the MPU 402 has not won the jackpot (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

In step S5704, when the MPU 402 determines that the jackpot has been won in step S5703 (YES), the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation button 35 as the operation means has been pressed down. When the MPU 402 determines in step S5704 that the player's operation is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5704 that the player's operation is being accepted (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S5705 whether or not the jackpot winning is before the end of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored, in other words, whether or not the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is cleared. .. When it is determined in step S5705 that the high frequency support mode is not before the end, in other words, the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is cleared (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5705 that the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode has not been cleared before the end of the high frequency support mode (YES), in step S5706, the MPU 402 sets the MPU 402 to step S5706. In, the processing of the suggestion effect is executed. Since the example of the suggestion effect is the same as the example of the suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 111, duplicate description will be omitted.

In addition, in FIGS. 115 to 117, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation button 35 as the operation means is pressed down, and determines whether or not any button (35a) of the operation button 35 is pressed down. Although the suggestion effect is executed when ~ 35c) is pressed down, the MPU 402 may execute the suggestion effect when the buttons 35a to 35c of the operation buttons 35 are pressed down in a predetermined order. In this case, the player can enjoy exploring what kind of operation is used to perform the effect suggesting the possibility of the latent probability change state, and the interest is improved. It can also encourage more active intervention by the player. Further, the present embodiment 10 is provided with an operation receiving means other than the operation button 35, for example, a touch sensor, and when the operation of the operation receiving means (touch sensor) is received, there is a possibility that the latent probability is changed. It may be configured so that the suggestive effect is executed.

Further, in the suggestion effect processing described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 117 (excluding FIG. 112), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect when the received type command is "small round high accuracy result". When the received type command is "small round low probability result", the effect suggesting that the high probability result is not won, in other words, the low probability result may be executed. Further, the MPU 402 determines whether the received type command is a "small round high probability result" or a "small round low probability result", and when the received type command is a "small round high probability result", If the type command received is "Small round low probability result", it suggests that the high probability result was not won, in other words, it is a low probability result. You may try to execute the effect to be performed.

Further, in the suggestion effect processing of the game machine according to the modification of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117, an effect of prompting the operation reception may be performed. Specifically, the suggestion effect process described with reference to FIG. 115 is step S5503 or later, the suggestion effect process described with reference to FIG. 116 is step S5607 or later, and the suggestion effect process described with reference to FIG. 117 is a step. After S5703, an effect of urging the player to accept the operation is performed. In the effect of urging the player to accept the operation, for example, an image or a video prompting the player to operate the operation button 35 is displayed on the display screen G (for example, the character "press!" Is displayed together with the image of the operation button 35. ), Or the voice "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, an image or a video prompting the operation of the operation button 35 may be displayed on the display screen G, and the voice "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

[11th Embodiment]
In the eleventh embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 having a fall lottery function will be described. The fall lottery means that the game state shifts from the probabilistic state in which the lottery probability of the jackpot lottery means is advantageous to the normal state in which the lottery probability is lower than the probabilistic state. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment falls from the probabilistic state to a low probable state when the above-mentioned fall lottery is performed together with the jackpot lottery during the probabilistic state, and when the fall lottery is won. Then, some conventional pachinko machines 10 do not notify whether or not they have won the fall lottery and have fallen from the probabilistic state to the low probable state. In this case, the player does not know whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic state or a low probable state. For this reason, depending on the player, the expectation for the big hit may decline immediately, and the game may be stopped even though it is in a probable state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect suggesting that the machine has fallen at a predetermined timing. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described, but only the process of notifying the result of the fall lottery will be described. Further, a configuration different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described, and duplicate description will be omitted for the same configuration.

FIG. 118 shows a jackpot occurrence stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area of ROM 312 provided as a hit / miss information group storage means of the main control device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the value of the random number to perform. As shown in FIG. 118, the low-probability mode pass / fail table includes the pass / fail table for the low-probability mode (low-probability (normal) pass / fail information group) shown in FIG. 118 (a) and the high probability shown in FIG. 118 (b). It is equipped with a pass / fail table for modes (a high probability (high probability) pass / fail information group). The MPU 302 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / fail tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the hit / fail table stored in the ROM 312 of the main control device 300 has a “fall result” in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above. Specifically, under the gaming state (normal state) in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), "big hit winning" and "special loss" It has the result of lottery (win / fail result) of multiple jackpot occurrences of "result" and "normal off result". In addition, under the gaming state (normal state) in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the “big hit winning”, “special loss result”, It has a lottery result (win / fail result) of multiple jackpot occurrences of "fall result" and "normal deviation result". In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the value of the random number that becomes the “fall result” is two.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / losing table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the random number values that are stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and become the "big hit winning". In addition, the value and number of random numbers are arbitrary for the "fall result".

When the "fall result" is won, the MPU 302 shifts the gaming state from the probabilistic state in which the lottery probability is advantageous to the normal state in which the lottery probability is lower than the probabilistic state. Specifically, the MPU 302 clears the high-probability mode flag set in the high-probability mode flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 313, and changes from the probabilistic state in which the gaming state and the lottery probability of the pachinko machine 10 are advantageous to the probabilistic state. Transition to a lower normal state.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In step S5801, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 302 determines in step S5801 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode (NO), the MPU 302 sets the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 118 (a)) from the winning / failing table storage area of ROM 312 in step S5802. read out. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S5801 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode (YES), in step S5803, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 118 (b)) is changed to the winning / failing table of ROM 312. Read from the storage area.

After executing the process of step S5802 or step S5803, the MPU 302 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S5804. Specifically, the MPU 302 includes the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE and the pass / fail table for the low probability mode read in step S5802 or the pass / fail table for the high probability mode read in step S5803. The result of the winning / failing lottery (winning / failing result) is determined by comparison with. The winning / failing result is one of "big hit winning", "special losing result", "falling result", and "normal losing result", and the winning / failing table in the high probability mode has the "falling result". Is different from the pass / fail table in low probability mode.

In step S5805, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S5804 is "big hit winning". When the MPU 302 determines in step S5805 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" (YES), the process after step S5806 is executed, and when it is determined in step S5805 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning" ( NO), the processing after step S5812 is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S5805 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" (YES), the MPU 302 determines in step S5806 whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313.

Here, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313, it is shown that the first result display unit 93a based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a starts the variable display. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S5806 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313 (NO), in step S5807, the first distribution table (see FIG. 21 (a)) is ROM 312. Read from the distribution table storage area of.

Further, when the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313, it indicates that the second result display unit 93b based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 84b starts the variable display. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S5806 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313 (YES), in step S5808, the second distribution table (see FIG. 21B) is ROM 312. Read from the distribution table storage area of.

After executing the process of step S5807 or step S5808, the MPU 302 executes the distribution determination process in step S5809. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 302 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S5807 or step S5808 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S5810, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93, and the determined information. That is, the information related to the symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored in the RAM 313. Here, the MPU 302 provides information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S5809 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 312. To determine. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 differently for each distribution result.

In step S5811, the MPU 302 sets a flag in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result determined in step S5809. Specifically, the MPU 302 sets the low probability result flag when it is specified that the distribution result is "low probability result", and when it is specified that it is "small round high probability result", it is small round. If you set the high probability result flag and identify that it is a "low round low probability result", if you set the low probability result flag for a small round and specify that it is the "best result", the most advantageous result flag To set. After that, the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S5819. In the processing of each of the following steps, the MPU 302 determines the distribution result with reference to the presence / absence of the flag set in the RAM 313.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S5805 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning" (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S5812 whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S5804 is a "special missed result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S5812 that the pass / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the process after step S5813 is executed, and in step S5812 it is determined that the pass / fail result is not a "special miss result". In the case (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S5815 whether or not the hit / fail result is the “fall result”.
When the MPU 302 determines in step S5815 that the pass / fail result is not the "fall result" (NO), the processing after step S5816 is executed, and when it is determined in step S5815 that the pass / fail result is the "fall result" (YES). ), MPU 302 executes the processes after step S5817.

In step S5813, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 302 determines and determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93. The information, that is, the information related to the symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored in the RAM 313. Here, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 312. The mode of the symbol set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the mode of the symbol set in the stop result table for the jackpot result. In step S5814, the MPU 302 sets a special disengagement flag in the RAM 313. In each of the following processes, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" by referring to the presence / absence of the special miss flag set in the RAM 313.

In step S5816, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 313. Here, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 312. It should be noted that the mode of the symbol set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the mode of the symbol set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

In step S5817, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the fall result. In the stop result setting process for the fall result, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93, and the determination is made. The information is stored in the RAM 313. Here, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by referring to the stop result table for the fall result stored in advance in the ROM 312. In the present embodiment, the mode of the symbol set in the stop result table for the fall result is the same as the mode of the symbol set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result. Therefore, the MPU 302 may refer to the stop result table for the normal off result when executing the stop result setting process for the fall result. The memory capacity can be saved by making the table referred to by the MPU 302 the same in the case of the "fall result" and the "normal deviation result".

In step S5818, the MPU 302 executes a process for the fall result. Specifically, the MPU 302 clears the high-probability mode flag set in the high-probability mode flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 313, and changes from the probabilistic state in which the gaming state and the lottery probability of the pachinko machine 10 are advantageous to the probabilistic state. Transition to a lower normal state.

After executing any of the processes of step S5811, step S5814, step S5816, and step S5818, the MPU 302 executes the display duration (display duration) setting process in step S5819. Since the process of setting the display duration (display duration) has been described in the first embodiment, duplicate description will be omitted.

In step S5820, the MPU 302 sets a variation command and a type command. The MPU 302 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S5820 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). The voice emission control device 400 executes a predetermined process (start of the variation display in step S5821) based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302, and the process will be described in detail later.

The variable command includes information related to the display duration, but does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs. In addition, the type command includes information related to the result of success or failure and information related to the result of distribution. More specifically, the type command includes each information related to "big hit winning", "special loss result", "normal loss result", and "fall result" as information related to the winning / failing result. In addition, in the type command, as information related to the distribution result, "low probability result", "small round high probability result", "small round low probability result", "most advantageous result" and "fall result" Contains information. In the following description, the winning / failing result and the sorting result are also collectively referred to as a game result. That is, the type command includes information related to the game result.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
Next, the effect determination process of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. Since only a part of the effect determination process of the game machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment and the effect determination process of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment are different, the game machine according to the present embodiment is referred to with reference to FIG. 108. The effect determination process of 10 will be described.

In step S5001, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302. When it is determined in step S5001 that the MPU 402 has not received each command (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S5009. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that each command has been received in step S5001 (YES), in step S5002, the game result is "out of place result" ("special out of place result", based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the command is "small round high probability result", "small round low probability result", "most advantageous result", "low probability result").

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5002 that the game result is not the "outlier result" (NO), the MPU402 determines in step S5003 whether or not the game result is the "special outlier result". When the MPU 402 determines in step S5003 that the game result is not a "special deviation result" (NO), the MPU 402 executes a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of game result in step S5004. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the stop symbol effective line L. Information on a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "1.1.1" or "2.2.2") is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "small round high probability result" or a "small round low probability result", the same even number as the stop result to finally display the stop on the stop symbol effective line L. Information on a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "4, 4, 4") is determined. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the symbol having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L (for example, "2.2").・ Determine the information related to the combination of 2 ”).

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S5003 that the game result is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 402 executes a common symbol determination process in step S5005. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result for finally displaying a stop on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 402 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out-of-order result" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S5002 that the game result is a "disengagement result" (YES), in other words, when it is determined in step S5002 that it is a "normal disengagement result" or a "fall result", in step S5006, it is normal. Executes the symbol determination process for disconnection. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 402 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variable command.

Since the step processing after step S5006 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, overlapping description will be omitted. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 110, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment has either an effect selected in the “small round high accuracy result” or an effect selected in the “small round low accuracy result”. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect selected in the "small round high accuracy result" and the effect selected in the "small round low accuracy result" are the same. It may or may not be different. Further, in the symbol determination in step S5004, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "small round high probability result", the same odd number as the stop result to finally display the stop symbol on the stop symbol effective line L. Alternatively, information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "1.1.1" or "2.2.2") may be determined.

<About the suggestion effect processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
120 to 125 are diagrams showing a flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (S4908 of FIG. 107) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the following description, the case of notifying the result of the fall lottery in the suggestion effect processing will be described, and other explanations will be omitted.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a flowchart for executing a suggestion effect (notifying the result of a fall lottery) at the time of a fall. Hereinafter, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestion effect at the time of falling will be described with reference to FIG. 120.

In step S5901, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S5901 that the type command of "small round high accuracy result" or "most advantageous result" is not received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S5901 that it has received the "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (YES), the MPU 402 receives the "fall result" type command in step S5902. Determine if it has been done. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the "fall result" is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S5902 that the type command of the "fall result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S5902 that it has received the type command of "fall result" (YES), in step S5903, the MPU 402 executes the processing of the suggestion effect. As an example of the suggestion effect, the MPU 402 is performed by any one or combination of audio, light emission, video, and movable accessory. For example, when outputting voice, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the sound data suggesting that the sound data has fallen from the high accuracy state to the normal state from the common ROM 404. Based on the instruction of the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403 reads out the sound data suggesting that it has fallen from the common ROM 404 and reproduces it (outputs from the speaker units 26A to 26C).

Further, when suggesting that the vehicle has fallen by light emission, the MPU 402 reads light emission data suggesting that the product has fallen from the ROM 412 or the common ROM 404, and causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B to emit light based on the read light emission data. .. Further, when suggesting that the image has fallen, the MPU 402 transmits a fall suggestion command for displaying the image (including an image) suggesting that the image has fallen to the display control device 500. The display control device 500 causes the display screen G to display an image (including an image) suggesting that the player has fallen, based on the fall suggestion command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 (MPU402).

As described above, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting that the game machine 10 has fallen when it has fallen from the probabilistic state to the normal state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the gaming state and can enjoy the game without stress. It should be noted that the number of fluctuations when the state falls from the high accuracy state to the normal state may be presented (suggested).

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a flowchart for executing a suggestion effect when displaying the result screen after the high frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 when the suggestion effect is executed when the result screen is displayed after the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 121.

In step S6001, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S6001 that the type command of "small round high accuracy result" or "most advantageous result" is not received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S6001 that it has received the "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (YES), the MPU 402 receives the "fall result" type command in step S6002. Determine if it has been done. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the "fall result" is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S6002 that the type command of the "fall result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6002 that the "fall result" type command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S6003 whether the result display start command has been transmitted to the display control device 500. When the MPU 402 determines that the result display start command has been transmitted in step S6003 (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process in step S6004. Since the example of the suggestion effect has been described in step S5903 of FIG. 120, a duplicate description will be omitted. Further, when it is determined in step S6003 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When suggesting that the image has fallen, the MPU 402 transmits a fall suggestion command for displaying the image (including an image) suggesting that the image has fallen to the display control device 500. The display control device 500 superimposes an image (including an image) suggesting a fall probability change on the result screen on the display screen G based on the fall suggestion command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 (MPU402). Display it. Further, in the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the fall effect is immediately after the result screen is displayed on the display screen G after it is determined that the result display start command has been transmitted. The timing for executing the suggestion effect may be as long as the result screen is displayed on the display screen G. Further, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect may be after the result screen is displayed. In this case, in step S6003 of FIG. 121, the MPU 402 determines whether or not a "result display stop command" for ending the display of the result screen has been transmitted to the display control device 500, and "result display" to the display control device 500. When the "stop command" is transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 may be configured to execute the suggestion effect process in step S6004. In addition, on the result screen, the number of fluctuations when falling from the high accuracy state to the normal state may be presented (suggested).

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a flowchart for executing a suggestion effect processing during a jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 122, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 when the suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high frequency support mode will be described.

In step S6101, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high accuracy result or the" most advantageous result "are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S6101 that the type command of "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6101 that it has received the type command of "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" (YES), the MPU 402 sets the high frequency support mode after the jackpot game ends in step S6102. Determines if has been started. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "high frequency support mode" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. If the MPU 402 determines in step S6102 that the high frequency support mode has not been started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestion effect execution process.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S6102 that the high frequency support mode has been started (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S6103 whether or not it has received the "fall result" type command. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the "fall result" is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S6103 that the type command of the "fall result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6103 that the type command of the "fall result" is received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S6104 whether or not the jackpot has been won. Specifically, the MPU 402 can be selected from "small round high probability result", "small round low probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" corresponding to various flag storage areas of RAM 413. Determine if the corresponding flag is stored. When it is determined in step S6104 that the MPU 402 has not won the jackpot (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

In step S6105, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in step S6104 (YES), the MPU 402 determines whether or not the jackpot winning in step S6104 is before the end of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored, in other words, whether or not the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is cleared. .. When it is determined in step S6105 that the high frequency support mode is not before the end, in other words, the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is cleared (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S6105 that the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode has not been cleared before the end of the high frequency support mode (YES), the MPU 402 suggests in step S6106. Executes the processing of. Since the example of the suggestion effect has been described in step S5903 of FIG. 120, a duplicate description will be omitted.

In the above description, the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect is when the jackpot is won, but the timing at which the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, a lottery (a counter may be used for the lottery) determines in which round of the jackpot game won in step S6104 the suggestion effect is to be executed. The MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect of step S6106 in the round determined by the lottery. In addition, a lottery for whether or not the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect is performed for each round, and the lottery is performed until the ending command is received or the final round (second round or fifteenth round) of the winning jackpot game. If you win, the suggestion effect will be executed, and if you do not win the lottery until the ending command is received or until the final round of the winning jackpot game, the suggestion effect will be executed during the ending period or the final round of the jackpot game. You may. In addition, the content of the suggestion effect may be changed according to the number of rounds won in the lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestion effect. In this case, since the content of the suggestion effect differs depending on when the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestion effect is won, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of seeing various suggestion effects.

FIGS. 123 to 125 are diagrams showing a flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggested when there is an operation reception) of the game machine according to the modified example of the present embodiment. Here, a mode in which the suggestion effect processing is executed when the player's operation is accepted will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 123, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 when the suggestion effect is executed when the player's operation is accepted during the high frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. explain.

In step S6201, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S6201 that the type command of "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6201 that it has received the "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (YES), the MPU 402 receives the "fall result" type command in step S6202. Determine if it has been done. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the "fall result" is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S6202 that the type command of the "fall result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6202 that the type command of the "fall result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S6203 whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation button 35 as the operation means has been pressed down. When the MPU 402 determines in step S6203 that the player's operation is being accepted (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process in step S6204. Since the example of the suggestion effect has been described in step S5903 of FIG. 120, a duplicate description will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6203 that the player's operation is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

As described above, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting the possibility of falling when the player's operation is accepted. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the gaming state and can enjoy the game without stress. It should be noted that the number of fluctuations (number of games) when the player falls from the high accuracy state to the normal state in the high frequency support mode may be presented (suggested).

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestion effect when the player's operation is accepted during the display of the result screen of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. explain.
In step S6301, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S6301 that the type command of "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6301 that it has received the "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command (YES), the MPU 402 receives the "fall result" type command in step S6302. Determine if it has been done. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the "fall result" is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S6302 that the type command of the "fall result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6302 that the type command of the "fall result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S6303 whether the result display start command has been transmitted to the display control device 500. When it is determined in step S6303 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines that the result display start command has been transmitted in step S6303 (YES), in step S6304, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation button 35 as the operation means has been pressed down. When the MPU 402 determines in step S6304 that the player's operation is being accepted (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process in step S6305. Since the example of the suggestion effect has been described in step S5903 of FIG. 120, a duplicate description will be omitted.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6304 that the player's operation is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S6306 whether or not the result display end command has been transmitted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S6306 that the result display start command has been transmitted (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process. If the MPU 402 determines in step S6306 that the result display start command has not been transmitted (NO), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process.

As described above, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting the possibility of falling when the operation of the player is accepted. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the gaming state and can enjoy the game without stress. Further, even if the player's operation is not accepted, the effect suggesting the possibility of falling is executed at the end of the result screen display, so that the player can surely grasp the transition of the game state. In addition, the number of fluctuations when falling from the high accuracy state to the normal state may be presented (suggested) on the result screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, sound emission in the case of executing the suggestion effect that the player's operation is accepted during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high frequency support mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The operation of the control device 400 will be described. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the suggestion effect processing (suggested when there is an operation reception) of the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 125, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 in the case of executing the suggestion effect that the player's operation is accepted during the jackpot game (next jackpot) after the high frequency support mode will be described.

In step S6401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" type command. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S6401 that the type command of "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6401 that it has received the type command of "small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result" (YES), the MPU 402 sets the high frequency support mode after the jackpot game ends in step S6402. Determines if has been started. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the "high frequency support mode" are stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. If the MPU 402 determines in step S6402 that the high frequency support mode has not been started (NO), the MPU 402 ends the suggestion effect execution process.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S6402 that the high frequency support mode has been started (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S6403 whether or not it has received the "fall result" type command. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the "fall result" is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. When it is determined in step S6403 that the type command of the "fall result" has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S6403 that the type command of the "fall result" has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S6404 whether or not the jackpot has been won. Specifically, the MPU 402 can be selected from "small round high probability result", "small round low probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" corresponding to various flag storage areas of RAM 413. Determine if the corresponding flag is stored. When it is determined in step S6404 that the jackpot has not been won (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

In step S6405, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in step S6404 (YES), the MPU 402 determines whether or not the jackpot winning in step S6404 is before the end of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored, in other words, whether or not the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is cleared. .. When it is determined in step S6405 that the high frequency support mode is not before the end, in other words, the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is cleared (NO), the MPU 402 ends the execution process of the suggestion effect.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S6405 that the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode has not been cleared before the end of the high frequency support mode, in other words, the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode is not cleared (YES), in step S6406, the MPU 402 is a player. Judge whether or not the operation of is accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation button 35 as the operation means has been pressed down. When the MPU 402 determines in step S6406 that the player's operation is being accepted (YES), the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect process in step S6407. Since the example of the suggestion effect has been described in step S5903 of FIG. 120, a duplicate description will be omitted.

In addition, in FIGS. 123 to 125, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any button (35a to 35c) of the operation button 35 as the operation means is pressed down, and any button (35a) of the operation button 35 is determined. Although the suggestion effect is executed when ~ 35c) is pressed down, the MPU 402 may execute the suggestion effect when the buttons 35a to 35c of the operation buttons 35 are pressed down in a predetermined order. In this case, the player can enjoy exploring what kind of operation is used to perform the effect suggesting the possibility of falling, and the interest is improved. It can also encourage more active intervention by the player. Further, the present embodiment 10 is provided with an operation receiving means other than the operation button 35, for example, a touch sensor, and an effect suggesting the possibility of falling when the operation of the operation receiving means (touch sensor) is received. May be configured to be executed.

Further, in the suggestion effect processing described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 125, the MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect when it receives the type command of "fall result", in other words, when it falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state. However, if the type command of "fall result" is not received, in other words, the suggestion effect may be executed when the state has not fallen from the probabilistic state to the normal state.

Further, in the suggestion effect processing of the game machine according to the modification of the present embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, an effect of prompting the operation reception may be performed. Specifically, in the suggestion effect process described with reference to FIG. 123, steps S6202 and later, in the suggestion effect process described with reference to FIG. 124, step S6303 and later, and in the suggestion effect process described with reference to FIG. After S6405, an effect of urging the player to accept the operation is performed. In the effect of urging the player to accept the operation, for example, an image or a video prompting the player to operate the operation button 35 is displayed on the display screen G (for example, the character "press!" Is displayed together with the image of the operation button 35. ), Or the voice "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, an image or a video prompting the operation of the operation button 35 may be displayed on the display screen G, and the voice "press the button" may be output from at least one of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

[Other Modifications of the Eleventh Embodiment]
In the eleventh embodiment, the "fall result" is added to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 118 (b)) stored in the pass / fail table storage area of the ROM 312 of the main control device 300. Although the embodiment in which the fall lottery is performed has been described, the fall random number counter C5 for the fall lottery is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313, and the MPU 302 is internally provided by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C5, CINI and CS. A lottery (big hit lottery, fall lottery, etc.) may be executed. The counter C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added (incremented) to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching a predetermined maximum value, the counter C5 returns to 0. The random number initial value counter CINI may be used to set the initial value of the fall random number counter C5. Here, since the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS have been described in the first embodiment, duplicated description will be omitted.

In the modified example of this embodiment, the fall random number counter C5 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec). The updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 313. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the fall random number counter C5 is a hold provided in the RAM 313 as an acquisition information storage means at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 84a or the second start port 84b. Based on the value of the fall random number counter C5 stored in the ball storage area (see FIG. 19) and stored in the reserved ball storage area, the fall lottery from the probabilistic state to the normal state is executed. Also in this embodiment, the value of the random number that wins the fall is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area of ROM 312 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means.

Further, when the MPU 302 of the main control device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment wins the fall lottery, it clears the probability change flags of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 313, so that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed from the probability change state to the normal state. Along with shifting to the state, a fall command indicating that the player has fallen is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400. The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 produces an effect suggesting that the state of the pachinko machine 10 may have fallen from the probabilistic state to the normal state based on the fall command transmitted from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300 at a predetermined timing. Execute with. Regarding the suggestion effect in the voice emission control device 400, in each suggestion effect process described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 125, the step process of "receive the type command of the fall result?" And the "receive the fall command" are performed. It can be realized by reading as "?" (Whether or not the fall command transmitted from the main control device 300 has been received).

A fall random number counter C5 for a fall lottery is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313, and the MPU 302 uses the values (information) of the counters C1 to C5, CINI, and CS to perform an internal lottery (big hit lottery, fall lottery, etc.). When executing the above, the fall lottery may be performed before the big hit lottery, or the fall lottery may be performed after the big hit lottery. When the fall lottery is performed before the jackpot lottery, if the fall lottery is won, the jackpot lottery is performed after the game state changes from the probability change state to the normal state. For this reason, the player can play the game while worrying that the game state will not fall to the normal state, and can obtain a feeling of harassment. On the other hand, when the fall lottery is performed after the big hit lottery, the fall lottery is performed after the big hit lottery is performed in a probable state in which the game state is advantageous, which is a very advantageous game form for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment and the modified example, the high frequency support mode given after the big hit game has a low frequency when the number of games (same as the number of fluctuations) reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). Move to support mode. In other words, in the present embodiment and the modified example, the high frequency support mode ends when the number of games is 100 times. However, the number of games in the high frequency support mode is not limited to 100. For example, in the high frequency support mode, the number of games may be less than 100 times, or 101 times or more.

Further, even if the number of games (same as the number of fluctuations) exceeds 100 in the high frequency support mode given after the big hit game, the high frequency support mode may be continued until the fall lottery is won. .. In this case, if the fall lottery is won with the number of games exceeding 100, the high frequency support mode ends. That is, when the high-frequency support mode is continued until the fall lottery is won, the player wins the fall lottery due to the end of the high-frequency support mode, and the game state falls from the high-accuracy state to the normal state. You can recognize that. For this reason, if the fall lottery is won in a state where the number of games exceeds 100 times in the high frequency support mode given after the jackpot game, it is suggested that the game state has fallen from the probabilistic state to the normal state. It is preferable that the suggestion effect is not executed.

Even though the player can recognize that the game state has fallen from the high accuracy state to the normal state, when the above suggestion effect is executed, the player is emotionally hurt or frustrated. (It is an act of applying salt to the wound), which is not preferable. In addition, if the player is emotionally hurt or frustrated, the game may be stopped. However, as described above, if the player wins the fall lottery when the number of games exceeds 100 in the high-frequency support mode given after the jackpot game, the game state falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state. By not performing the suggestion effect suggesting that the player has done so, the player can be prevented from being emotionally hurt or irritated, and the player can continue playing the game comfortably.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) When the pachinko machine 10 passes through the game board 81 having the game area in which the game ball rolls and the specific area (first start port 84a, second start port 84b) of the game area 104, the pachinko machine 10 A jackpot lottery means (MPU302) that performs a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a probabilistic state in which the lottery probability of the jackpot lottery means is advantageous as a gaming state according to the result of the game. , A game state control means (MPU302) that controls a normal state in which the lottery probability of the jackpot lottery means is lower than the probability change state, and a fall lottery means (MPU302) that performs a fall lottery in which the probability change state is set to the normal state each time a jackpot lottery is performed. The MPU 302) and an effect control means (MPU 402, voice emission control device 400, display control device 500, etc.) for executing an effect suggesting the result of the fall lottery at a predetermined timing are provided. Therefore, the player can know whether the gaming state is an advantageous probabilistic state or a normal state by the effect. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a bored player from quitting the game because the player's expectation for the jackpot cannot be maintained despite the probabilistic state. Further, when the player falls to the normal state, the player can recognize that the normal state is reached, so that the player can play the game without having any strange expectations. In this way, the player can accurately grasp the transition of the gaming state.

(2) The effect control means (MPU 402, voice emission control device 400, display control device 500, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting the result of the fall lottery when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means (MPU302) is won. .. Therefore, the player can immediately know that he has fallen. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not to continue the game even after winning the fall lottery and the lottery probability is not in an advantageous probabilistic state. In addition, since it is possible to know that the player has fallen immediately, the player can suppress the wasteful consumption of the game ball if the game is not continued. Further, when the player continues the game, he / she can continue the game after knowing that the lottery probability is not a favorable probability change state but a normal state, and the player feels highly convinced.

[12th Embodiment]
In a game hall where game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are installed, there is a place where BGM is played at a loud volume from a speaker provided in the game hall. In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the volume can be set by the player, and some players prefer to play at a high volume and enjoy the game by increasing the volume setting of the gaming machine. There is. As described above, the game hall is usually in a very loud state. On the other hand, some players do not like to play at a loud volume and play games by lowering the volume setting of the game machine. However, as described above, the volume inside the game hall is usually very loud. Therefore, if the volume setting of the game machine is reduced, it may be difficult to hear the BGM and dialogue of the game machine, and the player may not be able to fully enjoy the production of the game machine. In the present embodiment, in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, an embodiment of a game machine capable of suitably enhancing the interest of the player will be described. In the following, the present embodiment will be described by taking a pachinko machine as an example of the game machine, but the present invention can be applied to various game machines such as slot machines in addition to the pachinko machine. Further, the same components as those described in the first to sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes different effects depending on the magnitude of the output volume from the speaker units 26A to 26C. More specifically, different effects are executed based on the volume settings of the speaker units 26A to 26C included in the pachinko machine 10. Here, the effect includes a sound (speech), BGM, a sound effect output (hereinafter, also referred to as a sound effect) from the speaker units 26A to 26C, which are sound output means, and a display of the symbol display device 91, which is a display means. An effect displayed on the screen G (hereinafter, also referred to as an image effect), an effect by lighting / blinking the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, which are light emitting means (hereinafter, also referred to as a light emission effect), and the like are included. Further, although the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is not provided, even if a movable accessory effect (hereinafter, also referred to as an accessory effect) or a vibration effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a vibe effect) is added to the above effect. Good. Here, the character production and the vibe production are included in the production other than the sound production.

In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C can be set by the operation button 35. An operation button for setting the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C may be provided separately from the operation button 35. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of settings of the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as 5 steps, but the number of settings of the output volume that can be set is not limited to 5 steps, for example, the setting of the output volume. The number may be two or more stages. In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the setting of the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is set to setting 5> setting 4> setting 3> setting 2> setting 1 (> indicates the magnitude relationship of the volume). It has become. In other words, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the volume of setting 5 is set to be the loudest, and the volume of setting 1 is set to be the lowest. Further, as the volume setting is changed from setting 5 to setting 1, the volume is set to be gradually reduced.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect mode and the volume setting of the game machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 126, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, different effect mode DMAs are used for each of the volume settings 1 to 5 so that different effect modes are set according to the output volume settings of the speaker units 26A to 26C. ~ DME is associated.
Specifically, the effect mode DMA is associated with the volume setting "1". Further, the effect mode DMB is associated with the volume setting "2". Further, the effect mode DMC is associated with the volume setting "3". Further, the effect mode DMD is associated with the volume setting "4". Further, the effect mode DME is associated with the volume setting "5". Here, each of the effect modes DMA to DME has a sound effect, an image effect, and a light emission effect, and the reach effect, the advance notice effect, and the look-ahead can be achieved by the effect alone or a combination of the effects (for example, a combination of the sound effect and the image effect). Various productions such as production and latent suggestion production are performed.

Next, the effect contents of each effect mode DMA to DME will be described.
The effect mode DMA (corresponding to the volume setting "1") is an effect mode in which there are more effects (image effect, light emission effect) other than the sound effect than the effect mode DMB (corresponding to the volume setting "2"). To put it the other way around, the effect mode DMB is an effect mode in which there are fewer effects (image effect, light emission effect) other than the sound effect than the effect mode DMA.
The effect mode DMB (corresponding to the volume setting "2") is an effect mode in which there are more effects (image effect, light emission effect) other than the sound effect than the effect mode DMC (corresponding to the volume setting "3"). To put it the other way around, the effect mode DMC is an effect mode in which there are fewer effects (image effect, light emission effect) other than the sound effect than the effect mode DMB.
The effect mode DMC (corresponding to the volume setting "3") is an effect mode in which there are more effects (image effect, light emission effect) other than the sound effect than the effect mode DMD (corresponding to the volume setting "4"). To put it the other way around, the effect mode DMD is an effect mode in which there are fewer effects (image effect, light emission effect) other than the sound effect than the effect mode DMC.
The effect mode DMD (corresponding to the volume setting "4") is an effect mode in which there are more effects (image effect, light emission effect) other than the sound effect than the effect mode DME (corresponding to the volume setting "5"). Conversely, the effect mode DME is an effect mode in which there are fewer effects (image effect, light emission effect) other than the sound effect than the effect mode DMD.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the volume setting is changed to "1" to "5", and the larger the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the more the effects other than the audio effect (image effect, light emission). It is configured to reduce the production). Conversely, the volume setting is changed from "5" to "1", and the smaller the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the more effects (image effect, light emission effect) other than the sound effect are configured. Has been done.

It should be noted that there are many effects other than voice effects (image effects, light emission effects), for example, when the volume setting is large (for example, the volume setting is "5" or "4"), the speaker suggests a latent probability change. Although it is only output as audio from parts 26A to 26C (the suggestion effect of the latent probability change is performed only by the sound effect), when the volume setting is small (for example, the volume setting is "1" to "3"), the latent probability change Not only the lines suggesting the latent probability change are output as voice from the speaker units 26A to 26C, but also the lines suggesting the latent probability change are displayed as subtitles on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 (the suggestion effect of the latent probability change is also performed in the image production). ) May be done. In addition to outputting the lines suggesting the latent probability change as voice from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the light emitting effect by lighting / blinking the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B which are the light emitting means, the character effect by the movable accessory, and the vibration. You may add an effect such as a vibe effect by. The above lines are not limited to those suggesting a latent probability change.
By doing so, when the volume setting is small, the player can play the game without worrying about the possibility of missing the lines output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the interest is improved.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt processing, the MPU 402 executes the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 127 periodically (for example, in a 2 msec cycle).

(Step S6501)
The MPU 402 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 402 receives a command from the MPU 302, the MPU 402 stores the received command in the RAM 413. Specifically, the RAM 413 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 302, and the MPU 402 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 302. The MPU 402 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

For example, the MPU 302 is a production control that includes basic information necessary for the game, such as the result of the jackpot lottery (the lottery result of jackpot or loss, the jackpot type if it is a jackpot), the number of balls on hold, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. A command (type command, variation pattern command, decoration drawing designation command) is transmitted, and the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 receives this. Further, the MPU 302 transmits an effect control command (effect stop command) instructing the effect stop after a predetermined time (special symbol fluctuation time) has elapsed, and the MPU 402 receives this. Further, regarding the information for designating the game state, the MPU 302 transmits an effect control command (game state designation command or jackpot middle command) including the information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the transition of the game state occurs). Then, the MPU 402 receives this. As a result, the current gaming state is grasped on the MPU 402, in other words, the voice emission control device 400 side.

(Step S6502)
The MPU 402 executes the volume setting process. Specifically, the MPU 402 executes a process of controlling the volume output from the speaker units 26A to 26C to the received volume setting when the volume is set by the operation button 35 as the operation means. As a result, the volume output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is controlled to the volume set by the player. The details of the volume setting process will be described later.

(Step S6503)
The MPU 402 executes the effect mode determination process based on the volume setting in step S6502. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines which of the effect modes DMA to DME to execute the effect based on the volume setting in step S6502. The details of the effect mode determination process will be described later.

(Step S6504)
The MPU 402 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300. Specifically, the MPU 402 executes various effects such as reach effect, advance notice effect, look-ahead effect, and latent suggestion effect corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S6503, based on the command received from MPU 302.

(Step S6505)
The MPU 402 executes the demo display execution process based on the command received from the MPU 302. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 402 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting the demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. ..

(Step S6506)
The MPU 402 executes a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the first to third hold lamp units 95a to 96. Specifically, the MPU 402 executes a light emission effect corresponding to a command transmitted from the main control device 300 based on the results of the effect mode determination process in step S6503 and the effect determination process in step S6504.

(Step S6507)
The MPU 402 executes voice control processing for outputting sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 has a sound effect (BGM, voice (line)) corresponding to a command transmitted from the main control device 300 based on the results of the effect mode determination process in step S6503 and the effect determination process in step S6504. , Output of sound effects, etc.).

(Step S6508)
The MPU 402 executes an image control process for displaying the effect image on the display screen G. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command for executing the image effect to the display control device 500 based on the result of the effect mode determination process in step S6503 and the effect determination process in step S6504. The display control device 500 displays an image for effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400.

(Step S6509)
The MPU 402 is based on the contents of the main process (see FIG. 25) for power recovery notification process (step S416) and the front door frame opening monitoring process (FIG. 34) for normal time notification process (step S1303). Perform notification processing. Since the details of the abnormality notification process have already been described, duplicate explanations will be omitted.

(Step S6510)
The MPU 402 executes a result display process. In the result display process, a process for displaying the result screen is executed when the high frequency support mode (time reduction) ends without winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the probability change state. Since the details of the result display process have already been described, duplicate explanations will be omitted.

(Step S6511)
The MPU 402 executes the suggestion effect processing. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines a suggestion effect (an effect suggesting that the state of the pachinko machine 10 may be in a probabilistic state) based on the results of the effect mode determination process in step S6503 and the effect determination process in step S6504. Execute at the timing of. Since the timing of executing the suggestion effect processing has already been described, a duplicate description will be omitted. After that, the MPU 402 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<About the volume setting process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the volume setting process (step S6502 in FIG. 127) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

(Step S6601)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the player's operation has been accepted. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not any of the buttons (35a to 35c) of the operation button 35 as the operation means has been pressed down. When the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation is being accepted (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6602. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the player's operation is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 ends the volume setting process.

(Step S6602)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the left direction button 35b of the operation button 35 is pressed down. When the MPU 402 determines that the left direction button 35b has been pressed down (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6603. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the left direction button 35b is not pressed down (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6605.

(Step S6603)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "1" (minimum). Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1" (minimum). When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1" (minimum) (YES), the MPU 402 ends the volume setting process. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 do not correspond to "1" (minimum) (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6604.

(Step S6604)
The MPU 402 lowers the volume setting by one. Specifically, the MPU 402 is set to "4" if the volume setting is "5", "3" if the volume setting is "4", and "2" if the volume setting is "3". If the volume setting is "2", it is set to "1".

(Step S6605)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the right direction button 35c of the operation button 35 is pressed down. When the MPU 402 determines that the right direction button 35c has been pressed down (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6606. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the right direction button 35c is not pressed down (NO), the MPU 402 ends the volume setting process.

(Step S6606)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "5" (maximum). Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "5" (maximum). When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "5" (maximum) (YES), the MPU 402 ends the volume setting process. When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 do not correspond to "5" (maximum) (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6607.

(Step S6607)
The MPU 402 raises the volume setting by one. Specifically, the MPU 402 is set to "2" if the volume setting is "1", "3" if the volume setting is "2", and "4" if the volume setting is "3". If the volume setting is "4", it is set to "5".

(Step S6608)
The MPU 402 sets the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to the volume set in step S6604 or step S6607. Specifically, the MPU 402 changes (rewrites) the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 to one corresponding to the volume setting in step S6604 or step S6607. As a result, the output volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C becomes the volume set by the player.

In the above description, the volume is set by the left-right direction buttons 35b and 35c of the operation button 35, but the operation button for setting the volume may be provided separately from the operation button 35. Further, in the above description, when the left direction button 35b of the operation button 35 is pressed down, the volume setting is lowered by one step, and when the right direction button 35c of the operation button 35 is pushed down, the volume setting is increased by one step. When the left direction button 35b of the operation button 35 is pressed down, the volume setting is increased by one step, and when the right direction button 35c of the operation button 35 is pressed down, the volume setting may be decreased by one step.

<Regarding the effect mode determination process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect mode determination process (step S6503 of FIG. 127) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

(Step S6701)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "1". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "1" (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6702. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "1" (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6703.

(Step S6702)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the effect mode DMA corresponding to the volume setting flag “1”.

(Step S6703)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "2". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "2". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 correspond to "2" (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6704. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 do not correspond to "2" (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6705.

(Step S6704)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the effect mode DMB corresponding to the volume setting flag “2”.

(Step S6705)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "3". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "3". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 correspond to "3" (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6706. Further, when it is determined that the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 does not correspond to "3" (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6707.

(Step S6706)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the effect mode DMC corresponding to the volume setting flag “3”.

(Step S6707)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting is "4". Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the volume setting flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 corresponds to "4". When the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 correspond to "4" (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6708. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the volume setting flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 do not correspond to "4" (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S6709.

(Step S6708)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the effect mode DMD corresponding to the volume setting flag “4”.

(Step S6709)
The MPU 402 determines the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the effect mode DME corresponding to the volume setting flag “5”.

(Step S6710)
The MPU 402 sets the effect mode to the mode set in steps S6702, S6704, S6706, S6708 or S6709. Specifically, the MPU 402 changes (rewrites) the effect mode flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 to those corresponding to the effect modes determined in steps S6702, S6704, S6706, S6708 or S6709. As a result, the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 corresponds to the set volume.

[Modified example of the twelfth embodiment]
In the twelfth embodiment, different effects (effect modes DMA to DME) are executed according to the magnitude of the output volume from the speaker units 26A to 26C, that is, the volume setting. MDA to MDE may be configured so that the player can select them. In this case, the player can select the effect modes DMA to DME regardless of the magnitude of the output volume from the speaker units 26A to 26C, that is, the volume setting, so that the player's choices increase. As a result, the sufficiency and satisfaction of the player with the pachinko machine 10 are improved.

Further, the game machine 10 is provided with a sound collecting device (for example, a microphone), and the sound is collected by the sound collecting device (for example, a microphone). It may be configured to perform the effect. More specifically, according to the difference β-α (db) between the ambient environment volume α (db) of the game hall collected by the sound collector of the game machine 10 and the set volume β (db) of the pachinko machine 10. Then, any of the effect modes DMA to DME may be executed. In this case, the larger the difference in volume β-α (db), the more effects (image effect, light emission effect) other than the sound effect are, and the effect mode (for example, effect mode DMA, DMB, etc.) is executed. If the volume difference β-α (db) is negative, it means that the set volume β is larger than the ambient volume α. Therefore, if the volume difference β-α (db) is negative, it means that the set volume β is larger. Execute the production mode DME.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes an effect executing means (MPU402,) for executing an effect, a sound output means (speakers 26A to 26C) for outputting sound based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, and a sound. A volume setting receiving unit (operation button 35, MPU402) that accepts the output volume setting of the output means, and a volume adjusting means (MPU402) that adjusts the volume of the sound output means based on the setting received by the volume setting receiving unit. And, based on the setting received by the volume setting reception unit, the effect control means (MPU402) for causing the effect execution means to execute a different effect is provided. According to such a pachinko machine 10, since different effects are executed by the effect executing means based on the output volume setting, different effects can be enjoyed depending on the output volume setting. As a result, the interest is improved.

(2) The pachinko machine 10 has a first effect and a second effect in which the effect by the sound output means is relatively less than that of the first effect. Then, the effect control means causes the effect execution means to switch between the first effect and the second effect based on the setting received by the volume setting reception unit. According to such a pachinko machine 10, based on the setting received by the volume setting reception unit, the first effect with relatively many effects by the sound output means and the second effect with relatively few effects by the sound output means Since the production is switched and executed, it is possible to enjoy productions with different production ratios by sound, and the interest is improved.

(3) The effect control means of the pachinko machine 10 causes the effect execution means to execute the first effect when the output volume setting received by the volume setting reception unit is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. According to such a pachinko machine 10, when the output volume is set to a predetermined value or more, the first effect, which is relatively large in the effect by the sound output means, is executed. Therefore, when the output volume is large, the surroundings Even in a noisy situation, the player can easily hear the sound. Therefore, the player can enjoy the sound effect even if the ratio of the sound effect is increased. Further, it is considered that the player who increases the output volume wants to enjoy the effect by sound, and increasing the ratio of the effect by sound also suits the taste of the player. As a result, the interest is improved.

[13th Embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as the pachinko machine 10) according to the present embodiment is triggered by the winning of a game ball into the starting winning openings (first and second starting openings 84a, 84b) provided in the game board 81. The result of the internal lottery to be performed is referred to in advance (look-ahead determination), and the display effect of the symbol display device (look-ahead effect) is executed based on the result of this look-ahead determination. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of game effect modes 1 to 3, and any of the game effect modes can be selected and changed by operating the game effect mode selection button 600 described later. It has become. The pachinko machine 10 changes the game effect mode according to the signal output by the pressing operation of the game effect mode selection button 600. As a result, when the game effect mode is selected and changed, the background image is changed to the background image for the selected game effect mode at that time, and the actual display effect of the selected game effect mode is executed. To.

<Outline of look-ahead production>
The look-ahead effect is an effect that is executed for the hold stored in the hold storage area of the main control device 300, and can start a predetermined suggestion regarding the hold of the target before the execution of the variable effect related to the hold of the target. .. In the pachinko machine 10, as a look-ahead effect, when the symbol display device 91 stores a hold look-ahead effect that executes a hold display in a display mode indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot, or a first special figure or a second special figure is stored. In addition, the symbol display device 91 is during the variation effect based on the random number, or over a plurality of variation effects from the variation effect executed prior to the variation effect based on the random number to the variation effect based on the random number. In, it is possible to execute a special effect or the like for executing a specific display or the like. In addition, a plurality of types of execution modes of each look-ahead effect are provided, and various types of displayed images and the like are set.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, various pre-reading effect determination tables for determining the execution mode of each pre-reading effect are stored in the ROM 412 of the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400. The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 is a pre-reading pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300 (a command indicating which of the 1st to 8th hold is won (what hold is the pre-reading pass / fail command). (Includes information on whether or not the jackpot has been won)), a look-ahead effect according to the content of the received look-ahead win / fail command (whether the player has won in the 1st to 8th hold) The determination table is selected, and the execution mode of the look-ahead effect and the like are determined based on the selected look-ahead effect determination table. For example, in the look-ahead effect determination table, the first hold win is associated with the first look-ahead effect mode, the second hold win is associated with the second look-ahead effect mode, and the third hold win is associated with the second look-ahead effect mode. The 3 look-ahead effect modes are associated, the 4th hold win is associated with the 4th look-ahead effect mode, the 5th hold win is associated with the 5th look-ahead effect mode, and the 6th hold win is associated with the 6th hold win. The sixth look-ahead effect mode is associated, the seventh hold win is associated with the seventh look-ahead effect mode, and the eighth hold win is associated with the eighth look-ahead effect mode.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but a configuration different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to twelfth embodiments will be described, and the same configuration will be omitted.

<Game production mode selection button 600>
FIG. 130 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 130, a game effect mode selection button 600 as a game effect mode selection means is provided on the front left side of the upper bulge portion 31. The game effect mode selection button 600 is a button for selecting a plurality of game effect modes having different modes of display effect on the symbol display device 91. The player can switch the game effect mode by pressing the game effect mode selection button 600. The game effect mode selection button 600 does not necessarily have to be provided on the front left side of the upper bulging portion 31, and its installation position is arbitrary. However, it is preferable that the installation position of the game effect mode selection button 600 is not a position that prevents the player from visually recognizing the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, since the player needs to operate the firing handle 41 with the right hand to eject the game ball, the position where the game effect mode selection button 600 is installed is a position where the player can easily operate with the left hand, for example, a pachinko machine. More preferably, it is on the left side when facing the front of 10. Further, the operation button 35 provided on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31 of the pachinko machine 10 may also be used as the game effect mode selection button 600.

<Game production mode>
FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 in the three game effect modes of the pachinko machine 10.
In the pachinko machine 10, three game production modes are set. The game production mode 1 shown in FIG. 131 (a) is also referred to as a natural stage mode. For example, the background is an image of a shallow water in which sunlight is sufficiently poured into rocks and coral, and changes. The design is a character with numbers. In this game effect mode 1, a display effect is performed to warn that there is a high possibility of a big hit due to the appearance of bubbles or a school of fish. In the initial state, the game effect mode 1 is set, and if there is no change operation of the game effect mode, the game effect mode remains in the state of the game effect mode 1, and the variation display in the game effect mode 1 is displayed. Will be done.

The game production mode 2 shown in FIG. 131 (b) is also referred to as a treasure stage mode. For example, as a background, a Roman temple is sunk on the seabed, and the state of the seabed in the middle layer where some sunlight is poured. It is an image, and the variable symbol is a character with a number similar to that in the game effect mode 1. In the game effect mode 2, for example, a display effect such as a step-up notice for notifying that there is a high possibility of a big hit state is performed depending on the mode in which predetermined characters appear sequentially.

The game production mode 3 shown in FIG. 131 (c) is also referred to as a lagoon stage mode. For example, an image of a deep sea where a sunken ship exists on the seabed as a background and no sunlight is poured. The variable symbol is a character with a number similar to that in the game effect mode 1. In this game effect mode 3, display effect effects such as button notice and continuous notice are performed.

In the pachinko machine 10, the game effect mode 1 (natural stage mode) shown in FIG. 131 (a) is set as the default, and in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, the game effect mode 1 is selected. Then, each time the player presses the game effect mode selection button 600, the game effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 changes from the game effect mode 1 (natural stage mode) shown in FIG. 131 (a) to FIG. 131 (b). It is configured to change cyclically (periodically) in the order of the game effect mode 2 (treasure stage mode) shown and the game effect mode 3 (lagoon stage mode) shown in FIG. 131 (c).

As shown in FIG. 131, the symbol display device 91 of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a plurality of symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 capable of variablely displaying decorative drawings, and the first start port 84a or the second start port 84a or the second. With the winning of the starting port 84b, the decorative drawing starts to change in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Further, effective stop positions of decorative drawings are set in each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3, respectively, and a stop symbol effective line that combines the effective stop positions of the respective symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 by the symbol variation effect. The symbol combination of the decorative drawing that is stopped and displayed in L1 to L3 is derived. In the symbol display device 91 of the present embodiment, three stop symbol effective lines L1 to L3 are set.

The symbol display device 91 is displayed along a predetermined variation direction (in this embodiment, the lateral direction from the left side to the right side of the paper surface of FIG. 131 and / or the lateral direction from the right side to the left side of the paper surface of FIG. 131) at the start of the symbol variation effect. The variable display is configured so that the figure moves so that the variable display is stopped and displayed at the effective stop position of each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3 in a predetermined stop order. It has become like. Further, the symbol display device 91 temporarily temporarily stops and displays a decorative figure at an effective stop position of each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 before the symbol variation effect is completed, and displays the decorative symbols of each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. By stopping and displaying the figure, one symbol variation effect is completed. That is, the symbol variation effect (special figure 1 variation display and second special figure variation display) is performed from the start of variation to the final stop of the decorative drawings (special figure 1 and special figure 2) performed based on one start hold information. It is designed to be executed once.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 131, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91, the decorative drawings are displayed in three rows of left, middle, and right for each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Will be done. When a prize is awarded to the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b, the variation display of the decorative drawing is performed, and the variation display stops after a certain period of time has elapsed according to the variation pattern selected by the main control device 300. , Nine decorative drawings of vertical 3 × horizontal 3 are displayed as display results on the symbol display device 91. In the variable display that won the jackpot lottery, the display control device 500 is set so that three or more of the same main symbols (number symbols with characters) of the nine decorative drawings are aligned and stopped on a horizontal or diagonal straight line. Control is performed by, and the player is shown that a big hit has occurred. On the other hand, in the variable display that is out of the jackpot lottery, the display control device 500 controls so that three or more identical main symbols are not aligned and stopped in either the horizontal or diagonal direction among the nine decorative drawings. The player is shown that the deviation has occurred.

Here, in the decorative drawings displayed in the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the symbol display device 91 according to the present embodiment, the upper symbol row and the lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are vertically arranged. It is formed by connecting 18 symbols. Further, the middle symbol row Z2 is formed by arranging 20 symbols vertically. Normally, each symbol row is displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll from right to left with periodicity at the same time as the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, and the fluctuation of all the symbol rows stops before the special symbol stops. Further, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, normally, all of them are scrolled from right to left to perform variable display, and in the symbol row Z1, the numbers are arranged in ascending order toward the left, so that the main symbols are arranged. The numbers appear in ascending order, and in the symbol string Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order because the numbers are arranged in descending order toward the left.

The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 91 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol string, the scroll direction of each symbol string, the number of symbols of each symbol string, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol of each symbol string may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers. In addition, the decorative drawing may be given a first identification symbol that allows the player to definitively recognize that a probabilistic state (described later) is given after the jackpot game ends, and a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. It is classified as a second identification symbol that can be non-deterministically recognized as having.

[Main control device 300]
First, the control of the main control device 300 will be described.
<Prize processing for starting port>
FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the starting port. In the pachinko machine 10, a look-ahead lottery process (step S6808) is performed in the winning process for the starting port. Since the processes from steps S6801 to S6807 are the same as the processes of steps S201 to S207 of FIG. 23 described in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Prize processing for starting port>
FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a floater of the look-ahead lottery process (step S6808) of FIG. 132. Hereinafter, the look-ahead lottery process by the MPU 302 of the main control device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 133.

(Step S6901)
The MPU 302 of the main control device 300 executes a look-ahead lottery in which the MPU 302 draws a lottery as to whether or not the result of the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313 is a big hit. Specifically, the MPU 302 is stored in the first hold (the jackpot random number counter C1 value stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit) and the hit / miss table storage area shown in FIG. It is judged whether or not it is a big hit by comparing it with the hit / fail table (win / fail information group). The MPU 302 executes the process of step S6902 when the jackpot random number counter C1 value stored in the first area Ra1 wins the jackpot (YES). Further, the MPU 302 executes the process of step S6903 when the jackpot random number counter C1 value stored in the first area Ra1 is not won the jackpot (NO).

(Step S6902)
The MPU 302 sets a look-ahead pass / fail command indicating that the first hold has won the jackpot. This command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400 in the external output process of the main control device 300 (step S301 in FIG. 24).

(Step S6903)
The MPU 302 sets a look-ahead pass / fail command indicating that the first hold has not won the jackpot. This command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400 in the external output process of the main control device 300 (step S301 in FIG. 24).

(Step S6904)
The MPU 302 determines whether or not a lottery has been drawn to determine whether or not the result of the variation display of all the unexecuted portions stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313 is a big hit. When it is determined that the result of the variation display of all the unexecuted portions stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313 is a big hit (YES), the MPU 302 ends the look-ahead lottery process. Further, when the MPU 302 does not determine whether the result of the variation display of all the unexecuted portions stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313 is a big hit (NO), the process of step S6905 is executed.

(Step S6905)
The MPU 302 increments the hold number for determining whether or not the result of the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the hold ball storage area of the RAM 313 is a big hit, returns to the process of step S6901, and is the next hold. The second hold (the jackpot random number counter C1 value stored in the first area Ra2 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit) and the hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) stored in the hit / miss table storage area shown in FIG. To determine whether or not it is a big hit. In this way, the MPU 402 determines whether or not all the holds (1st to 8th holds) will be big hits, and if the big hits are won, the look-ahead winning or not indicating that the big hits are won. A command is set, and if the jackpot is not won, a look-ahead win / fail command indicating that the jackpot is not won is set. It should be noted that the look-ahead win / fail command includes information on which number of holds (how many holds) and whether or not a jackpot has been won.

The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 stores the look-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300 in the RAM 413 in the command storage process of the timer interrupt process (step S7001 in FIG. 135). The look-ahead win / fail command includes information on how many holds and whether or not a jackpot has been won. Therefore, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 can recognize which of the first hold to the eighth hold has won the jackpot by analyzing the content of the look-ahead pass / fail command.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a look-ahead lottery is performed when the number of holdings is one or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the number of holds is 2 or more, the look-ahead lottery may be executed, or if the number of holds is 3 or more, the look-ahead lottery may be executed.

[Voice emission control device 400]
FIG. 134 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. As described with reference to FIG. 130, the pachinko machine 10 includes a game effect mode selection button 600 as a game effect mode selection means. As shown in FIG. 134, the game effect mode selection button 600 is connected to an input port (not shown) of the voice emission control board 401 included in the voice emission control device 400. That is, the signal corresponding to the pressing operation of the game effect mode selection button 600 by the player is input to the voice emission control board 401.

Further, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 300 and analyzes the various commands. Then, the MPU 402 reads out the program and processing data, the light emission data, and the sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 based on the analyzed contents, and lights various lamp units 23A, 23B, 95a to 96 based on the read data. Drive and acoustically drive the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 300, and transmits the control commands to the display control device 500 based on the analyzed contents of the various commands.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the RAM 413 of the MPU 402 includes a flag storage area, a game production mode flag storage area, a game production mode reservation flag storage area, a game production mode reservation completion flag storage area, a look-ahead winning flag storage area, and the like during the fluctuation period. Has an area. Further, the MPU 402 includes a game effect mode counter C6 (not shown) that counts the number of times the player presses the game effect mode selection button 600.

The variable period flag storage area is an area for storing the variable period flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable period. The MPU 402 sets the value of the flag during the variable period to "1" during the variable period, and sets the value of the flag during the variable period to "0" during the period other than the variable period. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the value of the flag during the fluctuation period to "0" in the initialization process, and sets the value of the flag during the fluctuation period to "1" when the fluctuation display is started, and the fluctuation display is displayed. When finished, the value of the flag during the variable period is set to "0". More specifically, when the MPU 402 receives the fluctuation command (variation pattern command) set in step S717 of FIG. 28 from the main control unit 300, the MPU 402 sets the value of the flag during the fluctuation period to "1", and the figure shows. When the fluctuation end command set in step S509 of 26 is received from the main control unit 300, the value of the flag during the fluctuation period is set to "0". When the fluctuation display time included in the fluctuation pattern command elapses, the value of the flag during the fluctuation period may be set to "0".

The game effect mode flag storage area is an area for storing the game effect mode executed by the current pachinko machine 10, in other words, the game effect mode flag indicating the game effect mode displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91. is there. When the MPU 402 receives the game effect mode confirmation command indicating that the change of the game effect mode transmitted from the display control device 500 has been confirmed, the MPU 402 has determined the game effect mode flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area. Update to the game production mode flag corresponding to the production mode.

The game effect mode reservation flag storage area is an area for storing the game effect mode reservation flag indicating the game effect mode when the display control device 500 is requested to change the game effect mode. When the game effect mode selection button 600 is pressed by the player, the MPU 402 stores the received game effect mode in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the RAM 413. Specifically, the MPU 402 corresponds to the game effect mode in which the value of the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the RAM 413 is selected in response to the operation of the game effect mode selection button 600. Update to value. Further, the MPU 402 sets a game effect mode change command for changing to the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area. This command is transmitted to the display control device 500 in the external output process (step S7009 of FIG. 135) for transmitting the set command to the display control device 500.

The game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area is an area for storing the game effect mode reservation completion flag indicating the game effect mode when the reception of the game effect mode reservation is completed by the display control device 500. Upon receiving the reservation acceptance completion command transmitted from the display control device 500, the MPU 402 updates the game effect mode reservation completion flag stored in the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area. In other words, the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area is an area for storing a flag indicating the game effect mode when the game effect mode change command is received by the display control device 500.

When the look-ahead effect occurs and the change reservation of the game effect mode is canceled, the MPU 402 sets the value of the game effect mode reservation flag and the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area. The game effect mode reservation completion flag stored in is rewritten to the value of the game effect mode flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area. By this processing, the information of the game effect mode held by the voice emission control device 400 matches the information of the game effect mode of the display control device 500, and the period during which the game effect mode can be changed (other than the variable period in the present embodiment). During the period (for example, at the start of the next fluctuation), the game effect mode change reservation is canceled without changing the game effect mode.

The look-ahead winning flag storage area is an area for storing a flag indicating that the look-ahead has been won (pre-reading that has won the jackpot), and is the first in the look-ahead winning flag storage area like the RAM 313 of the main control device 300. ~ The 8th hold winning flag can be stored. When the MPU 402 receives the look-ahead win / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300, the MPU 402 stores the look-ahead winning fluff in the look-ahead winning flag storage area of the RAM 413 according to the content of the received look-ahead win / fail command. Specifically, when the MPU 402 sets the value of the first to eighth reserved winning flags in the look-ahead winning flag storage area to "0" in the initialization process and receives the look-ahead winning / failing command from the main control unit 300, The contents are analyzed, and the value of the look-ahead winning flag is set according to which of the 1st to 8th hold wins the jackpot. For example, when the MPU 402 wins a big hit in the first hold (also called a pre-reading win), the value of the first hold winning flag is set to "1", and the jackpot is won in the second hold (winning in the look-ahead). If it is, the value of the 2nd hold winning flag is set to "1", and if the 3rd hold wins the jackpot (also called pre-reading win), the value of the 3rd hold winning flag is set. If you set it to "1" and win the jackpot on the 4th hold (also called pre-reading win), set the value of the 4th hold winning flag to "1" and win the jackpot on the 5th hold (look-ahead). If the value of the 5th hold winning flag is set to "1", and if the 6th hold wins a big hit (also called pre-reading win), the 6th hold winning flag If the value is set to "1" and the 7th hold wins the jackpot (also called pre-reading win), the value of the 7th hold winning flag is set to "1" and the 8th hold wins the jackpot. If (also referred to as winning in look-ahead), the value of the 8th hold winning flag is set to "1". The MPU 402 is in the game production mode when the value of any of the first to eighth reserved winning flags stored in the look-ahead winning flag storage area is other than "0", in other words, when the look-ahead is won. The value of the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the reservation flag storage area and the game effect mode reservation completion flag stored in the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area are set to the game stored in the game effect mode flag storage area. By rewriting to the value of the effect mode flag, the change reservation of the game effect mode is canceled.

The game effect mode counter C6 is a counter for counting the number of times the player presses the game effect mode selection button 600. The game effect mode selection button 600 outputs an operation signal each time the player presses the button. The MPU 402 adds 1 to the count value of the game effect mode counter C6 each time a signal corresponding to the pressing operation by the player is received. The game effect mode counter C6 is a loop counter that has a count value from "0" to "2" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value "2". Then, the count value "0" of the game effect mode counter C6 corresponds to the game effect mode 1, the count value "1" corresponds to the game effect mode 2, and the count value "2" corresponds to the game effect mode 3.

The MPU 402 updates the count value of the game effect mode counter C6 and updates the value of the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the RAM 413 to a value corresponding to the updated count value. For example, when the game effect mode selection button 600 is pressed and the game effect mode 2 is selected as the game effect mode, the MPU 402 sets the count value of the game effect mode counter C6 to "1" and stores it in the RAM 413. The game effect mode reservation flag is rewritten to the flag corresponding to the "game effect mode 2".

In this way, when the game effect mode selection button 600 is pressed, the MPU 402 becomes a flag corresponding to the game effect mode in which the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the RAM 413 is selected. rewrite. As described above, when canceling the change reservation of the game effect mode, the MPU 402 sets the value of the game effect mode reservation flag and the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area. The stored game effect mode reservation completion flag is rewritten to the value of the game effect mode flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area.

[Display control device 500]
The display control device 500 receives various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 400, and based on the various commands, causes the symbol display device 91 to display a predetermined variable display effect. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 receives various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 400, analyzes the contents of the commands, and executes the display control of the symbol display device 91. For example, the MPU 502 analyzes various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 400, and stores the currently set game effect mode in various flag storage areas of the work RAM 513. In the pachinko machine 10, the work RAM 513 of the MPU 502 has an area such as a flag storage area, a game effect mode reservation flag storage area, and a game effect mode flag storage area during a variable period.

The variable period flag storage area is an area for storing the variable period flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable period. The MPU 502 sets the value of the flag during the variable period to "1" during the variable period, and sets the value of the flag during the variable period to "0" during the period other than the variable period. Specifically, the MPU 502 sets the value of the flag during the fluctuation period to "0" in the initialization process, and sets the value of the flag during the fluctuation period to "1" when the fluctuation display is started, and the fluctuation display is displayed. When finished, the value of the flag during the variable period is set to "0". More specifically, when the MPU 502 receives a variation command (fluctuation pattern command) via the voice emission control device 400, the value of the flag during the fluctuation period is set to "1", and the MPU 502 is set to "1" via the voice emission control device 400. When the fluctuation end command is received, the value of the flag during the fluctuation period is set to "0". When the fluctuation display time included in the fluctuation pattern command elapses, the value of the flag during the fluctuation period may be set to "0".

The game effect mode reservation flag storage area is an area for storing the game effect mode reservation flag corresponding to the game effect mode change command received from the voice emission control device 400. When the MPU 502 receives the game effect mode change command, the MPU 502 stores the game effect mode reservation flag corresponding to the received game effect mode change command in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513. Further, when the MPU 502 stores the game effect mode reservation flag, the MPU 502 sets a game effect mode change acceptance command to the effect that the game effect mode change command is accepted. This command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400 in the external output process (step S7306 of FIG. 139) for transmitting the set command to the voice emission control device 400.

The game effect mode flag storage area is an area for storing the game effect mode executed by the current pachinko machine 10, in other words, the game effect mode flag indicating the game effect mode displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91. is there. The MPU 502 determines whether or not the game effect mode can be changed, in other words, whether or not it is in the variable period, by the variable period flag in the variable period flag storage area, and the game effect mode can be changed. In other words, if it is not during the fluctuation period, the VDP505 is controlled and changed to the game effect mode corresponding to the received game effect mode change command. When the change to the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode change command received by controlling the VDP 505 is completed, the MPU 502 changes the value of the game effect mode flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area of the work RAM 513. Set the value corresponding to the game effect mode. Further, the MPU 502 sets a game effect mode confirmation command. This command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400 in the external output process (step S7306 of FIG. 139) for transmitting the set command to the voice emission control device 400.

The character ROM 506 of the display control device 500 stores three fluctuation pattern conversion tables TB1 to TB3 corresponding to the game effect modes 1 to 3 (not shown). In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the three game production modes (“game production mode 1” is also called the natural stage mode, and “game production mode 2” is also called the treasure stage mode). The mode, "game effect mode 3", has a game effect mode (also called a lagoon stage mode), and tables TB1 to TB3 for variable pattern conversion are provided for each of the three game effect modes.

The table TB1 is a table for the game effect mode 1, the table TB2 is a table for the game effect mode 2, the table TB3 is a table for the game effect mode 3, and the tables TB1 to TB3 have effect control commands. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to is stored in advance. Therefore, by using the tables TB1 to TB3, the variation pattern is determined by the received effect control command and the game effect mode stored in the game effect mode flag storage area of the work RAM 513.

The VDP505 has a function of forming a decorative image, a function of forming a background image corresponding to the game effect mode, a function of forming a variable pattern (character) image corresponding to the game effect mode, and a game effect mode. It has a function of forming an image such as a notice pattern, a function of generating a one-frame image from a layer on which a background image is formed, a layer on which a character image is formed, and a layer on which an image such as a notice pattern is formed. .. The VDP505 is given a game effect currently set in the game effect mode flag storage area of the work RAM 513 when an effect control command (commands such as complete off, normal reach, super reach, premium reach, jackpot, etc.) analyzed by the MPU 502 is given. The mode is read, and the variation pattern associated with the effect control command of the table corresponding to this game effect mode is read. Further, the VDP 505 forms an image such as a background image, a character image, and a notice symbol based on the read variation pattern, and the layer on which the background image is formed, the layer on which the character image is formed, and the image such as the notice symbol are formed. A one-frame image is generated from the layer on which the is formed. The VDP 505 rewrites the stored contents of the video RAM 507 with the generated image data. As a result, the display image of the symbol display device 91 is updated.

The VDP505 basically forms an image such as a background image, a character image, and a notice pattern according to the current game effect mode during the fluctuation period, and a layer on which the background image is formed and a layer on which the character image is formed. And a layer on which an image such as a preview symbol is formed, a one-frame image is generated. Further, the VDP 505 changes the game effect mode based on the instruction from the MPU 502. Specifically, the VDP 505 reads data from the table corresponding to the game effect mode instructed by the MPU 502, and rewrites the data in the video RAM 507.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device. The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 402 executes the timer interrupt process of FIG. 135 periodically (for example, in a 2 msec cycle). Since the processing of steps S7001 to S7006 of FIG. 135 is the same as that of steps S1401 to S1406 of FIG. 39 described in the first embodiment, duplicated description will be omitted, and only steps S7007 to S7009 will be described.

(Step S7007)
The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the game effect mode change process. Specifically, the MPU 402 is output from the background and speaker units 26A to 26C displayed on the symbol display device 91 when the game effect mode selection operation is performed by the game effect mode selection button 600 as the operation means. The process of changing the BGM or the like to the accepted mode is executed. The details of the game effect mode change process will be described later.

(Step S7008)
The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the look-ahead effect processing. Specifically, when the look-ahead win / fail command of the RAM 413 is stored, the MPU 402 creates a look-ahead effect determination table according to the content of the look-ahead win / fail command (which of the 1st to 8th hold winning commands is won). Select, and based on the selected look-ahead effect determination table, the execution mode of the look-ahead effect and the like are determined and executed. The details of the look-ahead effect processing will be described later.

(Step S7009)
The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an external output process for transmitting the set command to the display control device 500. Specifically, the MPU 402 includes commands corresponding to the production for game times, such as production control commands (type commands, variation pattern commands, and decorative drawing designation commands) and production control commands (effect stop commands) for instructing production stop. , It is determined whether or not a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode, a game effect mode change command for changing the game effect mode, etc. is set, and if it is determined that the command is set, that command is set. The command is transmitted to the display control device 500.

<About the game production mode change process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a game effect mode change process executed by the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10.

(Step S7101)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the game effect mode selection button 600 has been pressed. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the operation signal output from the game effect mode selection button 600 has been received. When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode selection button 600 has been pressed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7102. When the MPU 402 does not determine that the game effect mode selection button 600 is being pressed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process.

(Step S7102)
When the MPU 402 receives the signal corresponding to the pressing operation by the player, the MPU 402 adds 1 to the count value of the game effect mode counter C6.

(Step S7103)
The MPU 402 rewrites the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the RAM 413 to a flag corresponding to the selected game effect mode according to the value of the game effect mode counter C6 in step S7102. When the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area is rewritten, the MPU 402 executes a process of notifying (presenting) the game effect mode corresponding to the rewritten content to the player. It may be.

(Step S7104)
The MPU 402 sets a game effect mode change command corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag set in step S7103. As described above, this command is transmitted to the display control device 500 in the external output process (step S7009 in FIG. 135) for transmitting the set command to the display control device 500.

(Step S7105)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a game effect mode change acceptance command indicating that the game effect mode change command has been received from the display control device 500 has been received. When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode change acceptance command has been received from the display control device 500 (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7106. When the MPU 402 does not determine that the game effect mode change acceptance command has been received from the display control device 500 (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7109.

(Step S7106)
When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode change acceptance command has been received from the display control device 500, the game effect mode in which the reservation is accepted for the game effect mode reservation completion flag stored in the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area. Update to the value corresponding to.

(Step S7107)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a game effect mode confirmation command indicating that the game effect mode has been determined has been received from the display control device 500. When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode confirmation command has been received from the display control device 500 (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7108. When the MPU 402 does not determine that the game effect mode confirmation command has been received from the display control device 500 (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7109.

(Step S7108)
When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode confirmation command has been received from the display control device 500, the MPU 402 updates the game effect mode flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area to a value corresponding to the confirmed game effect mode.

(Step S7109)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the look-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the first to eighth reserved winning flags stored in the look-ahead winning flag storage area of the RAM 413 is "0". The MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process when the value of the first to eighth hold winning flags is "0", in other words, when the look-ahead effect is not executed (NO). Further, the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7110 when any value of the first to eighth hold winning flags is other than "0", in other words, when the look-ahead effect is executed (YES).

(Step S7110)
When executing the look-ahead effect, the MPU 402 cancels the change reservation of the game effect mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the value of the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area and the game effect mode reservation completion flag stored in the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area. Rewrite with the value of the game production mode flag stored in the production mode flag storage area. By this process, the information of the game effect mode held by the voice emission control device 400 matches the information of the game effect mode of the display control device 500, and the period during which the game effect mode can be changed (for example, at the start of the next fluctuation). In, the change reservation of the game production mode is canceled without changing the game production mode.

<About the look-ahead effect processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a look-ahead effect process executed by the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10.

(Step S7201)
The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 determines whether or not the look-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300 has been received. When the read-ahead pass / fail command is received (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7202. If the look-ahead pass / fail command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the look-ahead effect processing.

(Step S7202)
The MPU 402 recognizes whether or not the hold number and the look-ahead have been won based on the information included in the look-ahead win / fail command received in step S7201. For example, when the look-ahead win / fail command received in step S7201 relates to the second hold, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the second hold has won the look-ahead. Specifically, the MPU 402 recognizes that it is on hold and whether it has won the look-ahead from the information included in the look-ahead pass / fail command. If the look-ahead win / fail command received in step S7201 has won the look-ahead (YES), the MPU 402 executes step S7203. If the hold of the look-ahead pass / fail command received in step S7201 does not win the look-ahead (NO), the MPU 402 ends the look-ahead effect processing.

(Step S7203)
The MPU 402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412. The look-ahead effect determination table is a table for determining an execution mode of the look-ahead effect, and different look-ahead effect execution modes are associated with each other according to the command content of the look-ahead pass / fail command. Specifically, the first look-ahead effect mode is associated with the first hold look-ahead winning, the second look-ahead effect mode is associated with the second hold look-ahead winning, and the third hold look-ahead winning is the first. The 3 look-ahead effect modes are associated, the 4 hold look-ahead effect mode is associated with the 4 hold look-ahead effect mode, the 5 hold look-ahead effect mode is associated with the 5 hold look-ahead effect mode, and the 6 hold look-ahead effect mode is associated with the 5 hold look-ahead effect mode. The 6th look-ahead effect mode is associated with the winning, the 7th look-ahead effect mode is associated with the 7th hold look-ahead effect mode, and the 8th look-ahead effect mode is associated with the 8th hold look-ahead effect mode. ..

(Step S7204)
The MPU 402 selects and determines the execution mode of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the content of the look-ahead pass / fail command (whether the first to eighth hold is won) from the referenced look-ahead effect determination table. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores the look-ahead effect selection flag corresponding to the determined execution mode of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead effect selection flag storage area of the RAM 413. Thereby, the mode of the look-ahead effect in the sound emission control device 400 in the look-ahead effect, in other words, the light emission mode in the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound reproduction mode in the speaker units 26A to 26C are determined.

(Step S7205)
Further, the MPU 402 sets a look-ahead effect determination command that determines the mode of the look-ahead effect. This command is transmitted to the display control device 500 in the external output process of step S7009 of FIG. 135.

<Example of look-ahead effect executed by display control device 500>
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10, and more specifically, the display control device 500 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91. This is an example of look-ahead production. When the display control device 500 receives the look-ahead effect determination command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400, the display control device 500 executes the look-ahead effect based on the content of the received look-ahead effect determination command.

In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 138, the look-ahead effect is an effect in which a large number of bubbles rise from the lower side to the upper side of the display screen. The mode of the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 138 is merely an example, and is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 138. For example, an effect such as displaying an image of a specific character or definitely stopping a combination of specific symbols (so-called chance eyes) may be executed. Further, a specific effect may be executed over a plurality of variable periods. For example, when the jackpot is won in the 4th hold, in other words, when the value of the 4th hold winning flag is "1", the look-ahead effect is executed when the 1st to 3rd holds change, and the 1st It is preferable that the effect is such that the expectation for the jackpot of the look-ahead effect to be executed increases as the process progresses from the hold to the third hold.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the display control device 500>
FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. In this timer interrupt processing, the MPU 502 executes the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 139 periodically (for example, in a 2 msec cycle).

(Step S7301)
The MPU 502 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 502 receives a command from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400, the MPU 502 stores the received command in the work RAM 513. Specifically, the work RAM 513 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 402, and the MPU 502 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 402. The MPU 502 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer. For example, the MPU 502 is a production control that includes basic information necessary for the game, such as the result of the jackpot lottery (the lottery result of jackpot or loss, the jackpot type if it is a jackpot), the number of balls on hold, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Receive commands (game production mode change command, type command, variation command (variation pattern command), decoration drawing specification command, variation end command, etc.). Further, the MPU 502 receives an effect control command (effect stop command) instructing to stop the effect after a predetermined time (special symbol fluctuation time) has elapsed.

(Step S7302)
The MPU 502 executes the decorative symbol counter update process. The details of the decorative symbol counter update process will be described later.

(Step S7303)
The MPU 502 executes a decorative symbol display process for advancing the variable display of the decorative map on the display screen G on the symbol main display device 91. The details of the decorative pattern display processing will be described later.

(Step S7304)
The MPU 502 executes the game effect mode change process. The details of the game effect mode change process will be described later.

(Step S7305)
The MPU 502 executes the look-ahead effect processing. Specifically, the MPU 502 instructs the VDP 505 to form an image for the look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead effect determination command received from the voice emission control device 400, and the VDP 505 instructs the VDP 505 to form an image for the look-ahead effect. A one-frame image is generated from the formed layer and the layer on which the character image is formed. The VDP 505 rewrites the data of the video RAM 507 into the generated image, so that the image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 becomes the image of the look-ahead effect.

(Step S7306)
The MPU 502 executes an external output process for transmitting the set command to the voice emission control device 400. Specifically, the MPU 502 has confirmed the change to the effect control command, for example, the game effect mode change acceptance command indicating that the game effect mode change command has been accepted, or the game effect mode instructed by the game effect mode change command. It is determined whether or not a command such as a game effect mode confirmation command to that effect is set, and if it is determined that the command is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400.

<About the operation after the command storage process executed by the display control device 500>
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an operation after a command storage process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. The process of FIG. 140 is an interrupt process executed when a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 is received and stored in the display control device 500, and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 by this process. The display control device 500 performs the process associated with the above.

In the following description, the content of the variation pattern command is analyzed by the display control device 500, but the content of the variation pattern command analyzed by the voice emission control device 400 may be transmitted to the display control device 500. Good. Specifically, the voice emission control device 400 transmits a command corresponding to the content of the fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 500. As a result, it is not necessary to analyze the fluctuation pattern command in the display control device 500, and the processing load in the display control device 500 can be reduced.

(Step S7401)
The MPU 502 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer of the work RAM 513. The MPU 502 analyzes the read command and confirms the content of the command.

(Step S7402)
When the command is a variation pattern command, the MPU 502 writes the variation pattern command in the effect execution area. In response to this fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation patterns such as the fluctuation time and the presence / absence of reach in the special symbol are predetermined, and the fluctuation display corresponding to various lottery performed by the MPU 302 of the main control device 300 is the symbol display device. It is executed at 91.

(Step S7403)
The MPU 502 confirms the content of the received fluctuation pattern command. The MPU 502 executes the process of step S7404 if it is a jackpot fluctuation pattern command. The MPU 502 executes the process of step S7405 if it is a variation pattern command for reach. The MPU 502 executes the process of step S7406 if it is a loss variation pattern command.

(Step S7404)
The MPU 502 writes the value of the jackpot symbol counter buffer into the effect execution area of the work RAM 513 as a stop symbol of the decorative diagram for the current variation display.

(Step S7405)
The MPU 502 writes the value of the reach symbol buffer corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the effect execution area of the work RAM 513.

(Step S7406)
The MPU 502 writes the value of the offset symbol buffer corresponding to the fluctuation pattern to the effect execution area of the work RAM 513.

(Step S7407)
The MPU 502 starts the variable display of the decorative drawing by the symbol display device 91.

(Step S7408)
When the command is a stop symbol command, the MPU 502 writes the stop symbol data to the effect execution area of the work RAM 513.

(Step S7409)
When the command is a confirmation command, the MPU 502 confirms and stops the fluctuation display and ends the command reception process.

(Step S7410)
If the command is neither a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, or a confirmation command, the MPU 502 executes each process according to the received command.

<Regarding the decoration counter update process executed by the display control device 500>
FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing a decorative symbol counter update process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10.

(Step S7501)
The MPU 502 determines which of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 is the update time of the display counter, and executes a counter update process for updating the display counter of the symbol string whose update time is set according to the update time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the decoration counter S1 of the symbol row Z1, and if it is the update time, the decoration counter S1 of the symbol row Z1 is updated. On the other hand, if it is not the update time of the symbol string Z1, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the decoration counter S2 of the symbol row Z2, and if it is the update time, the decoration counter S2 of the symbol row Z2 is updated. Similarly, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the symbol string Z3, and if it is the update time, the decoration counter S3 of the symbol string Z3 is updated.

In updating the display counters S1 to S3, the MPU 502 adds the value of the lower 3 bits of the register to the previous counter value, subtracts the maximum value when the addition result exceeds the maximum value, and performs the calculation. The result is the current value of the decorative drawing counters S1 to S3. By executing the update process in this way, the decorative counters S1 to S3 of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are updated one by one in one normal process, so that the update times of the counter values may overlap. As a result, one set of the decoration counters S1 to S3 is updated every time the normal process is executed three times.

(Step S7502)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not the combination of the decoration counters S1 to S3 updated in step S7501 is a combination of jackpot symbols. When the MPU 502 is a combination of jackpot symbols (YES), the process of step S7503 is executed. Further, when the MPU 502 is not a combination of jackpot symbols (NO), the process of step S7504 is executed.

(Step S7503)
The MPU 502 stores the combination of the decoration counters S1 to S3 in the jackpot symbol buffer of the work RAM 513. As for the determination of the combination of the jackpot symbols, all the combinations of counter values in which the combination of the jackpot symbols is formed on any of the effective lines L set in the three rows of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in advance by the display control device 500. It is performed by storing it in the program ROM 512 and comparing it with the value.

(Step S7504)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not the combination of the decoration counters S1 to S3 updated in step S7501 is a combination of reach symbols. When the MPU 502 is a combination of reach symbols (YES), the process of step S7505 is executed. Further, when the MPU 502 is not a combination of reach symbols (NO), the process of step S7506 is executed.

(Step S7505)
The MPU 502 stores the combination of the decoration counters S1 to S3 in the reach symbol buffer of the work RAM 513. In addition, as a determination of the combination of the reach symbols, all the combinations of the counter values in which the combination of the reach symbols is formed on any of the effective lines L set in the three rows of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in advance by the display control device 500. It is performed by storing it in the program ROM 512 and comparing it with the value.

(Step S7506)
The MPU 502 stores the combination of the decoration counters S1 to S3 in the detached symbol buffer B22 of the work RAM 513. Here, the combination of reach symbols and the combination of out-of-symbol symbols may differ depending on each variation pattern of normal stop variation, forward stop variation, and pinch stop variation, but a symbol buffer corresponding to each variation pattern is provided. , It suffices to describe the combination of symbols corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

It is not always necessary to provide counters for determining the combination of decorative drawings for the number of symbol rows, and counters are provided for only one symbol row Z2 in the center, and the others are fixedly displayed according to a predetermined combination. Is also good. Further, a table in which a plurality of reach variation patterns are set in advance may be stored in the display control device 500, and the variation pattern may be derived from the table.

<Regarding the game effect mode change process executed by the display control device 500>
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a game effect mode change process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10.

(Step S7601)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not the game effect mode change command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 has been received. When the MPU 502 determines that the game effect mode change command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 has been received (YES), the MPU 502 executes the process of step S7602. Further, when the MPU 502 does not determine that the game effect mode change command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 has been received (NO), the MPU 502 ends the execution of the game effect mode change process.

(Step S7602)
When the MPU 502 receives the game effect mode change command, the MPU 502 stores the game effect mode reservation flag corresponding to the received game effect mode change command in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513.

(Step S7603)
When the MPU 502 is set to a value corresponding to the game effect mode change command that has received the flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513, the game effect mode change acceptance command indicating that the game effect mode change command has been accepted is set. To set. This command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400 in the external output process (step S7306 of FIG. 139) for transmitting the set command to the voice emission control device 400.

(Step S7604)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not it is in a variable period. Specifically, the MPU 502 determines whether or not the work RAM 513 is in the variable period by referring to the variable period flag in the variable period flag storage area of the work RAM 513. When it is determined that the MPU 502 is in the variable period (YES), the MPU 502 ends the execution of the game effect mode change process. Further, when the MPU 502 does not determine that it is in the fluctuation period (NO), the process of step S7605 is executed.

(Step S7605)
The MPU 502 controls the VDP 505 so as to change to the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513. The VDP 505 forms an image for the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag. Specifically, the VDP 505 refers to the table corresponding to the game effect mode corresponding to the technique effect mode reservation flag, reads out the variation pattern associated with the effect control command, and creates a background image based on this variation pattern. Generate the formed layer. Further, the VDP 505 is a one-frame image from a layer in which an image such as a character image and a notice symbol is formed, a layer in which a background image is formed, a layer in which a character image is formed, and a layer in which an image such as a notice symbol is formed. To generate. By rewriting the data of the video RAM 507 with the generated image, the VDP 505 corresponds to the game effect mode in which the image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 is selected.

(Step S7606)
The MPU 502 sets the flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area of the work RAM 513 to a value corresponding to the changed game effect mode.

(Step S7607)
The MPU 502 sets a game effect mode confirmation command in the work RAM 513. This command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400 in the external output process (step S7306 of FIG. 139) for transmitting the set command to the voice emission control device 400.

<Specific example of the game effect mode change process executed by the display control device 500>
FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a specific example of the game effect mode change process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the game effect mode selection button 600 is pressed from the “game effect mode 1” to the “game effect mode 2” and the values of the 1st to 8th hold winning flags are “0”. In other words, it is a figure explaining the game effect mode change process when the look-ahead effect does not occur. In FIG. 143 (b), the game effect mode selection button 600 is pressed from the “game effect mode 1” to the “game effect mode 2”, and the value of any of the 1st to 8th hold winning flags is “1”. In other words, it is a figure explaining the game effect mode change process when the look-ahead effect occurs.

(When there is no look-ahead effect: Fig. 143 (a))
In the first fluctuation display, the symbol trains Z1 to Z3 fluctuate at high speed from time t1, then the symbol train Z1 decelerates and fluctuates, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the symbol row Z2 and the symbol row Z3 also decelerate and fluctuate sequentially after the stop of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 stops, then the symbol row Z2 stops, and all the fluctuations end at time t2.
During the first variation display (during the variation period), when the game effect mode selection button 600 is operated and the operation signal from the game effect selection button is input, the game effect mode by the game effect mode selection button 600 is used. Change reservations are accepted. Then, during the period from this time t5 to the end time t2 of the first variation display, if the look-ahead effect does not occur and the game effect mode selection button 600 is not operated, the second time starts from time t3. The variable display is a variable display according to the game effect mode 2. If the game effect mode selection switch 600 is operated once during the period from time t5 to time t2, the second variation display starting from time t3 becomes the variation display by the game effect mode 3. ..

(When there is a look-ahead effect: Fig. 143 (b))
In the first fluctuation display, the symbol trains Z1 to Z3 fluctuate at high speed from time t1, then the symbol train Z1 decelerates and fluctuates, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the symbol row Z2 and the symbol row Z3 also decelerate and fluctuate sequentially after the stop of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 stops, then the symbol row Z2 stops, and all the fluctuations end at time t2.
Even if the game effect mode selection button 600 is operated and the operation signal from the game effect selection button is input during the first variation display (during the variation period), the look-ahead is won during the first variation period. Then, since the value of any of the 1st to 8th hold winning flags becomes "1", the look-ahead effect is generated, and the game effect mode change reservation by the game effect mode selection button 600 is cancelled. Then, the second variation display starting from the time t3 is the variation display in the game effect mode 1. Even if the game effect mode selection switch 600 is operated a plurality of times during the period from time t5 to time t2, the game effect mode change reservation by the game effect mode selection button 600 is canceled, so the game starts from time t3. The second variation display to be performed is the variation display in the game effect mode 1. Further, if the look-ahead is won during the first variable period, the game effect mode selection is performed regardless of whether the timing of winning the look-ahead is before or after the game effect mode selection button 600 is operated. The reservation for changing the game production mode by the button 600 is not accepted and is canceled.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, when the game effect mode selection button 600 is pressed during a period other than the variable period, the game effect mode is changed and during the variable period. When the pressing operation of the game effect mode selection button 600 is performed, the change of the game effect mode is reserved, and the change of the game effect mode is executed after the end of the variable period. Further, even if a reservation for changing the game effect mode is made, if the look-ahead effect is executed, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is canceled and the change of the game effect mode is not executed after the end of the variable period.

Therefore, when a reservation for changing the game effect mode is made, the problem that the look-ahead effect performed at the next fluctuation is not executed due to the change in the game effect mode and the look-ahead effect cannot be enjoyed is solved. Can be done. As a result, the look-ahead effect can be preferably executed. In addition, when there is a look-ahead effect, the player can surely enjoy the look-ahead effect, and the interest is improved.

[Modification 1 of the 13th embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, if the pre-reading is won (winning a big hit), the pre-reading effect is always executed. However, if the pre-reading is won, the pre-reading effect is not necessarily executed. It does not have to be in the form. For example, when the look-ahead is won, a lottery may be made as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and when the lottery is won, the look-ahead effect may be executed.

In this case, the lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect may be executed on the main control device 300 side, or may be executed on the voice emission control device 400 side. When the lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed on the main control device 300 side, the main control device 300 is provided with a random number counter C7 for drawing whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and the result for the look-ahead effect is correct or not. The table is stored in the ROM 312 of the main control device 300 in the pass / fail table storage area. Then, when the MPU 302 wins the look-ahead, it executes a lottery as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the random number counter C7 and the win / fail table for the look-ahead effect. Then, when the MPU 302 wins the execution of the look-ahead effect, the MPU 302 transmits a look-ahead pass / fail command to the voice emission control device 400.

Further, when the lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed on the voice emission control device 400 side, the voice emission control device 400 is provided with a random number counter C7 for drawing whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. The pass / fail table for the effect is stored in the ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400 in the pass / fail table storage area. Then, when the MPU 402 receives the pre-reading pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300, when the pre-reading is won, the MPU 402 draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect based on the random number counter C7 and the pre-reading effect table. Execute. When the MPU 402 wins the execution of the look-ahead effect, the MPU 402 stores the look-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300 in the RAM 413 of the voice emission control device 400.

Since the other configurations and operations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, overlapping description will be omitted.

According to the above configuration, if the pre-reading effect is won by lottery, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is canceled, but if the pre-reading effect is not won, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is not canceled. The mode is changed to the selected game production mode. Therefore, although the pre-reading lottery has been won, if the pre-reading effect is not performed, the reservation for changing the game effect mode is not canceled, and the convenience of the player is improved. Further, when the look-ahead effect is not performed, the game effect mode is changed without canceling the reservation for changing the game effect mode, so that the player can enjoy the game in the game effect mode selected immediately after the end of the fluctuation. Can be done.

[Modification 2 of the 13th embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the player presses the game effect mode selection button 600 to change the game effect mode. However, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, it varies. As a form in which the pachinko machine 10 changes the game effect mode regardless of the operation of pressing the game effect mode selection button 600 when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous change of the game effect mode. May be good.

<Configuration of voice emission control device 400>
When the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second modification of the present embodiment changes the game effect mode, the MPU of the voice emission control device 400 determines the elapsed time from the previous game effect mode change ( A timer T for counting (predetermined time) and a game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 for drawing which game effect mode to select when the predetermined time has elapsed are provided. Further, the ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400 stores a game effect mode selection table in which the value of the counter C9 and the game effect mode are associated with each other. It should be noted that it may be configured to count the number of times of receiving the fluctuation command instead of the fluctuation end command. When counting the number of times the change command is received, the game effect mode is changed in the next change.

The MPU 402 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the previous change in the game effect mode by the timer T. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the MPU 402 executes the lottery of the game production mode described later. Further, the MPU 402 resets the count value of the timer T to "0" when the lottery of the game effect mode described later is executed after the predetermined time has elapsed.

The game production mode lottery random number counter C9 is a loop in which 1 is added (incremented) to the previous value each time it is updated, reaches a predetermined maximum value (“2” in the modified example 2 of this embodiment), and then returns to 0. It is a counter. The game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec). When the predetermined time measured by the timer T elapses, the MPU 402 acquires the value of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 and stores it in the game effect mode lottery buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 413. Next, the MPU 402 collates the value of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 stored in the game effect mode lottery buffer of the RAM 413 with the game effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 412, and determines the changed game effect mode. ..

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a game effect mode selection table stored in ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 144, the value of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 is associated with the game effect mode. Specifically, the game effect mode 1 (natural stage mode) is associated with the value "0" of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9, and the game effect mode is associated with the value "1" of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9. 2 (treasure stage mode) is associated, and the game effect mode 3 (lagoon stage mode) is associated with the value “2” of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9.

<About the game production mode change process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a game effect mode change process executed by the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10.

(Step S7701)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the previous change in the game effect mode by the timer T. When the MPU 402 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7702. Further, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process.

(Step S7702)
The MPU 402 acquires the value of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 and stores it in the game effect mode lottery buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 413.

(Step S7703)
The MPU 402 collates the value of the game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 stored in the game effect mode lottery buffer of the RAM 413 with the game effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 412, and determines the changed game effect mode. Specifically, when the value of the game production mode lottery random number counter C9 is "0", the MPU 402 determines the game production mode to the game production mode 1 (natural stage mode), and the value of the game production mode lottery random number counter C9. When is "1", the game production mode is determined to be game production mode 2 (treasure stage mode), and when the value of the game production mode lottery random number counter C9 is "2", the game production mode is set to game production mode 3 (lagoon). Set to stage mode).

(Step S7704)
The MPU 402 rewrites the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the RAM 413 to the flag corresponding to the determined game effect mode according to the game effect mode determined in step S7703. When the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area is rewritten, the MPU 402 executes a process of notifying (presenting) the game effect mode corresponding to the rewritten content to the player. It may be.

(Step S7705)
The MPU 402 sets a game effect mode change command corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag set in step S7704. As described above, this command is transmitted to the display control device 500 in the external output process (step S7009 in FIG. 135) for transmitting the set command to the display control device 500.

(Step S7706)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a game effect mode change acceptance command indicating that the game effect mode change command has been received from the display control device 500 has been received. When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode change acceptance command has been received from the display control device 500 (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7107. When the MPU 402 does not determine that the game effect mode change acceptance command has been received from the display control device 500 (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7110.

(Step S7707)
When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode change acceptance command has been received from the display control device 500, the game effect mode in which the reservation is accepted for the game effect mode reservation completion flag stored in the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area. Update to the value corresponding to.

(Step S7708)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not a game effect mode confirmation command indicating that the game effect mode has been determined has been received from the display control device 500. When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode confirmation command has been received from the display control device 500 (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7709. When the MPU 402 does not determine that the game effect mode confirmation command has been received from the display control device 500 (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7710.

(Step S7709)
When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode confirmation command has been received from the display control device 500, the MPU 402 updates the game effect mode flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area to a value corresponding to the confirmed game effect mode.

(Step S7710)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the look-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the first to eighth reserved winning flags stored in the look-ahead winning flag storage area of the RAM 413 is "0". The MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process when the value of the first to eighth hold winning flags is "0", in other words, when the look-ahead effect is not executed (NO). Further, the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7711 when the value of any of the first to eighth hold winning flags is other than "0", in other words, when the look-ahead effect is executed (YES).

(Step S7711)
When executing the look-ahead effect, the MPU 402 cancels the change reservation of the game effect mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the value of the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area and the game effect mode reservation completion flag stored in the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area. Rewrite with the value of the game production mode flag stored in the production mode flag storage area. By this process, the information of the game effect mode held by the voice emission control device 400 matches the information of the game effect mode of the display control device 500, and the period during which the game effect mode can be changed (for example, at the start of the next fluctuation). In, the change reservation of the game production mode is canceled without changing the game production mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 changes the game effect mode when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times since the previous change of the game effect mode, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10 is the previous game. A fluctuation count counter C8 for measuring the number of fluctuations from the change of the production mode is provided, and when the number of fluctuations measured by the fluctuation count counter C8 reaches a predetermined number, the value of the game production mode lottery random number counter C9 is set. The game effect mode to be transferred may be determined by acquiring and referring to the game effect mode selection table.

Further, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times since the previous change of the game production mode, when the pachinko machine 10 changes the game production mode, the fluctuation period has ended, in other words, the fluctuation end command is received and the look-ahead effect is performed. If there is no game effect mode, the game effect mode may be changed, or if the next fluctuation period has started, in other words, the next variation command is received and there is no look-ahead effect, the game effect mode is changed. It may be configured to be executed.

Further, a form in which the player presses the game effect mode selection button 600 to change the game effect mode, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number or in the previous game effect mode. It may be combined with the form of changing the game effect mode when a predetermined time has elapsed from the change. When configured in this way, the player can change the game production mode at his / her own will, and can also enjoy changing the game production mode determined by the lottery by the pachinko machine 10, which improves the interest. To do. Further, if the player does not like the game effect mode determined by the lottery by the pachinko machine 10, the player can change the game effect mode by pressing the game effect mode selection button 600, which improves convenience. To do.

[Modification 3 of the 13th embodiment]
In the thirteenth embodiment and the first and second modifications, the game effect mode is not changed from the start to the end of the variation period, in other words, from the reception of the variation command to the reception of the variation end command. Although it is configured to accept reservations for changes in, the game production mode can be changed during a predetermined period from the reception of the fluctuation command to the reception of the fluctuation end command (during high-speed fluctuation in the modification 3 of the present embodiment). It may be configured as such. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 3 of the present embodiment will be described, but the configuration and operation different from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified examples 1 and 2 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described below, and duplicate description will be omitted. To do.

The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 includes a first timer TM1 for measuring a period of high-speed fluctuation during the fluctuation period. The first timer TM1 manages the period during which the game effect mode can be changed during the variable period. In the modified example 3 of the present embodiment, the game effect mode can be changed during the variable period, from the start of the variation to the symbol sequence Z1. Will be described as an example when is set to the period from the high-speed fluctuation to the deceleration fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation period W1). Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command from, the MPU 502 sets the first timer TM1 and counts (measures) the high-speed fluctuation period W1. In the third modification of the present embodiment, the game effect mode changeable period during the fluctuation period may be set to the period from the start of the fluctuation to the deceleration fluctuation of the symbol sequence Z2 or Z3.

<Regarding the game effect mode change process executed by the display control device 500>
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a game effect mode change process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10.

(Step S7801)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not the game effect mode change command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 has been received. When the MPU 502 determines that the game effect mode change command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 has been received (YES), the MPU 502 executes the process of step S7802. Further, when the MPU 502 does not determine that the game effect mode change command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 has been received (NO), the MPU 502 ends the execution of the game effect mode change process.

(Step S7802)
When the MPU 502 receives the game effect mode change command, the MPU 502 stores the game effect mode reservation flag corresponding to the received game effect mode change command in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513.

(Step S7803)
When the MPU 502 is set to a value corresponding to the game effect mode change command that has received the flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513, the game effect mode change acceptance command indicating that the game effect mode change command has been accepted is set. To set. This command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400 in the external output process (step S7306 of FIG. 139) for transmitting the set command to the voice emission control device 400.

(Step S7804)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not it is in a variable period. Specifically, the MPU 502 determines whether or not the work RAM 513 is in the variable period by referring to the variable period flag in the variable period flag storage area of the work RAM 513. When the MPU 502 determines that the fluctuation period is in progress (YES), the MPU 502 executes the process of step S7805. If the MPU 502 does not determine that it is in the fluctuation period (NO), the process of step S7807 is executed.

(Step S7805)
The MPU 502 determines whether or not it is in the high-speed fluctuation period W1. Specifically, the MPU 502 determines whether or not the high-speed fluctuation period W1 is in progress depending on whether or not the first timer TM1 set at the start of fluctuation is being counted. When the MPU 502 determines that the high-speed fluctuation period W1 is in progress (YES), the MPU 502 executes the process of step S7806. If the MPU 502 does not determine that it is in the high-speed fluctuation period W1 (NO), the MPU 502 ends the execution of the game effect mode change process.

(Step S7806)
The MPU 502 instructs the VDP 505 to set only the background image to the game effect mode specified by the game effect mode change command. The VDP 505 forms a background image for the game effect mode specified by the game effect mode change command, and continues image formation in the game effect mode before the change for images other than the background screen. Specifically, the VDP 505 refers to the table corresponding to the game effect mode whose settings have been changed, reads out the variation pattern associated with the effect control command, and forms a background image based on this variation pattern. To generate. Further, the VDP 505 forms an image such as a character image and a preview symbol while referring to the table corresponding to the game effect mode before the setting change, and the layer on which the background image is formed and the layer on which the character image is formed , A one-frame image is generated from a layer on which an image such as a preview symbol is formed.

(Step S7807)
The MPU 502 controls the VDP 505 so as to change to the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area of the work RAM 513. The VDP 505 forms an image for the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag. Specifically, the VDP 505 refers to the table corresponding to the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag, reads out the variation pattern associated with the effect control command, and creates a background image based on this variation pattern. Generate the formed layer. Further, the VDP 505 is a one-frame image from a layer in which an image such as a character image and a notice symbol is formed, a layer in which a background image is formed, a layer in which a character image is formed, and a layer in which an image such as a notice symbol is formed. To generate. By rewriting the data of the video RAM 507 with the generated image, the VDP 505 corresponds to the game effect mode in which the image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 is selected.

(Step S7808)
The MPU 502 sets the flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area of the work RAM 513 to a value corresponding to the changed game effect mode.

(Step S7809)
The MPU 502 sets a game effect mode confirmation command in the work RAM 513. This command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400 in the external output process (step S7306 of FIG. 139) for transmitting the set command to the voice emission control device 400.

<Specific example of the game effect mode change process executed by the display control device 500>
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a specific example of the game effect mode change process executed by the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10.
In FIG. 147 (a), the value of the 1st to 8th hold winning flags is "0", in other words, the game effect mode selection button 600 is pressed from "game effect mode 1" to "game effect mode 2". In addition, it is a figure explaining the game effect mode change process when the look-ahead effect does not occur.
In FIG. 147 (b), the value of any of the 1st to 8th hold winning flags is "1", in other words, the game effect mode selection button 600 is changed from "game effect mode 1" to "game effect mode 2". It is a figure explaining the game effect mode change process when a pressing operation is performed and a look-ahead effect occurs.

(When there is no look-ahead effect: Fig. 147 (a))
In the first fluctuation display, the symbol trains Z1 to Z3 both fluctuate at high speed from the fluctuation start time t1, then the symbol train Z1 decelerates and fluctuates at time t2, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the symbol row Z2 and the symbol row Z3 also decelerate and fluctuate sequentially after the stop of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 stops, then the symbol row Z2 stops, and all the fluctuations end at time t2.
In this fluctuation display, the period during which the game effect mode can be changed is the period from time t1 to time t2 (the high-speed fluctuation period W1 of the symbol sequence Z1. The time during the first fluctuation display (during the fluctuation period)). During the period from t1 to time t2, when the game effect mode selection button 600 is operated and the operation signal from the game effect selection button is input, the background image is changed to the background image for game effect mode 2 from time t7. By changing the background image, the player can visually confirm that the selection of the game effect mode has been accepted and that the next variation is the effect mode 2. The actual display effect content of the mode 2 is shifted during the next fluctuation.

(With pre-reading effect: Fig. 147 (b))
In the first fluctuation display, the symbol trains Z1 to Z3 both fluctuate at high speed from the fluctuation start time t1, then the symbol train Z1 decelerates and fluctuates at time t2, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the symbol row Z2 and the symbol row Z3 also decelerate and fluctuate sequentially after the stop of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 stops, then the symbol row Z2 stops, and all the fluctuations end at time t2.
Even if the game effect mode selection button 600 is operated during the period from time t1 to time t2 during the first variation display (during the variation period) and the operation signal from the game effect selection button is input, the first If the look-ahead is won during the second variable period, the look-ahead effect is generated because the value of any of the 1st to 8th hold winning flags is "1". Therefore, the game effect mode by the game effect mode selection button 600 is used. The change reservation of is canceled. Then, the second variation display starting from the time t4 is the variation display in the game effect mode 1. Even if the game effect mode selection switch 600 is operated one or more times during the period from time t1 to time t3, the game effect mode change reservation by the game effect mode selection button 600 is canceled, so that from time t4. The second variation display that is started is the variation display in the game effect mode 1. Further, if the look-ahead is won during the first variable period, the game effect mode selection is performed regardless of whether the timing of winning the look-ahead is before or after the game effect mode selection button 600 is operated. The reservation for changing the game production mode by the button 600 is not accepted and is canceled.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period during which the game effect mode can be changed is fixed (W1) regardless of the number of reserved balls, but if the fluctuation time differs depending on the number of reserved balls, the game effect mode can be changed. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 may be provided with as many timers TM as the number of timers TM for measuring such a period. For example, when the number of reserved balls is 5 or more and the fluctuation period is shorter than when the number of reserved balls is less than 3, the first timer for measuring the period during which the game effect mode can be changed when the number of reserved balls is less than 3. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 includes TM1 and a second timer TM2 for measuring the period during which the game effect mode can be changed when the number of reserved balls is 5 or more. In step S7802 of FIG. 146, the number of reserved balls is less than 5. In this case, the first timer TM1 may be set, and when the number of reserved balls is 5 or more, the second timer TM2 may be set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third modification of the thirteenth embodiment, the effect mode can be selected and changed even during the variable period. As a result, even when the reserved ball exists, the effect mode can be selected and changed. As a result, the game can be enjoyed in a different production mode for each reserved ball. In particular, if it is configured to change the lighting color of the hold lamp in order to announce that the probability of a big hit is high (high expectation) (for example, the hold lamp is usually lit in blue and the expectation is high). In that case, when the hold lamp is turned on in red to give a notice of that), the player can enjoy the display effect in a different effect mode for each hold ball, which can improve the enjoyment of the game. it can. It is also possible to solve the problem that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered by stopping the game until the reserved balls are exhausted.

[Modification 4 of the 13th embodiment]
In the thirteenth embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 3 thereof, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the change reservation of the game effect mode is canceled. In the modified example 4 of the thirteenth embodiment, the change reservation of the game effect mode is not completely canceled, but the look-ahead effect is executed after the game effect mode is changed according to the execution timing of the look-ahead effect, or the game effect is executed. A mode for determining whether to cancel without changing the mode will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 4 of the present embodiment will be described, but the configuration and operation different from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified examples 1 to 3 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described below, and duplicate description will be omitted. To do.

<Look-ahead production decision table>
In the pre-reading effect determination table of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth modification of the present embodiment, different pre-reading effect execution modes are stored for each game effect mode, depending on which number of hold is a big hit.
FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect determination table included in the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 148 is an example of a look-ahead effect determination table stored in ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400, and FIG. 148 is a display. This is an example of a look-ahead effect determination table stored in the program ROM 512 of the control device 500. For the sake of explanation, in FIG. 148, the hold numbers are set to 4 (1st to 4th hold). Further, as a matter of course, there is no mode of pre-reading effect executed after the next change in the first hold.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the pachinko machine 10, different execution modes are defined according to the pre-reading winning hold numbers (first hold to fourth hold). Here, the voice mode of FIG. 148 (a) defines the voice, BGM, sound effect, and the like output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the light emitting mode of FIG. 148 (a) defines a light emitting pattern (lighting, blinking, light emitting intensity, etc.) in various lamp units 23A and 23B. Further, the display mode of FIG. 148 (b) defines the display (cut-in image, character image, etc.) on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91. Further, the execution timing defines the timing for executing the look-ahead effect.

In the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the execution timing of the look-ahead effect is set to two, one is executed immediately after the execution mode of the look-ahead effect is determined, and the other is executed after the next variation. The execution timing is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 148, and various timings can be adopted. For example, when the fourth hold is a big hit, the look-ahead effect may be executed at two fluctuation destinations. Further, when the jackpot is won in the third and fourth hold, the look-ahead effect may be executed over a number variation. For example, when the jackpot is won in the third hold, the look-ahead effect may be executed over the two fluctuations after the next fluctuation, and when the jackpot is won in the fourth hold. May be a mode in which the look-ahead effect is executed over the three fluctuations after the next fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the look-ahead effect determination table, different execution modes are associated with each game effect mode according to the hold number of the look-ahead winning, so that the player wins the game effect mode and the look-ahead effect. You can enjoy different look-ahead effects for each hold number. In the fourth modification of the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed in all the game effect modes 1 to 3, but a game effect mode in which the look-ahead effect is not performed may be provided. For example, the game effect mode 3 may be set to a game effect mode in which the look-ahead effect is not performed.

In the look-ahead effect determination table shown in FIG. 148, a different look-ahead effect is associated with each game effect mode and a look-ahead winning hold number, but a different look-ahead effect is always associated with each game effect mode and a look-ahead winning hold number. It is not necessary to be set, and it is arbitrary what kind of look-ahead effect is associated with each game effect mode and the pre-reading winning hold number. For example, in different game effect modes, the same look-ahead effect mode may exist.

<About the game production mode change process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a game effect mode change process executed by the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10. Since the processing of steps S7901 to S7908 of FIG. 149 is the same as the processing of steps S7101 to S7108 of FIG. 136, duplicated description will be omitted.

(Step S7909)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the look-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the first to eighth reserved winning flags stored in the look-ahead winning flag storage area of the RAM 413 is "0". The MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process when the value of the first to eighth hold winning flags is "0", in other words, when the look-ahead effect is not executed (NO). The MPU 402 executes the process of step S7910 when the value of any of the first to eighth pending winning flags is other than "0", in other words, when the look-ahead effect is executed (YES).

(Step S7910)
The MPU 402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412, and sets the received game effect mode, in other words, the game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag, to the look-ahead effect corresponding to the current game effect mode. In other words, it is determined whether or not there is a look-ahead effect whose execution timing is "after the next change". When the corresponding look-ahead effect exists (YES), the MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process. If the corresponding look-ahead effect does not exist (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S7911.

(Step S7911)
The MPU 402 cancels the reservation for changing the game production mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the value of the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area and the game effect mode reservation completion flag stored in the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area. Rewrite with the value of the game production mode flag stored in the production mode flag storage area. By this process, the information of the game effect mode held by the voice emission control device 400 matches the information of the game effect mode of the display control device 500, and the period during which the game effect mode can be changed (for example, at the start of the next fluctuation). In, the change reservation of the game production mode is canceled without changing the game production mode.

In the above description, when the variable period has ended, in other words, when the variable end command is received and there is no look-ahead effect, the game effect mode is changed, but the next variable period has started. In other words, when the next variable command is received and there is no look-ahead effect, the game effect mode may be changed.

<About the look-ahead effect processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a look-ahead effect process executed by the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10.

(Step S8001)
The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 determines whether or not the look-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300 has been received. When the read-ahead pass / fail command is received (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S8002. If the look-ahead pass / fail command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the look-ahead effect processing.

(Step S8002)
The MPU 402 recognizes whether or not the hold number and the look-ahead have been won based on the information included in the look-ahead win / fail command received in step S8001. For example, when the look-ahead win / fail command received in step S8001 relates to the second hold, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the second hold has won the look-ahead. Specifically, the MPU 402 recognizes that it is on hold and whether it has won the look-ahead from the information included in the look-ahead pass / fail command. If the look-ahead win / fail command received in step S8001 has won the look-ahead (YES), the MPU 402 executes step S8003. If the hold of the look-ahead pass / fail command received in step S8001 does not win the look-ahead (NO), the MPU 402 ends the look-ahead effect processing.

(Step S8002)
The MPU 402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412. The look-ahead effect determination table is a table for determining an execution mode of the look-ahead effect, and as shown in FIG. 148, different look-ahead effect execution modes are supported depending on the current game effect mode and the command content of the look-ahead pass / fail command. It is attached.

(Step S8004)
The MPU 402 selects and determines the content of the pre-reading win / fail command (whether the first to fourth hold is won) and the execution mode of the pre-reading effect corresponding to the current game effect mode from the referenced look-ahead effect determination table. Specifically, the MPU 402 selects and determines whether the execution timing of the look-ahead effect is "immediate execution" or "after the next change" from the mode of the look-ahead effect associated with the winning hold number. For example, in the state of the game production mode 1, when the third hold is pre-read and won the jackpot game (special game state), the MPU 402 has voice mode, light emission mode, and execution timing of A4, B4, "immediate execution" or voice, respectively. The mode, the light emitting mode, and the execution timing are selected and determined by lottery from A5, B5, or "after the next fluctuation", respectively. Next, the MPU 402 stores the look-ahead effect selection flag corresponding to the determined execution mode of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead effect selection flag storage area of the RAM 413. Thereby, the mode of the look-ahead effect in the sound emission control device 400 in the look-ahead effect, in other words, the light emission mode in the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound reproduction mode in the speaker units 26A to 26C are determined. Further, the MPU 402 transmits a look-ahead effect determination command to the display control device 500 in the external output process of step S7009 of FIG. 135. The MPU 402 can recognize the current game effect mode by the game effect mode flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area of the RAM 413.

(Step S8005)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the game effect mode has been changed. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the game effect mode flag stored in the game effect mode flag storage area of the RAM 413 has been changed. When the MPU 402 determines that the game effect mode has not been changed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the look-ahead effect process. Further, when it is determined that the game effect mode has been changed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S8006.

(Step S8006)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the execution timing of the look-ahead effect determined in step S8004 is “immediate execution”. When the MPU 402 determines that the execution timing of the look-ahead effect is "immediate execution" (YES), the MPU 402 ends the look-ahead effect process. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the execution timing of the look-ahead effect is not "immediate execution" (NO), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S8007.

(Step S8007)
The MPU 402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412. The look-ahead effect determination table is a table for determining an execution mode of the look-ahead effect, and as shown in FIG. 148, different look-ahead effect execution modes are supported depending on the current game effect mode and the command content of the look-ahead pass / fail command. It is attached.

(Step S8008)
The MPU 402 has a game effect mode received in step S8005, in other words, a game effect mode corresponding to the game effect mode reservation flag, a look-ahead effect corresponding to the current game effect mode, in other words, a look-ahead effect whose execution timing is after the next change. Determines if is present. For example, when the game production mode received in step S8005 is the game production mode 2, the current game production mode is the game production mode 1, and the third hold is pre-read and won for the jackpot game (special game state). , MPU402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412, and is a look-ahead effect in which the execution timing is "after the next change" in the mode of the look-ahead effect associated with the hold number 3 of the game effect mode 2. It is determined whether or not the corresponding look-ahead effect) exists. If the corresponding look-ahead effect exists (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S8009. If the corresponding look-ahead effect does not exist (NO), the MPU 402 ends the look-ahead effect process.

(Step S8009)
The MPU 402 selects and determines from the referenced look-ahead effect determination table the content of the look-ahead pass / fail command (which of the first to fourth holds was won) and the execution mode of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the changed game effect mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores the look-ahead effect selection flag corresponding to the determined execution mode of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead effect selection flag storage area of the RAM 413. As a result, the mode of the look-ahead effect in the sound emission control device 400 in the look-ahead effect, in other words, the light emission mode in the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound reproduction mode in the speaker units 26A to 26C are newly determined. The MPU 402 transmits a look-ahead effect determination command to the display control device 500 in the external output process in step S7009 of FIG. 135. As a result, the mode of the look-ahead effect executed by the display control device 500 corresponds to the changed game effect mode.

In the description of the above modification 4, if the execution timing is not the look-ahead effect that is executed immediately, there is a look-ahead effect that is not the look-ahead effect that the execution timing is immediately executed after the game effect mode is changed (corresponding look-ahead effect). If there is a look-ahead effect that is not executed immediately (corresponding look-ahead effect) in the look-ahead effect after changing the game effect mode, change the game effect mode and change the game effect mode. Although the look-ahead effect is executed in, it is not always necessary to execute the look-ahead effect in the above mode.

For example, in the look-ahead effect selection table, even if the execution timing of the look-ahead effect is after the next change, the look-ahead effect executed over a plurality of fluctuation periods is likely to be a big hit (special game state). This is a look-ahead effect that players are looking forward to. If such a look-ahead effect becomes another look-ahead effect due to a change in the game effect mode, the disappointment of the player who could not enjoy the look-ahead effect executed over a plurality of variable periods also increases. In order to avoid such a problem, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the execution period of the look-ahead effect of the current game effect mode spans a plurality of variable periods, and the execution period of the look-ahead effect of the current game effect mode is set. If it is determined that the game spans a plurality of variable periods, the reservation of the game effect mode may be discarded. As described above, when the look-ahead effect spans several fluctuations, the change in the game effect mode is canceled and the execution of the look-ahead effect is prioritized, so that the player is not disappointed and the interest is enhanced. Can be done.

[Modification 5 of the 13th embodiment]
In the thirteenth embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 4 thereof, the pre-reading effect is generated only when the pre-reading is won by the main control device 300. In the fifth modification of the present embodiment, a mode in which the pre-reading effect is generated with a certain probability even when the pre-reading is not won by the main control device 300 will be described.

In this modification, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 includes a random number counter C10 for drawing the occurrence of the look-ahead effect, a hit / fail table (hit / fail information group) for generating the look-ahead effect, and a random number initial value counter C11.
<Random number counter C10>
The random number counter C10 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. Further, the random number counter C10 reads the value of the random number initial value counter C11 at that time as an initial value every time the loop is performed once. The random number initial value counter C11 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the random number counter C10.

By using the random number counter C10 and the random number initial value counter C11, a big hit lottery is performed by a plus method in which the next value (initial value) when the final value of the random number sequence appears is determined by an contingency value. Specifically, in the random number counter C11, when the power is turned on, the random number advances from the initial value of 0, and when the count progresses to the maximum value of 599, the next value does not become 0 and the random number initial value. The value acquired from the counter C11 becomes the initial value. Here, assuming that 100 is acquired from the random number initial value counter C11 as the initial value, the random number counter C10 advances the count to 100, 101, 102, returns to 0 when counting to 599, and proceeds to count to 99. The initial value is acquired again from the random number initial value counter CINI random. That is, in this method, since the initial value is changed every time the random number counter C10 makes one round, the periodicity does not appear at the timing when a specific random number appears.

<Win / Fail Table>
Among the values of the random number counter C10, the value of the random number that wins the pre-reading effect generation is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area of the ROM 412 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means.
Here, the winning / failing table includes a first winning / failing table for pre-reading non-winning, which is read when the pre-reading is not won, and a second winning / failing table for pre-reading winning, which is read when the pre-reading is won. doing.
The first hit / fail table is a win / fail table in which the stored random number values are small (for example, 0 to 10), in other words, it is difficult to win the look-ahead effect generation. On the other hand, the second pass / fail table has a large number of stored random numbers (for example, 0 to 100), in other words, it is a pass / fail table that is easy to win for the occurrence of the look-ahead effect.
The MPU 402 executes a lottery for generating a look-ahead effect by comparing these pass / fail tables with the value of the random number counter C10.
The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and the second winning / failing table may have a higher probability of being "look-ahead effect winning" than the first winning / failing table. Further, the value of the random number that becomes the "look-ahead effect winning" stored in the second winning / failing table does not have to include the value of the random number that becomes the "look-ahead effect winning" stored in the first winning / failing table. (1) A part or all of the random number values that are the "look-ahead effect" stored in the pass / fail table may be included.

<About the look-ahead effect processing executed by the voice emission control device>
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a look-ahead effect process executed by the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 5. Hereinafter, the look-ahead effect processing executed by the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 151.

(Step S8101)
Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the look-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300 has been received. When the read-ahead pass / fail command is received (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S8102. If the look-ahead pass / fail command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the look-ahead effect processing.

(Step S8102)
The MPU 402 recognizes whether or not the hold number and the look-ahead have been won based on the information included in the look-ahead win / fail command received in step S8101. For example, when the look-ahead win / fail command received in step S8101 is related to the second hold, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the second hold has won the look-ahead. Specifically, the MPU 402 recognizes that it is on hold and whether it has won the look-ahead from the information included in the look-ahead pass / fail command. If the look-ahead win / fail command received in step S8101 has won the look-ahead (YES), the MPU 402 executes step S8103. If the hold of the look-ahead pass / fail command received in step S8101 has not won the look-ahead (NO), the MPU 402 executes step S8104.

(Step S8103)
The MPU 402 reads out the second hit / fail table for the look-ahead winning, which is read when the look-ahead is won, among the hit / miss tables stored in the ROM 412.

(Step S8104)
The MPU 402 reads out the first hit / fail table for the look-ahead / non-winning, which is read when the look-ahead is not won, among the hit / miss tables stored in the ROM 412.

(Step S8105)
The MPU 402 executes a hit / fail determination process. Specifically, the MPU 402 acquires the value of the random number counter C10, and the acquired random number value and the second win / fail table for pre-reading winning read in step S8103 or the pre-reading non-winning table read in step S8104. The result of the winning / failing lottery (winning / failing result) is determined by comparing with the first winning / failing table.

(Step S8106)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S9205 is "winning". When the MPU 402 determines that the winning / failing result is "winning" (YES), the MPU 402 executes the process of step S8107. When the MPU 402 does not determine that the winning / failing result is "winning" (NO), the MPU 402 ends the look-ahead effect processing.

(Step S8107)
The MPU 402 refers to the look-ahead effect determination table stored in the ROM 412. The look-ahead effect determination table is a table for determining an execution mode of the look-ahead effect. Since the look-ahead effect determination table has already been described, duplicate explanations will be omitted.

(Step S8108)
The MPU 402 selects and determines the execution mode of the look-ahead effect from the referenced look-ahead effect determination table. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores the look-ahead effect selection flag corresponding to the determined execution mode of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead effect selection flag storage area of the RAM 413. Thereby, the mode of the look-ahead effect in the sound emission control device 400 in the look-ahead effect, in other words, the light emission mode in the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound reproduction mode in the speaker units 26A to 26C are determined. Further, the MPU 402 transmits a look-ahead effect determination command to the display control device 500 in the external output process of step S7009 of FIG. 135.

<About the game effect mode change process executed by the voice emission control device>
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a game effect mode change process executed by the voice emission control device 400 of the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, the game effect mode change process executed by the voice emission control device 400 of the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. 152. Steps S8201 to S8209 of FIG. 152 are described in steps S7101 to S7109 of FIG. 136. Therefore, in the following, steps S821 to S8211 in FIG. 152 will be described, and duplicate description of the other steps will be omitted.

(Step S8210)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect is won in the jackpot game. Specifically, in the MPU 402, the look-ahead effect that is "with look-ahead effect" in step S8209 is a look-ahead effect that occurs when the jackpot game is won, or a look-ahead effect that occurs when the jackpot game is not won. Determine if it is a production. The MPU 402 executes the process of step S8211 when the look-ahead effect that is "with look-ahead effect" in step S8209 is a look-ahead effect that occurs when the jackpot game is won. Further, the MPU 402 ends the game effect mode change process when the pre-reading effect "with pre-reading effect" in step S8209 is a pre-reading effect generated when the jackpot game is not won.

(Step S8211)
The MPU 402 cancels the reservation for changing the game production mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the value of the game effect mode reservation flag stored in the game effect mode reservation flag storage area and the game effect mode reservation completion flag stored in the game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area. The value of the game effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area is rewritten, and the change reservation of the game effect mode is canceled. By this process, the information of the game effect mode held by the voice emission control device 400 matches the information of the game effect mode of the display control device 500, and the period during which the game effect mode can be changed (for example, at the start of the next fluctuation). In, the reservation is canceled without changing the game production mode.

[Modification 6 of the 13th embodiment]
In the fifth modification of the thirteenth embodiment, when the look-ahead win / fail command is received and the look-ahead win / fail command is won, in other words, the look-ahead win / fail command is won in the jackpot game, the change reservation of the game production mode is discarded (cancelled). If the look-ahead effect is executed and the pre-reading win / fail command is not won, in other words, the jackpot game is not won, the change reservation of the game effect mode is discarded and the change reservation of the game effect mode is executed. ing. However, even if the look-ahead win / fail command is received and the look-ahead is won, in other words, the look-ahead win / fail command is won in the jackpot game, the look-ahead effect is executed without canceling the change reservation of the game effect mode, and the jackpot game is executed. After the end, the game may be changed to the reserved game production mode. In this case, the mode is changed to the game production mode reserved after the ending period elapses after receiving the ending command indicating that the jackpot game has ended.

Further, since the effect for the jackpot game is executed during the jackpot game, it is preferable that the game effect mode cannot be changed. Therefore, the RAM 413 of the voice emission control device 400 and the work RAM 513 of the display control means 500 are configured to be provided with a flag storage area during the jackpot game period for storing the flag during the jackpot game period indicating that the jackpot game period is in progress. .. The jackpot game period flag storage area is an area for storing the jackpot game period flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot game period. The MPU 402 and MPU 502 set the value of the flag during the jackpot game period to "1" during the jackpot game period, and set the value of the flag during the jackpot game period to "0" during the period other than the jackpot game period. Specifically, the MPU 402 and MPU 502 set the value of the flag during the jackpot game period to "0" in the initialization process, and set the value of the flag during the jackpot game period to "1" when the jackpot game is started. , When the jackpot game is completed, the value of the flag during the jackpot game period is set to "0". More specifically, when the MPU 402 and the MPU 502 receive the opening command (step S910 in FIG. 30) from the main control device 300, they set the value of the flag during the jackpot game period to "1" and set the ending command (step S910 in FIG. 31). When step S1017) is received from the main control device 300 and the time has elapsed by the ending period, the value of the flag during the jackpot game period is set to "0". When the opening command is received, the value of the flag during the jackpot game period may be set to "1", and when the time of the corresponding jackpot game period elapses, the value of the flag during the variable period may be set to "0". .. Then, in addition to the determination of whether or not the variable period is in progress in step S7604 of FIG. 142 and step S7804 of FIG. 146, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. (NO in step S7604 in FIG. 142 or NO in step S7804 in FIG. 146), when the game effect mode is changed and the game is in a variable period or a jackpot game (YES in step S7604 in FIG. 142 or step S7804 in FIG. 146). YES) If the game effect mode is configured not to be changed, the game effect mode is not changed even during the jackpot game, and the change reservation of the game effect mode is made during the jackpot game or during the variable period. Further, in this case, during the jackpot game or during the variable period, the game effect mode reserved each time the game effect mode selection button 600 is pressed is changed periodically (cyclically).

[Modification 7 of the 13th embodiment]
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 6 thereof, the voice emission control device 400 receives the pressing operation of the game effect mode selection button 600, and the voice emission control device 400 receives the look-ahead transmitted from the main control device 300. Based on whether or not a win / fail command has been received, it is determined whether or not to cancel the change in the game effect mode, and the determination result is transmitted to the display control device 500. However, the game effect mode is based on whether or not the display control device 500 accepts the pressing operation of the game effect mode selection button 600 and the display control device 500 receives the look-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300. It may be in the form of determining whether or not to cancel the change of the above and transmitting the determination result to the voice emission control device 400.

The display control device 500 determines whether or not to cancel the change in the game effect mode based on whether or not the look-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the main control device 300 is received, and the determination result is voice emission control. In the case of transmitting to the device 400, the game effect mode selection button 600 is connected to an input port (not shown) of the display control board 501 of the display control device 500 included in the voice emission control device 400. That is, the signal corresponding to the pressing operation of the game effect mode selection button 600 by the player is input to the display control board 501.

The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 is provided with a game effect mode counter C6 (not shown) that counts the number of times the player presses the game effect mode selection button 600, and the work RAM 513 has a flag storage area and a game during the fluctuation period. It has an area such as an effect mode flag storage area, a game effect mode reservation flag storage area, and a look-ahead winning flag storage area, and the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 executes the processes of FIGS. 136 and 145. Further, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 may be provided with the first timer TM1 and may be configured to accept the change reservation of the game effect mode until the middle of the fluctuation period. Further, a game effect mode lottery random number counter C9 and a game effect mode selection table (FIG. 144) for drawing which game effect mode is selected by the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 may perform a lottery in the game effect mode.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment and its modified example has a plurality of game production modes having different production modes, and a game production mode change reception means (MPU402) that accepts selection change of the game production mode. A special game determination means (MPU302) that determines whether or not to enter a special gaming state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a pre-reading determination as to whether or not to enter the special gaming state before the determination is made. It is not possible to select and change the look-ahead determination means (MPU302), the look-ahead effect execution means (MPU402, MPU502) that execute a predetermined look-ahead effect when it is determined in the look-ahead determination that a special gaming state is to be reached, and the game effect mode. When the game effect mode changeable period determination means (MPU402) for determining whether or not the game effect mode cannot be changed and the selection change of the game effect mode are accepted during the game effect mode changeable period, the selected game effect mode is selected. After the game effect mode is reserved by the game effect mode reservation means (MPU402) that reserves the change to and the game effect mode reservation means, if the look-ahead effect occurs or if the look-ahead effect has already occurred, the game effect A game effect mode reservation abandonment means (MPU402) for abandoning a game effect mode reservation by a mode reservation means is provided. That is, when the change reservation of the game effect mode is made and the look-ahead effect occurs, the change reservation of the game effect mode is discarded without being executed. As a result, the game effect mode is not changed, and the look-ahead effect is preferentially executed. As a result, the look-ahead effect is not canceled by changing the game effect mode, and the player can enjoy the look-ahead effect, and the interest of the game is improved. In particular, the look-ahead effect that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations is likely to be a big hit (special game state), and is therefore a look-ahead effect that the player is looking forward to. If such a look-ahead effect is canceled due to a change in the game effect mode, the player who could not enjoy the look-ahead effect is disappointed because the game effect mode after the change is a big hit without the look-ahead effect occurring. The feeling is also great. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is not canceled due to the change in the game effect mode, and the look-ahead effect is surely executed. As described above, in the present invention, since the look-ahead effect can be suitably performed, it is possible to enhance the interest without disappointing the player.

(2) The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment and its modified example is the current game if the reservation of the game production mode is not canceled by the game production mode reservation cancellation means after the period during which the game production mode cannot be changed has elapsed. When the production mode is changed to the reserved game production mode and the reservation of the game production mode is canceled by the game production mode reservation discarding means, the game production mode changing means (MPU402) that does not change the current game production mode is provided. .. That is, if the reservation of the game effect mode is not abandoned, in other words, if the look-ahead effect does not occur, the game is changed to the reserved game effect mode, so that the player can play the game in the reserved game effect mode. Can be enjoyed. Further, when the reservation of the game effect mode is abandoned, in other words, when the look-ahead effect is generated, the current game effect mode is not changed, so that the look-ahead effect can be enjoyed. For this reason, the interest of the player is improved.

(3) The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment and its modification has a first game effect mode storage means (a game effect mode flag storage area of RAM 413 of the MPU 402) for storing the current game effect mode and a game effect mode. A second game effect mode storage means (a game effect mode reservation flag storage area and a game effect mode reservation completion flag storage area of the RAM 413 of the MPU 402) for storing the game effect mode reserved by the reservation means is provided, and the game effect mode reservation is provided. The discarding means (MPU402) rewrites the game effect mode stored in the second game effect mode storage means to the game effect mode stored in the first game effect mode storage means, so that the reserved game effect mode is reserved. Is destroyed (cancelled). That is, when the current game effect mode is stored in the first game effect mode storage means, the reserved game effect mode is stored in the second game effect mode storage means, and the reserved game effect mode is canceled, the reserved game effect mode is stored. By rewriting the game production mode stored in the second game production mode storage means to the game production mode stored in the first game production mode storage means, the reservation of the game production mode can be reliably canceled with a simple configuration. can do.

[14th Embodiment]
FIG. 153 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of the gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment in an expanded manner. As shown in FIG. 153, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is located at the lower left side of the pachinko machine 10 toward the pachinko machine 10, in other words, at the lower end of the front door frame 14 (second frame) on the rotation base end side. A locking means 610 is provided in the vicinity of the provided protrusion shaft 62. When working or inspecting the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, also referred to as work / inspection), for example, when clearing a ball jam, it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 for work / inspection. If the frame 14 is not fixed in the open state, the front door frame 14 moves, which interferes with work and inspection. However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a locking means for locking the front door frame 14 in an open state, the front door frame 14 is in a free state when the front door frame 14 is opened. In other words, the front door frame 14 is not locked, and the protrusion shafts 61 and 62 provided on the upper end portion and the lower end portion on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14 (second frame body) are centered. It does not rotate. Therefore, the front door frame 14 does not get in the way during the work / inspection, and the work can be performed smoothly.

<Locking means 610>
FIG. 154 is a partial cross-sectional view showing an outline of the locking means 610. As shown in FIG. 154, the locking means 610 includes a through hole 611 provided on the facing surface 13S side of the inner frame 13 (first frame body) with the front door frame 14 (second frame body) and the front door. A boss 612 (convex portion) provided on the surface 14S side facing the inner frame 13 of the frame 14 is provided. The boss 612 is composed of a plate-shaped body 612A and a rod-shaped body 612B erected at a central portion or a substantially central portion of the plate-shaped body 612A. In the boss 612, the plate-shaped body 612A and the rod-shaped body 612B may be integrally formed, or the plate-shaped body 612A and the rod-shaped body 612B may be formed as separate members. The upper end 612T of the rod-shaped body 612B (opposite to the plate-shaped body 612A) is rounded as a whole, and as shown in FIG. 154, the shape of the upper end 612T of the rod-shaped body 612B is hemispherical.

Further, the locking means 610 includes a spring coil 613 (a urging member) that urges the boss 612 toward the facing surface 13S of the inner frame 13. The spring coil 613 is arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rod-shaped body 612B of the boss 612. In the present embodiment, the boss 612 and the spring coil 613 are housed in a storage chamber 14R provided on the hinge 14H of the front door frame 14 for space saving. The hinge H constituting the accommodation chamber 14R has a bent portion 14F, and the gap S between the bent portions 14F is smaller than the outer diameter of the plate-shaped body 612A of the boss 612. Here, the upper end side of the spring coil 613 is fixed to the hinge 14H of the front door frame 14, and the lower end side of the spring coil 613 is fixed to the plate-shaped body 612A of the boss 612. Therefore, the spring coil 613 urges the boss 612 toward the facing surface 13S of the inner frame 13 by pulling up the boss 612 toward the inner frame 13.

The upper end 612T of the rod-shaped body 612B of the boss 612 is housed in the storage chamber 14R so as to protrude from the hole 14H1 provided in the storage chamber 14R, and the protrusion height H1 of the boss 612 (the facing surface of the inner frame 13). The distance (distance from 13S to the apex of the boss 612) is smaller than the distance H2 from the bottom surface of the plate-shaped body 612A of the boss 612 to the inner surface of the bent portion 14F.

FIG. 155 is a plan view showing an outline of the locking means 610. Note that FIG. 155 is a plan view from the inner frame 13 side. As shown in FIG. 155, a plurality of through holes 611 of the locking means 610 are provided in the inner frame 13. Specifically, the front door frame 14 is closed, in other words, the position P1 where the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is 0 degrees, the position P2 where the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is about 60 degrees, and the front door frame. Through holes 611 are provided at the position P3 where the opening angle of the 14 is about 90 degrees and at the position P4 where the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is about 120 degrees. The position where the through hole 611 is provided is not limited to the above positions P1 to P4. However, it is preferable that the position of the through hole 611 at which the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is widest is such that the front door frame 14 does not interfere with the adjacent game machine when the front door frame 14 is opened. ..

<Operation explanation>
FIG. 156 is a partial cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the locking means 610. FIG. 156 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view showing a first state in which the upper end 612T of the boss 612 provided in the front door frame 14 is inserted into the through hole 611 provided in the inner frame 13. FIG. 156 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of a second state in which the upper end 612T of the boss 612 provided on the front door frame 14 is in contact with the facing surface 13S of the inner frame 13. Hereinafter, the operation of the locking means 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156.

In the locked state (locked state) of the front door frame 14, the boss 612 is urged by the spring coil 613 toward the facing surface 13S of the inner frame 13. Therefore, the upper end 612T of the boss 612 of the front door frame 14 is inserted into the through hole 611 provided at the position P1 of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 156 (a)). From the locked state, insert the key into the cylinder lock 75 provided at the lower right side or left side of the game machine main body 12 (lower right side in FIG. 2), and then rotate it counterclockwise to move the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13. When the front door frame 14 is pulled toward you, in other words, when the front door frame 14 is opened, the rounded upper end 612T of the boss 612 is moved to the position P1 of the inner frame 13. The upper end 612T of the boss 612 is disengaged from the through hole 611 by sliding while abutting against the inner wall surface of the provided through hole 611 (see FIG. 156 (b)).

Then, when the front door frame 14 is further rotated around the protrusion shafts 61 and 62 provided on the upper end portion and the lower end portion on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14 (second frame body), the inner frame is further rotated. The upper end 612T of the boss 612 enters the through hole 611 provided at the position P2 of 13 (the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is about 60 degrees), and the front door frame 14 is locked at the position P2. In this way, after unlocking the front door frame 14, the front door frame 14 (second frame body) is rotated around the protrusion shafts 61 and 62 provided on the upper end portion and the lower end portion on the rotation base end side on the back surface. As a result, the front door frame 14 is locked by the locking means 610 at positions where the opening angles are approximately 60 degrees, approximately 90 degrees, and approximately 120 degrees.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 14th embodiment, when the front door frame 14 (second frame body) is opened, the front door frame 14 is in a free state, in other words, the front door frame 14 is in a free state. It is not locked and may rotate around the protrusion shafts 61 and 62 provided on the upper end and the lower end on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14 (second frame body). Absent. Therefore, the front door frame 14 does not get in the way during the work / inspection, and the work can be performed smoothly.
Further, it is only necessary to provide a through hole 611 on the facing surface 13S of the inner frame 13 and provide a boss 612 (convex portion) on the facing surface 14S of the front door frame 14, and to provide the frame body locking means 610 easily and inexpensively. be able to.
Further, since the front door frame 14 can be locked to the inner frame 13 at a plurality of places, the opening degree of the front door frame 14 can be adjusted according to the work or inspection situation, and the convenience is improved. ..
Further, since the boss 612 is urged toward the facing surface 13S of the inner frame 13 by the spring coil 613 (urging member), the locked state can be maintained, and the front door frame 14 can be maintained during work or inspection. Does not move (close), improving safety.
Further, since the boss 612 is urged so as to be movable in the direction perpendicular to or substantially perpendicular to the facing surface 13S of the inner frame 13, when the boss 612 comes to the position of the through hole 611, the boss 612 is automatically urged. The upper end 612T of the sword enters the through hole 611. Therefore, it is not necessary to fit the boss 612 into the through hole 611, and the front door frame 14 can be easily locked.
Further, the upper end 612T on the side facing the inner frame 13 of the boss 612 is rounded. Therefore, even when the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13, in other words, the boss 612 is in the through hole 611, the front door frame 14 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 13. Since the upper end 612T, which is the rounded portion of the boss 612, slides while contacting the inner wall surface of the through hole 611, it is not necessary to remove the boss 612 from the through hole 611, and the front door frame 14 can be easily removed. Can be moved.

[Modification 1 of the 14th embodiment]
FIG. 157 is a plan view showing an outline (arrangement position) of the detection sensors 621A to 621D included in the gaming machine according to the first modification of the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the 14th embodiment detects that the upper end 612T of the boss 612 is inserted into the plurality of through holes 611 provided in the inner frame 13. Detection sensors 621A to 621D are provided in the respective through holes 611. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the detection sensor 621A in the through hole 611 provided at the position P1 where the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is 0 degrees, and the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is 60 degrees. The through hole 611 provided at the position P2 is provided with the detection sensor 621B, and the through hole 611 provided at the position P3 where the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is 90 degrees is provided with the detection sensor 621C to open the front door frame 14. The detection sensor 621D is provided in the through hole 611 provided at the position P4 where the angle is 120 degrees.

FIG. 158 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the operation of the detection sensors 621A to 621D included in the gaming machine according to the first modification of the 14th embodiment. Since the operations of the detection sensors 621A to 621D are the same, the operation of the detection sensors 621A will be described in FIG. 158, and the duplicate description of the operations of the detection sensors 621B to 621D will be omitted. The detection sensor 621A has a movable member 621T that is movable by pressing. As shown in FIG. 158 (a), when the upper end 612T of the boss 612 is not inserted into the through hole 611 provided at the position P1, the movable member 621T is not pushed, so that the detection sensor 621A No signal is output from (OFF). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), when the upper end 612T of the boss 612 is inserted into the through hole 611, the movable member 621T is pushed and a signal is output from the detection sensor 621A ( ON).

FIG. 159 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device of the game machine according to the first modification of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 159, the outputs of the detection sensors 621A to 621D are connected to the input port of the voice emission control board 401 of the voice emission control device 400. The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 recognizes that the front door frame 14 is closed, in other words, the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is 0 degrees when the output signal of the detection sensor 621A is turned ON. Similarly, the MPU 402 recognizes that the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is about 60 degrees when the output signal of the detection sensor 621B is turned on, and the output signal of the detection sensor 621C is turned on. , Recognizes that the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is about 90 degrees, and recognizes that the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is about 120 degrees when the output signal of the detection sensor 621D is turned ON.

In the first modification of the present embodiment, when the movable member 621T of the detection sensors 621A to 621D is pressed, the contacts housed in the detection sensors 621A to 621D are electrically connected and a signal is output (ON. However, the same optical sensor as the origin detection sensor 28 described with reference to FIG. 62 may be used as the detection sensors 621A to 621D. In this case, the optical sensor shown in FIG. 62 is provided in each through hole 611, and the upper end 612T of the boss 612 is inserted into the detection groove 28d formed by the light emitting element mounting portion 28a, the light receiving element mounting portion 28b, and the connecting portion 28c. Then, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element mounting portion 28a may be blocked by the boss 612, and a signal may be output. In the first modification of the present embodiment, in the MPU 402, the opening angles of the front door frame 14 are 0 degrees, 60 degrees, 90 degrees or 90 degrees, respectively, when the output signal of any of the detection sensors 621A to 621D is turned off. It may be configured to recognize that it is 120 degrees.

FIG. 160 is a data table showing the relationship between the opening angle of the front door frame 14 and the volume stored in the ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400. As shown in FIG. 160, in the first modification of the present embodiment, when the detection sensor 621A outputs a signal (ON), the volume of the alarm output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is set to setting 1. Will be done. Further, when the detection sensor 621B is outputting (ON) a signal, the volume of the alarm output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is set to setting 2. Further, when the detection sensor 621C is outputting a signal (ON), the volume of the alarm output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is set to setting 3. When the detection sensor 621D is outputting a signal (ON), the volume of the alarm output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is set to setting 1. Here, the relationship between the volume levels of settings 1 to 3 is shown in the following equation (1).
Setting 1> Setting 2> Setting 3 ... (1)

Next, the reason why the volume relation of the alarms output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is the relation shown in FIG. 160 will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 is a plan view showing the opening angle of the front door frame of the game machine according to the first modification of the 14th embodiment and the positional relationship of the front door frame.

When the detection sensor 621A is outputting a signal (ON), the front door frame 14 is at the position of P1 where the opening angle is 0 degrees. When the front door frame 14 is not opened and the front door frame 14 is facing forward in this way, there is little possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound even if the alarm volume is loud. .. Therefore, setting 1 has the loudest volume.

When the detection sensor 621B is outputting a signal (ON), the front door frame 14 is at the position of P2 where the opening angle is 60 degrees. In this way, when the front door frame 14 is opened at 60 degrees and the front door frame 14 faces the left front, if the alarm volume is high, the player playing the game in the next seat may be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. Comes out. However, the front door frame 14 is not suitable for a player who plays a game completely in the adjacent seat as the opening angle is 90 degrees (position P3). Setting 2 is lower in volume than setting 1 and louder than setting 3.

When the detection sensor 621C is outputting a signal (ON), the front door frame 14 is at the position of P3 where the opening angle is 90 degrees. When the front door frame 14 is opened at 90 degrees and the front door frame 14 faces the left side in this way, the front door frame 14 is suitable for a player who plays a game completely in the adjacent seat. Therefore, if the volume of the alarm is high, there is a high possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. Therefore, the volume of setting 3 is the lowest among the settings 1 to 3. In setting 3, the volume may be set to zero or the volume may be set to a level that is almost inaudible.

When the detection sensor 621D outputs a signal (ON), the front door frame 14 is at the position of P4 where the opening angle is 120 degrees. When the front door frame 14 is opened at 120 degrees in this way, the front door frame 14 opens to the front of the pachinko machine 10 on the left side. In such a state, it is difficult to assume that there is a player who plays a game in the left next seat. Normally, since there is no player who plays a game in the left next seat, the person who performs work / inspection opens the front door frame 14. It is considered that the door was opened to the position of P4 where the angle was 120 degrees. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the detection sensor 621D outputs a signal (ON), in other words, when the front door frame 14 is at the position of P4 where the opening angle is 120 degrees, the volume of the alarm is increased. Is set to 1. Even when the front door frame 14 is at the position of P4 where the opening angle is 120 degrees, the possibility that the player is playing in the next seat is not zero, so the opening angle of the front door frame 14 is 120 degrees. The volume may be set to 3 even when the position is P4.

<Abnormality notification processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
Next, the abnormality notification process of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 grasps the opening angle of the front door frame 14 according to which of the detection sensors 621A to 621D outputs the signal (whether it is ON), and the pachinko machine 10 determines the opening angle of the front door frame 14. The volume for notifying an abnormality is changed according to the position (opening angle of the front door frame 14). In the following description, the abnormality notification process when the front door frame 14 is opened by the second monitoring device 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormality notifications will be omitted.

(Step S8301)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S8301 that it has received the power recovery notification command (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S8302. If it is determined in step S8301 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S8304.

(Step S8302)
The MPU 402 transmits a power recovery notification command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received power recovery notification command. Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 provides a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

(Step S8303)
The MPU 402 starts reading data for notification at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading light emission data and sound data for power recovery notification from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed (closed). That is, since the front door frame 14 is not in a state of being opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat feels annoyed with the abnormality notification.

(Step S8304)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 is received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flags corresponding to the normal time notification commands of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 are stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S8304 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S8305. Further, when it is determined in step S8304 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S8311 described later.

(Step S8305)
The MPU 402 transmits a normal time notification command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal time notification command. Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets various data tables in the program ROM 512 for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

(Step S8306)
In step S8306, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading light emission data and sound data for normal notification from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. In this normal time notification data, light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

(Step S8307)
The MPU 402 performs BGM (including music and sound for production) stop processing. In this BGM stop process, the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped or muted. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM playback is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM playback when the door opening notification is released. When restarting the playback of the BGM when the door opening notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in the RAM 413 and starts the playback of the BGM from the address, thereby restarting the playback from the position where the BGM was stopped. Can be done. Further, when muting the BGM, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that no sound is output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

(Step S8308)
The MPU 402 grasps the opening angle of the front door frame 14 based on the signals input from the detection sensors 621A to 621D. More specifically, it is possible to grasp which of the detection sensors 621A to 621D is outputting the signal (whether it is ON).

(Step S8309)
The MPU 402 refers to the data table of FIG. 160 and sets the volume of the alarm output from the speaker units 26A to 26C according to the opening angle of the front door frame 14 grasped in step S8309. Specifically, when the detection sensor 621A outputs a signal (ON), the MPU 402 sets the volume of the alarm output from the speaker units 26A to 26C to setting 1. Further, when the detection sensor 621B outputs a signal (ON), the MPU 402 sets the volume of the alarm output from the speaker units 26A to 26C to setting 2. When the detection sensor 621C outputs a signal (ON), the MPU 402 sets the volume of the alarm output from the speaker units 26A to 26C to setting 3. When the detection sensor 621D outputs a signal (ON), the MPU 402 sets the volume of the alarm output from the speaker units 26A to 26C to setting 1.

(Step S8310)
The MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) the light emission data and the sound data whose reading was started in step S8303 or step S8306. Specifically, the MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the sound data read out in step S8303 or step S8306 is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C at the volume set in step S8309. As a result, an abnormality notification (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, and "The door is open!" Is heard from the speaker units 26A to 26C. And the output of the warning sound) is started at the volume set in step S8309. Further, the MPU 402 causes the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the light emission data started to be read in step S8303 or step S8306. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

(Step S8311)
The MPU 402 determines whether or not the door opening notification release command for canceling the door opening notification transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door opening notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S8311 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S8312. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S8311 that the door opening notification release command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S8312.

(Step S8312)
The MPU 402 transmits a door opening notification release command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

(Step S8313)
In step S8313, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door opening notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S8313, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads and reproduces the voice data “door closed!” From the common ROM 404. As a result, the voice "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

(Step S8314)
The MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0.

(Step S8315)
The MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S8307. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S8307, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM from the address. Playback resumes from the position. If the BGM has been muted in step S8307, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S8307, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the playback is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. The process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value may be performed. In this case, in step S8310, when the sound data read out in step S8303 or step S8306 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or the warning sound is processed so as to gradually or gradually increase to a predetermined value. You may. Further, in step S8307, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the playback is continued without stopping the BGM, the playback of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S8313. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S8315, when the playback of the BGM is restarted, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. With this configuration, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and it is possible to return without causing a sense of discomfort due to switching to BGM.

[Modification 2 of the 14th embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the 14th embodiment and the first modification, the inner frame 13 is provided with a plurality of through holes 611, and the front door frame 14 is provided with a boss 612 and a spring coil 613. A plurality of through holes 611 may be provided in 14, and a boss 612 and a spring coil 613 may be provided in the inner frame 13.

Further, the locking means 610 may be provided in the vicinity of the protrusion shaft 61 provided at the upper end of the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, or the rotation base on the back surface of the front door frame 14. It may be provided both near the protrusion shaft 61 provided at the upper end portion on the end side and near the protrusion shaft 62 provided at the lower end portion on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

Further, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), the spring coil 613, which is an urging means, is accommodated between the plate-shaped body 612A of the boss 612 and the bent portion 14F of the hinge 14H of the front door frame 14, and the boss 612 May be pushed up toward the inner frame 13 to urge the boss 612 toward the facing surface 13S of the inner frame 13.
Further, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), a plurality of recesses 614 may be provided on the facing surface 13S of the inner frame 13 instead of the through hole 611.
Further, as shown in FIG. 163 (c), the inner wall surface of the through hole 611 may have a tapered shape in which the inner diameter increases toward the side facing the boss 612. By adopting the tapered shape, even when the upper end 612T of the boss 612 is inserted into the through hole 611, when the front door frame 14 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 13, the boss 612 hits the taper of the through hole 611. Since it slides while in contact with each other, it is not necessary to remove the boss 612 from the through hole 611, and the front door frame 14 can be easily moved. Further, even when the recess 614 is provided instead of the through hole 611, it is preferable that the inner wall surface of the recess 614 has a tapered shape whose inner diameter increases toward the side facing the boss 612.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 14th embodiment is provided with a locking means 610 between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, so that the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13. However, a locking means 610 may also be provided between the outer frame 11 (fixed frame) and the inner frame 13 so that the inner frame 13 is locked to the outer frame 11. Further, the locking means 610 is not provided between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, but the locking means 610 is provided between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 13, and the inner frame 13 is provided with respect to the outer frame 11. It may be configured to be locked.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 is supported by one of the first frame body (inner frame 13, outer frame 11) and the right side portion or the left side portion of the first frame body with one of the right side portion or the left side portion as the support side. A second frame (front door frame 14, inner frame 13) rotatably provided with respect to the first frame with the support side as a support shaft, and at least one of the first frame or the second frame. A locking means (locking means 610) for locking the second frame body in an open state with respect to the first frame body is provided. Therefore, when the second frame is opened, the second frame is not in the free state. Therefore, the door does not get in the way during the work, and the work can be performed smoothly.

(2) Further, the locking means 610 of the pachinko machine 10 is a convex portion provided on one of the surface of the first frame facing the second frame or the surface of the second frame facing the first frame. And a concave portion or a through hole provided on the other side of the first frame body facing the second frame body or the other side of the second frame body facing the first frame body and engaging with the convex portion. There is. For this reason, it is only necessary to provide a convex portion and a concave portion or a through hole on the surface of the first frame body facing the second frame body and the surface of the second frame body facing the first frame body, respectively, which is simple and inexpensive. The frame body can be provided with locking means.

(3) Further, the recesses or through holes of the pachinko machine 10 are provided at a plurality of locations on the surface of the first frame facing the second frame or the surface of the second frame facing the first frame. .. Therefore, the second frame can be locked to the first frame at a plurality of places, and the opening degree of the second frame can be adjusted according to the work or inspection situation, which is convenient. improves.

[Other Embodiments]
Although the pachinko machine 10 according to each embodiment and its modification has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the structure and shape of each of the above-described embodiments, and is appropriately designed as long as it does not deviate from the gist thereof. Can be changed and embodied. For example, the configurations included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to 14th embodiments and the modifications thereof may be combined.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the features of the invention extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned respective embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are characterized. The combination of each feature, such as deformation and improvement within the range in which the object can be achieved, is included in the features of the present invention group.

<Feature A group>
Features A1.
The game machine (game machine 10) according to the feature A1 is
The first frame body (inner frame 13, outer frame 11) and
A first frame is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the first frame with one of the right side or the left side as a support side, and rotatably provided with respect to the first frame with the support side as a support shaft. 2 frames (front door frame 14, inner frame 13) and
With a locking means (locking means 610) provided on at least one of the first frame body or the second frame body and locking the second frame body in an open state with respect to the first frame body. ,
It is characterized by having.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, when the second frame is opened, the second frame is not in the free state. Therefore, the door does not get in the way during the work, and the work can be performed smoothly.

Feature A2.
The gaming machine according to the feature A2 is the gaming machine according to the feature A1.
The locking means is
A convex portion provided on one of the facing surface of the first frame body with the second frame body or the facing surface of the second frame body with the first frame body, and
A recess or a through hole provided on the other side of the first frame body facing the second frame body or the surface of the second frame body facing the first frame body and engaging with the convex portion.
It is characterized by having.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, a convex portion and a concave portion or a concave portion or a concave portion, respectively, are formed on the surface of the first frame body facing the second frame body and the surface of the second frame body facing the first frame body. It is only necessary to provide a through hole, and a frame locking means can be provided easily and inexpensively.

Feature A3.
The gaming machine according to the feature A3 is the gaming machine according to the feature A2.
The recess or the through hole is provided at a plurality of locations on the surface of the first frame facing the second frame or the surface of the second frame facing the first frame. And.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, since the second frame can be locked to the first frame at a plurality of places, the opening degree of the second frame can be adjusted according to the work or inspection situation. It can be done and convenience is improved.

Feature A4.
The gaming machine according to the feature A4 is the gaming machine according to the feature A2 or the feature A3.
The locking means is
It is characterized by having an urging member that urges the convex portion toward a surface facing the second frame body or a surface facing the first frame body.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, since the convex portion is urged toward the surface facing the second frame or the surface facing the first frame by the urging member, the locked state can be maintained. This can improve safety by preventing the second frame from moving to close or open during work or inspection (accidents such as pinching fingers or the front door frame hitting a player or worker). Can be reduced).

Feature A5.
The gaming machine according to the feature A5 is the gaming machine according to the feature A4.
The urging member
The convex portion is movably urged in a direction perpendicular to or substantially perpendicular to the surface facing the second frame or the surface facing the first frame.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, the convex portion is urged so as to be movable in the direction perpendicular to or substantially perpendicular to the surface facing the second frame or the surface facing the first frame. When the convex portion comes to the position of the concave portion or the through hole, the convex portion automatically enters the concave portion or the through hole. Therefore, it is not necessary to fit the convex portion into the concave portion or the through hole, and the second frame can be easily locked.

Feature A6.
The gaming machine according to the feature A6 is the gaming machine according to the feature A4 or the feature A5.
The convex portion is characterized in that the end portion of the convex portion facing the second frame body or the end surface side facing the first frame body is rounded.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the end portion of the convex portion on the facing surface side with the first frame body or the facing surface side with the second frame body is rounded. Therefore, even when the second frame is locked to the first frame, in other words, the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion or the through hole, the second frame is rotated with respect to the first frame. Then, since the rounded portion of the convex portion slides while contacting the wall surface of the concave portion or the through hole, it is not necessary to remove the convex portion from the concave portion or the through hole, and the second frame body can be easily moved. Can be done.

Feature A7.
The gaming machine according to the feature A7 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features A4 to A6.
The wall surface of the recess or the through hole
It is characterized in that the second frame has a tapered shape in which the inner diameter increases toward the side facing the convex portion in a state of being locked to the first frame.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the wall surface of the recess or the through hole has a tapered shape. Therefore, the second frame is rotated with respect to the first frame even when the second frame is locked to the first frame, in other words, even when the convex portion is in the concave portion or the through hole. Since the convex portion slides while contacting the concave portion or the taper of the through hole, it is not necessary to remove the convex portion from the concave portion or the through hole, and the second frame body can be easily moved.

Feature A8.
The gaming machine according to the feature A8 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features A2 to A7.
The audio equipment (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the second frame and
A detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290, detection sensor 622) that detects the opening of the second frame body, and
When the detection device detects the opening of the second frame, the abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) that controls the sound device to notify the abnormality, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, when the opening of the second frame is detected, an abnormality is notified, so that a so-called goto act of obtaining an illegal profit by malfunctioning a device or a part arranged in the housing, etc. It is possible to suppress cheating.

Feature A9.
The gaming machine according to the feature A9 is the gaming machine according to the feature A8.
The detection device
It has a second detector (detection sensor 621) that detects that the convex portion has been inserted into the concave portion.
The abnormality notification means is characterized in that the volume for notifying the abnormality is changed depending on which of the second detectors inserts the convex portion into the concave portion.

According to the feature A9 of the present invention group, since it has a second detector that detects that the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion, the opening angle of the second frame body, in other words, is based on the detection result by the second detector. Since the position of the second frame can be grasped and the volume for notifying the abnormality is changed according to the position of the second frame, it is necessary to flexibly respond by lowering the volume in case of unnecessary abnormality notification. Can be done.

Feature A10.
The gaming machine according to the feature A10 is the gaming machine according to the feature A8 or the feature A9.
The detection device
It has a first detector (detection sensor 622) that detects whether or not the convex portion is in a protruding state.
It is characterized in that the opening of the second frame is detected according to the detection result by the first detector.

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, the opening of the second frame is detected depending on whether or not the convex portion is in a protruding state. Therefore, a new detection device is used to detect that the second frame is opened. It is not necessary to attach it, and the opening of the second frame can be detected easily and inexpensively.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1.
The game machine (game machine 10) according to the feature B1 is
The first frame body (inner frame 13, outer frame 11) and
A first frame is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the first frame with one of the right side or the left side as a support side, and rotatably provided with respect to the first frame with the support side as a support shaft. 2 frames (front door frame 14, inner frame 13) and
With a locking means (locking means 610) provided on at least one of the second frame body or the first frame body and locking the second frame body in an open state with respect to the first frame body. ,
The audio equipment (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the second frame and
A detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290, detection sensor 622) that detects the opening of the second frame body, and
It is characterized by including an abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) that controls the sound device to notify an abnormality when the detection device detects the opening of the second frame.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the opening of the second frame is detected, and when the opening of the second frame is detected, an abnormality is notified, so that the device or component arranged in the housing malfunctions. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as so-called goto acts that obtain fraudulent profits by making them.

Feature B2.
The gaming machine according to the feature B2 is the gaming machine according to the feature B1.
The locking means is
A convex portion provided on one of the facing surface of the first frame body with the second frame body or the facing surface of the second frame body with the first frame body, and
A recess or a through hole provided on the other side of the first frame body facing the second frame body or the surface of the second frame body facing the first frame body and engaging with the convex portion. Have,
The recess or the through hole is provided at a plurality of positions on the surface of the first frame facing the second frame or the surface of the second frame facing the first frame.
The detection device
A second detector (detection sensor 621) for detecting that the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion is provided in each of the plurality of concave portions.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, since the second frame can be locked to the first frame at a plurality of places, the opening degree of the second frame can be adjusted according to the work or inspection situation. It can be done and convenience is improved. Further, since each of the plurality of concave portions has a second detector for detecting that the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion, the opening angle of the second frame body, in other words, the second one, is based on the detection result by the second detector. 2 The position of the frame can be grasped.

Feature B3.
The gaming machine according to the feature B3 is the gaming machine according to the feature B2.
The abnormality notification means is
It is characterized in that the volume for notifying the abnormality is changed depending on which of the second detectors inserts the convex portion into the concave portion.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, by changing the volume of the abnormality notification according to the open position of the second frame, it is possible to flexibly respond to the case of unnecessary abnormality notification by lowering the volume. ..

Feature B4.
The gaming machine according to the feature B4 is the gaming machine according to the feature B3.
The recess is provided at a first position where the opening angle of the second frame is within 90 degrees and a second position where the opening angle exceeds 90 degrees.
The abnormality notification means is
The volume when the convex portion is detected to be inserted into the concave portion by the second detector provided in the concave portion at the second position is set by the second detector provided in the concave portion at the first position. It is characterized in that the volume is made lower than the volume when it is detected by the detector that the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the game machine being played from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the game machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

Feature B5.
The gaming machine according to the feature B5 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features B2 to B4.
The detection device
It has a first detector (detection sensor 622) that detects whether or not the convex portion is in a protruding state.
It is characterized in that the opening of the second frame is detected according to the detection result by the first detector.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, the opening of the second frame is detected depending on whether or not the convex portion is in a protruding state. Therefore, a new detection device is used to detect that the second frame is opened. It is not necessary to attach it, and the opening of the second frame can be detected easily and inexpensively.

Feature B6.
The gaming machine according to the feature B6 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features B2 to B5.
The locking means is
It is characterized by having an urging member that urges the convex portion toward a surface facing the second frame body or a surface facing the first frame body.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, since the convex portion is urged toward the surface facing the second frame or the surface facing the first frame by the urging member, the locked state can be maintained. It can be done, and the second frame does not move (close) during work or inspection, improving safety.

Feature B7.
The gaming machine according to the feature B7 is the gaming machine according to the feature B6.
The urging member
The convex portion is movably urged in a direction perpendicular to or substantially perpendicular to the surface facing the second frame or the surface facing the first frame.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the convex portion is urged so as to be movable in the direction perpendicular to or substantially perpendicular to the surface facing the second frame or the surface facing the first frame. When the convex portion comes to the position of the concave portion or the through hole, the convex portion automatically enters the concave portion or the through hole. Therefore, it is not necessary to fit the convex portion into the concave portion or the through hole, and the second frame can be easily locked.

Feature B8.
The gaming machine according to the feature B8 is the gaming machine according to the feature B6 or the feature B7.
The convex portion is characterized in that the end portion of the convex portion facing the second frame body or the end surface side facing the first frame body is rounded.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the end portion of the convex portion on the facing surface side with the second frame body or the facing surface side with the first frame body is rounded. Therefore, even when the second frame is locked to the first frame, in other words, the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion or the through hole, the second frame is rotated with respect to the first frame. Then, since the rounded portion of the convex portion slides while contacting the wall surface of the concave portion or the through hole, it is not necessary to remove the convex portion from the concave portion or the through hole, and the second frame body can be easily moved. Can be done.

Feature B9.
The gaming machine according to the feature B9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the features B6 to B8.
The wall surface of the recess or the through hole
It is characterized in that the second frame has a tapered shape in which the inner diameter increases toward the side facing the convex portion in a state of being locked to the first frame.

According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, the wall surface of the recess or the through hole has a tapered shape. Therefore, the second frame is rotated with respect to the first frame even when the second frame is locked to the first frame, in other words, even when the convex portion is in the concave portion or the through hole. Since the convex portion slides while contacting the concave portion or the taper of the through hole, it is not necessary to remove the convex portion from the concave portion or the through hole, and the second frame body can be easily moved.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 11 ... Outer frame (fixed frame), 12 ... Game machine body, 13 ... Inner frame, 14 ... Front door frame, 21 ... Window part, 22 ... Window panel, 23 ... Display lamp device , 24 ... Error display lamp unit, 26A to 26E ... Speaker unit, 30 ... Cover member drive unit, 31 ... Upper bulging part, 32 ... Lower bulging part, 33 ... Upper plate, 34 ... Lower plate, 35 ... Operation Button, 41 ... Launch handle, 81 ... Game board, 82 ... General winning opening (10 prize balls), 83 ... Variable winning device, 85 ... Through gate, 86 ... Variable display unit, 87 ... Out opening, 88 ... Rotation guidance Members, 89 ... game nails, 91 ... symbol display device, 250 ... first monitoring device, 290 ... second monitoring device, 300 ... main control device, 400 ... voice emission control device, 500 ... display control device

Claims (3)

The first frame and
A first frame is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the first frame with one of the right side or the left side as a support side, and rotatably provided with respect to the first frame with the support side as a support shaft. 2 frames and
A locking means provided on at least one of the second frame body or the first frame body and locking the second frame body in an open state with respect to the first frame body.
The audio equipment provided in the second frame and
A detection device that detects the opening of the second frame and
A gaming machine comprising: an abnormality notification means for controlling the sound device to notify an abnormality when the detection device detects the opening of the second frame. In the gaming machine according to claim 1.
The locking means is
A convex portion provided on one of the facing surface of the first frame body with the second frame body or the facing surface of the second frame body with the first frame body, and
A recess or a through hole provided on the other side of the first frame body facing the second frame body or the surface of the second frame body facing the first frame body and engaging with the convex portion. Have,
The recess or the through hole is provided at a plurality of positions on the surface of the first frame facing the second frame or the surface of the second frame facing the first frame.
The detection device
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the plurality of concave portions has a second detector that detects that the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion. In the gaming machine according to claim 2.
The abnormality notification means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the volume for notifying the abnormality is changed according to which of the second detectors inserts the convex portion into the concave portion.

Images